Today’s News 30th November 2020

  • The Nuremberg Tribunal: 75 Years Later And Still The Basis For Humanity's Survival
    The Nuremberg Tribunal: 75 Years Later And Still The Basis For Humanity’s Survival

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 23:30

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    “The wrongs which we seek to condemn and punish have been so calculated, so malignant and so devastating, that Civilization cannot tolerate their being ignored because it cannot survive their being repeated. That four great nations, flushed with victory and stung with injury, stay the hand of vengeance and voluntarily submit their captives to the judgement of law, is one of the most significant tributes that Power ever paid to reason.”

    -Justice Robert Jackson, Nov. 21, 1945

    It is often forgotten what sort of a battle occurred after WWII to establish the Nuremberg Trials which gave the world a revolutionary code of law which even today offers many of the remedies to the Gordian Knots blocking our way to a peaceful future. By the end of the war, many European leaders of the allied nations wished to simply put leading Nazis against a wall to face a firing squad and return to “business as usual”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As I’ve outlined in many recent writings, it was only through the intensive efforts of U.S. President Franklin Roosevelt, and his leading allies in both the USA and Russia that a different course of action was decided upon and an official international tribunal was sanctioned that generated a total legal paradigm shift in international law that has been too easily taken for granted (due largely to the lack of effect these laws have had on post-WWII practice).

    Among those revolutionary reforms included the unprecedented mandate that wars of aggression would henceforth be illegal in the eyes of the law. The tendency for those higher officials carrying out inhuman orders to escape responsibility for their actions or omissions of correct action were deemed insufficient defenses under the higher moral principle of “known or should have known”.

    The underlying assumption of these Nuremberg laws are:

    1) “might does not make right” despite what generations of Hobbesians and Niescheans have chosen to believe and

    2) that every individual is responsible for their decisions based not on the arbitrary standards of whatever degenerate society they live in but rather upon the belief in the intrinsic powers of reason and conscience which all humans have access to and are obliged to guide our actions in life.

    Nazi philosophers and crown jurists like Martin Heidegger and Carl Schmidt whose thoughts have penetrated the western zeitgeist over the past 70 years would obviously find such concepts repugnant and deplorable.

    The fact that the “free world” has ignored these foundations of international law has not changed the fact that they are still true.

    Today, many of those powerful unipolar ideologues who managed the disastrous Cold War and post-Cold War geopolitical environment have attempted to erase the precedents of Nuremburg with such atrocities as Soros’ International Criminal Court, and the “Responsibility to Protect” doctrine (R2P) in defense of “humanitarian wars” as seen in Bosnia, Iraq, Afghanistan, Libya, and Syria in recent years. The disturbing rise of unipolar R2P advocacy rampant among the British ruling class like Lord Mark Malloch Brown, Tony Blair and all of the Obama-era globalists surrounding Biden make Vladimir Putin and Sergey Lavrov’s recent remarks at the 75 Anniversary Moscow conference celebrating the commencement of the Nuremberg Trials that much more important.

    Putin and Lavrov Celebrate the 75th Anniversary of Nuremberg Trials

    At this event, Putin reminded the attendees of the importance of the historic tribunals which ran from November 21, 1945 to October – 1946, saying:

    “We constantly refer to the lessons of the Nuremberg Trials; we understand their importance for defending the truths of historical memory, for making a well-founded and solid case against deliberate distortions and falsifications of World War II events, especially the shameless and deceitful attempts to rehabilitate and even glorify Nazi criminals and their accessories… It is the duty of the entire international community to safeguard the Nuremberg Trials’ decisions, because they concern the principles that underlie the values of the post-war world order and the norms of international law.”

    Putin’s remarks were amplified by Sergey Lavrov who elaborated on the new legal paradigm created at Nuremberg which provides an obvious cure for the rise of WWII revisionism, sanitation of Nazism in Ukraine and beyond as well as the revival of many of the practices that made Nazism a viral threat to mankind.

    “The Nuremberg Trials—an example of international criminal justice—proved that justice can be achieved with a professional approach based on broad interstate cooperation, consent and mutual respect. Clearly, the Nuremberg Tribunal’s legacy is not limited to law, but has enormous political, moral and educational value. A strong vaccination against the revival of Nazism in all its forms and manifestations was made 75 years ago. Unfortunately, the immunity to the brown plague that was developed in Nuremberg has seriously worn off in some European countries. Russia will continue to vigorously and consistently oppose any attempts to falsify history, to glorify Nazi criminals and their henchmen, and to oppose the revision of the internationally recognized outcomes of World War II, including the Nuremberg rulings.”

    So What Happened at Nuremberg?

    Amidst the ashes of WWII, a major battle was waged between those deep state forces that had funded fascism as a “solution to the woes of the great depression” vs those genuine patriots who understood that the very fabric of empire and its associated financial, cultural and legal paradigm had to be destroyed and replaced with a paradigm more befitting human civilization.

    Among the leading representative of the patriotic forces loyal to FDR’s anti-colonial vision was a man who has been nearly lost to history named Robert H. Jackson (1892-1954). Jackson would serve as Franklin Roosevelt’s most trusted legal advisor who first made a name for himself working closely with Ferdinand Pecora in prosecuting dozens of high level Wall Street financiers and pro-fascist industrialists who orchestrated the depression of 1929 and the later coup and assassination attempts against FDR in 1933-1934. After proving himself in combat, Jackson arose to become U.S. Solicitor General (1938-1940), Attorney General (1940-41) and leading member of the Supreme Court from 1941 until his death in 1954.

    Knowing that the deep state coup that ousted Vice-President Henry Wallace and imposed Anglophile tool Harry Truman onto the USA might destroy the hopes for a post-WWII order of peaceful cooperation as outlined by the United Nations Charter, Judge Jackson took the lead and organized the Nuremberg Tribunals delivering the opening speech on November 21, 1945:

    One of the prime motives behind the hearings was the intention to give legal meaning and action to the universal ideals conveyed in the United Nations’ Charter. This charter encapsulated the principles that FDR and Henry Wallace outlined repeatedly in the Four Freedoms. These freedoms asserted that all humankind regardless of race, sex, creed, or nationality would: 1) have the freedom from want, 2) freedom to worship as one’s conscience dictated, 3) freedom from fear, and 4) freedom of speech. If international law could tolerate wars of aggression, or if abdication of responsibility for ones’ criminal deeds could be tolerated on the basis of “I was just following orders”, then the UN Charter could carry little weight indeed.

    As Jackson wrote in his Summer 1945 report to the President justifying the creation of the Nuremberg Tribunal:

    “We therefore propose to charge that a war of aggression is a crime, and that modern international law has abolished the defense that those who incite or wage it are engaged in legitimate business. Thus, may the forces of law be mobilized on the side of peace.”

    During the course of the 11 month proceedings, not only were leading cabinet members, generals, lawyers and other high officials put on trial, but the deepest facets of natural law vs Nietschean “law of the strongest” was investigated with Platonic rigor as laid out in the brilliant award-winning film Judgement at Nuremberg (1960).

    Due to the leadership of Justice Jackson, the treatment of INTENTION and conspiracy was made the primary focus in the pursuit of justice and cause of criminal guilt. This was not a popular approach then or today for the simple fact that our world is shaped by many top down forces that want their victims’ minds to be forever trapped in the material bottom up world of deductive/inductive logic where immaterial causal intentions and ideas can never be found. For anyone wishing to pursue this fruitful line of thinking further, I suggest reading Edgar Allan Poe’s Eureka.

    When one adopts the view that intentions and conspiracies (i.e.: the effect of intentions + ideas when put into action) ARE NOT a driving force of politics and life, then we forever loose our ability to judge truthfulness in any serious manner. This was the philosophical premise of leading Nazi financier Hjalmar Schacht, whose moral relativism and cold calculating principles of economics directly justified the cheap labor camps that worked millions to death in the German war production effort. This same philosophy again found fertile soil in the post-1971 consumer society that revived the logic of cheap labor production under the age of “cheapest price is the law” globalization.

    Quoting Schacht who said “Truth is any story that succeeds”, Justice Jackson quipped “I think you can score many more successes, when you want to lead someone, if you don’t tell them the truth- than if you do tell them the truth”.

    Laying out the principled intention of the trial to the American people, Jackson said:

    “The common sense of mankind demands that law shall not stop with the punishment of petty crimes by little people. It must also reach men who possess themselves of great power and make deliberate and concerted use of it to set in motion evils which leave no home in the world untouched….

    “The case as presented by the United States will be concerned with the brains and authority in back of all the crimes. These defendants were men of a station and rank which does not soil its own hands with blood. They were men who knew how to use lesser folk as tools. We want to reach the planners and designers, the inciters and leaders….

    “It is not the purpose in my part of this case to deal with the individual crimes. I am dealing with the common plan or design for crime and will not dwell upon individual offenses. My task is only to show the scale on which these crimes occurred, and to show that these are the men who were in the responsible positions and who conceived the plan and design which renders them answerable, regardless of the fact that the plan was actually executed by others….

    “The Charter recognizes that one who has committed criminal acts may not take refuge in superior orders nor in the doctrine that his crimes were acts of state….

    “The real complaining party at your bar is Civilization…. The refuge of the defendants can only be their hope that International Law will lag so far behind the moral sense of mankind that conduct which is crime in the moral sense must be regarded as innocent in law. Civilization asks whether law is so laggard as to be utterly helpless to deal with crimes of this magnitude by criminals of this order of importance.”

    Today, the world sits once more on the brink of a new world order, and the emergence of a governing system that is shaped entirely on the same social Darwinistic/Nietschean operating system that gave rise to fascism in WWII. The same denial of universal truth that animated the minds of a Schacht, Goebbels, Heidegger or Schmidt has become hegemonic among western academia as well.

    Very few statesmen have had the courage and insight to resist this unipolar anti-nation state system, but among those who have we are fortunate to have found the current leader of Russia and his allies who in many ways are playing the same historic role as the one played 75 years earlier by Justice Robert Jackson, Henry Wallace and President Roosevelt. Whether the rest of the world wakes up in time to recognize the superiority of the multipolar alliance over the regressive order of the unipolarists carrying us ominously towards World War 3 remains to be seen.

  • Whole Foods CEO Warns: 'Capitalism Cannot Be Replaced With Disastrous Socialism' 
    Whole Foods CEO Warns: ‘Capitalism Cannot Be Replaced With Disastrous Socialism’ 

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 23:00

    Global leaders are using the virus pandemic to exert control over the world’s population under the guise of preventing the spread of COVID-19. The pandemic has provided elites with an opportunity to reset the global economy and abandon capitalism for socialism. 

    In the US, business leaders and politicians are fretting over a socialist system under a Biden presidency. 

    Whole Foods founder and CEO John Mackey recently spoke with America Enterprise Institute’s President Robert Doar about what socialism would mean for the country. Mackey called it a “failed system that “impoverishes everything,” according to Just The News

    While referring to the criticism of “trickle-down economics,” Mackey told Doar that socialism means “trickle up poverty.”

    “We have to recognize that some of the progressive insights are important and they shouldn’t go away, but we can’t throw out capitalism and replace it with socialism, that will be a disaster,” he said. “Socialism has been tried 42 times in the last 100 years, and 42 failures, it doesn’t work, it’s the wrong way. We have to keep capitalism, I would argue, we need conscious capitalism.”

    Mackey said one of the biggest problems plaguing the capitalism versus socialism debate is that businesses and corporations’ motivations are often misunderstood by the working-class.  

    “Until we get this corrected, capitalism is always going to be disdained and criticized and attacked,” he said. “It’ll be attacked for its motivations, because its motivations are seen as somehow impure. Yes, of course, business has to make money. If a business doesn’t make money, it will fail, but that doesn’t mean that its purpose is to make money.”

    He said the business community must convey the benefits of capitalism to the livelihoods of Americans, otherwise, the implementation of socialism will mean a path to poverty for all. 

    “It needs to evolve, otherwise the socialists are going to take over — that’s how I see it, and that’s the path of poverty,” he said. “They talk about trickle down wealth, but socialism is trickle up poverty. It just impoverishes everything, that’s my fear, that the Marxists and socialists, the academic community is generally hostile to business. It always has been. This is not new.”

    Mackey explained that the US’ university system is “anti-capitalist.” He said it starts with the lack of “business people” teaching in college business programs. 

    “Intellectuals teach, mostly intellectuals, who’ve never actually been in business at all, right? It’s very interesting,” he said. “And who don’t actually understand business, who don’t particularly understand entrepreneurship, and actually can oftentimes be hostile towards the very thing they’re teaching. So that’s a particular challenge.”

    Watch Full Interview:

    Despite Mackey’s strong dislike for socialism, Whole Foods has been described as a fairly liberal company. In the past, he has identified as a self-proclaimed libertarian.

    And it wasn’t just Mackey last week with a warning about socialism – Republican Senator Tim Scott from South Caroline told Fox News that if Democrats win the two Senate seats in the Georgia runoffs in January, the left will transform America into a socialist state, adding that it would be ‘game over for our nation’. 

    “There’s no doubt when you think of the elections in Georgia, it’s not simply controlling the Senate, it’s controlling the legislative agenda for America,” said Scott.

    An elitist attempt to push socialism could spell disaster for the country and mean more control over society. 

  • "If Only Cranks Find The Election Tabulations Strange, Put Me Down As A Crank…"
    “If Only Cranks Find The Election Tabulations Strange, Put Me Down As A Crank…”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 22:30

    Authored by Patrick Basham via The Spectator,

    Reasons why the 2020 presidential election is deeply puzzling

    To say out-loud that you find the results of the 2020 presidential election odd is to invite derision. You must be a crank or a conspiracy theorist. Mark me down as a crank, then.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I am a pollster and I find this election to be deeply puzzling. I also think that the Trump campaign is still well within its rights to contest the tabulations. Something very strange happened in America’s democracy in the early hours of Wednesday November 4 and the days that followed. It’s reasonable for a lot of Americans to want to find out exactly what.

    First, consider some facts.

    President Trump received more votes than any previous incumbent seeking reelection. He got 11 million more votes than in 2016, the third largest rise in support ever for an incumbent. By way of comparison, President Obama was comfortably reelected in 2012 with 3.5 million fewer votes than he received in 2008.

    Trump’s vote increased so much because, according to exit polls, he performed far better with many key demographic groups. Ninety-five percent of Republicans voted for him. He did extraordinarily well with rural male working-class whites.

    He earned the highest share of all minority votes for a Republican since 1960. Trump grew his support among black voters by 50 percent over 2016. Nationally, Joe Biden’s black support fell well below 90 percent, the level below which Democratic presidential candidates usually lose.

    Trump increased his share of the national Hispanic vote to 35 percent. With 60 percent or less of the national Hispanic vote, it is arithmetically impossible for a Democratic presidential candidate to win Florida, Arizona, Nevada, and New Mexico. Bellwether states swung further in Trump’s direction than in 2016. Florida, Ohio and Iowa each defied America’s media polls with huge wins for Trump. Since 1852, only Richard Nixon has lost the electoral college after winning this trio, and that 1960 defeat to John F. Kennedy is still the subject of great suspicion.

    Midwestern states Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin always swing in the same direction as Ohio and Iowa, their regional peers. Ohio likewise swings with Florida. Current tallies show that, outside of a few cities, the Rust Belt swung in Trump’s direction. Yet, Biden leads in Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin because of an apparent avalanche of black votes in Detroit, Philadelphia, and Milwaukee. Biden’s ‘winning’ margin was derived almost entirely from such voters in these cities, as coincidentally his black vote spiked only in exactly the locations necessary to secure victory. He did not receive comparable levels of support among comparable demographic groups in comparable states, which is highly unusual for the presidential victor.

    We are told that Biden won more votes nationally than any presidential candidate in history. But he won a record low of 17 percent of counties; he only won 524 counties, as opposed to the 873 counties Obama won in 2008. Yet, Biden somehow outdid Obama in total votes.

    Victorious presidential candidates, especially challengers, usually have down-ballot coattails; Biden did not.

    The Republicans held the Senate and enjoyed a ‘red wave’ in the House, where they gained a large number of seats while winning all 27 toss-up contests. Trump’s party did not lose a single state legislature and actually made gains at the state level.

    Another anomaly is found in the comparison between the polls and non-polling metrics. The latter include: party registrations trends; the candidates’ respective primary votes; candidate enthusiasm; social media followings; broadcast and digital media ratings; online searches; the number of (especially small) donors; and the number of individuals betting on each candidate.

    Despite poor recent performances, media and academic polls have an impressive 80 percent record predicting the winner during the modern era. But, when the polls err, non-polling metrics do not; the latter have a 100 percent record. Every non-polling metric forecast Trump’s reelection. For Trump to lose this election, the mainstream polls needed to be correct, which they were not. Furthermore, for Trump to lose, not only did one or more of these metrics have to be wrong for the first time ever, but every single one had to be wrong, and at the very same time; not an impossible outcome, but extremely unlikely nonetheless.

    Atypical voting patterns married with misses by polling and non-polling metrics should give observers pause for thought. Adding to the mystery is a cascade of information about the bizarre manner in which so many ballots were accumulated and counted.

    The following peculiarities also lack compelling explanations:

    1. Late on election night, with Trump comfortably ahead, many swing states stopped counting ballots. In most cases, observers were removed from the counting facilities. Counting generally continued without the observers

    2. Statistically abnormal vote counts were the new normal when counting resumed. They were unusually large in size (hundreds of thousands) and had an unusually high (90 percent and above) Biden-to-Trump ratio

    3. Late arriving ballots were counted. In Pennsylvania, 23,000 absentee ballots have impossible postal return dates and another 86,000 have such extraordinary return dates they raise serious questions

    4. The failure to match signatures on mail-in ballots. The destruction of mail in ballot envelopes, which must contain signatures

    5. Historically low absentee ballot rejection rates despite the massive expansion of mail voting. Such is Biden’s narrow margin that, as political analyst Robert Barnes observes, ‘If the states simply imposed the same absentee ballot rejection rate as recent cycles, then Trump wins the election’

    6. Missing votes. In Delaware County, Pennsylvania, 50,000 votes held on 47 USB cards are missing

    7. Non-resident voters. Matt Braynard’s Voter Integrity Project estimates that 20,312 people who no longer met residency requirements cast ballots in Georgia. Biden’s margin is 12,670 votes

    8. Serious ‘chain of custody’ breakdowns. Invalid residential addresses. Record numbers of dead people voting. Ballots in pristine condition without creases, that is, they had not been mailed in envelopes as required by law

    9. Statistical anomalies. In Georgia, Biden overtook Trump with 89 percent of the votes counted. For the next 53 batches of votes counted, Biden led Trump by the same exact 50.05 to 49.95 percent margin in every single batch. It is particularly perplexing that all statistical anomalies and tabulation abnormalities were in Biden’s favor. Whether the cause was simple human error or nefarious activity, or a combination, clearly something peculiar happened.

    If you think that only weirdos have legitimate concerns about these findings and claims, maybe the weirdness lies in you.

  • Tesla Now Building Third Gen Superchargers In China
    Tesla Now Building Third Gen Superchargers In China

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 22:00

    In what appears to us to be a continuing push to eventually become a Chinese company, Tesla will soon be producing its third generation electric Superchargers in China, in addition to vehicles it already manufactures there. 

    The company said it’ll start producing the chargers in 2021, according to Reuters. It plans on investing $6.4 million in a new factory to help make its third generation of chargers, called the Supercharger V3.

    It’s no surprise Musk is eager to expand in China, having called the country “smart” and “hard working” back in August of this year. The Tesla CEO – who has made himself billions off the back of U.S. government subsidies and the U.S. taxpayer – took to the “Daily Drive” podcast over the summer to make it clear exactly what country his allegiances lie with.

    On the podcast, reported by CNBChe called the people of China “smart” and “hard working” while at the same time calling U.S. citizens “entitled” and “complacent”. He specifically called out both New York and California, states whose taxpayers have literally funded Tesla’s business with massive tax breaks amounting to billions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When asked about China as an EV strategy leader worldwide, Musk responded:  “China rocks in my opinion. The energy in China is great. People there – there’s like a lot of smart, hard working people. And they’re really — they’re not entitled, they’re not complacent, whereas I see in the United States increasingly much more complacency and entitlement especially in places like the Bay Area, and L.A. and New York.”

     

    He then compared the U.S. to losing sports teams: “When you’ve been winning for too long you sort of take things for granted. The United States, and especially like California and New York, you’ve been winning for too long. When you’ve been winning too long you take things for granted. So, just like some pro sports team they win a championship you know a bunch of times in a row, they get complacent and they start losing.”

    Recall, Tesla secured $1.6 billion in loans from the Chinese government to help build its Shanghai factory, which helped the company resume normal operations post-Covid this year. 

    Musk – apparently completely devoid of any humility to the amount of money he has received from the U.S. taxpayer – defended his company by saying over the summer it hadn’t received as much government support from the Chinese government as most competitors: “They have been supportive. But it would be weird if they were more supportive to a non-Chinese company. They’re not.”

    Tesla’s total government assistance in the U.S. has surpassed $4.9 billion, according to CNBC

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recall, just weeks ago we also reported that Tesla’s Supercharger network in Australia now officially costed more than gas. The news came as a result of a “recent price increase” to use the Superchargers and – stop us if you’ve heard this one – “incorrect fuel figures on the Tesla website”. 

    This, of course, puts an end to Tesla’s years long claims that recharging its vehicles offered savings versus traditional internal combustion engine vehicles. 

    “According to Tesla the cost of charging a Tesla Model 3 is $7 per 100km compared with $12 for a rival petrol car,” WhichCar notes, before revealing the estimate uses “at least three incorrect figures”. The report disputes “how much electricity a Tesla Model 3 uses, the cost of electricity at a Tesla Supercharger and the price of petrol.”

    It also notes Tesla’s increase for its Supercharger to 52 cents per kilowatt-hour. The article calculates this recharging “even the most efficient” Model 3 Standard Range would cost $9.78 per 100km using a Supercharger.

  • What No One Is Saying About The Lockdowns
    What No One Is Saying About The Lockdowns

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 21:30

    Via The Corbett Report,

    If you are advocating for lockdowns, you are complicit in tearing families apart. You are complicit in inflicting untold suffering on millions of people around the world. You are complicit in casting the poorest and most vulnerable in our societies into even further grinding poverty. You are complicit in murder.

    TRANSCRIPT

    This is James Corbett of corbettreport.com.

    In 2006, a 15-year-old high school student from Albuquerque, New Mexico won third place in the Intel science and engineering fair for her project on slowing the spread of an infectious pathogen during a pandemic emergency. Using a computer simulation that she developed with the help of her father, she argued that in order to slow the spread of the disease, governments should implement school shutdowns, keep kids at home and enforce social distancing.

    Incredibly, that third place high school science fair project can be tied directly to the lockdown policies being implemented by governments around the world today. You see, that father that she developed her computer simulation with was no average doting dad, but a senior researcher at Sandia National Laboratories who at that time was working on pandemic emergency response plans for the US Department of Homeland Security. His proposal to implement school shutdowns and, if need be, workplace shutdowns in the event of a pandemic emergency was developed at least in part in response to his daughter’s high school project.

    Now those advocating for lockdowns have seen the destruction and death that those policies have wrought this year and we are living through that right now. Not only are people being deprived of their livelihoods and forced into grinding poverty as a direct result of these shutdowns, but now the undeniable truth is that if you are advocating for lockdowns, you are advocating for some portion of the population to be consigned to death.

    This is no longer debatable. It is even openly admitted—although months too late by the World Health Organization.

    DAVID NABARRO: I want to say it again: we in the World Health Organization do not advocate lockdowns as a primary means of control of this virus. [. . .] We may well have a doubling of world poverty by early next year. We may well have at least a doubling of child malnutrition because children are not getting meals at school and their parents and poor families are not able to afford it.

    This is a terrible, ghastly global catastrophe, actually. And so we really do appeal to all world leaders: stop using lockdown as your primary control method. Develop better systems for doing it. Work together and learn from each other. But remember, lockdowns just have one consequence that you must never, ever belittle, and that is making poor people an awful lot poorer.

    SOURCE: The Week in 60 Minutes #6

    This is the point at which, no doubt, I’ll be expected to produce the data to back up the non-controversial observation that lockdowns kill, even though that data will do precisely nothing to penetrate the consciousness of those who have already decided that they occupy the moral high ground for advocating locking billions of people around the globe as prisoners inside their own homes. But persevere I will.

    I’ll point, for example, to the letter signed by hundreds of doctors calling the lockdowns themselves a “mass casualty incident” and exhorting politicians to end the shutdowns.

    I’ll point to the research that shows that thousands of people will die because of delays to cancer surgery treatments as a result of the medical shutdowns.

    I’ll point to the research of the Well-Being Trust showing that 75,000 Americans are expected to die deaths of despair—including alcohol and drug misuse and suicide—this year alone as a result of the lockdowns.

    I will point to the research of The Lancet showing that 265 million people are expected to be thrown into severe food insecurity as a result of these lockdowns.

    I will even point to the research showing 125,000 children are expected to die from malnutrition as a result of these lockdowns.

    But, as I say, none of these deaths will matter to those who have already decided that they are right and virtuous for advocating locking vast swathes of the human population inside their own homes to starve to death in the name of slowing the spread of a disease that even the epidemiologists who have been wrong about everything this year tell us will kill less than one percent of the infected.

    Yes, slowing the spread, not stopping the spread. This was never about stopping a pandemic. Even the lockdown advocates never advocated that. But somehow that has been forgotten and “15 days to flatten the curve” has turned into a never-ending carte blanche for the biosecurity state to implement any number of draconian policies on its population, any number of policies on the checklist of the would-be dictator. Not only locking people inside their own homes, but constant surveillance of the population through the contact tracing and tracking apps that are increasingly being implemented around the globe, and, inevitably, the proposals for mandating the experimental vaccines which agents of the state will forcibly inject into people against their will.

    This is not acceptable.

    We cannot allow this to stand.

    If we forsake this, our most basic right—the right to step foot outside of our own homes—then we forsake our humanity itself. An important part of what makes us human is being taken away from us in the name of stopping the spread of COVID-19.

    But there is good news for those who have managed to retain their sanity in the time of insanity. We do not need a complicated plan in order to subvert this agenda. We do not need special deputization or to ask permission from the government. We do not need to join any particular political party or even any particular protest movement.

    All we have to do is disobey these unlawful “orders.”

    CASSIE ZERVOS: The persistent anti-lockdown protesters said they will not forget Melbourne’s strict 112 day measures as they took to the steps of Parliament. They carried signs saying “Don’t trust the government” and chanted for police to join them in their rally.

    SOURCE: Melbourne anti-COVID lockdown protest turns ugly outside Parliament House

    BUSINESS OWNER: I’ve lost friends who’ve killed themselves. I’ve seen clients die because they’ve lost their livelihood.

    HEALTH INSPECTOR: I’m sorry to hear that.

    BUSINESS OWNER: I know you are and i’m just a—I’m asking for you to guys have some compassion.

    SOURCE: Buffalo, New York Business Owners Stand Up to Cuomo Lockdown Orders

    ASHLEY DRIEMEYER: Can he arrest us all? Because, from what I am gathering, in this area we are all banding together and going against our governor.

    SOURCE: Illinois restaurant owner will defy new state restrictions

    [CROWD BANGS POTS AND PANS DURING PROTEST]

    SOURCE: Protests in Denmark – Epidemic law and mandatory vaccines – EPIDEMILOV

    BUSINESS OWNERS: Get out! Get out! Get out! Get out! Get out!

    SOURCE: Buffalo, New York Business Owners Stand Up to Cuomo Lockdown Orders

    If you have managed to retain your sanity during this time of widespread insanity, I applaud you and wish to assure you that you are not alone. Many, many people all around the world are defying orders. They are protesting against these lockdowns. They are standing up. They are disobeying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But of course the corporate controlled press don’t want you to know that disobedience is an option on the table and they will not report on this. But disobedience is an option.

    Open your business. Leave your home. Do not ask for permission. Disobey.

    To those who are still advocating for lockdowns, I encourage you to do so to the face of those parents who have lost their teenage children due to suicide as a direct result of the shutdowns and tell them that their child’s death doesn’t matter because it wasn’t listed as being due to COVID-19. Or do so to the face of the tens of thousands of others who have already lost loved ones as a direct result of these shutdown or the hundreds of thousands more who will die as long as these lockdowns endure.

    If you are advocating for lockdowns, you are complicit in tearing families apart. You are complicit in inflicting untold suffering on millions of people around the world. You are complicit in casting the poorest and most vulnerable in our societies into even further grinding poverty. You are complicit in murder.

    A line is being crossed right now. Which side of history are you on? Make your decision now and make it wisely, because your actions during these times will not be forgotten.

    You have been warned.

  • China's Xi Continues To Urge Troops Toward 'War Readiness' Over Taiwan Issue
    China’s Xi Continues To Urge Troops Toward ‘War Readiness’ Over Taiwan Issue

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 21:00

    China’s President Xi Jinping has continued to tell his armed forces that they should prepare for potential war amid heightened hostilities with America, particularly over the Taiwan issue.

    Speaking to a room full of People’s Liberation Army (PLA) leaders and officers at the Jingxi Hotel in Beijing this past week, Xi hailed the “new era” of a highly modernized fighting force which has transformed the PLA into a world-class fighting force. 

    The address to the Central Military Commission featured him ordering all officers and soldiers to focus on preparing for war “under real combat conditions,” according to quotes in state Xinhua News Agency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    PLA troops via AFP

    He further stressed that the national soldiers must not “fear hardship and do not fear death” while committing further to deepening training. 

    “Military training is the regular and central task of the army. It is the basic way to generate and improve combat effectiveness. It is the most direct preparation for military battles,” said Xinhua, citing the chairman. 

    Over the past month Xi has toured various military bases while urging war preparations and readiness. This also comes as naval and air forces step up drills off China’s coast, particularly near the Taiwan Strait and in the South China Sea

    Western analysts and media have tended to interpret this latest jingoistic rhetoric as something more than just the usual military orders of ‘readiness’ common to all national militaries:

    Earlier this month, China‘s state broadcaster released footage of the country’s soldiers launching multiple missiles to take down enemy targets during a live-fire drill. 

    In a clip released by Beijing in September, nuclear-capable bombers are seen carrying out a simulated attack on what appears to be the US Andersen Air Force Base on the Pacific island of Guam. 

    China has been flexing its military muscles since tensions heightened between China and the United States over Taiwan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Xi’s address to military officers last Wednesday, via CCTV

    The outgoing Trump administration has vowed to keep up its pressure on Beijing, the latest actions which has included sanctioning PLA-linked China-based companies, even down to the final weeks leading to Biden’s inauguration on January 20.

    The PLA consists of some two million active troops with a half million in reserve.

  • Global Inflation Watch – The Case For Gold As Future Money
    Global Inflation Watch – The Case For Gold As Future Money

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 20:30

    Authored by Alasdair Macleod via Goldmoney.com,

    This article posits that fiat currencies are on the path to hyperinflation and looks at the evidence in the prices of financial assets and commodities. So far, gold has notably underperformed, which indicates that the early signals of hyperinflation are confined to the cryptocurrencies, whose participants broadly understand fiat debasement, to equities reflecting the desire not to maintain cash and deposit balances, and in international trade, where commodity prices of all stripes have risen in price.

    Given that the early warnings of hyperinflation of money supply are here, the article then looks at the qualities required of a sound money to replace fiat currencies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Introduction

    Figure 1 shows how prices have moved from the Friday before the Fed’s announcement on 23 March that it would go all-in on its support for the US economy with unlimited quantitative easing. It amounted to a commitment to hyperinflate the money supply if needed. Before the Fed cut its funds rate to zero on 16 March nearly all these prices were falling.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since late-March every category has seen increases in prices. Sector and specialist analysts will always claim that there are identifiable reasons why prices for an individual category or commodity have risen. But the fact is that with the exception of the dollar and the other fiat currencies listed in the table all prices have risen. This cannot happen without the dollar and these currencies losing purchasing power.

    While being far from exhaustive in its representation, Figure 1 shows that on the back of existing and perhaps anticipated expansion of money supply, cryptocurrencies have seen the most substantial rises. Putting to one side the debate as to whether cryptocurrencies can be a replacement for fiat currencies, in the general population it is their followers who are most aware of fiat currency debasement. In a monetary inflation, the fact that a significant minority of economic actors understand what governments are doing to money early in the hyperinflationary process does not appear to have happened before. It invalidates the old saying that not one person in a million understands what is happening to their money.

    More people are flocking to cryptocurrencies, and while they appear to be predominantly driven by the prospect of profit rather than seeking an insurance against the demise of their local currencies, we cannot doubt that most of them have learned the lessons about money that evaded their forebears.

    That being the case, we can assume that far from being just a speculative bubble, the rise in prices for bitcoin, ether and other cryptocurrencies anticipates further falls in purchasing power for government currencies, yet to be reflected in the other categories.

    The rise in commodity prices varies considerably, but at a time of global economic slump, they are all higher not just in dollars, but measured in the other currencies represented in the table, which can only be a reflection of monetary debasement. Equities have also been strong with the more volatile NASDAQ 100 outpacing the S&P 500 index. And as if to ram the point home commodities and equity prices fell heavily on deflationary fears before the Fed’s unending stimulus was announced in March, only recovering and rising subsequently. The divide between deflationary and inflationary expectations could not be more marked.

    Not all items in Figure 1 turned higher precisely on 20—23 March. Gold bottomed at $1452 earlier on 16 March, the day when the Fed cut its funds rate to zero. It rallied before falling to test $1456 on 20 March before closing at $1498.7. Nevertheless, a rise of 20.8% puts it between the increase in M1 money supply and M2. The WTI Oil price went negative on 20 April due to delivery problems on Comex before recovering strongly to rise over 90% on balance from late-March.

    In the currencies, only the euro and sterling rose more than the dollar’s trade weighted index fell. And priced in all these currencies, the other items in Figure 1 increased.

    The relationship between money and prices

    There is usually a time lag between an expansion of the money quantity and its effect on prices, depending on the route it takes to full circulation. The lack of any distinction between existing and new circulating currency conceals its existence. And while every economic actor knows that government money loses purchasing power over time, it is still regarded by transacting parties as having the objective value while variations in price are reflected entirely in the goods or services being exchanged.

    If the distribution of new money is channelled through increased government spending targeted at one part of the total economy, then the price effect is initially confined to a few corporations and locations in the sectors concerned, before it spreads to the wider economy before being disseminated by employees, contractors and subsidiary businesses. Alternatively, if money is distributed widely by a representational helicopter, the price effect is more instantaneous because it is more immediately spent mainly on consumer goods.

    Even if the additional distribution of new money is made obvious to a population, it fails to grasp the consequences for the dilution of the existing stock of money. Like most analysts in the commodity markets, they initially think that prices are simply rising, and they fail to consider monetary debasement as the cause.

    While the simple mathematical relationship between the quantity of money and the effect over time on prices is widely understood, other effects are less so. Changing the amount of money in circulation fatally corrupts statistical comparisons, yet financial analysts appear unaware of the profound differences between today’s money and that of the past. Furthermore, in more normal times the expansion and contraction of bank credit is usually a far larger variation of total money than its expansion by a central bank to fund a government deficit.

    But the most profound effect on a money’s purchasing power comes when foreign owners of it domestic users gradually realise that the debasement will continue and even accelerate. Since 23 March, when the Fed told the world it would inflate limitlessly, there were two important categories of actors who immediately understood the inflation message. The first was the cryptocurrency community, as discussed above, and the second was the Chinese government, which accelerated its purchase of commodities, including iron ore, copper and oil. Wheat, cooking oil, and soybeans have followed. Predictably, commentators have seen the ramping up of commodity stockpiles, but not the unseen winding down of dollars. That is the point the Chinese appear to have understood, confirmed by the timing of accelerated commodity purchases. And their currency has also risen by nearly 8% against a weakening dollar, a marked change in official exchange policy.

    Hyperinflation of the dollar is here

    It is now impossible to envisage the US Government and the Fed limiting further monetary expansions. Their Keynesian creed tells them that to do so would be disastrous for the economy. By relying on macroeconomic beliefs upon which they base their policy decisions they cannot come up with an answer that ultimately saves the currency and the economy. They do not appear to realise that by transferring wealth to a generally non-productive government sector, monetary inflation impoverishes the productive capacity of the economy.

    It is against this background that having seen one enormous budget-busting stimulus package from the US Government, we shall shortly see another. Apart from the unconventional cryptocurrency sector and perhaps equity markets, there is little evidence that markets are discounting the inflationary effects of a second package yet — they are awaiting the shape of the next inflationary stimulus. The gold price, having risen by about a fifth since 20 March, is certainly not yet reflecting hyperinflation.

    But it is worth looking at US Government finances since March, when the covid response commenced, leading to a fall in tax revenue and an increase in government spending. This is shown in Figure 2.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The numbers in the table reflect the US Government’s financing of federal expenditure following the Fed’s decision to implement limitless QE, and so covers the period of the first wave of coronavirus. From it, we can see that government spending rocketed to 2.12 times tax revenue. This is not so obvious in the annualised CBO figures, where the additional expenditure is spread over the whole fiscal year to September 2020. But with a second half deficit over twice government spending, government financing is roughly one-third by tax revenue and two-thirds by money printing. And this is not going to be a one-off event.

    Along with the rest of the world, America has entered a second wave of infections, which will oblige the government to deploy a second similar, or even greater stimulus. The second covid wave is likely to lead to a further fall in tax revenues, as a result of bankruptcies from the initial coronavirus wave combining with the effects of the second. There is also a growing realisation that the economic problems from the virus alone will continue beyond the second wave. This fear is beginning to be reflected in the US Treasury bond market, with yields threatening to rise significantly, as illustrated in Figure 3.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The evidence from technical analysis strongly suggests the low point for the 10-year US Treasury bond yield has now passed and yields are set to rise significantly. That being the case, the Fed will find itself isolated as the only significant buyer as investors increasingly abandon Treasuries as a safe haven investment. And that is before we consider the position of foreign holders of US Treasuries and agency debt, with some of these key players having begun to reduce their holdings.

    A further consideration concerning the purchasing power of the next tranche of monetary expansion will come into play. While it is yet to be reflected in consumer prices, with the dollar already diluted by over 30% of additional M1 money between March and September, for the government to obtain the same effect from debasing the currency the expansion of M1 money supply will have to increase by roughly 40% on the expanded base. An aphorism that states for every debasement, a larger one for the same effect will follow, applies. It is the other side of the transfer of wealth from the productive economy to the government which is consistently ignored by macroeconomists. And the more wealth is transferred from the productive private sector to a generally unproductive government, the less there is to transfer. And far from serving to stimulate the economy, these monetary transfers are impoverishing the economy and reducing the government’s tax base at an accelerating pace. The ratio of tax income to inflationary financing illustrated in Figure 2 then rapidly deteriorates from three of inflation to one of tax revenue.

    The US Government’s dependency on inflationary financing is already a commitment with no palatable escape. Politicians are trapped by their earlier electoral promises. Assuming Biden is confirmed as the next US President, his left-leaning socialistic policies can only accelerate the debasement process.

    As has been the case in many other advanced economies, the US financial system has predominantly supported zombie companies since the Lehman crisis. The increase in unproductive debt has been widely noted. A final collapse of the hampered economy simply cannot be avoided, only deferred. But assuming attempts will continue to be made to defer this outcome, the Fed and the Treasury between them will have to underwrite commercial bank loans and the bank credit extended to businesses that would otherwise collapse. Instead of an understanding of the consequences for hyperinflation of the money supply from covid-19 lockdowns, it will be the realisation that currency debasement must continue to prevent widespread bankruptcies of unproductive, labour intensive businesses that finally awakens the general public to the likely collapse of its government’s money.

    The fallacy of the deflation argument

    Keynesian economists who see global economic activity badly undermined by covid lockdowns will be confused by the tendency for prices of commodities to rise, because demand for them must be falling. They are almost certain to argue that price rises are probably a short-term aberration, and that lack of consumer demand and oversupply of products will begin to deflate prices. This is reflected in statements from leading central bankers. They envisage that without the support of increasing money supply, the failure of businesses in a deflationary environment will lead to the thirties-type deflation, which fed into multiple bank failures and record levels of unemployment. In other words, they believe there is a growing danger of a self-feeding deflationary slump.

    The underlying mistake in the deflation argument was made long ago by dismissing Say’s law. Say’s law points out that we produce through the division of our labour in order to consume. Therefore, in approximate terms an increase in unemployment is matched by loss of production, so the supply and demand of consumer goods broadly remain in balance, but at a lower level of economic activity. The Keynesians only account for falling consumer demand without realising production also declines.

    Instead of linking production and consumption through Say’s law, Keynesians imagine a decline in consumer demand due to rising unemployment releases unused production capacity. Understanding this error explains another phenomenon: in a contracting economy people will not increase their cash and deposit balances at a rate to match the expansion of the money supply. Being poorer from the wealth transfer to government through monetary inflation, people tend to reduce their money balances. This alters their money to goods preferences to the detriment of the money’s purchasing power, while more money from the central banks floods the markets.

    The reason asset prices rise, followed by those of consumer goods, is a reflection of this desire not to increase money balances, and inevitably, then a tendency to begin reducing them takes hold. Today, this explains the rise in cryptocurrency and equity prices relative to fiat money, driven by the cohorts that are first to ditch a currency which is depreciating relative to their perceptions of financial security.

    The Keynesians’ reference point was the appalling depression of the 1930s, which they blamed on gold. With gold, prices fell bankrupting farmers, other businesses and the banks. But farmers with their new tractors increased grain output around the world, the glut driving prices lower for nearly all foodstuffs. At the same time the banks ended a period of credit expansion, withdrawing loans from businesses, creating the usual cyclical slump. The difference from previous slumps was intervention, first by President Herbert Hoover and then by Franklin Roosevelt. It was the prototype Keynesian intervention that prolonged the slump, not the gold standard.

    The misunderstanding of inflation-supporting economists and subsequent distortions of the historical truth about the depression have led the economic establishment to fully embrace inflationism, while condemning the deflation of prices as an evil. Again, this flies in the face of historical fact, because prices fell throughout the nineteenth century, improving the living standards of everyone and allowing the purchasing power of their savings to grow. Hard work and innovation were rewarded, while by permitting free markets the government let it all happen under a working gold standard.

    One can only suppose that the unadmitted purpose of inflationism is not to improve the prospects for the ordinary individual but to enhance government revenue. That is certainly the outcome of macroeconomic beliefs which condemn deflation.

    The case for gold as future money

    Some of the reasons commonly put forward denying an inflation problem are notably fiat-centric. For example, a claim that the rise in cryptocurrencies and equity markets are speculative bubbles and not indicative of monetary instability. There is almost certainly truth in this, with a large element of investment always dedicated to trend-chasing rather than founded on reason. But those that take the view it is only speculation fail to get the signal, that what they might describe as unwarranted speculation is an early warning of the consequences of monetary inflation. These are the financial commentators who fail to realise that of any form of money, only sound money can truly reflect a sustainable objective value.

    This brings us to metallic money, the gold and silver to which people have always defaulted when kings, emperors and governments fail to sustain their unbacked alternatives. In Figure 1 silver has been included in the commodity category, because with the gold/silver ratio at roughly 77 times it is not being priced for its monetary qualities. That may change. Until it does, we should consider the position of gold as the ultimate money while silver remains priced as an industrial metal, a situation that must nevertheless be kept under review. Furthermore, if governments are to stop the collapse of their currencies, that can only be done by mobilising central bank gold reserves to back them, or alternatively by linking their currencies to another which is fully convertible into gold at every holders’ option.

    Apart from other significant hurdles, those who believe that cryptocurrencies will replace gold when fiat dies have the problem of explaining how bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies will be sanctioned as money by governments which have none in their monetary reserves. Instead, they are currently designing their own central bank digital currencies, through which, they hope, they can control economic activity and ultimately prices. If anything, in the face of technological innovation they are spurred on by a determination to keep control of all forms of currency for themselves.

    The best hope for cryptocurrencies appears to be that fiat continues to exist and like the Argentine peso, never quite die. If and when they do elapse, or at least when the planners realise their battle is lost and that to prevent a complete monetary breakdown they must introduce proper backing for their currency, then states have the power and the means to ensure sound money is available within a matter of weeks. The only sound medium of exchange they can use is what they have to hand, and that is their gold reserves. Of course, if governments fail to back their currencies convincingly or rein in their spending — necessary to sustain gold backing credibly — cryptocurrencies might have a brief extension as stores of value.

    Putting the cryptocurrency issue aside, the history of collapses in the purchasing power of fiat money allows us to rank stores of wealth. The best has always been gold, or other reputable currencies backed by gold and fully accepted by the public as gold substitutes. This time, there are none, so it must be physical gold. As noted above, the debauchment of fiat money impoverishes the private sector until there is no wealth left to be transferred by this means. In consequence, the purchasing power of gold rises to reflect its relative scarcity compared with the capital and consumer goods in the hands of distressed sellers who at the same time reject the government’s currency. Only then can we rank the capital goods relative to each other. Residential property and country estates which produce food come high on the list, as do equities of companies that manage to survive the currency collapse.

    But these assets only rise measured in rapidly depreciating government currency. When the paper mark in Germany began its final collapse in 1923 a large house in a fashionable part of Berlin could be had for $100, at $20.67 to the ounce of gold, the equivalent of just under five ounces. Similarly, country estates could be had for ridiculously small amounts of gold-backed foreign currency.

    The requirements for monetary flexibility

    The argument promoted by bitcoin hodlers is that its future issuance is firmly capped at 21 million, and that with about 18.5 million already issued, of these many have been irretrievably lost. It is simply a supply argument, and if bitcoin replaces failing fiat the price will be sky-high.

    This reasoning ignores the fact that a rigid quantity of money in circulation is an unworkable proposition. Prices of consumer items will lack the stability that sound money contributes to transactions. It would become impossible to do the business calculations required for capital investment, because assumptions about future values for both the repayment of debt and the eventual value of the business investment cannot be reasonably assessed. And we must remember that we are moving from a fiat world where through inflation value is transferred from saver to borrower. A significant value-transfer to the saver from the borrower, which would be the inevitable outcome of using bitcoin as the money, would therefore severely restrict entrepreneurial activity and hamper economic progress.

    Gold is far more flexible, which is why it has always returned to be the peoples’ money when government money fails. In general terms, mine supply has always increase the level of above ground stocks at a rate similar to the world’s population growth, leading to long-term stability in the general level of prices. Furthermore, a large quantity of gold is not mobilised as money, but for other purposes, mainly jewellery. If the free market demand for monetary gold increases, scrap supply is there to augment gold used for monetary purposes, and if monetary demand diminishes relative to other uses, then scrap supply simply declines.

    With gold, there is minimal transfer of value over time from savers to borrowers or vice-versa. The increase in purchasing power that gold-backed savings have enjoyed in the past has come not because of supply constraints of gold, but through competition and innovation of production methods and technology. This certainty always led to savings being protected and available for personal emergencies, retirement, and to pass on to families. And as well as funding personal and family welfare, therefore rendering state welfare provision virtually unnecessary, personal savings provided the monetary capital for businesses and entrepreneurs, who could reasonably calculate the profits from their investment, the money being sound.

    Society under a gold standard enables its users to accumulate wealth, because its government, being generally unproductive by virtue of its bureaucracy and monopoly, would have to radically alter its expenditure commitments in order to discard inflationism. In the absence of this source of funding, the cost of government becomes fully exposed, and the tax burden cannot be increased sufficiently to replace it. With sound money, the state has no option but to cut its spending, and to reduce its interventionist roles.

    Properly understood by the state authorities, the route to maximising their own power is to let free markets flourish with sound money. This was the wisdom of Britain’s leaders in the nineteenth century, which made this small nation the most powerful on earth. It was also understood by America’s Founding Fathers and America similarly became the most powerful nation after Britain’s decline.

    But after decades of fiat money inflation, it is difficult for those steeped in macroeconomics to envisage a world where gold and fully backed gold substitutes are the only money. Much of the paraphernalia of risk management, derivatives and forward markets will no longer be needed and will disappear. Debt can only be taken out on the basis it is repaid when due, and assumptions that it can always be rolled over, or perhaps that the state will come to the rescue must be banished.

    Other than the residual role of issuing gold substitutes, of maintaining gold reserves and overseeing the production and free circulation of gold coins, there will be no role for central banks and their planners. Stemming from the UK’s Bank Charter Act of 1844, the laws and regulations that permit the creation of unbacked bank credit should be revised either to make it a criminal offence in line with natural law, or to permit free banking with the removal of limited liability for the managers and shareholders. Only then can the expansion of unbacked money, the origin of which is credit expansion, be reined in. Crony capitalism, whereby an entity gains government support for its operations or to the disadvantage of its competitors, must also cease.

    It must be admitted that politicians are unlike to benefit from a sudden Damascene conversion. The only thing that will be clear to them is the need to stabilise the currency, which they will probably have to fight against their own establishments to achieve. There will remain the considerable risk of political anarchy if wise leaders fail to take the public and their administrations with them, raising the prospect of Hayek’s Road to Serfdom.

    All that is for the future — perhaps not so distant as we might think — for which cryptocurrencies and central bank digital currencies are not equipped. But today, while there is incontrovertible evidence that some economic actors are beginning to understand that hyperinflation of the money supply is taking hold, the modest performance of the gold price tells us that for the broader public this realisation is still in its early stages.

  • House To Vote On Bill That Would Delist China-Based Companies If They Fail U.S. Audit Standards
    House To Vote On Bill That Would Delist China-Based Companies If They Fail U.S. Audit Standards

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 20:00

    As we have already reported, U.S. lawmakers appear as though they are finally going to hold Chinese companies’ feet to the fire: they are going to require China based companies comply with audit oversight rules that U.S. companies must also abide by. 

    This voids a years long loophole that literally everyone on Wall Street knew about and led to numerous U.S. listed China based frauds totaling well into the billions of dollars. 

    On Wednesday, house leaders will hold another measure that would require shares to be removed from trading in the U.S. if the transition to an annual U.S. reviewed audit isn’t undertaken. The law would still give Chinese companies a generous three years to comply with new rules, the Wall Street Journal notes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beijing has been critical of the bill, as it will obviously allow them to commit far less fraud on U.S. capital markets. But the legislation has bipartisan support in the U.S. and could be signed by Trump – who is rumored to be looking at new crackdowns on China before leaving office – if it passes the House.

    The Senate bill was sponsored by Sens. John Kennedy and Chris Van Hollen. Kennedy said: “The current policy that allows Chinese firms to flout the rules that American companies follow is toxic. I hope the House joins the Senate this week in unanimously passing this bill so it can start helping hardworking Americans.”

    As we reported about 2 weeks ago, the proposal will be issued for public comment in December, and will address a problem that has plagued Chinese companies on U.S. capital markets for more than a decade: China hasn’t let the work of Chinese auditors be inspected.

     

    This has been the key factor in a number of Chinese firms being halted and delisted from U.S. exchanges over the last decade, as short sellers like Citron Research and Muddy Waters Research have collectively worked, among others, to help expose innumerable frauds and misstatements from companies based in China. A movie, “The China Hustle“, was even made about the widespread fraud.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The PCAOB has been unable to get cooperation from China on a broad scale. The PCAOB has often had to sue Chinese audit firms and negotiate with Chinese regulators for more information. Now, new regulations could put the responsibility on the listing exchanges, like NASDAQ and NYSE, who choose to give credibility to China-based entities by accepting their listing fees and putting them on their well known exchanges.

    In other words, it appears to us that U.S. exchanges seem to have no problem making people like Jack Ma into billionaires with U.S. capital, without even understanding the intricacies of the opaque businesses they choose to list.

    The SEC is trying to get the plan in order before Chairman Jay Clayton leaves at the end of the year, as we noted  earlier this month. The regulation could then be “tweaked” by an incoming Biden administration. 

    China has come up with the laughable excuse that it “is worried about auditors revealing strategic secrets held by domestic firms, some of which are majority-owned by the Chinese government”. In fact, the country signed into law this year a rule stating that its citizens can’t comply with overseas regulators without the government’s permission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

  • This Company Wants To Put A Human-Size Hologram Booth In Your Living Room
    This Company Wants To Put A Human-Size Hologram Booth In Your Living Room

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 19:30

    Authored by Vanessa Bates Ramirez via SingularityHub.com,

    Over the last several months we’ve gotten very used to communicating via video chat. Zoom, FaceTime, Google Hangouts, and the like have not only replaced most in-person business meetings, they’ve acted as a stand-in for gatherings between friends and reunions between relatives. Just a few short years ago, many of us would have found it strange to think we’d be spending so much time talking to people “face-to-face” while sitting right in our own homes.

    Now there’s a new technology looming on the horizon that may one day replace video calls with an even stranger-to-contemplate, more futuristic tool: real-time, full-body holograms.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Picture this: you’re sitting in your living room having a cup of coffee when the phone-booth-size box in the corner dings, alerting you that you have an incoming call. You accept it, and within seconds your best friend (or your partner, your grandmother, your boss) appears in the box – in the form of millions of points of light engineered to look and sound exactly like the real person. And the real person is on the other end of the line, talking to you in real time as their holographic likeness moves around the box – you can see their gestures, body language, and facial expression just as if they were really there with you.

    The closest approximation to this that you may have heard about was when a holographic version of the late Tupac Shakur performed at Coachella in 2012. The hologram was simultaneously highly detailed—the lines of Tupac’s washboard abs were clearly defined and visible—and somewhat blurry; after the opening “scene,” in which the hologram stood still, it was hard to see any of Tupac’s facial features.

    The Tupac hologram was created by events tech company AV Concepts and Hollywood special effects studio Digital Domain, and reportedly cost at least $100,000. It seems holograms don’t come cheap; the afore-mentioned hologram box is currently going for $60,000.

    The box is called an Epic HoloPortl, and it’s made by PORTL, a company whose founder was inspired by Tupac’s hologram; after seeing the 2012 performance, David Nussbaum quickly bought the patents for the technology that made it possible, and has been working on turning the tech into something useful, fun, and scalable ever since.

    The Epic has high-resolution transparent LCD screens embedded into its interior walls. The person on the other end—the one appearing as a hologram, that is—just needs to have a camera and be standing against a white background. A camera on the Epic shows the sender the room and people he or she is being beamed to, essentially just like a Zoom call.

    Last month PORTL raised $3 million in funding, led by Silicon Valley venture capitalist Tim Draper. Nussbaum says he’s sold a hundred Epics, has pre-orders “in excess of a thousand,” and dozens of the devices have already been delivered, with clients including malls, airports, and movie theaters (all places that aren’t very frequented today—but here’s hoping they’ll make a comeback when the pandemic subsides).

    In fact, PORTL may not have gotten this funding if it weren’t for the pandemic; Nussbaum told TechCrunch that Draper pushed him to expand his vision for the company and its technology when the virus hit, likely anticipating that people will want new ways to communicate from a distance.

    Few can afford to shell out $60k for a hologram booth, though (not to mention having space for a 7-foot-tall by 5-foot-wide by 2-foot-deep box), and Nussbaum knows it; his next project is to build a smaller, cheaper version of the Epic.

    Even at a tenth of the current cost, the tech likely wouldn’t see widespread adoption by people wanting their own personal hologram portal at home. But there are many possible use cases beyond person-to-person communication.

    Any venue or event that would typically hire famous people to appear in person—be they celebrities, academics, religious figures, or business leaders—could beam a hologram of those people in instead. The implications may be most significant for education and business; Nussbaum believes the CEOs of the not-too-distant future will conduct their meetings via hologram. “You can now make that very important personal emotional contact with people that you need to talk to without actually having to leave your office,” he said.

    Whether this is true remains to be seen. Many of us have experienced Zoom fatigue over the course of the pandemic, becoming acutely aware that while it’s better than nothing, it’s also nothing like being in a room with someone in person; there’s only so much you can get from a face and voice on a screen.

    Will a face and voice on a three-dimensional, life-sized hologram be better? Stay tuned to find out.

  • Here's How Central Banks Will Finally Unleash Inflation: The Shenzhen Case Study
    Here’s How Central Banks Will Finally Unleash Inflation: The Shenzhen Case Study

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 19:05

    Back in 2009, when the Fed first launched QE, a majority of traders and strategists were convinced that the Fed would spark an inflationary inferno as a result of the hundreds of billions of dollars (back then, that was a big number) of liquidity injected into markets and which – using the Weimar Republic as an example – consensus expected would find their way to the broader economy triggering sharply higher prices as a result of global currency devaluation.

    And while one part of this forecast turned out to be true, with asset prices indeed hyperinflating in the subsequent decade, the flood of central bank reserves did little to boost benign broader economy inflation, i.e., wages.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s also why a decade later, with central banks now injecting a berserk $300BN each month, the 10Y continues to trade well below 1% – the simple reason is that having failed to spark broader inflation, the market is convinced that nothing the Fed and its central bank peers do can change this default dynamic.

    But if consensus was dead wrong about the economic outcome of the first QE back in 2009, could consensus be just as wrong now, and with most expecting deflation no matter how big the QE, could central banks finally “succeed” in sparking runaway inflation?

    The answer is yes and it will come in the form of digital currencies which we – and DoubleLine – have discussed extensively in the past year, which while the biggest economic and financial story of the year by far, has been successfully drowned in the noise surrounding covid and the US presidential election.

    But before we get into the specifics of how, here is another take on why, courtesy of BofA Chief Investment Officer Michael Hartnett, who believes that the key theme of the next decade will be “Dollar Debasement & Digital Currencies”, to wit:

    2020 saw $21tn of global fiscal and monetary stimulus. The US federal deficit skyrocketed to 25% of GDP, second only to WWII (27%). Global debt is expected to hit $277tn or 365% of GDP by year end, an all-time high while global interest rates are at their lowest level in 5,000 years. In the coming decade, loss of central bank independence, shift towards digital currencies as conduits for policy (UBI, “helicopter drops”, student debt forgiveness), introduction of Yield Curve Control & stealth Modern Monetary Theory, the end of era of “financial engineering” and considerable public sector deficits are all reasons we think the US will find it tougher to finance current account surpluses in coming years…the dollar likely will decline, bullish for commodities & EM.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But while all that sounds great in theory, the real question as always is how does it work in practice.

    The answer, as so often happens when it comes to financial experimentation, comes from China which is the most advanced nation in the development and rollout of digital currencies. Culminating a monetary revolution process that has been 6 years in the making, China started ramping up trials with the digital yuan last April, when it ran a pilot program that reportedly included US companies like McDonald’s and Subway…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and then in October, China launched one of the biggest real-world trials for its digital currency, when the government in Shenzhen carried out a lottery to give away a total of 10 million yuan (about $1.5 million) worth of the digital currency. Nearly 2 million people applied and 50,000 people actually won.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shenzhen

    The winners are required to download a digital Renminbi app in order to receive a “red packet” worth 200 digital yuan ($30), which they can then spend at over 3,000 designated retailers in Shenzhen’s Luohu district, according to China Daily. After that, they’ll be able to buy goods from local pharmacies, supermarkets and even Walmart.

    The idea was to not only test the technology involved, but boost consumer spending in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic. In short, China is not only subsidizing the centrally-planned economy by manipulating the supply-side of the question- it now can prop up demand by handing out digital currency to anyone (or everyone).

    Of course, unlike traditional central bank account-based currencies such as reserves, or decentralized cryptocurrencies like bitcoin, China’s digital currency would be controlled by the country’s central bank and will be instantly made available at a moment’s notice to anyone who can receive it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s adoption of digital central bank tokens is expected to be seamless as most of the nation’s digital payments already pass through companies like TenCent and AliPay and are already very popular in the country.

    The successful Shenzhen test means that a broad rollout is just a matter of time.

    As we have discussed repeatedly in recent months, central banks around the world are rushing to roll out the idea of issuing digital currencies. In October, the Bank for International Settlements and seven central banks published a framework for central bank digital currencies, or CBDCs.

    Needless to say, without any consumer-facing liability – it’s not a loan or a debt – the propensity to spend the digital currency is virtually instant and without limitation. After all, it’s money that the central bank (in this case PBOC) created out of thin air and has handed out to whoever it so chooses – a form of massive universal basic income or unprecedented population subsidy – in hopes of sparking higher prices.

    Consider it a way for central banks to atone for the fact that their policies were unable to boost wages in the past decade; instead, they will now simply hand out money with little regard for the consequences, as long as the consequences are sufficiently reflationary they allow some of the global massive debt tsunami which is now at $277 trillion, or 365% of GDP, to be inflated away.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally timing: according to tentative estimates for the rollout of ISO 20022, which is the required universal transaction standard which will make payment in digital currencies possible, we are looking at a 2022 launch date.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Newt Gingrich: 2020 Election May Be Biggest Presidential Theft Since 1824
    Newt Gingrich: 2020 Election May Be Biggest Presidential Theft Since 1824

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 18:40

    Authored by Ivan Pentchoukov via The Epoch Times,

    Former Republican House Speaker New Gingrich said on Friday that the 2020 election may have been subject to the biggest theft in nearly two centuries.

    “The more data comes out on vote anomalies that clearly are not legitimate the more it looks like 2020 may be the biggest Presidential theft since Adams and Clay robbed Andrew Jackson in 1824. State legislatures should demand recounts,” Gingrich wrote on Twitter.

    President Donald Trump and his allies are waging legal battles in several states in a bid to identify and disqualify potential illegal votes or to invalidate the election results there entirely. The lawsuits have served as vehicles for the release of sworn affidavits from witnesses who detailed widespread malpractice and alleged fraud in the 2020 election.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an op-ed for The Epoch Times written earlier the same week, Gingrich said that the “thieves” who stole the 2020 election “got sloppy.”

    “Stealing the 2020 election was a mammoth undertaking, involving widespread lawlessness and illicit partnerships between private actors and public officials. They’ve been working to cover their tracks since Election Day, but they didn’t work fast enough,” Gingrich said.

    “Now, the courts need to stop them from destroying any more evidence so that the people of Pennsylvania—and the rest of the country—can accurately assess the ramifications of their wrongdoing.”

    Recounts were ongoing on Sunday in Georgia and Wisconsin.

    Rudy Giuliani, the attorney leading Trump’s post-election legal effort, testified in a special session held by Pennsylvania state lawmakers last week. The lawmakers also heard from a number of witnesses who alleged fraudulent activity taking place during the processing, counting, and reporting of the votes.

    “This voter fraud that took place, which as you will see from the witnesses that we call, had several dimensions to it, several different ways in which it was done. The most dangerous thing is, it is very, very similar in at least six states that we’ve been able to study,” Giuliani said.

    Following the hearing, Pennsylvania’s Republican state lawmakers said they were gathering support for a resolution to decertify the state’s election results and appoint presidential electors through the legislature.

    Trump’s legal team said a hearing similar to the one in Pennsylvania will take place in Arizona on Monday.

  • Former Overstock CEO Paying 'Team Of Hackers And Cybersleuths' To Prove Trump Won Election
    Former Overstock CEO Paying ‘Team Of Hackers And Cybersleuths’ To Prove Trump Won Election

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 18:15

    Patrick Byrne, former CEO of Overstock.com, says he’s funding a group of ‘hackers, cybersleuths, and other people with odd skills’ to prove that Democrats cheated in the 2020 election, and that President Trump rightfully won.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I’ve funded a team of hackers and cybersleuths, other people with odd skills,” Byrne told One America News.

    The 57-year-old multimillionaire also appeared on several podcasts, including a November 23 appearance in which he said: “I’m a free agent, and I’m self-funded, and I’m funding this army of various odd people,” according to the Daily Beast.

    “It’s really going to make a great movie someday,” he added.

    Byrne claims he’s funding teams of “hackers and crackers” who realized all the way back in August that Dominion voting machines could be used to steal the election from Trump. Since the election, those voting machines have figured prominently in Trump supporters’ allegations of fraud, despite the company’s repeated denials and any actual proof the voting tallies were changed. –Daily Beast

    Byrne says he’s been communicating with former Trump attorney Sidney Powell for weeks – who last week filed two lawsuits in Michigan and Georgia alleging massive schemes to rig the election for Joe Biden.

    According to Powell’s Georgia lawsuit: “Old-fashioned ballot-stuffing” has been “amplified and rendered virtually invisible by computer software created and run by domestic and foreign actors for that very purpose,” adding that “Mathematical and statistical anomalies rising to the level of impossibilities, as shown by affidavits of multiple witnesses, documentation, and expert testimony evince this scheme across the state of Georgia.”

    In Michigan, Powell claims that “hundreds of thousands of illegal, ineligible, duplicate, or purely fictitious ballots” enabled by “massive election fraud” facilitated Biden’s win in the state.

    The suit claimed that election software and hardware from Dominion Voting Systems used by the Michigan Board of State Canvassers helped facilitate the fraud.

    More via Natural News:

    Speaking to Christopher McDonald of The McFiles in a recent interview, the former head of a $200 billion e-commerce company that has never once gotten hacked revealed that Dominion Voting Systems were used to perform a “Drop and Roll” technique of voter fraud that slyly padded the vote for Biden in at least five key swing areas of the country.

    Atlanta, Detroit, Milwaukee, Philadelphia, and Maricopa County, Arizona (Phoenix) were all rigged prior to election day to strip President Trump of his rightful win in each of these states. Byrne also mentioned Clark County, Nevada (Las Vegas) as another election fraud locale, though this one was more secondary.

    According to Byrne, who is not a supporter of President Trump but rather a “small l” libertarian, these five (or six if you include Clark County) areas are where a bulk of the election fraud took place. It did not have to be widespread because these were the key swing areas that Biden needed to “win” in order to steal the election.

    By cheating those five counties, you flip five key states, you flip the electoral college,” Byrne says. “In places where Trump lost by 10,000, there may be 300,000 fake, illegal votes for Biden. So this isn’t even close.

    He further contends that the election systems that govern elections in America “are a joke,” especially those run by Dominion Voting Systems and Smartmatic software.

    *  *  *

    Is Byrne’s ‘army’ Sidney Powell’s research team?

  • Biden's Economic, Communications Team Is Full Of Women
    Biden’s Economic, Communications Team Is Full Of Women

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 18:08

    Following his recent decision to appoint Janet Yellen as new Treasury Secretary, Joe Biden has decided to fill many of the key economic advisory spots with female staffers, all close to either Obama or Hillary Clinton.

    Biden is turning to longtime Hillary Clinton ally and Democratic policy staffer Neera Tanden to lead his Office of Management and Budget, while Cecilia Rouse will be head the Council of Economic Advisers, according to Bloomberg.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tanden, who currently leads the the liberal think-tank Center for American Progress, worked on the Obama administration’s health-care reform and was a close adviser to Hillary Clinton on her failed 2016 campaign. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rouse also worked in the Obama administration as a member of the CEA and is currently dean of Princeton University’s School of Public and International Affairs.

    Biden will also nominate Adewale “Wally” Adeyemo to be deputy treasury secretary. Previously Wally worked as President of the Obama Foundation.

    Biden isn’t stopping there, and according to a separate Bloomberg report Biden’s senior communications team is composed entirely of women, including Jen Psaki as White House press secretary. Psaki, a former Obama White House communications director and State Department spokeswoman, has been an on-camera spokeswoman for Biden’s transition office. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Other women who will be tasked with interpreting Biden’s “communications” include:

    • Kate Bedingfield, deputy campaign manager and communications director during the 2020 campaign, who will be Biden’s White House communications director.
    • Karine Jean-Pierre will be principal deputy press secretary after serving as a senior adviser during the campaign. She also worked on Barack Obama’s two presidential campaigns and in his White House as a regional political director.
    • Pili Tobar, the Biden campaign’s communications director for coalitions, will be deputy communications director.
    • Liz Alexander, whose work with Biden dates back to his time in the Senate, will be communications director for Jill Biden.

    President-in-waiting Kamala Harris is also betting heavily on women:

    • Ashley Etienne, a former communications director and senior adviser to House Speaker Nancy Pelosi, will be Vice President-elect Kamala Harris’s communications director.
    • Symone Sanders, one of Biden’s most visible campaign aides, will be senior adviser and chief spokesperson for Harris. Sanders advised Harris and traveled with her during the final weeks of the campaign, a task she’s continued in during the transition.

  • Judge Blocks, Then Unblocks Georgia From Wiping Or Resetting Election Machines
    Judge Blocks, Then Unblocks Georgia From Wiping Or Resetting Election Machines

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 17:48

    Authored by Ivan Pentchoukov and Petr Svab via The Epoch Times,

    A federal judge presiding over a major election lawsuit in Georgia on Sunday issued and then reversed an order directing the state to cease and desist wiping or resetting election machines.

    “Defendants are ordered to maintain the status quo & are temporarily enjoined from wiping or resetting any voting machines in the State of Georgia until further order of the court,” Judge Timothy Batten wrote in an emergency order issued Nov. 29.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The judge reversed the order not long after, explaining that the defendants are not in possession of the machines.

    “Plaintiffs’ request fails because the voting equipment that they seek to impound is in the possession of county election officials. Any injunction the Court issues would extend only to Defendants and those within their control, and Plaintiffs have not demonstrated that county election officials are within Defendants’ control. Defendants cannot serve as a proxy for local election officials against whom the relief should be sought,” the judge wrote.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The change of course by the judge drew a flabbergasted response from Lin Wood, an attorney associated with the Trump campaign.

    “What??? Judge reversed order based on Defendants’ claim that GA Counties control voting machines,” Wood wrote on Twitter, adding that the machines are owned by the state and that the Georgia secretary of state administers elections.

    “Why are GA officials determined to wipe these machines clean [by] resetting them?”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The plaintiffs in the lawsuit on Sunday filed an emergency motion which included an affidavit featuring a Nov. 25 message from an election official stating that the ballot-counting machines would be reset to zero on Monday, Nov. 30, before performing a recount.

    “The process will begin with an L & A – resetting the machine to ‘zero’ to begin the recount,” the text of the message stated before describing the specifics of the recount process.

    The affidavit was written by a GOP poll worker who says he or she addressed concerns about wiping the machines to the election manager.

    “Because the plan on Monday is to wipe the voting machines clean, and start from 0 so that we can recount using those machines, I’m concerned by what I am reading online,” the poll worker wrote, according to the affidavit.

    “I am seeing lots of notices from lawyers about possibly impounding the machines. Lawyers are now saying that the machines should be confiscated immediately before this happens to protect forensic data. They are saying those machines need to be impounded ASAP. Yikes. Maybe I’m being overly paranoid but let’s be sure this is what we’re supposed to be doing.”

    The supervisor responded, “It’s what we are supposed to do. It will take a court order to stop this process—so I guess we need to keep watching the news. If we get a court order to stop, we will see it in our SOS information. The issue is, the Atlanta area has already started,” the elections manager wrote.

    When the poll worker asked if the reset will wipe the forensic info from the machines, the manager said that “Atlanta already did it.”

    The lawsuit in question is being litigated by Sidney Powell, an attorney who defended former national security adviser Lt. Gen. Michael Flynn. President Donald Trump pardoned Flynn earlier this week. The Trump campaign has said that Powell is not part of its legal team.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Georgia Republican Party Chairman David Shafer wrote on Twitter after the judge issued the order that election officials in Fulton County were updating the software on voting systems earlier the same day.

    “Our Republican recount monitors at the World Congress Center waited today for four hours while Fulton County elections officials ‘updated the software.’ The explanation given to me—‘just the usual Fulton County incompetence’—is completely unacceptable,” Shafer wrote on Twitter.

    “It is outrageous that we cannot rely on Fulton County elections officials to do their jobs without unexplained four hour delays, interventions by private attorneys and federal court orders.”

    Voting Systems

    The lawsuit makes a number of allegations regarding the voting machines and software supplied by Dominion Voting Systems, which is used in Georgia and many other states.

    The lawsuit cites an affidavit written by a former electronic intelligence analyst under 305th Military Intelligence Battalion, who testified that the software used by the Dominion machines was accessed by agents of malicious actors, such as China and Iran, “in order to monitor and manipulate elections,” including the 2020 election.

    The suit further alleges that the machines are connected to the internet, even though they aren’t supposed to be, and are easily hacked, based on multiple expert declarations. The machines have built-in functions that allow operators to manipulate the results, several experts cited in the lawsuit said.

    Dominion has vehemently denied that its machines were used to manipulate vote counts.

    “Servers that run Dominion software are located in local election offices, and data never leaves the control of local election officials,” the company’s website states.

    “All U.S. voting systems must provide assurance that they work accurately and reliably as intended under federal U.S. EAC and state certifications and testing requirements. Dominion’s voting systems are certified for the 2020 elections.”

  • FBI Asks Pro-Trump Statistician To Share Findings Into Illegal Ballots
    FBI Asks Pro-Trump Statistician To Share Findings Into Illegal Ballots

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 17:35

    The FBI – which President Trump on Sunday suggested may be ‘involved’ in election fraud – has asked former Trump data chief Matt Braynard to share his findings on possible illegal ballots cast in the 2020 election.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Braynard, who runs the Voter Integrity Project, “The @FBI has proactively and directly requested from me the VIP findings that indicates illegal ballots,” adding “By Tuesday, we will have delivered to the agency all of our data, including names, addresses, phone numbers, etc.”

    Braynard added that “everything I pass on to local/state/fed law enforcement, litigants, legislatures, journalists, etc, is always a copy,” and noted “despite sharing it with individuals from all of those groups, there’s never guarantee of a productive result.”

    According to Braynard, his team has found multiple irregularities in the 2020 – including voters who never requested absentee ballots, potentially uncounted votes, and people registering their addresses at postal annex-type businesses in violation of state laws.

    “I estimate that the number of ballots that were either requested by someone other than the registered Republican or requested and returned but not counted range from 89,397 to 98,801,” said Steven Miller – a Williams College professor who analyzed Braynard’s data, according to Just The News.

    Meanwhile, former Kansas Attorney General Phillip Kline – current director of the Amistad Project of the Thomas More Society and Braynard’s partner in the project, tweeted on Sunday: “After learning that hundreds of thousands of ballots are potentially fraudulent- The FBI has now requested to look at our data.”

    Kline noted that Braynard was contacted by “FBI Special Agent Young Oh of the FBI Los Angeles Field Office,” and that they were fully cooperating.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The notion of Branyard handing over data to the same agency which performed espionage on the 2016 Trump campaign, led by a director which sat on the Hunter Biden laptop evidence of Biden corruption in Ukraine – sitting by while Democrats impeached Trump over asking Ukrainians to investigate exactly that, has many wondering if the agency’s request is intelligence gathering on an opponent, or related to a legitimate investigation into voter fraud.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President Trump on Sunday suggested to Fox News’ Maria Bartiromo that the FBI and Justice Department ‘may be involved.’

    Wouldn’t be the first time…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • NYC Pub Declares Itself "Autonomous Zone" After Government Tries To Shut It Down
    NYC Pub Declares Itself “Autonomous Zone” After Government Tries To Shut It Down

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 17:25

    In what is a hilarious bit of irony for Democrat politicians in New York, a pub that had its liquor license yanked due to Covid rules has now declared itself an “Autonomous Zone” and is continuing to do business.

    The bar, called Mac’s Public House in Staten Island, said publicly: “We refuse to abide by any rules and regulations put forth by the Mayor of NYC and Governor of NY State.”

    They also painted “AUTONOMOUS ZONE” on the sidewalk outside the bar and put signs in the windows claiming “As of November 20, 2020, we hereby declare this establishment an AUTONOMOUS ZONE”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: NY Post

    The pub had its liquor license revoked by the state and was slapped with thousands of dollars in fines after defying New York’s latest move to “orange zone status” (whatever that means) thanks to the very huge brain of “Emmy nominated” Governor Andrew Cuomo. 

    Co-owner Danny Presti told The Post: “At this point, we’re OK with it, because we’re not paying it. [The Sheriff’s Department] is issuing us $1,000 fines, so they keep coming back. We’re still here. We’re not letting them in.”

    Co-owner Keith McAlarney said in a recent YouTube video: “We’re not backing down. You think you scared me by . . . saying I don’t have a license now to serve liquor now? Well guess what? That liquor license is on the wall. If that liquor license is gonna come off the wall, it’s gonna be done by Cuomo. You wanna come down here and pull that license off the wall?” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: NY Post

    He continued: “De Bozo – you want to come down here and pull the license off the wall? Feel free to end up comin’ down, and we’ll end up having a conversation before you even think about stepping foot on my property. I will not back down.”

    On Saturday, the bar was operating without a license, offering booze for free to a small group of customers. The move is try and exploit a loophole in Cuomo’s bill by not actually charging customers. 

    One customer said: “He’s alright, he’s doing the right thing.”

    Another customer – who didn’t pay for his drink and left a $100 tip on a glass of water – said: “I totally support what he is doing. I don’t support the tyrannical nonsense they have in place.” 

    Here is a video update on the bar from the weekend: 

  • If CPI Measured Actual House Prices, Inflation Would Be 3% Right Now
    If CPI Measured Actual House Prices, Inflation Would Be 3% Right Now

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 17:00

    Submitted by Joseph Carson, formerly chief economist at AllianceBernstein

    “Actual” consumer price inflation is rising during the recession. That runs counter to the normal recessionary pattern when the combination of weak demand and excess capacity works to lessen inflationary pressures.

    The main source of faster consumer price inflation is centered in the housing market. The Case-Shiller Home Price Index posted a 7% increase the last year, more than twice the gain of one-year ago.

    The sharp acceleration in house price inflation represents the fastest increase since 2014 and runs counter to the patterns of the past two recessions. During the 2001 recession house price inflation slowed by one-third, while in the Great Financial Recession housing prices posted their largest decline in the post-war period, falling over 12% nationwide.

    The consumer price index (CPI) does not show in house price inflation because it uses a non-market rent index to capture the trends in housing inflation. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) estimates that the non-market rent index has increased 2.5% in the past 12 months, or 450 basis points below the rise in house prices.

    If actual house prices were used in place of rents core CPI would have registered a 3% gain in the past year, nearly twice the reported gain of 1.6%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If aggregate price measures did not exist house prices would be one of the most important measures to gauge inflation and the proper setting of official interest rates. That’s because house price cycles include easy credit/financial conditions, excess demand, and inflation expectations, three key ingredients of inflation cycles.

    Rising consumer price inflation is added to the list of unique features of the 2020 recession. Others include an increase in corporate debt levels instead of debt-liquidation and rising equity prices instead of share price declines.

    If the 2020 recession has economic and financial features that normally appear during economic recovery what does that imply for the next growth cycle? The debt overhang at the corporate and federal debt should impede the next growth cycle. And if the cyclical rise in housing demand is occurring in recession it can’t be repeated during recovery.

    The next economic cycle will be filled with unique tipping points, and no one should assume that policymakers can control or offset them.

  • The 'Smartest Man In The Room' Just Joined Sidney Powell's Team
    The ‘Smartest Man In The Room’ Just Joined Sidney Powell’s Team

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 16:55

    Authored by Andrea Widburg via AmericanThinker.com,

    In her Georgia complaint, Sidney Powell included the declaration of Navid Keshavarz-Nia, an expert witness who stated under oath that there was massive computer fraud in the 2020 election, all of it intended to secure a victory for Joe Biden.  Dr. Kershavarz-Nia’s name may not mean a lot to you, but it’s one of the weightiest names in the world when it comes to sniffing out cyber-security problems.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We know how important Dr. Kershavarz-Nia is because, just two and a half months ago, the New York Times ran one of its Sunday long-form articles about a massive, multi-million-dollar fraud that a talented grifter ran against the American intelligence and military communities.  Dr. Kershavarz-Nia is one of the few people who comes off looking good:

    Navid Keshavarz-Nia, those who worked with him said, “was always the smartest person in the room.” In doing cybersecurity and technical counterintelligence work for the C.I.A., N.S.A. and F.B.I., he had spent decades connecting top-secret dots. After several months of working with Mr. Courtney, he began connecting those dots too. He did not like where they led.

    Not only does Dr. Kershavarz-Nia have an innate intelligence, but he’s also got extraordinary academic and practical skills in cyber-fraud detection and analysis.  The reason we know about his qualifications is that it takes seven paragraphs for him to list them in the declaration he signed to support the Georgia complaint.

    His qualifications include a B.A., M.A., and Ph.D. in various areas of electrical and computer engineering.  In addition, “I have advanced trained from the Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA), Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), National Security Agency (NSA), DHS office of Intelligence & Analysis (I&A) and Massachusetts Institution of Technology (MIT).”

    Professionally, Dr. Kershavarz-Nia has spent his career as a cyber-security engineer.  

    “My experience,” he attests,” spans 35 years performing technical assessment, mathematical modeling, cyber-attack pattern analysis, and security intelligence[.]”  

    I will not belabor the point.  Take it as given that Dr. Kershavarz-Nia may know more about cyber-security than anyone else in America.

    So what does the brilliant Dr. Kershavarz-Nia have to say?  This:

    1. Hammer and Scorecard is real, not a hoax (as Democrats allege), and both are used to manipulate election outcomes.

    2. Dominion, ES&S, Scytl, and Smartmatic are all vulnerable to fraud and vote manipulation — and the mainstream media reported on these vulnerabilities in the past.

    3. Dominion has been used in other countries to “forge election results.”

    4. Dominion’s corporate structure is deliberately confusing to hide relationships with Venezuela, China, and Cuba.

    5. Dominion machines are easily hackable.

    6. Dominion memory cards with cryptographic key access to the systems were stolen in 2019.

    Although he had no access to the machines, Dr. Kershavarz has looked at available data about the election and the vote results.  Based on that information, he concluded

    1. The counts in the disputed states (Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Michigan, Arizona, Nevada, and Georgia) show electronic manipulation.

    2. The simultaneous decision in Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Arizona, Nevada, and Georgia to pretend to halt counting votes was unprecedented and demonstrated a coordinated effort to collude toward desired results.

    3. One to two percent of votes were forged in Biden’s favor.

    4. Optical scanners were set to accept unverified, un-validated ballots.

    5. The scanners failed to keep records for audits, an outcome that must have been deliberately programmed.

    6. The stolen cryptographic key, which applied to all voting systems, was used to alter vote counts.

    7. The favorable votes pouring in after hours for Biden could not be accounted for by a Democrat preference for mailed in ballots.  They demonstrated manipulation.  For example, in Pennsylvania, it was physically impossible to feed 400,000 ballots into the machines within 2–3 hours.

    8. Dominion used Chinese parts, and there’s reason to believe that China, Venezuela, Cuba interfered in the election.

    9. There was a Hammer and Scorecard cyber-attack that altered votes in the battleground states, and then forwarded the results to Scytl servers in Frankfurt, Germany, to avoid detection.

    10. The systems failed to produce any auditable results.

    Based on the above findings, Dr. Keshavarz-Nia concluded with “high confidence that the election 2020 data were altered in all battleground states resulting in a [sic] hundreds of thousands of votes that were cast for President Trump to be transferred [sic] to Vice President Biden.”

    This is going to be tough evidence for Democrats to counter.  Back when the naïve Democrats thought Trump would be the one to commit fraud, they held congressional hearings and wrote articles about the voting machines’ vulnerability.  And with the New York Times touting Dr. Keshavarz-Nia’s brilliance and his ability to sniff out fraud, they’ll struggle to that he’s not a reliable expert.  Things are getting fun.

  • Biden Twists Ankle While Playing With Psychic Dog
    Biden Twists Ankle While Playing With Psychic Dog

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 16:10

    Presumptive President-Elect Joe Biden slipped and twisted his ankle on Saturday while playing with his dog – which, coincidentally, telepathically told a British psychic that the 78-year-old former Vice President would make a “great president.”

    Per Biden’s office, “On Saturday Nov. 28, President-elect Biden slipped while playing with his dog Major, and twisted his ankle.  Out of an abundance of caution, he will be examined this afternoon by an orthopedist.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Biden’s alleged mishap sparked a lively debate on Twitter:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Was this Major’s revenge after Biden went a sniff too far?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 29th November 2020

  • Fragile And Unsustainable Lies
    Fragile And Unsustainable Lies

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/29/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Robert Wright via The American Institute,

    Many times throughout history, policymakers have doubled down on their own mistakes, refusing to believe that they were wrong or hoping that somehow doing the wrong thing twice or thrice would somehow make things right. Then it all came crashing down at once and the rulers lost their minds, and sometimes their necks or heads.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Economic, governance, and social systems often rely on each other in ways not readily discerned by narrow technocrats. When one crumbles, the others fall in rapid succession while all the putative experts express surprise. Look at the way that the U.S.S.R, one of the world’s two “super” powers, fell apart in the late 1980s when it lost enough feathers from its peacock tail in Afghanistan that its lies about the superiority of its command economy became obvious even to its own systematically deluded subjects.

    When NPR proved inadequate to prevent Americans from seeing the few feathers left in America’s peacock tail, as evidenced by the surprise victory of Trump and his MAGA messaging in 2016, mass media joined forces with various “progressive” elements to create a propaganda machine that puts the old clunky Soviet state media to shame. 

    Precisely because it is ostensibly private and domestic, America’s mass media, tarnished as its reputation is becoming, retains more credibility than any state-run media ever possessed. Many pundits have noted how 2020 resembles 1984, except the propaganda so far has come from a political resistance movement backed by parts of the government (FBI, CDC) rather than “the” state per se

    The phalanx of private media and sundry have convinced tens of millions of Americans that: 

    • we are better off imposing lockdowns that cause far more harm than the virus itself (and sundry cognates, like the virus is super serious and novel, spreads easily via asymptomatic people, yet is stopped by irrational policies like curfews, as if people won’t simply start drinking earlier!); 

    • the current president is somehow illegitimate (Russian election interference, Ukrainian quid pro quo); 

    • nation-altering Constitutional reforms are necessary (de facto elimination of the electoral college, creation of additional states, SCOTUS enlargement); 

    • calling all people of Euroamerican descent racist isn’t itself racist;

    • a virus can differentiate between good protests (pro-BLM and pro-Biden) and bad ones (anti-lockdown and pro-Trump);

    • the American people chose a candidate who essentially did not campaign or set forth a coherent policy platform over one who, for all his faults, was president when the economy finally palpably improved and made enough progress in the Middle East to be nominated for a Nobel Peace Prize.

    Most impressive of all has been the way the mass media censored or downplayed Biden’s many weaknesses, his deplorable record on race, his almost half-century of self-serving political machinations, and his family’s dealings with Ukraine and China.

    Thankfully, the Truth always prevails, it is just a matter of when and how. When the real world is heavily involved, Lies quickly die. So many a hubristic tyrant from ancient times to Hitler has fallen in war; many a fiat currency, including confederal Continentals and Confederate graybacks, has evaporated when their nominal value in circulation rapidly outstripped the real value of goods brought to market. 

    The most robust, sustainable Lies cannot even be properly called such because they make no real world predictions at all but instead appeal to emotion and faith, to Revealed Truth. Some have lasted for millennia and though less popular than previously in many places they will surely outlast 2020’s Lies, even though some of those have appealed to faith, oddly in the name of “science,” as in phrases like “follow the science” reminiscent of Sunday sermons beseeching congregants to “follow Scripture.”

    But religion appeals to people’s inner worlds so it can get by on dodgy slogans like “God works in mysterious ways.” The Lies of 2020, by contrast, make real world predictions and no amount of media censorship, irrational analysis, or outright obfuscation can permanently hide the fact that lockdowns impose large net burdens, Trump is no more incompetent or flawed than previous presidents, Constitutional checks and balances need to be strengthened and not dismantled, and Americans/America are no more racist than any other people/country.

    Just as a fiat currency can quickly lose value through the self-interested actions of market participants, so too can lockdowns dissolve. In fact, in both cases governmental attempts to bolster its Lie (that its monetary policies or lockdowns work) will serve to speed the inevitable. If policymakers do not take the “Thanksgiving Rebellion” as a serious warning, they are dumber or more hubristic than even the most pessimistic have claimed. 

    In fact, Americans should use social media, a tool like all tools that can be used for good as well as evil, to pick a time to sing some vintage Twisted Sister in unison to underscore the point: “Oh, we’re not gonna take it anymore! … This is our life … oh You’re so condescending/Your gall is never ending … If that’s your best, your best won’t do. … We’re right … We’re free … We’ll Fight … You’ll see.”

    I practice what I preach and drove 12 hours from Georgia to New Jersey to spend time with my family this Thanksgiving, which as usual is gathering near one of the branches of the Atilis Gym, the owners of which gained fame earlier this year by proving the state’s restrictions on places of exercise was not just wrong but wrongheaded. To this day, not a single case of coronavirus has been linked to the establishment and, in fact, its regular patrons stand (and run, bike, squat, and row) as bulwarks against the spread of the coronavirus.

    What kind of public health system bemoans the fact that 40 percent of the population is so unhealthy that they are at higher risk of developing complications from the coronavirus and then shutters workout facilities (and even at points boardwalks, parks, etc.)? A coercive state that truly cared about its people would have forced them to exercise instead of shuttering gyms, walking paths, and bike trails!

    The longer policymakers allow the pandemic to play out through forced restrictions on natural interaction, the more Americans who will conclude that the public health system and Big Medicine have formed a “complex” akin to the military-industrial and scientific-technical-research complexes that Dwight D. Eisenhower warned Americans about when he left office in 1961, in the wake of another election apparently won with the aid of dead Democrats

    This third complex is not interested in Americans’ health but rather their debility. Its goal is to make people dependent on pills and fancy vaccines (the kind now being tested, not the much easier and cheaper live vaccines that might have provided safe, voluntary herd immunity in a month or two, without lockdowns) and to charge through the nose for them, indirectly through taxes or insurance premia. Indirect billing renders the exorbitant costs easier to hide, but like all Lies with real world implications its effects are fragile and unsustainable as even indirect healthcare expenses become unbearable. That led to dropout (most uninsured Americans rationally opted out of insurance that was too costly relative to the expected benefit) and calls for “reforms,” all of which attempt to force everyone to pay tribute to the healthcare complex.

    The big risk that I see is that some Americans are coming to understand 2020’s Lies much more quickly and clearly than others. There is a chance, therefore, that instead of The People rising up against feckless government tyrants a la Twisted Sister, tensions between the Still Masked and the Unmaskers, which started in March and intensified over the summer, may boil over into violence. That would be lamentable and counterproductive and could cause the deaths of more Americans in a single day than have perished thus far during the entire pandemic. Violence is a contagion to which nobody can become immune.

  • CCP Imposes Tough New 'Social Credit Score' Rules
    CCP Imposes Tough New ‘Social Credit Score’ Rules

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 23:30

    China will consider individuals who seriously endanger people’s health and safety, or disrupt markets’ fair competition and normal social order, as threats to society under its new social credit guidelines.

    State broadcaster CCTV reported that the measures were discussed during a recent meeting of the state council citing a state council meeting led by Premier Li Keqiang, President Xi’s point man for handling the fallout for the coronavirus.

    Among these new punitive measures, China will promote quality development of the credit reporting industry, while encouraging the  sharing of credit information related to finance, government administration and public utilities Speed up orderly use of government-related data Strengthen information security and privacy protection.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The meeting, chaired by Premier Li Keqiang on Wednesday, decided on measures to refine the bad-faith deterrent mechanism to promote the orderly and healthy development of the social credit system.

    The principles include adhering to laws and regulations, protecting rights and interests, taking a prudent and appropriate approach and implementing list-based managemen The scope and procedures of credit information shall be formulated in a science-based way, while those for sharing credit information shall be standardized, the meeting said.

    For those who aren’t familiar with it, Fox News explains that China’s social credit system is a government program being implemented the People’s Republic of China regulate its citizens’ behavior based on a point system.

    Citizens with higher scores have had an easier time getting bank loans, free medical checkups and discounts on heating. Points have been deducted for traffic violations, selling faulty products or defaulting on loan payments. In some cases, people with bad social credit scores have been barred from buying airline or train tickets.

    Other infractions including smoking in non-smoking areas, along with buying – or playing – too many video games, according to various media reports.

  • Inequality And The Gold Standard
    Inequality And The Gold Standard

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by David Howden via The Mises Institute,

    [First published by Mises Canada, December 2013.]

    Imagine that you earn $40,000 a year and your boss doubles you at $80,000 a year. Business was good to you both in 2013, and you received a 25% raise for your efforts. Not bad, and your boss gets to share in this good fortune too with an extra $25,000 (about 30%). You’re going to make $50,000 in 2014 and your boss will pull in $105,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Are you happy with this deal? Probably. But wait, income inequality just increased! Your boss originally outpaced you by 100%, but now his salary is 110% higher than yours.

    To read the brouhaha going around right now, this situation is cause for alarm. Income inequality has increased and despite the fact that everyone is doing better than they once were, one group is doing relatively better.

    What about if we reverse the example, starting from the original salaries? Instead of having a great year, imagine things were very bad and salary cuts are going around. You get a 25% pay cut so that you will now be earning $30,000 a year, and because he has more responsibility about the direction of the business and its lack of success, your boss gets a larger pay cut of $25,000. (This situation is the mirror image of the first example.)

    You are making much less than you did last year. Are you upset about this? Probably. But wait, apparently there is a silver lining. Your boss now “only” makes about 80% more money than you, versus the 100% salary differential that existed last year. Income inequality decreased!

    Apparently you can take solace in knowing that the playing field has been levelled, even if your kids are going to have a tough Christmas morning one year from now.

    This is admittedly a very simple example. What I am trying to show is that the income inequality debate is not as straight forward as it is commonly framed. It is not just a question of one group getting a larger piece of the pie, but of increasing the size of the pie so that everyone can benefit.

    John Cassidy recently entered the melee with a very digestible look at American income inequality over time. In his “six charts” there is some of the same (the top 1% of earners have seen their share of the pie rise rapidly over the past decades) and also some surprises.

    Relying on data from Berkeley economist Emmanuel Saez, Cassidy shares the following graph showing changes in real income growth over the past century.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    First let’s look at the top 1%. There seem to be about three distinct periods their incomes have gone through. The first from 1913 to roughly 1973 is more or less flat. Real incomes for the top 1% were no higher in 1973 than they were around 1930. After 1973 however there is a sharp and mostly uninterrupted spike upwards which seems to stop around the year 2000. After 2000 their real incomes have ebbed and flowed, primarily in response to capital gains and losses on their stock portfolios. Even though the volatility of their income has increased, it still remains quite high relative to any time over the past 100 years.

    Compare this with the bottom 99%. There seem to be about four distinct periods of real income growth. From 1913 until the end of the Great Depression, real income remained more or less constant. The 1940s, 50s and 60s saw a rapid increase in real income growth, far more rapid than what the 1% experienced. This came to a sudden end around 1973 and a stagnation until the early 1990s. Then from 1993 onwards we see the same final stage as the 1%. Increasing real incomes (though much slower than the 1%) but more volatility as well.

    There are many things which are the same in these two trends, but the one year that probably pops out for people who think income inequality is a bad thing is 1973.

    This year marked the end of the steady advance for the 99%’s real income gains and set in motion the rapid advance of the 1%. In other words, the marked income inequality we see today is a product of the post-1973 world.

    So what happened in 1973? Many things as it turns out. Decreased unionization was getting underway in the U.S. economy around this time, as was the spike in the price of oil.

    Russ Roberts over at Café Hayek has a different explanation. He thinks it has to do with changes to the family unit. Large increases in the divorce rate and a steady increase in the number of households headed by women could be to blame for the sudden jump in income inequality.

    Maybe, but although this could be a reason why, I doubt it is the primary reason.

    Let’s try an informal test. What was the biggest event to occur in 1973?

    Americans probably will answer Roe v. Wade, the completion of the World Trade Center as the world’s tallest building or the beginnings of the Watergate hearings. Maybe the start of withdrawal of troops from Vietnam or Britain joining the European Economic Community. Or for sports fans it could be Secretariat winning the Triple Crown and getting immortalized on the cover of Time.

    Actually the most important thing to happen in 1973 actually happened in 1971, August 15th to be exact.

    On that date Richard Nixon closed the gold window. The U.S. dollar was convertible by foreign governments into gold under the then-existing Bretton Woods system at the great price of $35 per ounce. Continued redemption demands by some belligerent countries (primarily France) drained the U.S. of its gold reserves until the breaking point when it became questionable how much longer this could continue for. In what could have been the most important day of the 20th century, Richard Nixon decided to renege on the U.S.’s promises to foreign governments and essentially default on its currency. No longer was the U.S. dollar tied to gold and the U.S. no longer had to worry about spending beyond its means.

    Well, almost no longer. While there was no convertibility into gold after 1971 there was still that old bugaboo of fixity in the exchange rate. The U.S. dollar still functioned on a fixed exchange rate standard relative to gold until 1973, even if there was no convertibility. This meant that the U.S. was still not free to expand its money supply or incur ever increasing budget deficits at will. It had to target a dollar price of gold, which was reset a little higher in 1971 to $38/oz. Even though there was no redeemability, the U.S. was legally obliged to target this gold price, something which tied its hands concerning the extent to which deficits could be run and expansionary of the money supply policies could be pursued.

    The effect on the deficit is easy to understand in light of this.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the late 1880s (and before) the U.S. government ran a somewhat balanced budget. Minor blips appeared during the two World Wars, but by-and-large the deficit hovered very close to the zero line. In the late 1960s we can witness the a growing deficit, partly in response to the cost of the Vietnam War but even that is relatively mild to what would come later. Likewise, 1971 also witnessed a growing deficit but the year which defines the point of no return is clearly 1973. At that point the U.S. deficit went into freefall and besides a few surplus years in the late 1990s it has never recovered.

    The effect was also pronounced on prices.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prices were indeed climbing throughout the 1960s, but 1973 was also the year that set off the most inflationary episode in America´s history. Being unhinged from that relic of gold, the Federal Reserve could increase the money supply and monetize the Federal government’s budget as it wanted. This culminated with 15% annual inflation in 1980 something which took a very strong-minded Federal Reserve chairman by the name of Paul Volker to tame by putting the breaks on money supply growth.

    Inflation looks tame today, though the experience following the 1973 decoupling showed what happens when you let the government spend at will without any restraint. Gold provided restraint, just as political gridlock should today. But in the period of the mid to late 1970s there was no such luck.

    All this takes us back to the original question: why did income inequality increase so much after 1973? We can look to two factors both related to the loss of the gold exchange standard in 1971 and the arrival of flexible exchange rates two years later.

    • First, as the U.S. government no longer had to worry about redeeming U.S. debt held overseas in gold, it was able to spend without restraint. Of course, this created a large budget deficit quickly, something which needed a solution.

    • This brings us to the second point. By monetizing the U.S. budget deficits, the Federal Reserve set off a period of high price inflation.

    The reason why there is growing income inequality since 1973 is a direct result of this monetary mayhem. All this new money needs an entry point into the economy. Someone has to get it first and spend it. When they spend this newly created money they do so at the existing set of prices, but in the course of making these expenditures prices will rise. Those who get the money first “win” in the sense that they get a free lunch – they have a greater income and can spend it before prices rise. Those who get the money last are the “losers” – they get access to this money eventually as it is spent (trickles down?) but by the time that occurs, prices have already risen. They are no better off.

    The 99% that have become relatively poorer over the past 40 years are those who get access to this new money last. (Remember however that these people are still, thankfully, wealthier than they were 40 years ago.)

    Who are the remaining 1%, then? Well, who gets the money first?

    Government officials and contractors, to the extent that they gets the proceeds of all the newly created money are the first and primary beneficiaries. Big banks and financial institutions also win as they are the enablers who help this newly created money enter the economy. Incidentally, 99 times out of 100, when we think of someone in the 1% who is getting ahead of the rest of us, they probably either work for the higher echelons of the government or are involved in the financial industry.

    Coincidence? I doubt it, and you just have to go back in time to 1973 to understand why.

  • Visualizing 50 Years Of Gaming History, By Revenue Stream (1970-2020)
    Visualizing 50 Years Of Gaming History, By Revenue Stream (1970-2020)

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 22:30

    Every year it feels like the gaming industry sees the same stories—record sales, unfathomable market reach, and questions of how much higher the market can go.

    We’re already far past the point of gaming being the biggest earning media sector, with an estimated $165 billion revenue generated in 2020.

    But as Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach illustrates in the infographic below, it’s important to break down shifting growth within the market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Research from Pelham Smithers shows that while the tidal wave of gaming has only continued to swell, the driving factors have shifted over the course of gaming history.

    1970–1983: The Pre-Crash Era

    At first, there was Atari.

    Early prototypes of video games were developed in labs in the 1960s, but it was Atari’s release of Pong in 1972 that helped to kickstart the industry.

    The arcade table-tennis game was a sensation, drawing in consumers eager to play and companies that started to produce their own knock-off versions. Likewise, it was Atari that sold a home console version of Pong in 1975, and eventually its own Atari 2600 home console in 1977, which would become the first console to sell more than a million units.

    In short order, the arcade market began to plateau. After dwindling due to a glut of Pong clones, the release of Space Invaders in 1978 reinvigorated the market.

    Arcade machines started to be installed everywhere, and new franchises like Pac-Man and Donkey Kong drove further growth. By 1982, arcades were already generating more money than both the pop music industry and the box office.

    1985–2000: The Tech Advancement Race

    Unfortunately, the gaming industry grew too quickly to maintain.

    Eager to capitalize on a growing home console market, Atari licensed extremely high budget ports of Pac-Man and a game adaptation of E.T. the Extra Terrestrial. They were rushed to market, released in poor quality, and cost the company millions in returns and more in brand damage.

    As other companies also looked to capitalize on the market, many other poor attempts at games and consoles caused a downturn across the industry. At the same time, personal computers were becoming the new flavor of gaming, especially with the release of the Commodore 64 in 1982.

    It was a sign of what was to define this era of gaming history: a technological race. In the coming years, Nintendo would release the Nintendo Entertainment System (NES) home console in 1985 (released in Japan as the Famicom), prioritizing high quality games and consistent marketing to recapture the wary market.

    On the backs of games like Duck HuntExcitebike, and the introduction of Mario in Super Mario Bros, the massive success of the NES revived the console market.

    Estimated Total Console Sales by Manufacturer (1970-2020)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nintendo looked to continue its dominance in the field, with the release of the Game Boy handheld and the Super Nintendo Entertainment System. At the same time, other competitors stepped in to beat them at their own game.

    In 1988, arcade company Sega entered the fray with the Sega Mega Drive console (released as the Genesis in North America) and then later the Game Gear handheld, putting its marketing emphasis on processing power.

    Electronics maker Sony released the PlayStation in 1994, which used CD-ROMs instead of cartridges to enhance storage capacity for individual games. It became the first console in history to sell more than 100 million units, and the focus on software formats would carry on with the PlayStation 2 (DVDs) and PlayStation 3 (Blu-rays).

    Even Microsoft recognized the importance of gaming on PCs and developed the DirectX API to assist in game programming. That “X” branding would make its way to the company’s entry into the console market, the Xbox.

    2001–Present: The Online Boom

    It was the rise of the internet and mobile, however, that grew the gaming industry from tens of billions to hundreds of billions in revenue.

    A primer was the viability of subscription and freemium services. In 2001, Microsoft launched the Xbox Live online gaming platform for a monthly subscription fee, giving players access to multiplayer matchmaking and voice chat services, quickly becoming a must-have for consumers.

    Meanwhile on PCs, Blizzard was tapping into the Massive Multiplayer Online (MMO) subscription market with the 2004 release of World of Warcraft, which saw a peak of more than 14 million monthly paying subscribers.

    All the while, companies saw a future in mobile gaming that they were struggling to tap into. Nintendo continued to hold onto the handheld market with updated Game Boy consoles, and Nokia and BlackBerry tried their hands at integrating game apps into their phones.

    But it was Apple’s iPhone that solidified the transition of gaming to a mobile platform. The company’s release of the App Store for its smartphones (followed closely by Google’s own store for Android devices) paved the way for app developers to create free, paid, and pay-per-feature games catered to a mass market.

    Now, everyone has their eyes on that growing $85 billion mobile slice of the gaming market, and game companies are starting to heavily consolidate.

    Major Gaming Acquisitions Since 2014

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Console makers like Microsoft and Sony are launching cloud-based subscription services even while they continue to develop new consoles. Meanwhile, Amazon and Google are launching their own services that work on multiple devices, mobile included.

    After seeing the success that games like Pokémon Go had on smartphones—reaching more than $1 billion in yearly revenue—and Grand Theft Auto V’s record breaking haul of $1 billion in just three days, companies are targeting as much of the market as they can.

    And with the proliferation of smartphones, social media games, and streaming services, they’re on the right track. There are more than 2.7 billion gamers worldwide in 2020, and how they choose to spend their money will continue to shape gaming history as we know it.

  • 2021 Would Be A Great Time To Audit The Fed
    2021 Would Be A Great Time To Audit The Fed

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Nick Hankoff via The Mises Institute,

    Gone are the days of the Federal Reserve hiding in the shadows. Now it’s a woke central bank fighting for climate and racial justice. Progressives must not fall for this but instead team up with the populist right to audit the Fed and demand transparency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Let the healing begin! If it is going to be President Joe Biden a couple months from now, then there will be all the more incentive for antiestablishment Democrats to join forces with populist Republicans. What better issue than auditing the Federal Reserve System?

    There is strong precedent for progressives and the populist right to unite around an “Audit the Fed” movement. In early 2009, Congressman Ron Paul introduced the Federal Reserve Transparency Act, which garnered 320 House cosponsors by the summer of 2010.

    Since then, the antiestablishment factions of both parties have grown and at least one of the 2009 House cosponsors now holds a Senate seat. Audit the Fed has passed the House on three occasions, so it could see as much or more success this coming session.

    Another development over the last eleven years is the Fed’s evolving public image. Before Ron Paul’s 2008 presidential run, the central bank lurked in near-total darkness. Two thousand nine was a breakout year for its public relations campaign, and the Fed has failed to return to its prior obscurity. 

    Now the secretive power center larps as a super–social justice warrior, fighting for climate and racial justice, the top pet issues of the progressive left. Many grassroots progressives expressed their distaste for Hillary Clinton and Joe Biden, but even those who held their noses to vote for them shouldn’t feel at all obliged to apologize for the Fed’s virtue signaling.

    Meanwhile, inflationary monetary policy most harms those people and communities whom the progressive left claims to champion. Saving becomes more difficult or impossible, while prices of goods rise.

    All the more reason for the Fed to adopt the likeness of a woke institution. Just as it has blamed “irrational exuberance” for boom-bust cycles, it can now blame systemic racism or climate change for poor economic growth that’s actually fueled by its own monetary policy.

    This week, the Fed officially sought membership in the Network for Greening the Financial System, an assemblage of central banks and other international forces that “support the transition toward a sustainable economy” for the sake of the climate.

    This past summer, Fed chairman Jerome Powell promised to improve “diversity” within the Fed’s structure. Will the new friendlier, kinder, and woker Federal Reserve System win the trust of progressives or irk them for stealing their thunder and undermining their vision?

    Most Americans already don’t trust the Fed, especially Democrats, people forty-nine and under, and those making less than $50,000 a year. Those would be natural progressive constituencies.

    Republicans in the House and Senate, especially if the president is unable to secure a second term, will be in a strong position to take on the Fed. Trump has long criticized the bank and its chairman, whom he picked. Although more recent frustration expressed was over interest rates not being low enough, Trump also supported auditing the Fed during his 2016 campaign.

    Republicans will also likely control the Senate, so any other Fed-related bills that Democrats might propose would have more trouble finding enough votes for passage. Take for instance the Federal Reserve Racial and Economic Equity Act recently introduced by Senators Elizabeth Warren and Kirsten Gillibrand and cosponsored by Bernie Sanders.

    This FRREE Act seeks to “minimize and eliminate racial disparities in employment, wages, wealth, and access to affordable credit.” That amounts to overhauling the Congress’s instructions for the Fed, which have focused the bank’s duties on job creation and price stabilization since 1977.

    Unfortunately, its champions Warren and Sanders have opposed auditing the Fed in the past. It will take a groundswell of grassroots pressure to turn them around, but it can be done.

    Any hope for real political unity that actually benefits the American people depends on the success of projects like Audit the Fed. If populist movements from the left and right can coalesce on this one thing, they will find their time well spent. 

    Even if a President Biden or Trump vetoed the legislation, it would amount to progress in the pursuit of transparency at the Fed. Both the left and right side of grassroots politics could claim a piece of the same victory. That would be a nice turnaround from 2020.

  • Cali Mansion Once Listed For $100 Million Sells For "Only" $48.4 Million
    Cali Mansion Once Listed For $100 Million Sells For “Only” $48.4 Million

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 21:30

    Today in “a look into a luxury real estate market you will never likely participate in” news…

    A famous L.A. mansion called “Opus” that was once listed for $100 million and has been on the market for over three years has finally sold – at a more than 50% haircut.

    The 20,000 square foot mansion sold for $48.4 million this week, furniture included, according to Bloomberg. It is also the latest canary in the luxury real estate coal mine, selling for a large discount during a pandemic which has seen foreign buyers dry up and an exodus from city areas.

    Additionally, as we have noted this year, California is seeing an outflow of residents as poor state management, higher taxes and more government are driving citizens to tax havens like Florida and Texas. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: BBG

    Jonathan Miller, president of appraiser Miller Samuel told Bloomberg of the original price tag: “It was never worth that to begin with. High-end properties are moving, but they’re not moving for prices that are disconnected from the market.”

    The house sports 7 bedrooms and 11 bathrooms, and was custom built by movie producer turned real estate developer (of course) Nile Niami. He first tried to sell the house “with a PR campaign involving a hyper-sexualized video of mostly-naked women in different parts of the house, including one shot of four women slathered in gold paint posing around a golden Lamborghini”.

    When that didn’t work, we guess he ran out of ideas and simply decided to start cutting the price 3 years ago. 

    Niami is currently developing a $500 million private residence called “The One” that has 4 swimming pools, a nightclub and a bowling alley. We can’t prove it, but we’re sure this insanity is somehow Neel Kashkari’s fault. Niami says he won’t budge on the $500 million price tag. 

    Umansky said of the project: “He just won’t listen to the market. If he would just sell and not try to hit a grand slam on every deal, he would be great.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: BBG

    The lack of a bid in general is isolated to speculative luxury homes over $100 million, the article notes (we can’t imagine why). The rest of the real estate market has been showing signs of lack of supply, mirroring demand nationally in places like South Florida, the Hamptons and Greenwich, Connecticut.

    Mauricio Umansky, chief executive officer of the Agency, said: “There’s a big gap between what the owners are willing to sell for and buyers are willing to pay. They didn’t underwrite correctly.”

    While the bid/ask spread on real estate has narrowed, some celebrity real estate sales have seen their prices drop. Lori Loughlin, before heading to jail, sold her Bel Air mansion for almost 50% less than the $35 million she was asking. Ellen DeGeneres and Portia de Rossi also recently sold their home for $33.3 million after it was originally listed at $40 million.

  • The Strangely Unscientific Masking Of America
    The Strangely Unscientific Masking Of America

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Jenin Younes via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    I remember vividly the day, at the tail end of March, when facemasks suddenly became synonymous with morality: either one cared about the lives of others and donned a mask, or one was selfish and refused to do so. The shift occurred virtually overnight. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Only a day or two before, I had associated this attire solely with surgeons and people living in heavily polluted regions. Now, my friends’ favorite pastime during our weekly Zoom sessions was excoriating people for running or socializing without masks in Prospect Park. I was mystified by their certitude that bits of cloth were the only thing standing between us and mass death, particularly when mere weeks prior, the message from medical experts contradicted this new doctrine.

    On February 29, the U.S. surgeon general infamously tweeted:

    “Seriously people – STOP BUYING MASKS. . . They are NOT effective in preventing general public from catching #Coronavirus.”

    Anthony Fauci, the best-known member of the coronavirus task force, advised Americans not to wear masks around this time. 

    Similarly, in the earliest weeks of the pandemic, the CDC maintained that masks should be worn only by individuals who were symptomatic or caring for a sick person, a position that the WHO stood by even longer.

    As rapidly as mask use became a matter of ethics, the issue transformed into a political one, exemplified by an article printed on March 27 in the New York Times, entitled “More Americans Should Probably Wear Masks for Protection.” The piece was heavy on fear-mongering and light on evidence.  While acknowledging that “[t]here is very little data showing that flat surgical masks, in particular, have a protective effect for the general public,” the author went on to argue that they “may be better than nothing,” and cited a couple of studies in which surgical masks ostensibly reduced influenza transmission rates.  

    One report reached its conclusion based on observations of a “dummy head attached to a breathing simulator.”  Another analyzed use of surgical masks on people experiencing at least two symptoms of acute respiratory illness. Incidentally, not one of these studies involved cloth masks or accounted for real-world mask usage (or misusage) among lay people, and none established efficacy of widespread mask-wearing by people not exhibiting symptoms.  There was simply no evidence whatsoever that healthy people ought to wear masks when going about their lives, especially outdoors.  Yet by April, to walk the streets of Brooklyn with one’s nose and mouth exposed evoked the sort of reaction that in February would have been reserved for the appearance of a machine gun.

    In short order, the politicization intensified. President Trump refused to wear a mask relatively early on, so resistance to them was equated with support for him. By the same token, Democratic politicians across the board eagerly adopted the garb; accordingly, all good liberals were wearing masks religiously by the beginning of April. Likewise, left-leaning newspapers such as the New York Times and the Washington Post unequivocally promoted mask-wearing after that March 27 article, with no real analysis or consideration of opposing views and evidence.

    The speed with which mask-wearing among the general public transitioned from unheard of to a moral necessity struck me as suspicious. After all, if the science was as airtight as those around me claimed, surely masks would have been recommended by January or February, not to mention during prior infectious disease outbreaks such as the 2009 swine flu. It seemed unlikely that the scientific proof became incontrovertible sometime between late February and late March, particularly in the absence of any new evidence surfacing during that time period. 

    Perhaps none of this is particularly surprising in this hyper-political era. What is shocking is the scientific community’s participation in subverting evidence that does not comport with the consensus. A prime example is the Institute of Health Metrics Evaluation’s (“IHME”) rather astounding claim, published in the journal Nature-Medicine and echoed in countless articles afterward, that the lives of 130,000 people could be saved with a nationwide mask mandate.  

    As my colleague Phil Magness pointed out in an op-ed in the Wall Street Journal, the IHME model was predicated upon faulty data:  it assumed that 49% of Americans were wearing masks based on a survey conducted between April and June, while claiming that statistic represented the number of Americans wearing masks as of September 21.  In fact, by the summer, around 80% of Americans were regularly wearing them.  (Ironically, had Dr. Fauci and the Surgeon General not bungled the message in March, mask use probably would have reached much higher rates much earlier on).

    This called into question the accuracy of the 130,000 figure, since many more people habitually used masks than the study presumed. 

    Although Magness contacted Nature-Medicine to point out the problem, after stalling for nearly two weeks, the journal declined to address it.  Needless to say, the damage had been done:  newspapers such as the New York Times undoubtedly would fail to correct the error and any retractions certainly would be placed far from the front page, where the initial article touting the IHME figure appeared. Thus, as expected, the unfounded claim that 130,000 lives could be saved with a nationwide mask-mandate continues to be repeated, including by president-elect Joe Biden and National Institutes of Health Director Francis Collins. 

    That the science behind mask-wearing is questionable at best is further exemplified by a letter to the editor written in response to Magness’s article. Dr. Christopher Murray acknowledged that rates of mask-wearing have steadily increased, but then concluded that masks should be used because they are “our first line of defense against the pandemic” and current IHME modeling indicates that “if 95% of U.S. residents were to wear masks when leaving home, we could prevent the deaths of tens of thousands of Americans” because “masks work,” and “much deeper pain is ahead if we refuse to wear them.”  

    None of this accounts for the failure of either Nature-Medicine or the IHME modelers to recognize and correct the error.  Moreover, neither the IHME modelers nor Dr. Murray provide any evidence that masks work. They assume masks are extremely effective at preventing spread of the coronavirus, and then claim that the model is correct for that reason. This sort of circular reasoning is all-too typical of those who so vociferously insist that masks are effective without going to the trouble of substantiating that contention – or differentiating what is likely a modest benefit from mask-wearing in specific indoor locations and around high-risk individuals from the media-driven tendency to depict masks as a silver bullet for stopping the virus in all circumstances. 

    Coverage of a recent mask study conducted in Denmark likewise epitomizes the failure of the scientific community to rigorously engage with results that do not fit the prevailing masks-as-a-panacea narrative. The first randomized and controlled study of its kind, it found an absence of empirical evidence that masks provide protection to people wearing them, although it apparently did not assess whether they prevent infection of those who encounter the wearer.  The report was covered in a New York Times article bearing the patronizing headline, “A New Study Questions Whether Masks Protect Wearers. You Need to Wear Them Anyway.”  

    Noting that the results “conflict with those from a number of other studies,” primarily “laboratory examinations of the particles blocked by materials of various types,” the author remarked that, therefore, this research “is not likely to alter public health recommendations in the United States.” Notably, laboratory examinations, as opposed to the Danish study, do not account for the realities of everyday mask usage by non-medical professionals. 

    The author then quotes Susan Ellenberg, a biostatistician at the University of Pennsylvania, who claims that the study indicates a trend: “‘in the direction of benefit’ even if the results were not statistically significant. ‘Nothing in this study suggests . . . that it is useless to wear a mask,’” according to Dr. Ellenberg. 

    Nor does anything in this study suggest that it is useful to wear a mask, a fact that Dr. Ellenberg (and the headline) conveniently ignores. Furthermore, if a result is statistically insignificant, it should not be used to make the case for any proposition — as even I, a layperson, know.  

    Scientists ought to dispassionately analyze data that contradicts their biases and assumptions, and be open to changing their beliefs accordingly. That the results of the only randomized, controlled study were and continue to be automatically discounted demonstrates that, when it comes to the subject of masks, anything approximating the scientific method has gone out the window. That is all the more evident given the lack of interest that mask proponents have shown in conducting a randomized, controlled study themselves.

    An article in the Los Angeles Times went even further: it twisted the findings of the Danish study to argue, incomprehensibly, that the research demonstrated more mask-wearing is warranted.  The author cited, as supposedly compelling evidence that masks work, the low Covid-19 death rates in Singapore, Vietnam, and Taiwan.  Indeed, according to the latest YouGov poll, administered in mid-November, 83% of Americans now wear masks in public, higher rates than Vietnam (77%) and Taiwan (82%).

    Furthermore, there are other explanations, apart from widespread mask usage, for the remarkably low death rates in these countries.   Some scientists believe that previous exposure to other coronaviruses in these regions may confer partial or total immunity to SARS-CoV-2. Others have speculated that obesity, environment or genetics could be the reason that Europe and the United States have substantially higher death rates than many Asian and African countries; after all, obesity is one of the most significant risk factors for severe illness. 

    To conclude on the basis of low death rates in several countries that masks prevent coronavirus transmission is patently absurd, illogical, and unscientific. A casual observer might also note that coronavirus cases (albeit not necessarily deaths) are rising in many parts of the world, regardless of mask mandates or rates of implementation. While not a controlled experiment, this fact at least ought to be addressed when making such sweeping claims. 

    Ultimately, I do not have the credentials to determine whether or not –or to what extent — masks work. But it is obvious that the issue has become so politicized that mainstream media outlets, politicians, and even scientists seize upon the slightest bit of favorable evidence, dismiss out of hand anything that conflicts with their theory, and most egregiously of all misrepresent the data, to support the conclusion that masks worn by asymptomatic people prevent coronavirus transmission.  

    And masks are only one part of this story: school closures, lockdowns, and social distancing all have been dogmatically embraced as a means of controlling infection. The substantial evidence that these mechanisms are not effective, particularly beyond their duration, has been automatically rejected for too long. This is not science: it is politics, and those within the profession who have refused to examine their confirmation biases, or manipulated the evidence to score political points, are utterly unqualified for the job. 

  • The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity
    The 2021 Liquidity Supernova: Step Aside Fed – US Treasury Will Unleash $1.3 Trillion In Liquidity

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 20:30

    One of the most poignant (and painful to some) lessons of the past decade – especially to contrarian, bearish investors such as Odey and Horseman – is that the Fed can keep print money far longer than any short can remain solvent. And while it was considered in poor taste until earlier this year to admit that the market levitation is entirely due to the Fed’s manipulation of markets- a task best left to fringe, tinfoil wearing blogs – all pretense disappeared after Jerome Powell nationalized the bond market in March, and just last week Morgan Stanley’s chief rates strategist, Matthew Hornbach, admitted that central bank liquidity is the most critical component of rising macro markets: “It both greases the wheels of transactional finance and changes the opportunity set available to investors.”

    It’s also why Morgan Stanley has been especially bullish on markets in 2021: as Hornbach summarized it simply: “When it comes to liquidity, our focus is on both “narrow” and “broad” measures… We expect both types of liquidity to expand in 2021.

    Last Monday we discussed the expansion of the first type of liquidity, namely that provided by central banks. The math was, in a word, staggering: combined, the 8 DM central banks are expected to purchase US$304 billion of securities ($238 billion of which will be government bonds), on average, from private markets every month in 2021 (with the Fed and the ECB naturally doing most of the buying).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putting this number in context, in total these 8 central banks are expected to add liquidity worth 0.7% of annual nominal GDP, on average, every month in 2021. “That is a rapid pace of global liquidity injection, the likes of which we haven’t seen outside of 2020” Hornbach casually inserts.

    What is even more striking is that this may not be enough: as we showed two weeks ago, after the Fed monetized virtually every dollar of net Treasury issuance in 2020, in 2021 Treasury supply will significantly outstrip Fed purchases (and this is even without factoring in the possibility of another major fiscal stimulus).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Said otherwise, while the Treasury faces net Treasury issuance of roughly $2.4 trillion, the Fed is expected to monetize less than half of this total, or $960 billion. Considering that in 2020 under the auspices of “helicopter money” (from which we remind readers there is simply no coming back) the Fed will have monetized virtually every dollar of net issuance, this is a huge cliff and one which could lead to a shock drop in Treasury prices if the market reprices (lower) its expectations for Fed monetizations.

    In other words, the Fed needs to more than double its scheduled monthly QE in 2021 just to catch up to where it was in 2020; and the Fed is hardly alone – in just the past month, the RBA, the BOE and most recently, the Riksbank, all announced expansions to their current QE.

    And here comes the twist, because in what may come as a surprise to some, in 2021 liquidity injections won’t be limited to QE.

    As traders who lived through the reserve squeeze of Sept 2019 recall all too vividly, central bank purchases of securities via QE aren’t the only way liquidity can find its way into markets. In the US, the Treasury can increase liquidity by allowing its cash balance – held at the Federal Reserve – to decline. When Treasury issues debt, it can either spend the money on government mandates or it can keep the money in its checking account at the Fed, known as the Treasury General Account (TGA).

    To be sure, from a liquidity perspective Treasury debt issuance and the subsequent spending does not impact liquidity on net, in general. When Treasury issues debt, banking system reserves decrease. And when Treasury spends the money, banking system reserves increase.

    However, as Hornbach reminds us, 2020 was unique in that Treasury issued lots of debt without spending the money, resulting in over $1.6 trillion in Treasury cash available for deployment at a moment’s notice, yet due to Congress’ inability to reach agreement on a fiscal stimulus, this money was never spent (and may have cost Trump a victory in the election).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a result, the cash balance in the TGA increased dramatically, resulting in a massive liquidity drain; in fact were it not for other sources of liquidity injection – such as the Fed injecting hundreds of billions with monthly periodicity – that may have been a huge problem for markets. In any event, as the chart below shows, despite the Treasury’s liquidity drain reserves increased in 2020 regardless, surpassing a record $5 trillion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what happens in 2021 with all this cash already sloshing around?

    Well, as Hornbach writes, in 2021 the Treasury General Account will experience more volatility due to the debt ceiling deadline, but will initially result in a very large injection of liquidity. The debt ceiling deadline is August 1, 2021. On this date, the US Treasury will not be able to issue any additional debt above and beyond what it needs to cover existing debt obligations. However, what few may be aware of, is that there is a clause written into the law that prohibits the TGA from rising above levels prior to the debt ceiling deadline, which was in 2019.

    This means that based on the 2019 debt ceiling, the Treasury cash will need to be at $200 billion by August 1, 2021. As such, there will be significant T-bill paydowns in 2021 through August in order for Treasury to reduce its cash balance – leading to a massive increase in reserves which is entirely apart from those injected via Fed QE, which continues at a pace of $120 billion per month. With the TGA cash currently at just under $1.5 trillion, it means that the US Treasury will unlock $1.3 trillion in liquidity over the next 8 months, more than doubling the liquidity coming from the Fed over the same time period which will be roughly $1 trillion ($120 x 8 months)!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We hope this massive liquidity injection explains why Biden was so interested in getting a former Fed chair – Janet Yellen – in charge of the Treasury. After all, the amount of liquidity to be injected by the Treasury Department will match, almost dollar for dollar, what Jerome Powell will do in 2021.

    So when will this liquidity impact markets?

    The Fed first announced its QE-driven foray into liquidity provision on Sunday, March 15, and as Morgan Stanley notes, “it took a couple weeks for the liquidity to flow to where it was needed most: the S&P 500 bottomed and the Fed’s broad trade-weighted US dollar index topped on March 23.”

    Since then, the US dollar index has lost 9.4% and the S&P 500 index is up 60%. In addition, US 10y real yields have fallen 100bp while 10y breakeven inflation rates have risen 100bp. In that sense, the injection of liquidity in 2020 has already had an immense impact on markets.

    So how do we know markets will feel the impact again in 2021? In the end, liquidity doesn’t have to find its way around markets if it doesn’t have an incentive. And it certainly doesn’t have to find its way into risky assets.

    As we saw ahead of the US election, US$ 1 trillion found its way into money market funds (MMFs), given the uncertainty of a well-telegraphed risk event. However, according to Hornbach, in 2021, the sheer size of liquidity entering markets will make it hard for investors to keep it sitting in cash accounts, earning next to nothing. And, given virtual guarantees that most central bank policy rates will remain at effective lower bounds (ELBs) in 2021, and many will remain there in 2022 as well, Hornbach concludes that “investors will have a (performance) incentive to move cash into higher yielding assets.”

    In the end, it’s not possible for us to say exactly when the liquidity will impact market prices throughout the year. Still, once the race for returns begins as we enter the new calendar year (the new fiscal year for many investors), we expect liquidity to venture out of its safe-haven cash-cave – just as long as new, unforeseen uncertainties aren’t mounting at the same time.

    Translation: buy everything ahead of an unprecedented dollar devaluation orgy.

  • Watch: CNN Admits There Are "Legal & Constitutional" Ways For Trump To Stay In Office
    Watch: CNN Admits There Are “Legal & Constitutional” Ways For Trump To Stay In Office

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    In a video released before the election but attracting fresh attention, CNN’s Fareed Zakaria explained the “legal and constitutional” case by which President Trump could stay in office even if he loses the election.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a moment of actual journalistic integrity, which is incredibly rare these days for CNN, Zakaria outlined how Trump could retain the presidency “without actually winning the vote.”

    Explaining how the system worked, Zakaria said electors are determined by that state’s popular vote, but that this is “not a constitutional obligation.”

    The host then outlined the exact scenario that happened on election day, with Trump leading on November 3rd but then mail-in ballots swinging the result for Biden, prompting a flurry of challenges and lawsuits.

    “Taking account of the confusion, legislatures decide to choose the electors themselves,” said Zakaria before pointing out that eight out of nine key swing states have Republican legislatures.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “If one or more decide that balloting is chaotic and marked by irregularities, they could send what they regard as the legitimate slate of electors, which would be Republican.”

    Adding to the confusion, Democrats from the same states would also send their electors to Washington, which Zakaria suggested could be “part of the Republican plan.”

    “Because you see when Congress convenes on January 6 to tally the electors’ votes, there would be challenges to the legitimacy of some electors,” explained Zakaria.

    This would prompt Congressional Republicans to argue that disputed states should not be counted, which would ensure Biden’s could not reach 270 electoral college votes.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “At that point, the constitution clearly directs that the House of Representatives vote to determine the presidential election, but it does so with each state casting a single ballot,” said Zakaria, noting that this process would result in the re-election of Donald Trump.

    “Trump doesn’t have to do anything other than accept this outcome, which is constitutional,” concluded Zakaria.

    The video has caused consternation amongst some Biden supporters, who are eagerly pointing out that it was released before the election.

    However, this makes no difference whatsoever. Zakaria’s explanation of how Trump could still win is still in play.

    *  *  *

    New limited edition merch now available! Click here. In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

  • "I Want To Build A World Where Someone Like Me Is Impossible" – Meet The Trust Fund Brats Trying To Destroy Capitalism
    “I Want To Build A World Where Someone Like Me Is Impossible” – Meet The Trust Fund Brats Trying To Destroy Capitalism

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 19:30

    Roughly 18 months have passed since New York Magazine published a cover story declaring that, in the age of President Trump, all the new “it” kids in Brooklyn (we use the term “kids” loosely; most are well into their 30s) are avowed socialists.

    As the reporter explains, the new generation of Brooklyn cool kids have blue check marks on twitter and low-paying editorial jobs at digital magazines like the (now defunct) Outline, Deadspin (a media outlet ostensibly dedicated to sports but realistically covered whatever its reporters and editors felt like writing about on any given day) or Jacobin, a magazine that has been described by some as “straight up Marxist” in its editorial slant. Almost all of them were white women, the most oppressed class.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One year later, a staff uprising at the NYT exposed just how deeply embedded these new crypto-marxist values have become in the modern American media environment. Staffers successfully ousted Opinion Page editor James Bennett over his decision to curate an essay from Republican Sen. Tom Cotton despite the fact that the opinion page is supposed to be an entirely separate editorial entity from the NYT’s newsgathering operation.

    This week, the NYT has published a story about a handful of wealthy heirs who have embraced the socialist credo, and who see their massive piles of inherited wealth as a symbol of shame, not a blessing for which they should be extremely grateful.

    Take 25-year-old Sam Jacobs, for example. Described as “a socialist since college”, he reportedly sees his family’s “‘extreme plutocratic wealth’ as both a moral and economic failure”.

    “I want to build a world where someone like me, a young person who controls tens of millions of dollars, is impossible,” he said.

    Fortunately for Jacobs, his grandfather was one of the founders of Qualcomm, the ubiquitous chipmaker. And even if he gives $30 million away, he’ll still have another $70 million or so coming to him over the course of his lifetime. And what’s more, he’s not alone. As the NYT reports, for all their kvetching about student loans, American millennials will soon become the beneficiaries of what social scientists are calling “the great wealth transfer”: tens of trillions of dollars are expected to pass from the hands of baby boomers to their millennial and Gen X spawn over the coming decade.

    However, most American millennials won’t inherit anything, except for “debt, dim job prospects” and a “figment” of the social safety net (that seems like an exaggeration, especially considering that literally every single American citizen who reaches the required age will receive a monthly check from the federal government, part of a program called “social security”, not to mention medicare/medicaid).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But as both a “trust-fund kid and an anticapitalist”, Jacobs “is in a rare position among leftists fighting against economic inequality”. And he’s hardly along in trying to navigate “what it means to be with the 99%, when you’re the 1%” – embracing the type of reductive, us-vs.-them thinking promoted by Bernie Sanders and his allies.

    30-year-old Rachel Gelman is another example. Her wealthy family gave generously to liberal causes growing up. Now, as a 30-year-old preparing to inherit millions from her parents, Gelman is trying to find a way to give back since most of her family’s money “comes from stocks…which means it comes from underpaying and undervaluing working-class people, and that’s impossible to disconnect from the economic legacies of Indigenous genocide and slavery.”

    Of course, no story about modern day socialism would be complete without a quote from professor Richard Wolff, an “economist” who currently teaches at the New School in Manhattan (an overpriced university dedicated to serving the overprivileged elite who could score high enough on their SATs to get into NYU).

    As Wolff, known to millions of millennials for his guest appearances on the left wing podcast “Chapo Trap House”, explains, all the money being inherited by today’s millennials came from “a mammoth redistribution away from the working masses, creating a super-rich tiny minority at the expense of a fleeting American dream.”

    Later on in the story, one of the heirs whose wealth comes from a chain of strip malls, said the business model just reeks of “intersectional oppression”.

    Heirs whose wealth has come from a specific source sometimes use that history to guide their giving. Pierce Delahunt, a 32-year-old “socialist, anarchist, Marxist, communist or all of the above,” has a trust fund that was financed by their former stepfather’s outlet mall empire. (Mx. Delahunt takes nongendered pronouns.)

    “When I think about outlet malls, I think about intersectional oppression,” Mx. Delahunt said. There’s the originally Indigenous land each mall was built on, plus the low wages paid to retail and food service workers, who are disproportionately people of color, and the carbon emissions of manufacturing and transporting the goods. With that on their mind, Mx. Delahunt gives away $10,000 a month, divided between 50 small organizations, most of which have an anticapitalist mission and in some way tackle the externalities of discount shopping.

    In reality, most of the wealth held by baby boomers wasn’t redistributed, but was in fact created during the 20th century during the post-war economic boom – an economic movement that generated more prosperity, and dragged more people out of poverty, than any earlier period in human history.

  • Glenn Greenwald Opines On Ilhan Omar's Misguided Defense Of John Brennan
    Glenn Greenwald Opines On Ilhan Omar’s Misguided Defense Of John Brennan

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 19:00

    Authored by Glenn Greenwald via greenwald.substack.com

    The right to dissent from, and to work against, the official foreign policy of the U.S. Government is vital: foundational to Constitutional liberties. There is very little such dissent in the U.S. Congress, where many of the core tenets of the Foreign Policy Community (from CIA drone warfare and clandestine coups to steadfast support for Gulf State and Middle East tyrannies as well as Israel) enjoy overwhelming, at times virtually unanimous, bipartisan support.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That is one of the reasons that — as I’ve said repeatedly — I am glad that there are now members of Congress such as Congresswomen Ilhan Omar of Minnesota and Rashida Tlaib of Michigan who so vocally and unflinchingly dissent from this general foreign policy orientation and especially from those policies which most members of Congress either cannot or do not want to denounce.

    Whether or not one agrees with these two lawmakers on every issue, having members of Congress questioning and objecting to highly consequential foreign policies is inherently healthier than full-scale agreement or fear-driven acquiescence. Dissent strengthens all democracies. That is why I have relentlessly defended Congresswoman Omar, even in the face of less-than-ideally-phrased proclamations, from what I regard as bad faith accusations of bigotry and a lack of patriotism (just as I denounced moronic claims that Trump was a “traitor”): bad faith accusations of bigotry or treason are often designed to demonize attempts to question pieties and ostracize those who do it.

    For that very reason, I was quite surprised to see that late Friday night, Congresswoman Omar, in response to something I wrote, defended not only former CIA Director John Brennan — who as Obama’s CIA Director presided over the bombing of numerous countries including Somalia — but also The Logan Act. The Logan Act is nothing more than an unconstitutional attempt to criminalize foreign policy dissidents, like her, and is so dangerous in the hands of the CIA, FBI and federal prosecutors precisely because it lacks any clear definition or meaning.

    Despite this, Congresswoman Omar depicted that ancient statute not as what it is — an impossibly vague and overly broad attempt to criminalize the core Constitutional right to dissent — but instead as some kind of specific, precisely defined, and well-established precedent, the contours of which are clearly established and easily applied. None of that is true.

    This 219-year-old statute is one of the most unconstitutional and dangerous laws in the U.S. Code. Because it has never been used to prosecute anyone, and was only used to obtain an indictment one time in its entire history — back in 1803, against someone who wrote an op-ed criticizing U.S. foreign policy toward France — nobody knows what it actually prescribes or allows because there is no binding judicial precedent interpreting what it means. It is precisely because it has never been used to prosecute anyone that there is no judicial clarity about what it means, and that’s how the U.S. Government wants it (for the same exact reason, the DOJ has never made good on its threats to prosecute any journalist who publishes classified information under the Espionage Act of 1917: they prefer to weaponize the fear of uncertainty regarding the law’s scope and application rather than prosecute journalists under it and thus risk a judicial ruling declaring it unconstitutional or inapplicable to journalists).

    The wildly broad vagueness and lack of clarity is what makes it so dangerous to leave the Logan Act on the books. These are exactly the kinds of ambiguous laws that can serve as an abusive pretext in the hands of the FBI, empowering it to investigate anyone it wants under the rubric of this archaic, ambiguous law. A law can be so vague that it can be unconstitutional for that reason alone: a failure to clearly advise citizens of what is and is not legal violates the right of due process.

    But while all such vague laws are dangerous, the Logan Act is particularly menacing to those who dissent from core U.S. foreign policy and are thus often accused of disloyalty, such as Congresswoman Omar. All members of Congress, but particularly foreign policy dissidents, should be working to repeal this ancient and repressive law, not wielding it as a weapon against adversaries and pretending that it is some highly specific, clear and valid criminal constraint on the conduct and speech of U.S. citizens.

    *  *  *

    The context of the exchange with Congresswoman Omar, and the key role played in it by former Obama CIA Director John Brennan, is necessary to understand Rep. Omar’s point. Far more importantly, this context illustrates the severe, ongoing dangers of allowing this dangerous law to fester on the books.

    On Friday, reports emerged that, just days after Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu met with Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, a key Iranian nuclear scientist was ambushed and murdered by gunmen. U.S. officials told The New York Times that Israel was behind the assassination — which should be unsurprising given that Israel assassinated several senior Iranian nuclear scientists during the Obama years.

    This news provoked indignation from MSNBC’s John Brennan, formerly Obama’s Director of the CIA, an agency heralded worldwide for its righteous opposition to assassinations. Along with condemning the assassination of this Iranian scientist as “a criminal act and highly reckless,” Brennan also used his tweet to send an explicit message to Iranian officials: urging them not to retaliate but instead to wait for the Biden administration to take over, promising the new U.S. administration would “respond against perceived culprits.”

    In other words, Brennan, like many people (including myself), is concerned that the Trump administration and Israel are seeking to escalate tensions with Iran during the transition — either because they seek war with Tehran or, more likely, because they want to provoke a cycle of retaliation that would prevent the incoming Biden administration from re-implementing the Iran Deal which Trump nullified and which Israel vehemently opposes.

    Thus, Brennan sought to subvert what he perceives as the current foreign policy of the U.S. Government — to provoke and punish Iran — by encouraging Iranian officials to ignore the provocation and therefore not derail efforts by the incoming U.S. administration to establish better relations once Biden is inaugurated:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are so many amazing ironies to this Brennan statement. To begin with, it’s just stunning to watch Obama’s Chief Assassin — who presided over a global, years-long, due-process-free campaign of targeted assassinations, under which the official “kill list” of who was to live and who was to die was decreed by Judge, Jury and Executioner Brennan in a secret White House meeting that bore the creepy designation “Terror Tuesdays” — now suddenly posture as some kind of moral crusader against assassinations. I have denounced these Israeli assassinations as terrorism — both in the past and yesterday — but I have also denounced with equal vigor the Obama/Brennan global assassination program.

    The audacity of Brennan’s moral posturing became even more evident as he tried to explain why his and Obama’s assassination program was noble and legal, while the one that resulted in Friday’s killing in Iran was immoral and criminal. After all, this is the same John Brennan who got caught red-handed lying about how many innocent civilians were killed by Obama’s global assassination program, and who even claimed the right to target American citizens for execution by drone without any transparency let alone due process: a right they not only claimed but exercised.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When you’re reduced to sitting on Twitter trying to distinguish your own global assassination program from the one you’re condemning, that is rather potent evidence that you are among the absolute last persons on earth with the moral credibility to denounce anything. That’s particularly true when you directed your unilateral assassination powers onto your own citizens, ending several of their lives.

    But that’s the Trump era in a nutshell: the most bloodthirsty monsters and murderers successfully whitewash their own history of atrocities by deceiving people into believing that none of this was done prior to Trump, and that their flamboyant opposition to Trump — based far more in stylistic distaste for him and loss of their own access than substantive policy objections — absolves them of their own prior, often-worse monstrosities. Call it the David Frum Syndrome.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But to me the most glaring irony — as I pointed out — is how similar is the transition message sent by Brennan on Friday to the Iranians when compared to the one sent by Gen. Michael Flynn to the Russians during the 2016 transition after the Obama administration sanctioned Moscow. The message of both Flynn and Brennan was virtually identical: don’t over-react or excessively retaliate: a new administration will soon take power and wants to work with you, so don’t do anything rash now that could prevent that from happening.

    But the difference is that while Brennan was predictably celebrated for his message to the Iranians, with viral likes and re-tweets, Flynn was criminally investigated by Jim Comey’s FBI for his. After Comey, then the FBI Director, ordered the investigation into Flynn’s ties to Moscow closed at the start of 2017 due to lack of evidence, FBI agents deeply hostile to Trump seized on Flynn’s December, 2016, intercepted phone call with Russian Ambassador Sergey Kislyak — when Flynn was a national security transition official just weeks away from taking over — to continue the criminal investigation on the ground that he may have violated the Logan Act by attempting to subvert current U.S. foreign policy with his message to Moscow not to overreact and instead to wait for the new administration.

    Read the rest of the report here.

  • "Washington Is Exhausted": Swamp Gears Up For Post-Trump Power Orgy
    “Washington Is Exhausted”: Swamp Gears Up For Post-Trump Power Orgy

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 18:30

    Washington elites are breathing a sigh of relief, as power players on both sides of the aisle gear up for ‘business as usual’ following a four-year disruption in swamp-activities – thanks to one Donald J. Trump, whose perhaps prematurely anticipated departure from the Oval Office has the DC establishment licking their chops.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The classic friendly-rivals dinner party will be back, likely bigger than ever, with VIP guests from the Biden administration, a few formers from the Obama crowd, a senator or two seated next to a Supreme Court justice,” according to the Washington Post‘s Roxanne Roberts

    Shoving the Uniparty’s collective excitement in our plebeian faces, Roberts writes in. full. stops. “Washington is exhausted. Washington is optimistic. Washington is desperate for change. The aristocracy of this city is ready to move on, daring to hope that the last four years was a fever that finally broke and life can get back to normal.”

    Poor Washington.

    “Normal, as in a respect for experience and expertise. Normal, as in civility and bipartisan cooperation. Normal, as in not wanting to punch someone in the face,” Roxanne continues.

    And who’s about to usher in this period of ‘bipartisan cooperation’ and controlling one’s violent delights? Joe Biden, of course!

    Biden and wife Jill Biden “know how to get around Washington, how to be a part of the establishment, how to make it work for them in their everyday lives,” says an influential Republican hostess who, like many of the city’s social leaders, spoke on the condition of anonymity to speak frankly without retribution. “People who have always enjoyed the Washington scene are yearning to get back to that, have some semblance of what they enjoyed so much before. There are a lot of Republicans who sat out the Trump years and bit their tongues for four years who are thrilled to have Biden.” At the heart of this optimism is the belief that politicians on both sides of the aisle get more accomplished when they like each other. -WaPo

    And of course, no self-respecting DC power-player can survive without attending establishment soirées, fundraisers, diplomatic corps and ‘historical traditions’ underpinning the ‘business of Washington’ – which Roxanne says needs ‘bipartisanship to really thrive’ after the Trump administration made everything a ‘test of loyalty.’

    “Washington’s elite social world can pivot faster than a prima ballerina,” Roxanne continues – noting that a COVID-19 vaccine and a ‘call for comity’ will allow them to ‘press the reset button and start fresh.

    According to the report, the ‘permanent establishment’ was polarized by a White House that referred to them as the ‘swamp’ or ‘deep state.’ Not anymore, writes Roxanne – who looks forward to DC’s return to its ‘former glory.’

    For the last four years, the tone from the White House was contemptuous of Washington, dismissing the permanent establishment — the longtime politicians and former administration officials who call it home — as the “swamp” or “deep state.” The social arbiters, traditionally respectful of a new administration, quickly found themselves between a Trump and a hard place: To invite or not to invite?

    Back to normal will mean more state dinners, a prestigious and glamorous way of reestablishing global ties. And it means that Washington events traditionally attended by the president and first lady for the better part of five decades — the Honors, the Alfalfa dinner, the Gridiron, the Ford’s Theatre gala and the correspondents’ dinner — will likely return to their former glory. -WaPo

    “The president-elect has a great number of friends who are Republicans that he served with,” says Clinton and Obama administration veteran, Ambassador Capricia Marshall. “And he will be inviting them into the White House because that’s how you get work done: creating those relationships in these social atmospheres, making people feel invited and welcomed.

    Bipartisanship equals money

    Perhaps the biggest relief to Washington insiders from a lack of Trumpian politics will be the restoration of bipartisan fundraising – as “The quickest way to attract money is to have support from both sides of aisle: a Republican and a Democrat prominently displayed at the head table, with the corporate support and underwriting that greases all those wheels.”

    “This idea that we are a democracy, we disagree on a lot, but we come together around certain moments. You may not be happy with who wins, but you understand and recognize the power of it,” says event planner Philip Dufour.

    Capricia Marshall fondly recalls a textbook scene from every movie about corrupt Washington officials, which DC elites have been unable to recreate in Trumpian times:

    I fondly remember Senator [Daniel] Inouye and Senator McCain all getting into these wonderful debates about various issues on the environment and on the economy,” says Marshall. “It was very entertaining to watch. And in the end, they would lift their glass, give each other a toast, a smile, a great laugh and carry on.”

  • A Key Time For Gold
    A Key Time For Gold

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by Sven Henrich via NorthmanTrader.com,

    I wanted to offer some thoughts on Gold on this Thanksgiving weekend as Gold has reached a key price pivot and has seen sizable selling in recent weeks as the rest of the market continues to melt into the stratosphere and speculative bubbles are spreading across asset classes.

    So why not Gold?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are multiple factors at play: The more obvious is that market participants thought Gold to be a safety hedge in an uncertain world and with Covid vaccines being announced weekly that uncertainty is being presumable priced out of the market and the safety hedges unwound.

    Yet Gold has also been presumed to be a central bank currency printing trade as the dollar is being pounded into the ground. That correlation worked all year but has stopped working as both dollar and Gold have been dropping together lately and that has to be concern for Gold longs. If Gold can’t rally with the dollar dropping then when can it rally?

    This is where technicals are coming in and they suggest a key time for Gold.

    Now those that are following our market videos know I’ve been cautious Gold ever since the target got hit in the summer:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The main reason being technical, once targets are reached and charts show negative divergences I’m of the mindset to sit back and wait for new chart patterns to evolve.

    As market video subscribers know I’ve been watching key patterns that could suggest Gold to be buying opportunity here.

    Firstly, the most obvious chart aspect is the support of the 200MA which probably most people are watching, also in context of bullish falling wedge/bull flag that has formed:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note this pattern was challenged late last week, but also note Gold has been following one bullish pattern after another which we identified ahead of time in 2019 ( Gold Going BullGold Bull Part II ).

    So Gold continues to follow bullish patterns, also note Gold is getting oversold, but has room to become more oversold.

    What’s more interesting to me here is how Gold has precisely reached the retrace target zone I’ve been outlining in the market videos since the summer, the .382 fib along with the 2012 bounce highs as support:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That is confluence support and holding this confluence zone would support the notion of this corrective move in Gold off of the weekly negative divergence having the opportunity to build a larger cup and handle pattern which would be tremendously bullish Gold long term for a target north of $3,000.

    I need to outline two caveats here.

    First, note how similar the rip rally in 2020 is to the one of 2011. That period was followed by a steep correction similar to the current one. Gold then chopped up and down in price for 2 years before finally dropping to the 2015 lows. The similarity of the structure certainly leaves room for a similar outcome. One argument to support such a price development is to say that incremental central bank intervention will be diminishing in the years to come. They went all in this year and there are frankly less assets for them to buy, certainly in comparison to the magnitude they bought in the short time period in 2020.

    Second, and this goes to my earlier point: Watch the US dollar:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold should’ve been able to take advantage of the recent dollar weakness, but hasn’t been able to. That’s a concern. Note Gold peaked in the summer near the time when the dollar bottomed. Now the dollar is retesting these lows with a potential falling wedge which could play as bullish pattern and firm as a potential double bottom.

    If Gold can’t rally with a falling dollar how will it cope with a potential rising dollar? As the dollar has yet to show strength it is an academic question at the moment, but it’s something to keep a watchful eye on it as correlations are to be viewed with extreme caution at the moment.

    Let’s not forget: We are inside the largest asset bubble of all time:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Distortions having been created that central bankers are fully aware of, but rarely admit. But when they do one best pay attention:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Distortions brought about by the loosest financial conditions in history:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pedal to the metal risk on. Except in Gold in recent months.

    Bottomline: Gold has continued to follow technicals beautifully and the recent weakness is no surprise to those that have followed the technical chart structures. Now Gold has reached key confluence support and has the opportunity to rally from this support. But the caveats need to be watched and risk managed as we live in times of broad market correlations having been mercilessly raped by central bankers and their policies.

    *  *  *

    For the latest public analysis please visit NorthmanTrader. To subscribe to our market products please visit Services.

  • COVID Antibody Drugs From Regeneron, Eli Lilly Raise Concerns About Supply Shortages
    COVID Antibody Drugs From Regeneron, Eli Lilly Raise Concerns About Supply Shortages

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 17:30

    Powerful drugs recently authorized by the FDA are expected to help patients suffering from the earliest stages of COVID-19 avoid the most severe symptoms. President Donald Trump even once referred to Regeneron’s antibody treatment as a “cure” for the virus.

    But there are still some issues that have yet to be resolved.

    The US, like several other developed nations, has spent hundreds of millions of dollars to secure supplies of Eli Lilly and supplies of the Regeneron.

    Officials are working to establish sites to infuse the medications to patients with mild to moderate disease who had until recently been advised to stay home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Both the Eli Lilly and Regeneron monoclonal antibodies mimic proteins the body normally makes to block the virus from entering cells; they were cleared by the FDA earlier this month. They’re the first drugs authorized specifically for non-hospitalized patients, and are targeted at those at risk of severe symptoms because of older age, obesity and other chronic conditions.

    Experts told Bloomberg that while Trump touted Regeneron’s therapy after receiving it in October, infectious disease doctors noted that the evidence supporting the drugs’ use in Covid-19 is not yet definitive. Yet there’s hope they could help the country battle its worst-ever coronavirus surge, as average daily infections soared to almost 170,000 over the last week. About 90,500 Americans were hospitalized with COVID-19 as of Thursday.

    Coronavirus-beset hospitals around the US are grappling with more infected staff, said Allison Suttle, chief medical officer at Sanford Health, a nonprofit health system based in South Dakota. Treatment that keeps patients from being admitted to overcrowded hospital wards is offering a tantalizing reprieve, she said.

    The US has paid Eli Lilly $375 million to lock in supplies of its antibody medication – the amusingly-named “bamlanivimav”, equivalent to 300,000 vials of the antibody, bamlanivimab, over the next two months. The government has also awarded Regeneron $450 million to make and supply enough doses of its antibody cocktail for another 300,000 patients through the end of January. Both companies intend to scale up supply for the U.S. next year.

  • NY Gym Owner Rips Up $15,000 Lockdown Fine On Live TV: "We Will Not Comply"
    NY Gym Owner Rips Up $15,000 Lockdown Fine On Live TV: “We Will Not Comply”

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 17:00

    Submitted by Rusty Weiss of The Mental Recession,

    Robby Dinero, the owner of Athletes Unleashed gym located in Orchard Park, New York, tore up a $15,000 fine from the Erie County Health Department during a live Fox News interview.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dinero got hit with the extraordinarily hefty fine following a confrontation in which roughly 50 business owners attending a meeting inside the gym refused to allow a pair of sheriffs and a health inspector entry to the building without a warrant.

    “They picked a fight with a Marine and a whole bunch of patriots,” the gym owner said in a separate interview with WBEN, before pointing out that “The Constitution protects those rights.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    New York Gym Owner Rips Up His Fine, Says He Will Not Comply

    Dinero, speaking with Fox anchor Sandra Smith, reiterated that Governor Andrew Cuomo’s lockdown edicts infringe upon his rights.

    The veteran, having pointed out Cuomo’s and Erie County Executive Mark C. Poloncarz six-figure taxpayer-funded salaries, challenged them to look their constituents’ children in the eyes and tell them their parents’ work is not “essential.”

    The lockdown rules, he believes, deny citizens their Constitutional right to earn a living.

    Dinero then ripped up the fine on camera while supporters behind waved American flags and shouted, “We will not comply.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Confrontation With Business Owners and Authorities Goes Viral

    Last week, Dinero held a meeting with business owners inside his gym. He explained that the meeting was a protest of New York’s regulations that have closed gyms, salons, and other businesses deemed nonessential.

    Oddly enough, despite the state’s blind eye to riots under the guise of ‘protests’ over the summer, authorities took issue with this particular peaceful protest. Sheriffs and the health inspector showed up and things escalated as the business owners refused to let them on the property without a proper warrant.

    “Get out! Get out!” they repeatedly yelled.

    As the authorities leave, one protester can be heard shouting, “Take your Commie s*** elsewhere!”

    Cuomo has been regulating everything in his state during the pandemic, from what time New Yorkers can eat in restaurants to what they can eat in restaurants, and on to what people can do in their own home. His constitutional overreach has prompted several sheriffs to refuse to enforce his orders. 

    Cuomo responded by calling any sheriff who refuses to enforce his edicts a “dictator.” He said that without a hint of irony.

  • Saudi King Was Not Informed Of Netanyahu's Visit & Meeting With MbS
    Saudi King Was Not Informed Of Netanyahu’s Visit & Meeting With MbS

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 16:30

    Some fascinating new details have emerged regarding last Sunday’s (11/22) unprecedented visit of Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to Saudi Arabia.

    First to recap, amid widespread reports that the Saudis will be the next Arab country to normalize ties with the Jewish state, after the UAE and Bahrain were the first to do so, Netanyahu met with crown prince Mohammed Bin Salman (MbS) the Saudi city of Neom. It was also in the presence of US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Daily Sabah

    This was reported as a “covert meeting” – also given Riyadh officially denies it took place while it was widely acknowledged in Israeli and international press. The two leaders reportedly discussed joint efforts to counter Iran, an issue which already saw intelligence and operations sharing in places like Syria.

    Reuters on Friday released new bombshell information alleging the whole meeting with Netanyahu was done without the approval or even knowledge of the Saudi head of state, King Salman bin Abdulaziz.

    The Times of Israel also underscored that “Saudi Arabia’s King Salman was reportedly kept out of the loop about Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s secretive trip to the kingdom this week for talks with Crown Prince Mohammed Bin Salman.” And further:

    Quoting a Saudi source and a foreign diplomat in Riyadh, Reuters reported Friday that normalization with Israel appeared off the table as long as the Saudi monarch is alive — an analysis also made Thursday by a senior Israeli source cited by Israeli TV.

    Given the king’s age and increased reported senility, MbS has in recent years acted as de facto head of the kingdom, but it remains an incredibly bold move (the meeting with Israel’s leader) especially given King Salman is said to be against any ‘normalization’ with Israel. 

    And then there’s this incident from thie G-20 the prior week… the video was said to have been intentionally leaked:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “A video was leaked during the G20 summit which showed MbS correcting the confused king’s recollection, a leak which sources said was intentional,” according to Reuters.

    It appears MbS plans to further sideline his father especially when it comes to foreign policy, relying on the ‘poor health’ angle to argue Salman is incapable of making crucial decisions as official head of state.

  • Rare Video Games Are Attracting Top Dollar
    Rare Video Games Are Attracting Top Dollar

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 16:00

    Submitted by Market Crumbs,

    Last month we wrote about the strength in the sports card market and how blue chip sports cards may actually be a better investment than blue chip stocks, at least over the last decade.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Daily Mail says data from PWCC—which manages the largest trading card auction venue in the world, shows the index of the top-performing 500 cards had a return on investment of 216% since 2008 compared to 135% for the S&P 500.

    “The market’s just on fire,” PWCC director of business development Jesse Craig told the DailyMail.com.

    Another corner of the collectors world that is on fire is the market for rare video games. Driven by nostalgia and a flood of money, the last few months has seen record prices paid for video games.

    In July, a copy of Super Mario Bros. brought a winning bid of $114,000 and set a new record for the most ever paid for a video game. The video game, which is the first in the popular Super Mario Bros. series, was one of the first variants produced after Nintendo began sealing the games in shrink-wrap in 1985.

    “The demand for this game was extremely high, and if any lot in the sale could hit a number like that, it was going to be this one,” Heritage Auctions’ Director of Video Games Valarie McLeckie said.

    With just over four months having passed since the copy of Super Mario Bros. set a new record, it was easily topped by a $156,000 winning bid last Friday for a sealed copy of 1990’s Super Mario Bros. 3. Heritage Auctions said 20 bidders were trying to acquire the video game following an opening bid of $62,500.

    This particular game is a rarity for the way the word “Bros.” is printed on the front cover, slightly covering Mario’s famous white glove. This particular cover indicates it’s the earliest version of Super Mario Bros. 3 that was produced.

    “We couldn’t be more pleased about breaking the world record for the second time in the same year,” McLeckie said. “That said, it’s no surprise that another Mario game, which so many of us grew up with, would set the new bar.

    It’s not just Super Mario Bros. games attracting top dollar. A Pokémon “Red Version” for Nintendo’s GameBoy auctioned for $84,000 last week, marking a record price for a Pokémon title and more than four times the pre-sale estimate. At July’s auction, 27 bidders attempted to acquire a copy of Mike Tyson’s Punch-Out!! before it ended up selling for $50,400.

    With virtually every asset soaring in price, who knows which nostalgic item from your childhood will be the next hot collectors item.

  • "This Is No Free Country": Anti-Lockdown Protests Rage In London, Dozens Arrested
    “This Is No Free Country”: Anti-Lockdown Protests Rage In London, Dozens Arrested

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 15:30

    Over 60 protesters were arrested in anti-lockdown demonstrations on Saturday, as activists clashed with police who sought to break it up.

    If only it was a BLM demonstration.

    According to The Guardian, “officers were attempting to disperse the protesters after the Metropolitan police argued the demonstration was unlawful under coronavirus bans on gatherings after the removal of the specific protest exemption.”

    Rights groups, however, believe the protests should be permitted under the “reasonable excuse” law, and called the de-facto ban as “alarming.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Officers faced jeers from demonstrators and chants of “shame on you” and “choose your side” as they sought to end the protest and enter crowds to make arrests, some forcibly. They were also pelted with missiles on at least one occasion, video footage showed.

    The Metropolitan police tweeted: “Officers have made over 60 arrests following groups gathering in London today. These were for a number of different offences, including breaching coronavirus restrictions. We expect this number to rise. We continue to urge people to go home.” –The Guardian

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Please ensure you have access to social media throughout the day, as the rally will need to be reactive to circumstances,” wrote anti-lockdown group StandUpX in a Telegram post. “Bring pots, pans, whistles, party horns and anything you can to be heard,” the post continues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I got pushed about by police for no reason earlier, just cause they’re squashing up anybody that wants to complain. This is no free country,” one protester told Sky News, while another held a sign saying “Your fear leads to losing our liberty.”

    The protest comes weeks after 190 people were arrested on Nov. 5 during another lockdown demonstration.

    According to police spokesman Stuart Bell, “This type of behaviour not only breaks the law, it also risks spreading the virus between multiple areas of the country. It is for this reason that we urge people not to travel into London and this is also why we will be taking appropriate enforcement action if this happens.”

    We assume he’s OK with BLM protests.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “In practice, police are increasingly treating protests as banned,” said Big Brother Watch director Silkie Carlo, who has campaigned for civil liberties during the lockdown. “The incompetence and casual authoritarianism demonstrated by the Met police here is breathtaking. The right to protest is the bedrock of any democracy. It’s clear to me that there’s a deliberate attempt to chill that right and misrepresent the law,” she added.

    “As the government takes unprecedented steps to interfere with our rights, sidelines parliament and attacks the rule of law, undermining protest is another threat to our ability to hold it to account and stand up to power. Protest and dissent are the lifeblood of a healthy democracy, and even more so important in a public emergency,” said Gracie Bradley, interim director of rights group “Liberty.”

  • Moral Decay Leads To Collapse
    Moral Decay Leads To Collapse

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 15:05

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Our national claim of moral superiority is no longer plausible.

    A very strong case can be made that America is now a moral cesspool. Consider just three cases: Jeffrey Epstein, the CEO of Pfizer and JPMorgan Chase.

    Sadly, Epstein is the epitome of America’s elite: getting away with abusing children for years, if not decades; when finally caught a few years ago, escaping with a legal wrist-slap; acquiring a fortune of $200 million without creating any jobs, innovations or value; buying his way into the good graces of Harvard, MIT and a seemingly endless parade of celebrities, politicians, scientists, etc.

    And very par for the course in America’s elite: Epstein’s crimes were known by America’s intelligence and law enforcement agencies, but rather than indict him, they made him an “intelligence asset” that had to protected from exposure to the consequences of the rule of law.

    When some tiny sliver of light was shed on his decades of blatant corruption and exploitation, a sliver that implicated the wealthy and powerful, then Epstein was dispatched in classic Deep State fashion, in a manner that speaks volumes about the banana “republic” nature of America.

    Pfizer’s CEO arranged a massive sale of Pfizer stock and then timed the release of overhyped vaccine data to maximize his private gains.

    Nothing illegal here, just another example of what I call legalized looting.

    JPMorgan Chase manipulated markets to maximize its gains, and its $1 billion fine is just the cost of doing business in a pervasively corrupt society and economy. Nobody ever goes to prison for these billion-dollar skims, scams, frauds amd embezzlements; financial criminals get a get out of jail free card with every crime.

    These three examples are just a few of thousands of examples of insider skimming and gaming the system, abuse of power, fraud, pay-to-play, embezzlement, racketeering and other forms of corruption that enrich the few at the expense of the many.

    Whenever I mention America’s moral decay, somebody is always quick to discount the decay with cliches such as “there’s always been corruption” or “it’s human nature, you’ll never get rid of it.”

    These pathetically flimsy excuses mask the reality that America’s moral decay has reached extremes that eventually trigger collapse in the financial, social and political realms.

    The decay of civic virtue and the social contract is so gradual that only the few who recall specific set-points from previous generations even notice the advancing rot.

    A third of the Roman Senate was killed in combat during the disastrous defeat at Cannae; can we imagine a third of the U.S. Senate putting their own lives at risk? No, we cannot; that level of sacrifice is unthinkable in America today. The protected elites have no real skin in the game. The consequences of their mismanagement fall on the unprotected many.

    Can we imagine the two eldest sons of a present-day political scion volunteering for combat overseas, with one killed in combat and the other severely wounded? (Joe Kennedy, Jr. and John F. Kennedy in World War II.) Such elite sacrifice is unimaginable in today’s America.

    As for the social contract: to saddle young people with highly uncertain prospects with $1.7 trillion in student loan debt would have been unimaginable, If not criminal, two generations ago. Now this ruthless exploitation of students–in essence, punitive debt-serfdom that enriches the wealthiest few who own the student loans–is now the norm. Parasitic elites sucking the powerless dry is now the status quo in America.

    This academic paper (via A.P.) sheds light on the severe consequences of moral decay: Moral Collapse and State Failure: A View From the Past.

    In summary, the authors examined premodern states / empires with an eye on socio-economic systems that generated a social environment which provided real benefits to citizens via a moral code and good government practices.

    (I would include the early Tang and Song dynasties in China of examples of such systems that were not democratic but which offered a judiciary of recourse, investment in infrastructure and other forms of public good, rule of law and social mobility.)

    Yes, elite corruption is ever-present, but good governance requires limiting elite corruption as part of the social contract in which citizens support the state (paying taxes, etc.) because the state provides for the common good.

    The authors point out that citizens expect relatively little of autocracies in the way of public good because the citizenry know the autocracy is a self-serving, corrupt elite. But governments that earned the consent of the governed by providing for the common good are held to a higher standard.

    When the moral code that requires service to the public good decays, the legitimacy of the state collapses. Here is a quote from the paper:

    “Moral failure of the leadership in this social setting brings calamity because the state’s lifeblood–its citizen-produced resource-base–is threatened when there is loss of confidence in the state, which brings in its wake social division, strife, flight, and a reduced motivation to comply with tax obligations.

    In the resulting weakened fiscal economy, services that citizens have come to depend on fail, including public goods and administrative control of corruption.

    To realize and sustain good government is especially difficult owing in large part to the importance of shared moral obligations between citizens and the state.”

    In other words, a strict moral code that requires elites to devote resources and leadership for the public good is the critical foundation of the entire social, economic and political order. When this moral code decays, the state and its elites both lose legitimacy and the consent of the governed.

    Put another way: once the elites have decayed to exploitive, self-serving, profiteering parasites, the public has no interest in supporting the state or its elites. Rather, they will cheer the collapse and ruin of the parasitic elites.

    The explosive rise of elites’ wealth and power in the past few decades has been documented and charted, and I’ve repeatedly posted charts showing that virtually all the real income gains of the past 20 years have flowed to the top 0.1%. This RAND study found that America’s elites siphoned $50 trillion into their own pockets in the past two generations: Trends in Income From 1975 to 2018.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is the chilling summation of America’s terminal moral decay from Moral Collapse and State Failure: A View From the Past:

    “Many citizens perceive that they have little stake in what should be a democratic society.

    Decline in citizen confidence is compounded by a great economic transition in the US, a U-turn over the last five decades in wealth and income inequalities.

    These economic shifts are undergirded by a new ethos and practices that enshrine shareholder value, personal freedom, nepotism, cronyism, the comingling of state and personal resources, and narcissistic aggrandizement in ways rarely seen in the early history of our Republic.”

    Our national claim of moral superiority is no longer plausible: America is a moral cesspool that cannot be drained.

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    A Hacker’s Teleology: Sharing the Wealth of Our Shrinking Planet (Kindle $8.95, print $20, audiobook coming soon) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World
    (Kindle $5, print $10, audiobook) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($5 (Kindle), $10 (print), ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF).

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    Become a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 28th November 2020

  • What A Biden Administration Means For Border Security
    What A Biden Administration Means For Border Security

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/28/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Chris Farrell via The Gatestone Institute,

    A Biden administration means two dramatic and dangerous reversals on Trump policies that will endanger the American public: 1. Termination of President Trump’s signature 2016 campaign issue — The Wall; and 2. Loosening of immigration restrictions.

    “There will not be another foot of wall constructed on my administration, No. 1,” Biden told National Public Radio earlier this year.

    “I’m going to make sure that we have border protection, but it’s going to be based on making sure that we use high-tech capacity to deal with it.”

    Biden is not really promising any border protection at all. It sounds good, but it is a hollow falsehood. Most of the American public does not know about or has forgotten the $30 billion dollar disaster known as “SBInet.” We have been down this “high-tech virtual wall” road before. The only winners were defense contractors. The virtual wall does nothing to deter or prevent unlawful entry across the border. It merely provides surveillance and recording of the illegal activity. Thousands of hours of video recordings of such crossings are available on the internet right now. Technology contractors are encouraged that a Biden administration would like to continue watching and recording millions of people entering the country illegally.

    The Americans paying the very high price for Biden/Harris reckless open borders policy are in border communities. Biden’s reversals spell doom for overloaded (and closed) hospitals, schools, public housing, and courts. Remember: Biden (and the rest of the Democratic presidential field) promised free healthcare to all illegal aliens.

    Biden will reverse Trump policies and rules governing legal immigration. He will — no doubt — cancel Trump’s so-called “Muslim ban” that barred immigrants from certain countries and curtailed legal immigration, including restrictions on asylum claims.

    Biden has a long public record, so you will not be surprised to learn that a few years ago he was proudly in favor of building 700 miles of border fence. Biden had a border hawk position back on November 27, 2006 at a Q&A with a Columbia, SC Rotary Club meeting. Notably, Biden has faced criticism for his past track record on immigration issues. Obama/Biden deported 3 million illegal aliens. The Trump administration deported fewer than 1 million over the last 3+ years.

    Court battles will continue, of course. Some Trump administration initiatives are still working their way through the judicial process. Biden has committed to restoring the Obama-era Deferred Action for Childhood Arrivals (DACA) program, which gives deportation relief and work permits to those brought illegally to the U.S. as children. Please remember, many of those “children” are now in their early 30s. The Trump administration tried to end the program, but that effort was blocked by the Supreme Court.

    Biden has also glommed onto the “Comprehensive Immigration Reform” mantra, and vowed to initiate a complete system overhaul not accomplished since Reagan’s well-intentioned error of 1986. While making that pledge, Biden disavowed workplace enforcement raids and sees no reason why illegal aliens cannot immediately begin receiving public assistance from taxpaying Americans.

    Setting aside big national policy considerations, let us focus again on the border communities and the Americans directly at risk. Almost seven years into a Judicial Watch investigation dealing with Mexican Cartel penetration of federal, state and municipal law enforcement organizations in the El Paso, Texas region, we uncovered facts that resulted in the Department of Justice Inspector General taking direct action. Corrupt law enforcement officials at the federal, state and municipal level were removed. Other corrupt officials were effectively “neutralized” through exposure and pressure, even if they were not publicly acted against criminally or administratively. We also uncovered and exposed an El Paso-based narco-terror ring headed by Al Qaeda’s director of operations for North America, Adnan El Shukrijuma (deceased), targeting Chicago landmarks. A 48-minute documentary explaining the plot, “The Sun City Cell,” can be found on YouTube.

    What are Americans in El Paso, Texas, Nogales, Arizona, and San Diego, California concerned about with respect to Biden administration border security? Over the past two weeks, in emails and phone interviews, border residents provided the following observations:

    • “Whenever Obama was in there, drug cartels were so bad that it didn’t seem like anybody was fighting the drug cartels… the cartels ruled everything. They ran the dope, they trafficked the young girls, and there were so many more killings.”

    • “Trump had more Customs and Border Patrol agents at the border. Cattle crossings from Mexico were checked, inspected and limited. The cartels have used cattle to move dope for years. Now they’ll go back to moving cattle and laundering money back through the crossing here [Santa Teresa, NM] with less law enforcement. It will be a serious step backwards.”

    • What happens when the next ‘caravan’ from Honduras and Guatemala shows up? Does everyone gain immediate access to the country and get free healthcare, no questions asked? That’s what they promised. They show crying women and children on the news, but that is a tiny percentage of the people in the ‘caravans’ — they are almost all young men — but the media lies about that and doesn’t show the real story. God, help us!”

    U.S. Customs Service Officer Patricia Cramer, president of the Arizona chapter of the National Treasury Employees Union, revealed in an interview that persons crossing into the United States from Mexico are not health-screened in any way. No temperature taken, no cursory visual exam, nothing. The “locked-down border” under President Trump is a lie. Now, imagine the health and safety conditions under a Biden administration. Remember: In “COVID-world,” you cannot go to the gym, and you must “social distance” in absurd ways — but the border is open, and no one is screened.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The (purportedly incoming) Biden administration is promoting a 4 to 6 week national lockdown. The country is in the midst of an “Alice in Wonderland” public health crisis — and the Biden administration is promoting border security and immigration policies that are completely contradictory to what American citizens are enduring.

    Is this what we all have to look forward to over the next four years?

  • How US Presidents Rank For Clemency
    How US Presidents Rank For Clemency

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 23:30

    President Trump has granted a pardon to his former national security advisor Michael Flynn in a rare act of clemency. Flynn pleaded guilty to lying to the FBI about contacts with Russian officials and he was fired after just 23 days on the job.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, despite the media uproar over Trump’s actions with Flynn, Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes that throughout his time in the White House, Trump has used pardons, commutations and other forms of leniency less frequently than other presidents, particularly his direct predecessor.

    Infographic: How U.S. Presidents Rank For Clemency | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As one of the final acts of his eight years in office, President Obama announced that he was commuting the sentences of 330 prisoners, most of whom had been serving time for minor drug offences. Just before his second term ended, the White House announced that Obama had granted more commutations than any president in U.S. history.

    In terms of total executive clemency actions, Obama granted the most since Harry S. Truman, according to Department of Justice data published by the Pew Research Center. He primarily focused on commutations, orders that cut somebody’s prison sentence short. These are different to pardons, which are usually granted after a person has served their time, a forgiveness gesture which also restores somebody’s rights (which a commutation does not do).

  • 10 Hypocritical Dems Who Prattle On About Masks & Lockdowns But Personally Act Like They're All BS
    10 Hypocritical Dems Who Prattle On About Masks & Lockdowns But Personally Act Like They're All BS

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by Victoria Taft via PJMedia.com,

    There are our betters who ignore the COVID rules and then there are the rest of us.

    We’re the people like the Georgia shopper in the tweet below who got hassled at Costco because his son wasn’t wearing a mask. To be clear, the Costco member was wearing a mask but grew upset when store management threatened to toss him out over his kid. The next thing you know, two unmasked police officers were handcuffing the masked father and taking him into custody.

    Yeah, we’re that guy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Two standards, no waiting. Unless it’s for toilet paper, Postmates deliveries, or for schools to finally open.

    Democrats publicly applaud mask mandates (U.S. Senate Democrats), losses of freedom (Gretchen Whitmer, Gavin Newsom, Chris Cuomo), and cutting off power to your house for having a party (Eric Garcetti). They take pleasure in virtue-signaling to the public about wearing masks, distancing, and not commingling for meals, yet don’t actually follow their own advice when they believe the cameras are off.

    Stay separated, they say. Don’t sing or “exert” yourself with others!  But these scolds give away the game when they do nothing and say nothing about antifa and Black Lives Matter screaming, chanting, rioting, looting, and burning things down.

    Rules for thee but not for me.

    With this in mind, we begin our list of Ten Hypocrite Democrats Who Prattle on About Masks and Lockdowns But Personally Think They’re BS with:

    1. NYC Mayor Bill De Blasio

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The New York City dictator has presided over the hollowing out of the City That Never Sleeps with his onerous, hypocritical rules. He ordered people not to take anything but essential walks, whatever that means, and closed down the gyms to deny his lockdown victims convenient places to stay strong and healthy. He’s closed schools and sports parks. Yet, and you know where this is going, he took walks with his wife and ordered his own gym to let him in. This while he’s used police to stop large gatherings – not of rioters and protesters – of Jewish children and families. He’s done little to curb violent protests. He has encouraged unrest, in fact, by directing protesters to his hand-painted target. He’s stoked riots at which his daughter has been arrested.

    In this rogue’s gallery, Bill de Blasio is the absolute worst.

    2. California Governor Gavin Newsom

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The dinner party photos above gave away the game for California Governor Mask-Between-Bites.

    Stay distant, mask between bites, masks inside and outside, no more than three households at the table, stay six feet apart, eat outside, went Gavin Newsom’s ceaseless Thanksgiving and other coronavirus diktats. He even had rules for your outdoor tents. The governor, who sits by idly while petulant teachers’ union bosses keep kids at home on Zoom classes, has his own children in in-person classes in private school. His own business remains open, despite his closure of other wineries for a time.

    His hypocrisies are almost as long as his list of Dolores Umbrage-like Hogwarts ‘decrees.” There’s little to no criticism of his rules and no demand for the underlying science that supposedly supports them. The Santa Anas blow, but Governor Hair Gel demands you wear a mask outside. Reporters, who want to date him, nod their agreement like the bobbleheads they are.

    3. House Speaker Nancy Pelosi

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    San Francisco’s hair salons were closed, but House Speaker Nancy Pelosi got herself a private, black-market blow-out in San Francisco and it was all done without a mask. Later, the stiletto-wearing octogenarian blamed the salon owner for setting her up

    The Democrat House Leader, who went to Chinatown to record a video urging everyone to come on down when the Wuhan virus was taking hold, now has professionally handmade and coordinated face masks for her designer suits. And you should too.

    4. Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Beetlejuice doppelgänger pulled a Pelosi and got her hair done during her imposed salon shutdown because, she sniffed, she’s too important to look bad. She is so important, as a matter of fact, that she symbolically repealed her own ban on large gatherings to go to a Joe Biden rally, which, it is widely believed, dwarfed any gathering he had during his actual basement campaign.

    5. CNN Host Chris Cuomo

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s likely that most of what you know about Governor Andrew Cuomo’s kid brother, Fredo, is what you see on Fox News. Chris Cuomo is the whole hypocritical package. Like many New Yorkers, he got coronavirus. CNN made a literal show of his quarantine.  Cuomo hosted his program from the basement of his estate and held forth with withering criticism of people who didn’t quarantine, wear masks or conduct their lives to his exacting standards. Then we found out that in his off time, he was out looking for houses with his wife. And at his other abode in Manhattan, he wasn’t wearing a mask.

    This Cuomo doesn’t hand down diktats like his brother, Governor Nipple Ring, but picks targets, such as people who act as he does, on live TV giving his viewers the green light to go after them.

    6. Michigan Governor Gretchen Whitmer

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Michigan governor has been so dictatorial in her response to coronavirus that an impeachment effort has been launched against her. Her diktats included banning the sale of garden seeds and ordering people not to get in their boats and escape to their second homes, which is exactly what her husband understandably tried to do to escape his dictator-wife’s rules. Whitmer brushed off her husband’s planned Memorial Day escape in their boat as him simply joking around. No one was amused.

    7. Oregon Governor Kate Brown

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Oregon’s machine politician has at one point of the coronavirus shutdown pulled every political lever to keep the state locked down. She’s closed struggling stores, sicced the cops on Thanksgiving revelers, closed every house of worship, and called every Trump supporter racist and a white supremacist (no, it doesn’t matter if you’re a person of color, you’re a white supremacist). And at the same time she dictated there be no large gatherings for the law-abiding, she not only failed to even attempt to stop weeks-long widespread rioting by her antifa and Black Lives Matter allies in Portland, but filed a lawsuit against the Trump administration to try to stop the president from doing it. She is the poster child of hypocrisy.

    For her Thanksgiving messages, she urged people to “uninvite” loved ones and on Thanksgiving Day posted a list of elderly people who died with coronavirus.

    8. New York Governor Andrew Cuomo

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Behold Governor Andrew Cuomo. Though he’s not the biggest hypocrite in the bunch, he is the most rewarded hypocrite in the bunch. The New York governor is the author of a book about his noble and near-single-handed crusade to close schools and put grannies in coronavirus-infected nursing homes. Fortunately for him, Cuomo’s self-adulating COVID news conferences, featuring his unhinged rants and crazed bravado, have been noticed by the International Emmy awards people, who rewarded Governor Nipple Ring with one of the ersatz metal statues.

    As the New York Post notes, Cuomo sure talks a lot about masks! masks! masks! but doesn’t actually wear them much, except in his Twitter avatar and photo ops.

    9. D.C. Mayor Muriel Bowser

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Where to start. The woman who holds news conferences in a mask so you can barely understand what she’s saying has undertaken coronavirus diktats with the seriousness of an East German guard. She lets her pet protesters and rioters loot, terrorize, intimidate and burn things down. She recently broke her own rules and took a trip to Delaware for a Joe Biden rally. The woman who wants to put Bobby Beltway in quarantine for going to Grandma’s called her trip “essential.” But yours isn’t.

    10. Tie Governor Ralph Northam, Denver Mayor Michael Hancock

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Governor Sheets Blackface issued forth a directive to the masses to wear their masks and then “forgot to bring” his to the Virginia coast. He did selfies with constituents without a mask. Of all the people to forget a mask, it was the man who notoriously donned one in medical school photos and dressed in blackface.

    And 30 minutes before he boarded a plane to see his family for Thanksgiving, Mayor Michael Hancock urged Denver residents not to travel because, you know, COVID and stuff.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hypocrisy is what’s for dinner this Thanksgiving. Eat up, there’s plenty to go around.

    *  *  *

    Victoria Taft is the host of “The Adult in the Room Podcast With Victoria Taft” where you can hear her series on “Antifa Versus Mike Strickland.” Find it  here.  Follow her on Facebook,  TwitterParlerMeWeMinds @VictoriaTaft 

  • This Is How Much Space $300,000 Buys In Cities Around The World
    This Is How Much Space $300,000 Buys In Cities Around The World

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 22:30

    The bull market in hot urban retail and commercial real estate markets lasted for pretty much the entire post-crisis recovery period. But COVID has turned things around, and as people flee to the suburbs, it’s worth taking a look at how valuations have declined.

    While urban real-estate markets have taken a hit as people flee to the suburbs and more space, it’s worth taking a look at how much space costs in different cities around the world. While foreign cities are of course cheaper than the top American metropolises, the numbers in some cases might surprise you.

     

    The median American home price, which is roughly $300,000, can buy a whopping 2,100 square feet in Houston, and nearly 1.5x that in Johannesburg. But in San Francisco and Singapore, that number buys just 300 square feet.

    • The median U.S. home price, $300,000, buys almost 5,000 square feet in Delhi, but only 144 square feet in Hong Kong.
    • Looking at the two extremes in America, homebuyers in Houston could get seven times more space compared to their fellow house-hunters in San Francisco.
    • In Canada, Ottawa offers the most space for $300,000, while Lisbon, Portugal would be a buyer’s best bet of all the European cities included in the analysis.

    Hong Kong’s infamously tiny apartments are probably not the ideal place for riding out a pandemic. But that’s why the city’s real estate market has taken such a hit (well, at least that’s one reason).

    In the US, Houston appears to be the city that offers the best value, as buyers get the highest ratio of square footage per dollar. With the added bonus of living in one of America’s largest and most economically vital cities.

     

    As the formerly city-loving millennial generation sets its sights on the suburbs, and young adults who have fallen on hard times move back in with their middle-class parents, is it possible that cities like NYC could see the economic progress of the last 30 years slip away? Crime is already rising at an alarming rate, and not only in New York.

  • We Haven't Seen This Much Suffering On Thanksgiving Since The Great Depression
    We Haven't Seen This Much Suffering On Thanksgiving Since The Great Depression

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    In my entire lifetime, there has never been a Thanksgiving like this.  39 million Americans don’t have enough to eat right now, more than 70 million claims for unemployment benefits have been filed so far during this calendar year, and people are waiting in line for hours at food banks all over the nation just for some Thanksgiving handouts.  If you and your family have plenty of turkey to eat, you should be very thankful, because many Americans can no longer even take Thanksgiving dinner for granted these days. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Tuesday, vehicles were lined up for hours in New Jersey as people waited to receive prepackaged Thanksgiving meals at a local food bank…

    Video obtained by CNN on Tuesday from the Meadowlands entertainment complex in New Jersey showed residents waiting for several hours to obtain prepackaged boxes of meals for the Thanksgiving holiday.

    “If it wasn’t for this place, we wouldn’t know where we would get our food,” one distraught woman told CNN of the food bank in East Rutherford, N.J.

    Of course we have been seeing similar wait times all over the nation.  At one food bank in Texas, demand for Thanksgiving meals was more than eight times higher than normal

    Food bank officials in Dallas, Texas, have also noticed a staggering increase in demand for food assistance. North Texas Food Bank representatives told the Dallas Morning News that they handed out roughly 8,500 meals to local families during a giveaway on Saturday that in years past has seen fewer than 1,000 show up for donations.

    You can see a stunning photograph of vehicles lined up for that food distribution event right here.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are a lot of really nice vehicles in that picture.  Many of those individuals are probably accustomed to living comfortable middle class lifestyles, but just like I warned in my new book they are “suddenly” in need of food because this economic downturn has turned their worlds completely upside down.

    Yes, there have always been hungry people in America, but what we are witnessing now is hard to fathom.  According to the U.S. Census Bureau, approximately 12 percent of all Americans did not have enough food to eat between October 28th and November 9th…

    As the coronavirus pandemic continues to surge, more Americans are reporting going hungry, a Washington Post analysis found.

    In data collected by the Census Bureau between Oct. 28 and Nov. 9, around 12 percent of all American adults reported not having enough food to eat, a figure higher than at any other point since the pandemic began earlier this year.

    It is estimated that the current population of the United States is 328 million.

    If you take 12 percent of 328 million, you get more than 39 million Americans that are going hungry right now.

    And this is just the beginning.  Thanks to the new lockdowns that are being instituted all over the country, the number of Americans that are filing for unemployment benefits is starting to rise again

    The number of Americans applying for unemployment benefits rose last week to 778,000, evidence that the U.S. economy and job market remain under strain as coronavirus cases surge and colder weather heighten the risks.

    The Labor Department’s report Wednesday said jobless claims climbed from 748,000 the week before. Before the virus struck hard in mid-March, weekly claims typically amounted to roughly 225,000.

    Overall, more than 70 million new claims for unemployment benefits have been filed in 2020.

    As I discussed yesterday, we have never seen anything like this before in all of U.S. history.

    At this point, even Hollywood is conducting mass layoffs.  More job loss announcements just keep rolling in with each passing day, and I expect that to continue all throughout the very dark winter ahead.

    Other economic numbers also tell us that the U.S. economy is definitely heading in the wrong direction

    The data firm Womply says that 21% of small businesses were shuttered at the start of this month, reflecting a steady increase from June’s 16% rate. Consumer spending at local businesses is down 27% this month from a year ago, marking a deterioration from a 20% year-over-year drop in October, Womply found.

    If you think that anyone is going to be able to wave a magic wand and fix this mess, you are just being delusional.

    There are millions upon millions of Americans that have already been pushed to the breaking point by this pandemic.  One of those individuals is a 38-year-old California resident named Andrew Lee

    “I’ve exhausted all of my unemployment benefits. I’ve had to resort to food stamps and [California’s Medicaid program] for the first time in my life. I’m backdated on my rent and my credit has been ruined,” said 38-year-old Andrew Lee, who lives in a suburb of Los Angeles with his wife and two children.

    Lee lost his job as a business development director several months before the pandemic. But once it hit, it became that much harder to find work. And he didn’t initially qualify for any pandemic-related unemployment benefits.

    His car has been repossessed and his wife’s car has also been repossessed.

    So even if they could find jobs, how are they supposed to get to work?

    Lee is just like so many other hurting Americans.  First he ran through all of his savings, and then he started relying on his credit cards.

    Now that his unemployment benefits have been exhausted, he is out of options, and his family is a step or two from becoming homeless.

    In the months ahead, tens of millions of others will find themselves facing similar scenarios.

    This is what an economic collapse looks like.  The United States hasn’t had to face anything like this since the Great Depression of the 1930s, and what we have experienced so far is just the start.

    In 2019, I received quite a bit of criticism because the economy was relatively stable and to many people it seemed like an “economic collapse” was not even remotely a possibility.

    But now an economic collapse has officially arrived, and all of the things that I have been warning about are starting to happen one right after the other.

    The “perfect storm” is upon us, and most Americans still do not understand the horrors that lie ahead.

    *  *  *

    Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

  • Russia Warns US It Will "Respond" To Future Border Violations In Sea Of Japan
    Russia Warns US It Will "Respond" To Future Border Violations In Sea Of Japan

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 21:30

    Russia’s foreign ministry said Friday that it’s lodged a formal protest with the United States over this week’s incident in the Sea of Japan, calling it a “provocation designed to disturb the peace”

    Russia further said Friday it’s military won’t hesitate to “respond” the next time the US Navy brazenly violates its maritime borders. During the Tuesday encounter a Russian warship was described as chasing the US destroyer out of the area.

    “We warn the US not to repeat the violation. We reserve the right to respond in the future,” a foreign ministry statement said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer USS John S. McCain. Source: US Navy

    The incident happened Tuesday and involved a Russian destroyer threatening to ram the USS John S McCain warship which the Kremlin alleged violated sovereign Russian waters by up to 2km:

    According to the Russian defense ministry, its Pacific Fleet destroyer the Admiral Vinogradov used an international communications channel to warn the US ship about “the possibility of using ramming to get the intruder out of the territorial waters”.

    “The Russian Federation’s statement about this mission is false,” said a spokesman for the US Navy’s 7th Fleet, Lt Joe Keiley. “USS John S McCain was not ‘expelled’ from any nation’s territory.”

    It’s essentially a matter of the border not being recognized by the United States.

    The US Navy early this week had responded bluntly: “By conducting this operation, the United States demonstrated that these waters are not Russia’s territorial sea and that the United States does not acquiesce in Russia’s claim that Peter the Great is a ‘historic bay’ under international law.”

    The US 7th Fleet confirmed it was “approached aggressively” by the Russian ship and condemned the provocative behavior.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s how the US 7th Fleet framed the question of the maritime border dispute in its formal response to the Russian charge:

    In 1984, the U.S.S.R declared a system of straight baselines along its coasts, including a straight baseline enclosing Peter the Great Bay as claimed internal waters. This 106-nautical mile (nm) closing line is inconsistent with the rules of international law as reflected in the Law of the Sea Convention to enclose the waters of a bay. By drawing this closing line, the U.S.S.R. attempted to claim more internal waters – and territorial sea farther from shore – than it is entitled to claim under international law. Russia has continued the U.S.S.R. claim.

    While it’s not the first time an intercept incident has occurred in disputed waters in the Sea of Japan, this latest certainly marks a severe escalation given the rare Russian direct threat of ramming.

  • Are Students Liberal? Yes – But Not Everywhere
    Are Students Liberal? Yes – But Not Everywhere

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 21:00

    Submitted by RealClearEducation, authored by Samuel Abrams, professor of politics at Sarah Lawrence College and a visiting scholar at the American Enterprise Institute.

    This article is part of a series of opinion essays on the topic of free speech on campus, coinciding with the launch of the 2020 College Free Speech Rankings

    When it comes to making news about protests and action for liberal causes, schools in New England seem to dominate the news. We’ve seen violence and protests surrounding visits from Charles Murray and Ryszard Legutko at Middlebury College. Brown University spent hundreds of millions of dollars in response to student protests related to questions of diversity and inclusion. Yale has seen numerous protests and student arrests and students there attacked and harassed a faculty couple who headed a residential college in 2015 claiming that they felt unsafe because of an email message about Halloween costumes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While protests in other parts of the county do make news, such as the recent troubles relating to the police at Northwestern, it appears that students in New England are far more likely to engage in such actions.

    Thanks to new data behind the 2020 College Free Speech Rankings from RealClearEducation, the Foundation for Individual Rights in Education (FIRE), and survey firm College Pulse – representing the largest study of student attitudes toward speech to date – we know that students enrolled in the higher education institutions in New England are appreciably more liberal and open to shutting down speech and expression than the overwhelming majority of college students.

    With almost 20,000 students in FIRE survey sample, it is possible to break the national sample down into regional groups and the data makes it abundantly clear that those enrolled in New England are notably different.

    The General Social Survey shows that political ideology in the United States has been remarkably consistent since the 1970s and that liberals are not dominant. In the most recent sample, the survey found that 28% of Americans identify as liberal, 31% as conservative, and the balance of 37% are in the middle as moderates. In contrast, 50% of college students are liberal, 26% are conservative and the minority – 23% – are moderates. College students demonstrate a significant liberal lean.

    But this lean is not uniform. In New England, the data reveal that college students live in a huge bubble where there are 5 liberals for every 1 conservative. 71% of New England college students identify as liberal and just 15% conservative and 14% moderate. This is by far the most lopsided region in the nation.

    The most similar regions to New England, ideologically, are the West Coast and Mid-Atlantic regions. 59% of students in both regions identify as liberal with just a fifth of their students holding conservative views, meaning there are three liberal undergraduates for every conservative student in those regions. This breakdown is far off the national average.

    Looking at other regions in the United States, the liberal student dominance disappears. Take the Mountain region – 8 states that are mixed ideologically with rural areas and big and growing cities such as Denver and Phoenix – and the ideological balance is far less extreme. Here about a quarter of students are moderate and in the middle with a little more than a third identifying as conservative and 41% stating that they are liberal. In fact, if one excludes the three extreme liberal regions, the remaining 6 divisions are far more diverse with 46% of students being liberal, a quarter moderate, and about a third (30%) conservative.

    The differences between some schools are striking. At the University of Arizona in Tempe there are 1.5 liberals for every conservative. But Brown in Rhode Island has 12 liberal students for every conservative.

    Ideological imbalance is problematic in and of itself if you value viewpoint diversity in the classroom, but it is also the case that students in New England are far more likely to believe that actions to shut down speech are acceptable.

    When asked whether it is ever appropriate to shout down or try to prevent someone from speaking on campus, 61% of students found that this was acceptable, nationally. But in New England 70% of students thought preventing a speaker was talking was justified in at least some circumstances. This is in stark comparison to regions like East South Central, home to the Universities of Tennessee and Alabama, where just half of the students found such behavior acceptable.

    Similarly, when asked about the acceptability of blocking other students from entering a campus event, almost half (48%) of New England students thought this tactic would be an acceptable way to protest a campus speaker. About 30% of students in the East South Central, the Mountain, West North Central, and West South Central – a nearly 20-point difference – felt that blocking an entrance was acceptable.

    Put somewhat differently, 51% of Yale students would approve of tactics which would prevent students from hearing an opinion on their campus, but just 35% at the Universities of Missouri – which itself made national attention when a faculty member and students tried to forcibly block the press from covering a demonstration – would be willing to block others from attending an event.

    New England schools are collectively an outlier in terms of both student liberalism and their willingness to shut down speech. And the perception that protests against speakers are more common in New England is born out in the data. This lopsided liberal trend matches earlier work, which revealed a similar imbalance, where liberal professors outnumber conservative professors 28 to 1 for New England colleges and universities. And while finding a conservative professor in New England is exceedingly rare and far out of step with the national ratio of 6 to 1, many regions in the country are not as homogenous.

    Ideological imbalance among students is a problem, especially in New England. It is crucial that students of all ideological backgrounds encounter a multitude of ideas in college.

    But it’s important to note that the student imbalance in New England is far less one-sided than the faculty imbalance there. And faculty imbalance may be a far more pressing problem if one values viewpoint diversity. It’s more readily fixable too, if schools would only prioritize the hiring of a more ideologically diverse faculty and work to ensure that all faculty strive to present a multitude of views and intellectual traditions in their classrooms.

  • "Dark Winter" – Millions Of Americans Are Expected To Lose Their Homes
    "Dark Winter" – Millions Of Americans Are Expected To Lose Their Homes

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 20:30

    A dark covid winter is descending on the working-poor of America as millions of adults face eviction or foreclosure in the next few months. Bloomberg, citing a survey that was conducted on Nov. 9 by the U.S. Census Bureau, shows 5.8 million adults face eviction or foreclosure come Jan. 1. That accounts for 32.5% of the 17.8 million adults currently behind rent or mortgage payments. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg 

    On Monday, we noted that on Dec. 31 many of the key provisions in the CARES Act are set to expire if there is no action from Congress. This could be catastrophic for 12 million America who will lose access to their Emergency unemployment benefits activated in the aftermath of the covid pandemic, which alone could be a drag of up to 1.5% to growth in 1Q, according to a recent Bank of America report. 

    Additionally, the expiration of eviction moratorium, mortgage forbearance programs, and suspension of student loan payments could compound the working poors’ financial stresses, many of whom, about 21 million of them, are unemployed and receiving benefits from the government.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Bloomberg 

    The survey points out at least half of households in Arkansas, Florida and Nevada are not current on rent and mortgage payments – equating to 750,000 could face an eviction come early 2021. 

    On a city by city basis, New York City, Houston, and Atlanta had the greatest threat of evictions come early next year. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The most concerning part about the expiration of various CARES programs starting on Jan. 1 is that it removes safety nets for the working poor. A lapse from when expirations hit to Congress and the new Biden administration expected to strike a stimulus deal is expected be short-lived. 

  • Shots Fired: China Slaps "Distressing" Tariffs Up To 212% On Australian Wine
    Shots Fired: China Slaps "Distressing" Tariffs Up To 212% On Australian Wine

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 20:30

    China has drastically ramped up its trade conflict with Australia, on Friday slapping a whopping 200% tax on all Australian wine, in a move being widely described as the first shot fired in what went from behind-the-scenes bureaucratic punitive actions to now an open trade war.

    “The Ministry of Commerce imposed import taxes of up to 212.1%, effective Saturday, which Australia’s trade minister said make Australian wine unsellable in China, his country’s biggest export market,” the AP reports. The lead industry body Wine Australia, said the country’s total shipments to China in the first nine months of 2020 accounted for 39% of all Australian wines.

    Australia has been among those countries, foremost among them the United States under Trump, leading the charge of criticism aimed at Beijing over its handling of the coronavirus pandemic, lately calling for a formal international probe into the deadly virus’ origins there. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China is the top market for Australian wine exports, via Reuters.

    “This is a very distressing time for many hundreds of Australian wine producers, who have built, in good faith, a sound market in China,” Australia trade minister Simon Birmingham responded on Friday.

    The growing tensions between the two trade partners has also included tit-for-tat travel restrictions and in a couple notable cases the detention of journalists with dual nationality by Chinese security services. This amid China taking measures early this month to block a wide array of key Australian exports from lobsters to coal.

    But as one analyst cited by AP has observed of what’s increasingly obvious, Australia has become a “one-trick pony export-wise to China” and thus Beijing holds all the cards, with Canberra scrambling to play on the defensive while China extracts political concessions by threatening to torpedo Australia’s commodities exports.

    China’s Ministry of Commerce justified the wine tariffs as a necessary response after rampant complaints that Chinese producers were hurt by improperly low-priced Australian imports.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Prime Minister Scott Morrison has lately slammed Beijing practicing blatant “economic coercion” with regard to an increasing array of its exports being held up at port for what are seen as contrived inspections procedures, which sometimes end in large shipments going bad, such as lobster. 

    Beijing has also recently began taking aim at Australia’s tourism industry by discouraging tourists and students from visiting the country.

    Via Trading EconomicsAustralia exports to China was US$103 Billion during 2019, according to the United Nations COMTRADE database on international trade. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On news of this latest 200% wine tax Australia’s main stock market index fell by 0.5%. China’s foreign ministry was quick to capitalize by demanding Australia “do something conductive” to change course and improve relations but without diving into details:

    “Some people in Australia adhering to the Cold War mentality and ideological prejudice have repeatedly taken wrong words and deeds on issues concerning China’s core interests,” said the spokesman, Zhao Lijian.

    Australia should “take China’s concerns seriously, instead of harming China’s national interests under the banner of safeguarding their own national interests,” Zhao said.

    Further fueling China’s dramatic actions is Australia’s impending mutual defense treaty with Japan which is still being deeply negotiated.

    Japan is of course a prime strategic rival to China heavily involved in pressing anti-China rhetoric on its expansion of militarized artificial islands in the South China Sea. 

  • Suicides In Japan Jumped 39% In October…
    Suicides In Japan Jumped 39% In October…

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, risks to your prosperity… and on occasion, inspiring poetic justice.

    *  *  *

    And the Emmy Goes to the Governor of New York Andrew Cuomo

    Andrew Cuomo, the Governor of New York, recently released a book he allegedly wrote called, “American Crisis: Leadership Lessons from the COVID-19 Pandemic,” congratulating himself for being an amazing leader.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So the first time I saw the headline that Cuomo had won an Emmy, I thought it was a joke, poking fun at the Governor for his self-aggrandizing book.

    But this is not The Onion: Cuomo, will receive an Emmy award for his 111 televised COVID-19 briefings this spring.

    The academy, which typically awards Emmys to actors in TV series, said Cuomo’s leadership had people around the world tuning in– “New York tough became a symbol of the determination to fight back.”

    The fact that New York has the second highest per-capita COVID-19 death rate of any state hasn’t stopped the praise for this Dear Leader.

    That is why Cuomo clearly deserves the Emmy. He must be a good actor to convince so many people that his utter failure in leadership should be celebrated.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Just One Liar Triggered a Lockdown for Millions

    Authorities in South Australia don’t think you should blame them for a sudden, strict, six day lockdown that affected 1.7 million Australians.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Blame the pizza guy!

    A new Covid patient claimed he contracted COVID-19 from a pizza box.

    This led authorities to fear that the virus had mutated to become more easily transmissible, which prompted their draconian response to lock everyone down again.

    It turns out the man was an employee of the pizza shop, and picked up the virus while working alongside an infected coworker.

    The state’s senior officials blamed the pizza guy, claiming he lied to them, and this is why the lockdown took place.

    Yep. Blame it on the pizza guy. Clearly we can’t hold government officials responsible for the decisions they make, the hysteria they create, or the freedoms they destroy.

    Obey.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Suicides in Japan Jumped 39% in October

    More Japanese people died by suicide in October alone than have died from COVID-19 throughout the entire pandemic.

    In 2019, Japan saw its lowest suicide rate ever recorded during the 40 years it has kept track.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then suddenly in July 2020, the suicide rate began to skyrocket again. Gee I wonder why.

    October 2020 saw a 39% spike in suicides compared to October 2019.

    17,000 people have died by suicide this year in Japan, while fewer than 2,000 have died from COVID-19.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Katy Perry Gets a Big Bowl of Hate for Urging Political Tolerance

    Pop singer Katy Perry was delighted with how the Presidential Election has shaped up so far.

    But rather than stoke more division, she Tweeted, “The first thing I did when the presidency was called is text and call my family members who do not agree, and tell them I love them and am here for them.”

    In other words, she reached out with kindness to people who have different opinions than she has. And that seems like a perfectly mature and tolerant thing to do.

    But not to the Twitter Mob!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Twitter jumped on the singer immediately for refusing to hate people with opposing political views.

    Apparently she doesn’t realize that 70+ million Americans are guilty of thought crimes and need to be ridiculed, shamed, and exiled.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Solomon Islands Considers Banning Facebook

    In the name of national unity, the Solomon Islands is looking to ban Facebook.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Prime Minister announced that “Cyberbullying on Facebook is widespread, people have been defamed by users who use fake names, and people’s reputations that have been built up over the years [are destroyed] in a matter of minutes.”

    “We have [a] duty to cultivate national unity and the happy coexistence of our people … [Facebook] is undermining efforts to unite this country.”

    Personally I think Facebook is atrocious. But it’s up to individual people to decide whether or not to use it.

    And surely it must be a total coincidence that a few weeks ago, Facebook was instrumental in spreading leaked documents that showed how COVID-19 economic relief funds had been misspent by the Solomon Islands government.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years. That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

  • Airport Deploys 'Virus-Killing Robots' During Holidays As Mall Santas Turn To Plexiglass Barriers And 'Sanitation Elves'
    Airport Deploys 'Virus-Killing Robots' During Holidays As Mall Santas Turn To Plexiglass Barriers And 'Sanitation Elves'

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 19:30

    Holidays during the pandemic were always going to be interesting, as fears over a second wave have been met with a flood of lockdowns and restrictions on gatherings.

    Yet, many Americans aren’t buying it, or don’t care about a virus that kills less than 1% of those it infects – as over 1 million travelers flew through US domestic airports last Friday, the 2nd highest daily total since the pandemic hit last spring.

    Airlines, meanwhile, are jumping through all sorts of hoops to keep regulators and worried passengers happy – mandating that passengers wear masks throughout their flights, while airports employ measures of their own such as thermal imaging to scan for fevers (which has ‘accuracy issues‘ per experts). Airports are also employing touchless kiosks and attempting to enforce social distancing recommendations.

    San Antonio International Airport in Texas has gone one step further – deploying a virus-fighting robot that shoots powerful bursts of UV light onto surfaces, according to the Washington Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s called LightStrike, and other airports are considering whether to invest in the $125,000 device that has been shown to be effective against the coronavirus. Some airports are watching to see whether travel improves over the coming weeks, according to officials at Xenex, the company behind the device.

    Xenex says that its robot business has increased 600 percent amid the pandemic. Most of the increase is related to the health-care industry, but the robot also has entered new markets such as hotels, professional sports facilities and police stations. –Washington Post

    “When you bring something like SARS-CoV-2 into focus, institutions like hotels, airlines, professional sports teams, they’re looking for what’s best-in-class to kill it,” according to Xenex CEO, Morris Miller.

    The 43″ tall UV-producing robots with a seven-foot effective radius were initially developed for hospitals as a method of eliminating viruses and antibiotic-resistant bacteria, and was recently picked up by a local school district in Texas, according to the report.

    It’s been known for decades that UV radiation can destroy viruses by chemically altering their genetic material. However, different pathogens are susceptible to UV light at varying wavelengths. Many traditional UV devices use low-intensity mercury bulbs, which means they may take longer to kill organic material such as viruses. By contrast, LightStrike robots have a powerful xenon UV-C light source capable of damaging the DNA and RNA of viruses in a matter of minutes. –Washington Post

    In a test conducted by the Texas Biomedical Research Instituted in San Antonio, the LightStrike robot destroyed COVID-19 in two minutes, and has shown to be effective at killing certain superbugs such as C. diff. 

    Meanwhile, mall santas have also been forced to adapt to Christmas with COVID – with some now appearing for photos from inside ‘acrylic snow globes’ and other barriers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Old Saint Nick will pose for photos from inside an acrylic snow globe in Richmond. He’ll be barricaded behind a eight-foot picture frame in Lakewood, Colo. And in Gruene, Tex., Cowboy Kringle, who wears red leather chaps and a cowboy hat, will keep socially distant by asking visitors to sit on a saddle positioned six feet away.

    This year’s holiday photos will have a decidedly pandemic feel: No more sitting on Kriss Kringle’s lap or whispering in his ear. Instead, venues are increasingly requiring reservations, masks and temperature checks. Santa is hosting drive-through events, attaching face shields to his hat and trading in his white cloth gloves for disposable ones to protect himself — and others — as coronavirus cases skyrocket to new highs around the country. –Washington Post

    “Everything is different this year, but people are finding a way to keep that traditional Santa experience,” said Mitchell Allen, owner of the Hire Santa staffing firm – where ‘virtual bookings have grown tenfold,’ yet only constitute a fraction of the company’s total revenue according to the report.

    “It’s unexpected, to be honest.”

    At Bass Pro Shops, which also owns Cabela’s, Saint Nick is stuck behind an acrylic shield, while elves serve as “Santa’s sanitization squad,” as some 95,000 families stopped by for photos during Santa’s first week at 176 stores.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Santa’s helper works to keep things disinfected at the Springfield Bass Pro Shops store. (Annaliese Nurnberg/The Washington Post)

    With struggling retailers being sent into bankruptcy thanks to a sharp dropoff in foot traffic during the pandemic, mall santas have been a longstanding reason for families to set foot in malls. And with Santa-booking companies reporting a 40% dropoff in appointments, and many Santas dropping out of the workforce over health concerns.

    Santas are also nervous. Many are in their 70s and 80s and have health conditions such as diabetes that put them at particularly high risk of coronavirus complications. Brenneman, who owns the booking firm Santa Claus and Co. in Phoenix, said about half of the 30 white-bearded men he employs are sitting the season out, and a few are doing only outdoor events. -WaPo

    In trying to adjust to the ‘new normal,’ mall owners “have spent months — and tens of thousands of dollars — trying to reimagine Santa’s Wonderland for the coronavirus era. The goal, they say, is to spread holiday cheer (but not the virus),” according to the report.

    “Santa can’t give out hugs or candy canes this year, but people still want to see him,” said 70-year-old Mark Brenneman, who has been playing Santa for nearly 50 years. “They want hope. They want normal.

  • Infographic: The 4-Year-Long Campaign Against Trump
    Infographic: The 4-Year-Long Campaign Against Trump

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 19:00

    Via The Epoch Times,

    The post-election push to pressure President Donald Trump to concede, despite numerous credible allegations of voter fraud and ongoing legal challenges, is not an isolated incident.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is the culmination of a four-year-long campaign against him, which started during his first run for president in 2016 when the FBI launched a politically motivated investigation of his campaign. During his subsequent four years in office, there have been consistent efforts to remove him from office, first through the Russia-collusion narrative and then through impeachment.

    The Epoch Times here provides an overview of some of the main efforts made against the sitting president of the United States.

    This is an issue that transcends party lines, as it is not only an assault on Trump, but an assault on the office of the presidency, and with it, an assault on the foundation of America.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Click on infographic to enlarge.

    Politically Motivated Investigation

    The FBI under the Obama administration in 2016 launched a politically motivated investigation of the Trump campaign. Based on publicly available information, we know the investigation was initiated based on the thinnest of evidence: remarks made by a junior Trump campaign adviser to the Australian ambassador in London. In reality, the investigation primarily relied on the discredited “Steele dossier,” produced by former MI6 agent Christopher Steele on behalf of the Clinton campaign and the Democratic National Committee (DNC).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Donald Trump boards Air Force One in Butler, Pa., on Oct. 31, 2020. (Mandel Ngan/AFP via Getty Images)

    The Trump–Russia Shadow

    While the FBI’s Crossfire Hurricane investigation itself would not find any evidence of Trump–Russia collusion, the ongoing investigations, including selective leaks to the media, would create the public narrative that Trump had colluded with Russia to win the 2016 election. This cast a shadow over the first few years of his presidency and constrained his actions both domestically and internationally. Some members of Congress had gone so far as to call for Trump’s impeachment over the false allegations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Former director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation James Comey, speaks via a TV monitor during a hearing on Capitol Hill in Washington on Sept. 30, 2020. (Stefani Reynolds/Pool/Getty Images)

    FBI Under Comey and McCabe

    The FBI under Director James Comey and Deputy Director Andrew McCabe pro-actively worked against Trump. McCabe was directly involved in the Crossfire Hurricane investigation, working with FBI agent Peter Strzok and FBI attorney Lisa Page. After Comey was fired by Trump in May 2017, McCabe actively pushed the agency to further investigate Trump. McCabe’s FBI went as far as suggesting Department of Justice official Bruce Ohr reach back out to Steele, despite that many of the claims in his dossier had been disproven by that time and the FBI had cut ties with him over his leaks to the media.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The New York Times building is seen in New York City on Feb. 7, 2013. (Carlo Allegri/Reuters)

    Media

    Perhaps one of the most powerful forces working against Trump during his presidency has been the news media. Over the past five years, they have relentlessly published skewed and inaccurate information about Trump while minimizing or ignoring his accomplishments, seeking to portray him publicly as an illegitimate president. This type of reporting has created a climate of anger, hate, and instability in America. It has resulted in threats made to the president’s life and acts of violence against his supporters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The White House stands at dusk in Washington on Feb. 5, 2020. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

    Impeachment

    The House of Representatives on Dec. 18, 2019, impeached Trump along partisan lines. Though the Senate would later dismiss the charge, it left a mark on his presidency and dragged the country through months of public attacks in the media. At the center of the impeachment was a phone call Trump made on July 25, 2019, to Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky, during which Trump expressed his hope that allegations of potential corruption involving former Vice President Joe Biden would be investigated. Given even the publicly available information at the time, there were legitimate concerns that American political influence and taxpayers’ funds were misused in Ukraine. At the time, it was publicly known that Biden’s son Hunter had received tens of thousands of dollars a month from a Ukrainian energy giant, while then-Vice President Biden—in his own words—had pressured the Ukrainian president to fire a prosecutor as a prerequisite for receiving $1 billion in foreign aid. That same prosecutor had been investigating the Ukrainian energy company Burisma, as well its board, which included Hunter Biden.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A medical worker in protective suit conducts nucleic acid testings for residents at a residential compound in Wuhan, the Chinese city hit hardest by the coronavirus disease (COVID-19) outbreak, Hubei province, China, on May 15, 2020. (Aly Song/Reuters)

    CCP Virus

    Trump’s opponents have accused the president of mishandling the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus, commonly referred to as the novel coronavirus, by acting too late. This, however, is contrary to the events of early 2020. The Trump administration on Feb. 2, 2020, banned all foreign travel from China, the source of the CCP virus. This decision was made by the president against the advice of some of his top advisers and exceeded actions taken by most other nations at the time. Meanwhile, his opponents in politics and media described it as xenophobic and an overreaction. In hindsight, the decision proved immensely valuable in helping to slow the spread of the virus. As the virus spread in the United States, the Trump administration increased testing capacity, coordinated with state governments to provide them with the federal assistance they needed, used the defense production act to compel companies to produce critical health equipment such as ventilators, and provided billions in federal funding and eased federal regulations for major drug companies to push for the development of a vaccine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chinese troops march during a military parade in Tiananmen Square in Beijing, on Oct. 1, 2019. (Greg Baker/AFP via Getty Images)

    Foreign Interference

    It would be accurate to say that Trump is communist China’s biggest adversary. The president broke a decades-long U.S. policy toward China that was based on the belief that, through engagement and economic development, the People’s Republic would evolve from a totalitarian regime toward a more democratic country. In reality, this strategy of appeasement merely resulted in trillions of dollars and hundreds of thousands of U.S. jobs going to China. And instead of becoming more democratic, the Chinese regime used this wealth to advance its dictatorship, creating the most technologically advanced tyranny the world has ever witnessed. The CCP has consistently worked against Trump during his presidency, both publicly and behind the scenes. Beijing has used its domestic and overseas propaganda channels—often by relying on the United States’ own media—to vilify Trump, going as far as to suggest that the outbreak of the CCP virus in Wuhan was because of the American military.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A police armored vehicle patrols an intersection while a building set afire by rioters burns in Kenosha, Wis., on Aug. 24, 2020. (Brandon Bell/Getty Images)

    Black Lives Matter

    Black Lives Matter (BLM) has been behind the riots that have plagued American cities for much of this year. The group has hijacked the concerns people have over racism and used them to justify its advance of a Marxist agenda. In a 2015 video, BLM co-founder Patrisse Cullors described herself and her fellow founders as “trained Marxists.” Just like in Russia, China, Cuba, and Venezuela, trained Marxists have hijacked righteous causes to advance the communist agenda. Many of those who lived through the Cultural Revolution in China in the 1960s have commented that the riots in the United States over the summer, which included the toppling of historical statues, were eerily similar. The result is a climate of chaos and insecurity that affects the entire country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Antifa extremists in Berkeley, Calif., on Aug. 27, 2017. (Amy Osborne/AFP via Getty Images)

    Antifa

    Dressed in full black gear including armor, helmets, and masks, and trained in agitation and basic combat, Antifa extremists have been involved in numerous acts of violence during Trump’s presidency. In many cases, these acts of violence, which include the use of weapons, rocks, and Molotov cocktails, were directed at law enforcement and government property. But Antifa members have also directly targeted unarmed common citizens for simply supporting Trump. We saw this happen twice in Washington, where those who had gathered to support Trump were later attacked when alone in the city at night. Antifa’s use of a militia-style force to intimidate and physically attack citizens for their political beliefs creates a powerful climate of fear and stands against the most basic American values.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Aerial photo of the Washington Memorial with the Capitol in the background in Washington D.C. in this file photo. (Andy Dunaway/USAF via Getty Images)

    The Permanent Government

    Though Trump as president is the leader of the executive branch, when he came to office he inherited a federal government staffed with hundreds of thousands of employees. It’s no secret that many career officials in the U.S. government have actively sought to undermine or even openly work against Trump. Many in government have been led by false information published by media organizations to believe that they are doing the right thing, and that by working against Trump, they are putting the interests of the country first. In fact, they have done the country a disservice by blocking a rightfully elected president from executing the will of the people.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Robert Mueller in Washington, on May 29, 2019. (Reuters/Jim Bourg)

    Mueller Special Counsel Investigation

    Following the firing of FBI Director Comey, Deputy Attorney General Rod Rosenstein assigned former FBI Director Robert Mueller to continue the FBI’s investigation of alleged Trump–Russia collusion. Mueller would conclude in a final report that there was no evidence of such collusion. But this only came after a nearly two-year-long investigation, giving the media and Trump’s political opponents leeway to portray Trump as an illegitimate president because of his supposed affiliation with Russia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Donald Trump speaks on the phone with Russian President Vladimir Putin in the Oval Office of the White House on Jan. 28, 2017. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

    Illegal Leaks

    Throughout the past four years, the Trump administration has been plagued by selective leaks aimed at damaging Trump’s presidency. Some of these leaks have been criminal in nature, such as the leak of the transcripts of Trump’s conversations with foreign leaders—a felony offense. Treasury official Natalie Edwards was found guilty of illegally leaking suspicious activity reports (SARs) on financial transactions by former Trump campaign associate Paul Manafort, among others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Poll workers board up windows so ballot challengers can’t see into the ballot counting area at the TCF Center where ballots are being counted in downtown Detroit on Nov. 4,2020. (Seth Herald/AFP via Getty Images)

    2020 Election Fraud

    Following the Nov. 3 elections, dozens of credible allegations of voter fraud or other illegal acts connected to the counting of ballots have emerged. Dozens of poll workers across multiple states have given testimony in sworn statements—under penalty of perjury—detailing irregularities in how ballots were counted, as well as how the workers were instructed to make otherwise illegal changes to ballots, how they were unable to properly observe ballot counting, and how they witnessed new ballots mysteriously appear out of nowhere. The Trump campaign and the Republican National Committee launched a number of lawsuits to challenge the process. They’ve argued that in Pennsylvania alone, 600,000 ballots should be invalidated, as Republican election observers weren’t allowed to witness the ballot processing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Donald Trump speaks at Trump Tower, fielding questions from reporters about Charlottesville, in New York City, on Aug. 15, 2017. (Drew Angerer/Getty Images)

    Manufactured Narratives

    The use of manufactured narratives to attack Trump has been pervasive since he assumed the presidency. Perhaps the most notable is the claim that he defended neo-Nazis in Charlottesville, Virginia, when in fact he said that that there were “very fine people on both sides,” referring to people who “were there to protest the taking down of, to them, a very, very important statue and the renaming of a park from Robert E. Lee to another name.” Trump specifically added, “I’m not talking about the neo-Nazis and the white nationalists, because they should be condemned totally—but you had many people in that group other than neo-Nazis and white nationalists.” Yet despite this being on public record, Trump would continue to be asked throughout his presidency, especially during the election season, whether he was ready to “denounce white supremacy,” despite having done so on many occasions, even before becoming president

  • New Study Exposes Alleged Accounting Error Regarding COVID Deaths
    New Study Exposes Alleged Accounting Error Regarding COVID Deaths

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by Ethan Yang via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    At the time of this writing, the United States currently maintains the highest number of Covid-19 deaths and ranks 11th for the highest deaths per capita. There have been approximately 262,000 recorded Covid-19 deaths in the United States, which is certainly a concerning number. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, a new study (link removed but now available at Archive.org) published by Dr. Genevieve Briand at Johns Hopkins University notes some critical accounting errors done at the national level.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The study – which is still being vetted – simply examines the raw data that should have been questioned months ago.

    The overall conclusion is that Covid-19, at least according to collected data, is not the killer disease that it is currently hyped up to be. AIER is not endorsing the study as is without further study, but we are interested in the argument being examined and discussed.

    Viewing Covid-19 Deaths in Context

    It is already well established that Covid-19 is a disease that is most dangerous to those over the age of 65 and who have preexisting conditions. In the United States, there has been an observed 2.1% mortality rate, with elderly individuals making up over half that number. 

    Young and healthy people are not by any significant capacity threatened by Covid-19. 

    One of the most important factors when it comes to Covid-19 is preventing excess death. According to the CDC

    “Estimates of excess deaths can provide information about the burden of mortality potentially related to the COVID-19 pandemic, including deaths that are directly or indirectly attributed to COVID-19. Excess deaths are typically defined as the difference between the observed numbers of deaths in specific time periods and expected numbers of deaths in the same time periods.”

    Essentially, there is an average number of deaths every year due to a variety of causes that for the most part have remained constant through the years. This includes morbidities such as heart disease, which has long been the leading cause of death, and cancer, which has long plagued our existence. For Covid-19 to be a serious cause of alarm, it would need to significantly increase the number of average deaths. 

    However, according to the study,

    “These data analyses suggest that in contrast to most people’s assumptions, the number of deaths by COVID-19 is not alarming. In fact, it has relatively no effect on deaths in the United States.”

    Total deaths in the United States show no significant change and even mirror past trends of seasonal illness. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: CDC Data, Methodology Included in this Video

    According to this graph constructed using data provided by the CDC from the last 6 years, total deaths have remained relatively constant and increases can be explained by various factors such as a larger population. The spikes in deaths in 2020 are consistent with historical trends, only topping 2018 by 11,292 deaths. There have been over 262,000 deaths attributed to Covid-19 in the United States, yet total deaths have not increased in any alarming capacity; they have only mirrored existing trends. In short, according to 6 years of data collected by the CDC, Covid-19 has not led to any significant increase in deaths.

    Diving Deeper 

    What is even more interesting if not more alarming is that the spike in recorded Covid-19 deaths seen in 2020 has coincided with a proportional decrease in death from other diseases. 

    Yanni Gu writes

    “This suggests, according to Briand, that the COVID-19 death toll is misleading. Briand believes that deaths due to heart diseases, respiratory diseases, influenza and pneumonia may instead be recategorized as being due to COVID-19.” 

    Deaths have remained relatively constant, yet reported deaths due to deadly conditions such as heart disease have fallen while reported Covid deaths have risen. This suggests that the current Covid death count is in some capacity relabeled deaths due to other ailments. According to the graph, reported Covid deaths even overtook heart disease as the main cause of death at one point, which should raise suspicion.

    This aligns with many other well-established facts about the virus, such as those with comorbidities are the most at risk. According to the CDC, about 94% of Covid deaths occur with comorbidities. This suggests that it could be possible that a large number of deaths could have been mainly due to more serious ailments such as heart disease but categorized as a Covid-19 death, a far less lethal disease.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: John Hopkins News-Letter, provided by Genevieve Briand

    According to this graph provided by the study, deaths labeled under Covid-19 increased while deaths labeled under others decreased. It is important to note that this sample only applies to the month of April as the author notes these were the weeks with the highest reported deaths. Gu writes 

    “The CDC classified all deaths that are related to COVID-19 simply as COVID-19 deaths. Even patients dying from other underlying diseases but are infected with COVID-19 count as COVID-19 deaths. This is likely the main explanation as to why COVID-19 deaths drastically increased while deaths by all other diseases experienced a significant decrease…

    “If [the COVID-19 death toll] was not misleading at all, what we should have observed is an increased number of heart attacks and increased COVID-19 numbers. But a decreased number of heart attacks and all the other death causes doesn’t give us a choice but to point to some misclassification,” Briand replied.”

    Furthermore, Briand’s research notes that the percentage of death has remained relatively constant through all age groups. Covid death statistics seem to mirror the normal distribution of death amongst age groups, further lending credence to the argument that many Covid deaths are recategorized deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Briand provides this graph constructed from CDC data that shows that deaths amongst various age groups have remained relatively constant. 

    By simply looking at the raw data presented by the CDC Gu writes that

    “All of this points to no evidence that COVID-19 created any excess deaths. Total death numbers are not above normal death numbers. We found no evidence to the contrary,” Briand concluded.

    What Do We Do With This Information?

    Briand and likely many others suppose that the extreme emphasis on Covid-19 has led to the unintended classification of the disease as the cause of death. She further stresses that although this data challenges the idea that Covid is an unprecedented and lethal disease, we should still be concerned with mitigating death in general. 

    However, it is clear that this significant accounting error regarding Covid deaths, if true, is not productive. It has caused mass hysteria and misinformed public policy. Closing down communities to fight a virus that according to the data, has had no significant contribution to total deaths, reduces our overall capacity to build a healthy society. 

    [ZH: Alex Berenson (@AlexBerenson) noted on Twitter: “Folks: I know a lot of you are referencing this Johns Hopkins paper that’s been pulled. Unfortunately it is wrong. The excess deaths are real. Yes, they’re very, very skewed by age, but they’re real. Pretending otherwise doesn’t help.”]

    Lockdowns have resulted in severe damage to our capacity to improve the general health of society. From the catastrophic economic damage that lowers the standard of living for everyone to surgeries being deemed “unessential,” our current policies are not helping in preventing deaths in general; they are likely leading to more. Suicides and substance abuse are up, mental and physical health are down, all due to lockdowns. 

    The late Dr. Donald Henderson, who led the eradication of smallpox, noted in 2006 that 

    “Experience has shown that communities faced with epidemics or other adverse events respond best and with the least anxiety when the normal social functioning of the community is least disrupted.”

    The hysteria over Covid-19 has likely led to the alleged accounting error noted in Briand’s study, the reclassification of expected deaths from all causes into Covid deaths.

    That accounting error has likely led to a number of policy decisions that have drastically crippled our ability to support the general welfare of society, economically, socially, and spiritually. Going forward these findings should give us pause and reconsideration over the threat Covid-19 actually poses and realize how much avoidable damage we have done to ourselves as a result.

  • The Background for Black Friday's All-Time Highs
    The Background for Black Friday's All-Time Highs


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 17:55

    Real Vision managing editor Ed Harrison and senior editor Ash Bennington discuss the all-time highs set on the S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite on this holiday-shortened trading day in U.S. equity markets. Harrison and Bennington also take a step back to evaluate the broader context for rising stock prices during the month of November. Specifically, the pair explores the apparent recent decrease of political risk in the U.S., the impact of increasing case counts and virus fatalities, the potential effects of a Covid-19 vaccine on the global economic climate, and the risk of future lockdowns and growing geopolitical uncertainty in the Middle East.

  • Carter Page Sues Comey, DOJ And Others For $75 Million Over Crossfire Hurricane Abuse
    Carter Page Sues Comey, DOJ And Others For $75 Million Over Crossfire Hurricane Abuse

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 17:30

    Former 2016 Trump Campaign aide Carter Page has filed an eight-count complaint against the Department of Justice, the FBI, former FBI Director James Comey and others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Filed in the DC District Court, Page seeks at least $75 million in damages over, amongst other things, obtaining four illegal Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act warrants against him.

    More via The Federalist‘s Margot Cleveland:

    Page’s 59-page complaint lists as defendants a veritable “Who’s Who” of the SpyGate scandal, including former FBI Director James Comey, Assistant Director Andrew McCabe, and the disgraced team of Peter Strzok and Lisa Page. Also singled out were Kevin Clinessmith, who earlier this year pleaded guilty to falsifying an email to hide Page’s past service as a source to the CIA, and FBI Agents Joe Pientka, Stephen Somma, and Brian Auten, with additional defendants identified merely as John Doe 1 – 10 and Jane Doe 1 – 10.

    ­The first four counts of his complaint allege claims under FISA, with one count seeking damages for each of the four FISA court orders the defendants obtained against Page. FISA provides a private right of action to allow “an aggrieved person. . . who has been subjected to an electronic surveillance or about whom information obtained by electronic surveillance of such person has been disclosed,” to sue those responsible.

    While Page’s attorneys are filing a civil claim under FISA, the filing notes that the same act makes it a criminal offense to illegally “engage in electronic surveillance under color of law.”

    Page also claims that the United States government is responsible for civil wrongs “in the same manner and to the same extent as a private individual under like circumstances,” a Federal tort claim which allows Page to sue the government for wrongful conduct, as if it were a private person.

    Meanwhile (thanks to expert analysis by Cleveland – a lawyer and CPA), Page alleges a Bivens claim, named after a Supreme Court case in which a plaintiff was determined to be entitled to damages from the individual government actors responsible for violating their Fourth Amendment protection against unreasonable search and seizure – “which describes precisely what the Crossfire Hurricane team did in submitting the four false and misleading FISA applications to the FISA court.”

    Lastly, Page seeks justice in a pair of complaints under the federal Privacy Act – the first of which seeks to force the DOJ to update his “individual records,” and the second which seeks an injunction to force the government to do so – as he says “he was falsely portrayed as a traitor to his country.”

  • Was Wednesday A Super Spreader Event, One Bank Asks
    Was Wednesday A Super Spreader Event, One Bank Asks

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 17:14

    From DB’s Jim Reid

    Wednesday was the busiest day at US airports since the pandemic began. The Transportation Security Administration screened  more than 1.07 million people at US airports on Thanksgiving eve. For context this number was still down 41% on the same Wednesday last year.

    We are very positive about the chance of a return to normal life in 2021, especially from Q2 onwards. However it is quite clear that Thanksgiving and Christmas pose Covid super spreader event risk in various countries. Canada held Thanksgiving on October 12th and many public health officials there have blamed this for the recent spike in cases.

    If the US follows this pattern, tighter restrictions and weaker activity could still dominate in the near term before the positive trends of vaccines and mass testing kick in across the globe as we go through Q1.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Here Is Who Will Get The COVID Vaccine First According To Goldman
    Here Is Who Will Get The COVID Vaccine First According To Goldman

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 17:00

    Last week, Moncef Slaoui, the head of Washington’s “Operation Warp Speed”, laid out the ‘official’ timeline for vaccinating the American population, culminating in the extremely optimistic projection that the American population would reach 70% vaccination threshold – supposedly enough to achieve ‘herd immunity’ in May. The first doses, on the other hand, are expected to be administered on Dec. 11 and Dec. 12, Slaoui said.

    Now, according to a team of analysts at Goldman Sachs, most major developed-market economies aren’t expecting to make meaningful progress in inoculating their populations until later into the second half of Q2.

    Looking ahead, the FDA has already set up Pfizer’s and Moderna’s vaccines to receive emergency-use approval perhaps as soon as next week, while based on comments from European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen, the European Medicines Agency (EMA) is likely to authorize the three leading vaccines by year’s end.

    With investors already shifting their focus to actual distribution, Goldman’s team has published projections for six major advanced economies in five steps:

    1. Global vaccine production: We use monthly global production projections from our health care equity analysts for Pfizer-BioNTech, Moderna, AstraZeneca, Novavax, and Johnson & Johnson. The projections assume that production gradually rises in early 2021 and achieves the announced targets.

    2. Country vaccine supply: To allocate production across countries, we use data on agreements of purchases and purchase options, shown in the left panel of Exhibit 1, and data on initial deliveries. We assume the production share a country receives from a developer rises in the country’s initial deliveries, confirmed purchases, optional purchases, and population but falls to zero when contracted and optional purchases are delivered or when cumulative deliveries across the five developers exceed 90% of the population.2

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    3. Country vaccine demand: We use responses to the global Ipsos survey question of “From when a vaccine is available, when would you become vaccinated?” (Exhibit 1, right). This survey suggests that most people expect to wait some time before taking it, consistent with wanting to learn more about safety, side effects, and effectiveness. We also assume that demand will be more elevated and front-loaded than reported in the October Ipsos survey, which preceded recent trial results and upcoming public vaccination campaigns. Based on the expected timing of trials for children, we assume vaccinations for children under age 12 start globally in October 2021.

    4. Vaccine distribution capacity: We assume a speed limit on distribution that rises from 10% of the population in December to 20% of the population from February 2021 onwards based on the peak speed of the flu vaccine US distribution this year, corresponding to 20% of the population per month.

    5. Country vaccinations: We estimate monthly vaccination as the minimum of supply, demand, and distribution capacity Exhibit 2 illustrates the estimates of supply (light blue), demand (dark blue), and actual vaccinations (dotted green line) for the US and Canada. In both countries, vaccination is initially significantly limited by scarce supply, until additional capacity allows supply to exceed slowing demand in April. In Canada, the speed limit on distribution binds briefly in April. Demand drives vaccination from April in the US and May in Canada, rises gradually over the summer based on survey estimates, increases significantly with child vaccinations in the fall, and jumps past 70% in October in both countries.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Exhibit 3 shows our expected timeline for actual US vaccinations by tiering phase. High-risk groups, mostly health care workers and individuals with comorbid conditions, will likely receive the first available doses from mid-December, likely leading to significant public health benefits from Q1 onwards, followed by widespread vaccination from early April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking more broadly, our baseline forecast is that large shares of the population are vaccinated by the end of Q2 in all major DMs (Exhibit 4). The UK is expected to vaccinate 50% of its population in March with the US and Canada following in April. We forecast that the EU, Japan, and Australia reach this 50% threshold in May. As production becomes abundant by mid-Q2, vaccination rises gradually with demand and surpasses 70% across all DMs in the fall when children become eligible.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We next explore a downside scenario. This scenario assumes that (1) the AstraZeneca and Johnson & Johnson vaccines, which are both viral vector vaccines, do not succeed (perhaps reflecting safety events), and (2) vaccine demand measures fall back to October 2020 Ipsos survey levels. In this scenario, supply rises much more slowly in the EU, reflecting a larger reliance on both developers. In the medium run, vaccination levels are the lowest in the EU (assuming no new contracts are signed) but also the US and Japan, where the decline in demand leaves vaccination at relatively low long-term levels. In contrast, Australia and Canada are more resilient, benefiting from diversified supply contracts and relatively strong vaccine demand measures.

    * * *

    Source: Goldman Sachs

    While various governments have released comprehensive and detailed timelines for when their populations will have achieved ‘herd immunity’, Goldman’s analysts warned that European countries are skewed toward “the later timeline” since AstraZeneca and Johnson and Johnson are lagging behind Pfizer and Moderna.

    Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau held a press briefing on Friday to explain the official Canadian vaccination timeline. The PM said he expects most Canadians will be vaccinated by September. The announcement follows Trudeau’s remarks from earlier this week that Canada “won’t be first in line” for a vaccine since it hadn’t struck any major deals with suppliers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But Canada is in much better shape than the vast majority of countries, which have no deals at all. They will need to rely on the kindness of strangers – either the WHO and Bill Gates’s (who are trying via their “Covax” project to raise enough money to vaccinate the whole world) or President Xi and Beijing

  • Pope Francis Criticizes Anti-Lockdown Protesters In New Book 
    Pope Francis Criticizes Anti-Lockdown Protesters In New Book 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 16:30

    While coronavirus lockdowns triggered widespread social unrest and resulted in the worst socio-economic implosion the world has ever seen – Pope Francis is set to reveal his thoughts on what transpired this year in a new book expected to be released next month, according to AP News

    In “Let Us Dream: The Path to A Better Future,” ghostwritten by biographer Austen Ivereigh, Francis champions anti-racism protesters while demonizing anti-lockdown demonstrators. He said those around the world who demonstrated against lockdown restrictions reacted “as if measures that governments must impose for the good of their people constitute some political assault on autonomy or personal freedom!”

    “You’ll never find such people protesting the death of George Floyd, or joining a demonstration because there are shantytowns where children lack water or education,” Francis wrote in the new 150-page book. “They turned into a cultural battle what was in truth an effort to ensure the protection of life.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Francis touched on Floyd’s police killing that ignited social unrest across almost every US metro area for months. Francis said: “Abuse is a gross violation of human dignity that we cannot allow and which we must continue to struggle against.”

    However, Francis condemned anti-racism protesters’ attempt to erase history by dismantling statues of Confederate leaders. He said there are better ways to create dialogue.

    “Amputating history can make us lose our memory, which is one of the few remedies we have against repeating the mistakes of the past,” he wrote.

    Francis criticized populist leaders who’ve created buzz among supporters at massive rallies and scapegoats others for their countries’ problems. He compared the populist movement of today to the ones from the 1930s. 

    “Today, listening to some of the populist leaders we now have, I am reminded of the 1930s, when some democracies collapsed into dictatorships seemingly overnight,” he wrote. “We see it happening again now in rallies where populist leaders excite and harangue crowds, channeling their resentments and hatreds against imagined enemies to distract from the real problems.”

    He also said the virus pandemic had become an opportunity for the world to reset. Not too long ago, Archibishop Carlo Maria Vigano warned about a global reset intended to undermine “God and humanity”.

    Earlier this month, Francis’ latest Encyclical “Fratelli Tutti” (“Brothers All”) was published and seemed more of a political document than a spiritual guide to the catholic faith. He spoke for a more globalist political system and denounced the global capitalist free market economy.

    In the most recent monthly prayer intention, he called all the good Catholics of the world to “pray that the progress of robotics and artificial intelligence may always serve humankind.”

  • Controversy Intensifies Over Danish 'Zombie Minks' As Company Behind Botched Covid-Culling Identified
    Controversy Intensifies Over Danish 'Zombie Minks' As Company Behind Botched Covid-Culling Identified

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 11/27/2020 – 16:00

    A Danish company behind a botched culling of 17 million minks which appeared to ‘rise from the dead’ has been identified.

    Copenhagen-based International Service System (ISS) was tasked with the mass burial of the culled minks, which were infected with a mutated form of COVID-19. Controversy erupted however after the minks appeared to rise from the dead – as locals reported mink-movement within the three-foot deep mass graves.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Bloomberg, ISS says it was contacted by the government to handle two specific mass graves located in Western Denmark – following instructions provided by the military and the Danish Veterinary and Food Administration.

    “When the relevant authorities contacted us, we mobilized a full emergency response within 24 hours,” according to Senior ISS VP Simon Kaiser.
     

    Due to the ‘zombie mink’ controversy, a majority of parties in Danish parliament want the minks exhumed because they believe they were buried too close to a lake which Danes occasionally use for swimming.

    Dead mink were tipped into trenches at a military area in western Denmark and covered with two metres of soil. But hundreds have begun resurfacing, pushed out of the ground by what authorities say is gas from their decomposition. Newspapers have referred to them as the “zombie mink”.

    Jensen’s replacement, Rasmus Prehn, said on Friday he supported the idea of digging up the animals and incinerating them. He said he had asked the environmental protection agency look into whether it could be done, and parliament would be briefed on the issue on Monday. –Reuters

    Due to the ‘zombie mink’ controversy, a majority of parties in Danish parliament want the minks exhumed because they believe they were buried too close to a lake which Danes occasionally use for swimming.

    After public outrage over the zombified members of the weasel family, Danish police spokesman Thomas Kristensen urged locals to remain calm – explaining that gasses in the decay process can cause the bodies to move.

    “As the bodies decay, gases can be formed. This causes the whole thing to expand a little. In this way, in the worst cases, the mink get pushed out of the ground,” Kristensen said, according to the Guardian.

    And as The Mind Unleashed notes: “another issue is the fact that the animals were placed in shallow graves because the process was rushed. The graves were just over three feet deep, which allowed some witnesses to see the movement. Now officials are planning to order the graves to be dug twice as deep.

    “This is a natural process. Unfortunately, one metre of soil is not just one metre of soil –it depends on what type of soil it is. The problem is that the sandy soil in West Jutland is too light. So we have had to lay more soil on top,” Kristensen said.”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th November 2020

  • Power Is An Illusion, Control Is A Facade
    Power Is An Illusion, Control Is A Facade

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 23:15

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us,

    This past year in numerous countries the public is being bombarded with lessons in power and control that have been forgotten for generations. I think the majority of westerners in particular have long believed themselves “safe” from totalitarian government, from collectivist micro-management and from communistic cultism. They thought we had moved beyond the nightmares of the 20th century. They thought that the “new world” was going to be more Utopian, and that freedom would grace us naturally along with technological progress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sure, in the back of everyone’s subconscious there is the fear that the good times are an illusion and that dystopia is just behind a thin veneer of economic stability and false optimism, but most people do not really think such catastrophes will happen in their lifetime. We are now in the midst of a deliberately over-hyped pandemic, strict national lockdowns, civil unrest, riots, aggressive tech censorship, intrusive government censorship, unprecedented corporate and treasury debt, stagflationary central bank stimulus and the collapse of massive financial bubbles. Yet, I still don’t get the impression that many in the public really grasp the extent of the danger; they still believe that the situation is going to heal itself without any effort or much sacrifice on their part.

    This is the first lesson of power: Entire societies can be easily influenced when they suffer from delusions that the bad times will be fleeting, and that governments will keep them safe no matter what.

    It is a historically proven pattern that governments tend to CREATE problems instead of solving them, and this is because the power dynamic of government never changes. The politicians we “vote” for are not in control, rather, the elites who fund their campaigns and who permeate their cabinets are in control. Political representatives come and go, but the establishment elites never leave. Therefore, the problems our society faces will remain; they are a direct result of the subversive and perpetual power structure that serves the interest of a select minority rather than the public. The decline of our society into tyranny will not stop until this power structure and the people behind it are erased.

    This would actually be a simple thing to achieve if enough people were to accept the truth and take action. The elites, the globalists, the establishment, the “new world order”, whatever you want to call this organization of power mongers, is but a collection of mostly weak and feeble psychopaths and parasites. They are completely out in the open; they proudly proclaim their affiliations and intentions on a regular basis through their host institutions, from the Council on Foreign Relations to Tavistock to Bilderberg to the World Economic Forum, the IMF, the Bank for International Settlements, the Ford Foundation, the Rockefeller Foundation, the Open Society Foundation, etc. There is very little that is hidden about these people anymore.

    But, it is also a sad reality that most people have to hit rock bottom before they embrace the idea that they cannot rely on the corrupt system to save them from harm. And as long as they continue to have blind faith that the system will self correct, they will never act. The elites operate in the open with impunity because they know that human beings are more likely to seek out help from the system than they are to fix a problem for themselves. If someone was to switch off that single mass fantasy, the elites would be gone tomorrow.

    The second lesson of power is that perception of consent creates legitimate consent. To put it another way – When people believe that their peers and neighbors have accepted a certain level of tyranny, they too will often accept it so that they don’t stand out or draw attention to themselves as “aberrant”. People seeking power only need to create the illusion of mass consent. Even when the majority of people are against them, the perception of compliance can sometimes overwhelm logic.

    Control is usually achieved passively without force. Sometimes you don’t even need the threat of force; sometimes you only need to inspire a fear of standing out among the crowd.

    For example, the pandemic has been used the past six months as a tool for creating such a narrative. Mask wearing “rules” are particularly insidious as they conjure illusions of compliance and submission. “Everyone” is wearing a mask, therefore everyone must support medical tyranny. Mask wearing is a complete farce when it comes to the actual science of virology and viral spread. The CDC still does not recommend cloth masks to their own employees and only allows them to use N95 filtered masks. A recent and censored Danish study confirms the reality that masks are mostly useless.

    Strictly enforced cloth mask rules have done nothing to stop renewed spikes in infections in multiple countries and US states. The fact that in many places masks are required OUTDOORS despite endless scientific evidence showing that UV light and open air kills microorganisms including viruses shows that the lockdown response has nothing to do with science or saving lives. It is about control.

    We can take all logical factors into account, but, for a lot of people, if they see others wearing masks they too will wear a mask simply because they are afraid to be judged by what they perceive to be the majority. The reality is that a majority of people are wearing the masks grudgingly, and they would take them off tomorrow if they knew other people would do the same.

    This is why the mainstream media pushes mask wearing propaganda everyday, 24/7. News journalists stand on street corners or in open air parks and wear masks on camera. Politicians wear masks even when on camera in their own homes. Celebrities and companies try to sell the idea that mask wearing is “cool”. Hey, if you don’t wear a mask you could be putting hundreds or thousands of other people at risk and killing their grandmas, right?

    The masks do nothing. They achieve nothing in terms of stopping the virus spread or saving lives. This is a fact made obvious by the very infection numbers the establishment holds up as a rationale for the masks. But if the establishment elites through propaganda can convince you to wear a mask everyday, then this opens the door to them dictating many other aspects of your life. The masks are just a gateway into more destructive mandates.

    The solution to this type of tyranny is to stop caring what other people think, especially when the facts are on your side. In the town where I live, the vast majority of people have said no to the mask restrictions. If someone wants to wear a mask because they believe it will protect them, that’s fine. But, no one is going to tell us we have to wear them “for our own good”. That said, even if I was the ONLY person not wearing a mask around town, I would not care if it bothered others. Your credo has to be “try and force me to wear a mask, and watch what happens…”

    The third lesson of power is that force only leads to control if you respond with submission. A group of people can beat you or even kill you, but they can’t force you to comply if you do not fear for your own life.

    I find that the use of force by tyrants is predicated on the assumption that the people they are seeking to control will not fight back effectively. As soon as people do fight back effectively, the tyrant is shocked. Most tyrants rise to power, not because they have won multiple battles and subdued their opponents, but because they never had to fight in the first place. Or, they win a handful of easy battles, often staged to look more victorious than they really were, and then use those mediocre wins as a means to terrify all future opposition into not fighting. The tyrants start to believe their own lies and presume their own invincibility.

    Predators do not seek out hard targets, they seek out weak targets. The solution to tyrants is for the hard targets to seek them out and strike them in the midst of their confidence. When predators get hit back they have a habit of running away.

    But, this requires people who do not live in fear of what might happen when they fight back. The concept of sacrificing comfort (or much worse) can’t be an issue. Fear fades away when a person fights for something more than himself. It’s not always about personal survival, sometimes it’s about the survival of future generations, or the survival of a set of principles. As that fear disappears, so does the illusion of control that tyrants rely on.

    The fourth lesson of power is that ideals either stem from human conscience, or they do not. And if they do not, then they are not ideals worth adopting or fighting over. The conscience of the average person is not as ambiguous and changeable as the establishment would like you to believe. A lion’s share of human beings operate on a certain set of inherent morals and principles that are universally shared; they do not need to be taught these principles, they are born knowing them. If these rules were not ingrained into our psyches our species would have self destructed thousands of years ago.

    Establishment elites would like you to believe that all ideals are a product of environment, and that those who control the environment control the morals of the people by extension. This is a lie. Values such as freedom exist even in the most oppressive environments, and people seek it out even when the risk is overwhelming. Empathy is also inherent for most of us, but a certain percentage of people are born without the capacity for it. The REAL fight in the middle of any power struggle is the fight between those who are born with conscience, values and empathy, and those who are born without these grounding characteristics.

    Psychopathic tyrants desperately want to prove that all other people are just as devoid of humanity and soul as they are. They want to prove that the voice of conscience that guides us is a mask we wear to pretend that we are not evil at our core. Control comes from the fallacy that we are dependent on our environments to tell us who we are as individuals. Control comes from the notion that morals are relative, and that principles are social constructs.

    Conscience is inherent, but it is also a choice. You have the free will to listen to it, or ignore it. If a tyrant can convince you to ignore the voice of your own conscience then the only other guide in life is your environment. And, if that tyrant dominates every aspect of your environment, then he now has the power to rewrite your moral code, at least temporarily. You can be made to do terrible things you would not otherwise do, or support destructive causes and ideologies you would not otherwise support.

    The ultimate totalitarian power is the power to make people forget their own inner voice. The ultimate tool against evil is to listen to that voice and to not be afraid of the supposed consequences.

    The question of the facade of power is about to become the defining question of our epoch as the elitist establishment accelerates their agenda for greater centralized control of our lives. The truth they do not want you to understand is that they have no power. They have nothing. We could defy their mandates anytime we wish. We could do away with them tomorrow if we wanted. They are of no use to humanity, they serve no valuable purpose. They only seek to feed like vampires on the masses and fulfill their deranged fantasies of conquest. Sooner or later they will have to be dealt with – The sooner the better.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

  • Solomon Islands PM Defends Temporary Facebook Ban 
    Solomon Islands PM Defends Temporary Facebook Ban 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 22:40

    Last week, the Solomon Islands government approved a temporary block of social media website Facebook across the tiny island nation of 650,000, a move that top government officials said would protect people from cyberbullying and online defamation, according to Australian ABC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    By Monday, Prime Minister Manasseh Sogavare doubled-down on his government’s temporary measure to block the social media website, “as it was a necessity to preserve national unity.” He said Facebook undermines social cohesion. 

    “Cyberbullying on Facebook is widespread, people have been defamed by users who use fake names, and people’s reputations that have been built up over the years [are destroyed] in a matter of minutes.

    “We have [a] duty to cultivate national unity and the happy coexistence of our people … [Facebook] is undermining efforts to unite this country,” he said. 

    Australian ABC notes the ban has yet to go into effect, though the prospect of the ban has caused an uproar among younger people. Sogavare stands by the new measure, saying it was aimed at protecting the youth from “vile abusive language” and not a way to silence them. 

    It’s still unclear how the temporary ban will be enforced. The government still needs to determine whether it will use a firewall or utilize some other technique to block Facebook. 

    The move to ban the social media website comes as reports began to spread on the platform, accusing the government of misappropriating virus pandemic funds for social programs – prompting calls for an audit of the virus pandemic relief program.  

    This isn’t the first time a Pacific government has mulled over the idea of blocking Facebook – leaders in Papua New Guinea, Fiji, and Samoa have all considered similar options. 

    Besides Facebook, governments in Asia are also blocking Pornhub. Thailand’s government banned more than 190 porn sites, including Pornhub, earlier this month, prompting outrage among the younger generation. 

  • Joe Biden: Return Of The CFR
    Joe Biden: Return Of The CFR

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 22:05

    Submitted by Swiss Policy Research,

    A Joe Biden presidency means a “return to normality” simply because it means a return of the US Council on Foreign Relations (CFR).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    In 2008, Barack Obama received the names of his entire future cabinet already one month prior to his election by CFR Senior Fellow (and Citigroup banker) Michael Froman, as a Wikileaks email later revealed. Consequently, the key posts in Obama’s cabinet were filled almost exclusively by CFR members, as was the case in most cabinets since World War II. To be sure, Obama’s 2008 Republican opponent, the late John McCain, was a CFR member, too. Michael Froman later negotiated the TPP and TTIP international trade agreements, before returning to the CFR as a Distinguished Fellow.

    In 2017, CFR nightmare President Donald Trump immediately canceled these trade agreements – because he viewed them as detrimental to US domestic industry – which allowed China to conclude its own, recently announced RCEP free-trade area, encompassing 14 countries and a third of global trade. Trump also canceled other CFR achievements, like the multinational Iran nuclear deal and the UN climate and migration agreements, and he tried, but largely failed, to withdraw US troops from East Asia, Central Asia, the Middle East, Europe and Africa, thus seriously endangering the global US empire built over decades by the CFR and its 5000 elite members.

    Unsurprisingly, most of the US media, whose owners and editors are themselves members of the CFR, didn’t like President Trump. This was also true for most of the European media, whose owners and editors are members of international CFR affiliates like the Bilderberg Group and the Trilateral Commission, founded by CFR directors after the conquest of Europe during World War II. Moreover, it was none other than the CFR which in 1996 advocated a closer cooperation between the CIA and the media, i.e. a restart of the famous CIA Operation Mockingbird. Historically, OSS and CIA directors since William Donovan and Allen Dulles have always been CFR members.

    Joe Biden promised that he would form “the most diverse cabinet” in US history. This may be true in terms of skin color and gender, but almost all of his key future cabinet members have one thing in common: they are, indeed, members of the US Council on Foreign Relations.

    This is the case for Anthony Blinken (State), Alejandro Mayorkas (Homeland Security), Janet Yellen (Treasury), Michele Flournoy and Jeh Johnson (candidates for Defense), Linda Thomas-Greenfield (Ambassador to the UN), Richard Stengel (US Agency for Global Media; Stengel famously called propaganda “a good thing” at a 2018 CFR session), John Kerry (Special Envoy for Climate), Nelson Cunningham (candidate for Trade), and Thomas Donilon (candidate for CIA Director).

    Jake Sullivan, Biden’s National Security Advisor, is not (yet) a CFR member, but Sullivan has been a Senior Fellow at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace (a think tank “promoting active international engagement by the United States”) and a member of the US German Marshall Fund’s “Alliance For Securing Democracy” (a major promoter of the “Russiagate” disinformation campaign to restrain the Trump presidency), both of which are run by senior CFR members.

    Most of Biden’s CFR-vetted nominees supported recent US wars against Afghanistan, Iraq, Libya, Syria and Yemen as well as the 2014 regime change in Ukraine. Unsurprisingly, neoconservative Max Boot, the CFR Senior Fellow in National Security Studies and one of the most vocal opponents of the Trump administration, has called Biden’s future cabinet “America’s A-Team”.

    Thus, after four years of “populism” and “isolationism”, a Biden presidency will mean the return of the Council on Foreign Relations and the continuation of a tradition of more than 70 years. Indeed, the CFR was founded in 1921 in response to the “trauma of 1920”, when US President Warren Harding and the US Senate turned isolationist and renounced US global leadership after World War I. In 2016, Donald Trump’s “America First” campaign reactivated this 100 year old foreign policy trauma.

    Was the 2020 presidential election “stolen”, as some allege? There are certainly indications of significant statistical anomalies in key Democrat-run swing states. Whether these were decisive for the election outcome may be up to courts to decide. At any rate, Joe Biden may well be the first US President known to be involved in international corruption before even entering office.

    Why are most US and international media hardly interested in this? Well, why should they?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Boston Dynamics' Robot Dog Builds "Radiation Map" Of Chernobyl Reactor
    Boston Dynamics' Robot Dog Builds "Radiation Map" Of Chernobyl Reactor

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 21:30

    Spot, the autonomous robot dog, from Boston Dynamics, was equipped with radiation sensors to create a map of the radiation coming out of the Chernobyl nuclear power plant, according to news agency Ukrinform.  

    Researchers at the University of Bristol and nuclear experts from the State Specialized Enterprise “Central Enterprise for Radioactive Waste Management” recently deployed the four-legged robot to the Chernobyl Nuclear Power Plant Zone that has been abandoned since the catastrophic meltdown in 1986. The site has since been covered up with layers of steel and concrete to keep nuclear material from escaping into the atmosphere. 

    Weekly measurements around the Chernobyl site are mainly done by humans, which puts them at risk, unlike Spot, a robot who could do so without putting humans in grave danger of radiation poisoning. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Dave Megson-Smith, a researcher at the University of Bristol, was one of the scientists aiding Spot on its nuclear power plant adventure. Megson-Smith specializes in sensor development and equipped Spot with a collimated radiation sensor. 

    “We built a map of the radiation coming out of the front wall of Chernobyl power plant as we were in there with it,” Megson-Smith told IEEE Spectrum. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Spot was able to wander around the Chernobyl nuclear site, as well as into the New Safe Confinement structure, which is a steel dome that contains hazardous radioactivity. The robot surveyed radiation levels in the area, creating a 3D map of the distribution. 

    According to Megson-Smith, there’s a lot of uncertainty on how much radiation Spot is capable of handling. He said Spot is a “system that we can send into places where humans already can go, but where we just don’t want to send humans.”

    Video: Spot’s Chernobyl Adventure 

    Engineering a completely radiation-proof robot is challenging – as was seen after the Fukushima Daiichi nuclear disaster in 2011 when robots were sent to die as they surveyed the damaged nuclear power plant. 

    The future purpose of Spot at Chernobyl could be autonomous radiation mapping to detect radiation leaks. 

    Not too long ago, a different Spot was assigned to a BP Plc oil rig to “read gauges, look for corrosion, map out the facility, and even sniff out methane.” 

    While Spot conveniently completes tasks that may endanger humans – the most important takeaway is that robots will displace millions of jobs over this decade. 

  • This Thanksgiving, The Government Gifts Us COVID-19 Sex Advice
    This Thanksgiving, The Government Gifts Us COVID-19 Sex Advice

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Jim Bovard via The Libertarian Institute,

    Politicians and petty czars have canceled Thanksgiving across the nation.  What have government health departments offered in lieu of a family gathering? Endless idiotic advice for “safe sex” during COVID.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Vermont Department of Health captured the ethos of many health departments across the nation: “Decisions about sex and sexuality need to be balanced with personal and public health.” COVID Federal Superstar Anthony Fauci reflected that judgment when he declared in April that those who meet strangers for sex via Tinder or other dating apps are entitled to make their “choice regarding a risk.” Many government officials have been far more tolerant or even encouraging of risky sexual relations during the pandemic while mercilessly suppressing other social and economic relations.

    New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo is an Emmy-award winning hero of the COVID pandemic, regardless of the ten thousand elderly New Yorkers who died after he ordered nursing homes to admit COVID patients. Cuomo’s endless restrictions have been spurred by his view that “government can be a force for good,” as a New Yorker profile recently noted.

    While Cuomo has vehemently condemned synagogues that disobeyed his orders to disperse, other officials in New York give their blessings to behavior which is reckless even by “woke” standards. The New York City Health Department recommended that people who organize orgies should “Limit the size of your guest list. Keep it intimate.” The guidance does not quite specify “rooftop” but it is clearly implied: “Pick larger, more open, and well-ventilated spaces.”

    Dr. Demetre Daskalakis, New York City’s deputy health commissioner, boasts, “Our health department has a really strong record of being very sex positive.” At the same time that New York cops have violently assaulted people for not wearing face masks, the city government officially sanctioned “glory holes.” The Big Apple’s health department urged people to “be creative with… physical barriers, like walls, that allow sexual contact while preventing close face-to-face contact.”

    California Governor Gavin Newsom has become infamous for his bizarre list of Thanksgiving prohibitions to fight COVID. But the pandemic has uncorked other official weirdness in the Golden State.

    The San Francisco Department of Public Health took preemptive action to re-define “premature” out of existence. The local bureaucrats advised:Quicker can be better. The longer we are within 6 feet of someone, the greater the risk.” Will health departments take the next step, promoting Revolutionary Era imagery celebrating the return of the “Minute Man”?

    As part of its recommendations for “navigating the landscape of love,” San Francisco bureaucrats urged to “embrace dirty thoughts. And clean surfaces.” The guidance stresses the importance of cleaning “shared toys,” especially when switching “collars” and similar items from one body to another. The department also noted: “When it comes to COVID-19 risk, outdoors is better than indoors.” Considering that the local government already permits homeless people to perform any other bodily function on Market Street, adding copulation might not be that much of a change in the local scenery.

    The Fenway Health Center, a “Federally Qualified Community Health Center,” served up bad news to spatially-challenged Bostonians: “Using the social distancing recommendation of 6 feet, oral sex may still put you at risk of COVID.” Bizarrely, the Fenway Center urges people NOT to wear masks during hook-ups: “Leave the protective gear to the medical professionals and those who have the virus.”

    The Austin, Texas Health Department alerted local residents: “COVID-19 has been found in fecal matter. Avoid activity that could allow virus from feces to enter your mouth.” In the COVID era, “Eat shit and die” has gone from being a juvenile taunt to being an ominous government health warning. Similar warnings on the dangers of “rimming” occurred in other health department recommendations.

    The City of Milwaukee Health Department advises, “Masturbation will not spread COVID-19, especially if you wash your hands (and any sex toys) with soap and water for at least 20 seconds before and after sex.” But if you wash your hands for only 15 seconds afterwards, then ‘Rona wins. Actually, if people need to be told to wash their hands after taking their pleasure, they are probably beyond redemption. Besides, do post-game prophylactics make any sense after a solo performance?

    Many other government agencies have become cheerleaders for self-reliance, as if there was a dire need for officialdom to specify how hundreds of millions of Americans should let off steam. At last report, the World Health Organization had not yet added masturbation to its Five Heroic Act list though it may soon qualify for a #ThanksHealthHeroes honorable mention.

    In the same way that politicians focused myopically on COVID transmission risks to justify inflicting vast collateral damage on the economy, health departments offer recommendations that might avoid COVID transmission but could be otherwise ruinous.  Instead of meeting sex partners online, the New York City Health Department recommends, “Video dates, sexting, subscription-based fan platforms, sexy ‘Zoom parties’ or chat rooms may be options for you.” Other health departments made similar recommendations.

    So maybe invite Jeffrey Toobin to your Zoom party? (Toobin was fired after masturbating during a New Yorker zoom call.)  Many of the “chat rooms” that bureaucrats recommend are stockful of jailbait, police and FBI agents masquerading and looking to entrap people for underage sex or other offenses.  Maybe someone should ask Jeff Bezos about his billion dollar emailed pictures of his private parts? The National Security Agency and foreign governments vacuum up a huge amount of online activity; anything that people reveal to a group of people online could easily turn up in their dossier.

    Since the pandemic began, politicians have claimed a prerogative to micro-manage citizens’ lives with one harebrained edict after another. For instance, Pennsylvania Governor Tom Wolf decreed on November 17 that people must wear masks in their own homes whenever someone visits who does not live in that household. On Monday, Gov. Wolf banned all alcohol sales in bars and restaurants on Thanksgiving Eve – a completely arbitrary edict that sows havoc and will do nothing to make COVID vanish.

    Wolf would never dare to outlaw sex outside of wedlock but somehow politicians captured the right to throttle almost every other aspect of people’s lives. But a “copulation exemption” to the de facto COVID cancellation of the Bill of Rights makes no sense. People deserve as much freedom to drink rancid Rolling Rock beer on Thanksgiving Eve as they do to throw the Philly dice for a Tinder Thanksgiving treat. When politicians are permitted to selectively nullify freedom, the injustices will be exceeded only by the absurdities.

  • Thanksgiving "Ask Me Anything" with Ed and Jack
    Thanksgiving "Ask Me Anything" with Ed and Jack


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 20:55

    Real Vision managing editor Ed Harrison welcomes Jack Farley for a Thanksgiving “Ask Me Anything” special edition of the Daily Briefing. Sourcing questions from the Real Vision Exchange, Jack asks Ed questions about whether the U.S. will enter a second round of lockdowns, and whether the equity market could once again undergo a major crash. Ed shares his views on the future of debt, deflation, and commodities, over the next 30 years, as well as his technique learning new languages. Jack and Ed share the ways in which they follow market news, as well as their views on the difference between accounting antics and downright fraud. Lastly, Jack and Ed give an inside look at Real Vision’s ongoing mission to democratize finance.

  • These Are The Best (And Worst) Places To Live During The Coronavirus Era
    These Are The Best (And Worst) Places To Live During The Coronavirus Era

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 20:30

    The coronavirus pandemic has exposed the shortcomings of the global health-care system, while also exposing how developed and developing world economies could demonstrate such unexpected responses. Tiny South Korea has managed to suppress the virus with mass testing and tracing. The US, meanwhile, has recorded the most deaths, while China has already vaccinated more than 1 million people before its leading vaccine effort has even been approved.

    With so many variables at play, Bloomberg has tried to develop a ranking for which countries fared the best during the coronavirus outbreak. While crunching the numbers, reporters asked questions like ‘where were the best places to be during the coronavirus pandemic’? and ‘where was the virus handled most effectively?’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The rankings were based on two broad categories, COVID status and quality of life.  Additionally, Bloomberg introduced what it called the “Covid Resilience Ranking scores” for the economies, which purported to measure how resistant a given economy was to the disruptions caused by the coronavirus. There were 10 key metrics: from growth in virus cases to the overall mortality rate, testing capabilities and – importantly – whether the country had managed to secure any supply agreements for the COVID-19 vaccines that are about to hit the market in the west.

    Unsurprisingly (this is Bloomberg, after all), the top three finishers were New Zealand in first place (the country used a massively costly economic lockdown to quash a few mild flareups), Japan in second (the country has seen remarkably few cases and deaths despite Japan’s perceived slowness in implementing measures to prevent the virus from spreading, and finally Taiwan, which has been hailed as having one of the most successful approaches to combating the virus.

    To try and simplify things, Bloomberg kept the ranking to economies with a GDP of at least $200 billion. According to Bloomberg, the three top performers all took early concrete steps to stanch the spread of the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ironically, Bloomberg noted that border control was a critical component of the most successful countries’ strategies, beginning with Beijing’s decision to cordon off Hubei Province and the city of Wuhan.

    Here are the complete rankings, courtesy of Bloomberg:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, Bloomberg pointed out that authoritarian countries generally outperformed democracies like the US and UK. And while lockdowns have been deployed around the world with mixed results, Bloomberg claimed that there’s nothing more effective than when citizens have faith in the authorities and their guidance. When that happens – and Bloomberg cites Japan and Sweden as examples – lockdowns aren’t necessary to stanch the surge in cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But while the US has lagged in several aspects of its response to the virus, it holds the lead in the number of vaccine agreements it has forged.

    In the end, whoever has the vaccines will likely be in the best position moving forward.

  • Watch: Obama Blames Trump For His Own Border "Cages"
    Watch: Obama Blames Trump For His Own Border "Cages"

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    Barack Obama took a shot at President Trump in an interview Wednesday, blaming him for border ‘cages’ that were actually instituted and used under the former President’s administration.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Obama was decrying the level of support that Trump received from hispanic voters during the election campaign.

    “But there’s a lot of evangelical Hispanics who, you know, the fact that Trump says racist things about Mexicans,” Obama said during the interview with with The Breakfast Club radio show.

    “Or puts detainees, you know, undocumented workers, in cages — they think that’s less important than the fact that, you know, he supports their views on gay marriage or abortion, right?” Obama claimed.

    It is more than a tad ironic that Obama begins by talking about how metropolitan elites can be out of touch with the rest of America, and then immediately goes on to pigeon hole Hispanic voters as only caring about abortion.

    Are hispanic voters incapable of caring about economic issues or crime? Just because they are brown?

    That isn’t the most egregious aspect of his comments, however, given that he completely ignores the fact that for many years the so called ‘cages’ were used by the Department of Homeland Security under the Obama administration.

    It was in 2014, two years before Trump was elected, that the ‘cages’ story reached its peak, with overcrowded and squalid conditions at holding facilities making headlines.

    While leftists pretty much ignored the story while Obama was in the White House, it suddenly became a major issue when Trump took office.

    Indeed, the very same photos from 2014 were recycled and presented as if they were taken during Trump’s tenure.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Democrats and leftist celebrities hammered Trump, using the footage and photos that were taken under Obama and Biden’s regime.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This continued right up until the election.

    When the conditions at the border facilities again made headlines in 2018 and 2019, particularly because children were being separated from their families, Trump asked that pressure be put on House Democrats to pass a law to end the practice:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    When Democrats failed to do so, Trump signed an executive order demanding that the practice of separating children be immediately halted:

    Democrats then complained that the EO wouldn’t fix the issue, while still doing nothing themselves:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez even used the story as a photo-op, fake crying while wearing designer clothing and an expensive watch.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It was later revealed that the “cage” AOC was behind concealed nothing but a parking lot.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    When news organisations, including Infowars, attempted to highlight this, the photographer who took the images claimed copyright and demanded they be removed from the story.

    If Joe Biden takes office in January, expect photos of kids in cages to return. He has repeatedly promised to rapidly send an amnesty deal to the Senate within the first 100 days of his presidency that would give amnesty to 11 million immigrants who currently reside in the US without documentation.

    Customs and Border Protection (CBP) Chief Mark Morgan has warned that if President Trump’s enforcement priorities on illegal immigration are abandoned, the US will see a huge “invasion” at the border.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Indeed, reports suggest that the Biden border rush has already begun.

  • Black Friday Shoppers Expected To Spend More Online Than In Stores For First Time
    Black Friday Shoppers Expected To Spend More Online Than In Stores For First Time

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 19:35

    The coronavirus has accelerated a trend in American holiday-season consumption: the shift away from packing malls on Black Friday, and toward shopping online, placing some orders as early as “Prime Day” (which Amazon held in October this year). Instead of braving the elements and the lines, a growing number of Americans instead place most, or all, of their holiday gift orders via Amazon.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In recent years, the trend was attributed to  bitterly cold weather and other impediments. But old habits die hard, and up until last year, millions of Americans continued to pack into stores on Black Friday, with many big box stores opening earlier and earlier (eliciting public backlash over pulling workers and shoppers away from their families).

    But as COVID-19 infections peak and governors tighten restrictions on ‘non-essential’ businesses like retailers, analysts are bracing for e-commerce sales to finally eclipse brick-and-mortar sales for the first time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why? Because according to a survey from Deloitte, for the first time ever, more American holiday shoppers are planning to spend a total of $189 billion, which would be a staggering 33% from last year. That’s equal to two years’ growth in one season. “This year is unlike anything else,” said Ken Perkins, president and founder of Retail Metrics. “People are going to be really adverse to come into stores on Black Friday, so traffic will be relatively more modest. Curbside pick will be extremely important this holiday season. Impulse buying will also fall off as online shopping tends to be very targeted.”

    Retailers (including specifically department stores) that rely on mall traffic have been particularly hard-hit this year. Just the other day, we reported that America’s brick-and-mortar stores owe a staggering $52 billion in rents.

    What’s even more worrisome: department stores even reported steep declines in online traffic ahead of Thanksgiving, according to CFRA Research analyst Camilla Yanushevsky. That could be a sign that consumers are focusing on proven e-commerce platforms like Amazon and a select few others, while the laggards are doomed.

    However, there are exceptions, as with every trend. Bloomberg points out that Williams-Sonoma and TJX Corp – owner of HomeGoods and TJ Maxx – could outperform as the rush to the suburbs has led to heightened demand for furnishings, while TJ Maxx’s everyday bargains typically attract more shoppers in hard economic times (though according to the economic wizards on the Wall Street Journal’s editorial board, the Dow’s latest milestone has NOTHING to do with central bank liquidity injections and EVERYTHING to do with the “wonderful engine of prosperity” that is the American economy).

    “Even with the vaccine coming, people are moving out of the city, into the burbs, and they need to fill their homes,” one analyst at RetailMetrics said.

    Other potential beneficiaries, according to Bloomberg, include Best Buy, Conn’s Inc and Acco Brands, as demand for hot gadgets like the PS5 and new phones from Samsung and Apple leads to a surge in sales. Bloomberg also cited Mattel, Hasbro, Amazon and Walmart as other potential holiday season outperformers.

    According to Bloomberg and CNBC, COVID has helped to separate the wheat from the chaff in the retail space, compounding the problems of retailers who neglected their digital business, while rewarding companies that did, via increased opportunities for synergies (like order online, pickup in store functionality).

    This holiday season should put all that to the test.

    As the start of the holiday shopping season arrives, some analysts are getting worried. JPMorgan Chase’s Matthew Boss recently cut his estimate for Q4 same-store sales – one key metric for retailers that’s closely watched by analysts – to below-consensus levels. If the shift to ecommerce is as dramatic as the Deloitte survey suggests it might be, then that might prove to have been a prescient move.

  • Illinois Senators Durbin and Duckworth Are Among The Book Burners Happy With Big Tech Censorship
    Illinois Senators Durbin and Duckworth Are Among The Book Burners Happy With Big Tech Censorship

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 19:10

    Submitted by Mark Glennon of Wirepoints

    Democracy is subverted when the free exchange of information and opinion is suppressed.

    That subversion is now reality in America and much of the world thanks primarily to censorship by big technology platforms and our unapologetically dishonest and biased national media.

    Last week, the Judiciary Committee of the United States Senate held hearings on one of those causes, big tech censorship. If you are unaware of how pernicious and common that censorship has become, particularly by Twitter and Facebook, you are dangerously uninformed. Comedian Bill Maher, hardly a right-winger, said it right: The censorship is “evil” and “f—ed up.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The new media gatekeepers

    This is not about Trump. He and censorship of him are now in mostly in the rear view mirror. Though censorship was blatantly targeted at him, it’s the future that matters now,  — whether the marketplace of ideas can survive in a world where big tech’s authoritarianism is broad and growing.

    For example, Twitter and Facebook last week censored Oxford University scientists who posted an article about a recent study questioning the effectiveness of face masks to stop COVID-19. One of the censored authors said such censorship is “one of the reasons we face a global meltdown of free thinking and science.” His name, sadly ironic, is Thomas Jefferson.

    Question big tech censorship and even prominent liberals face retribution. For example, Glenn Greenwald, a respected liberal journalist, dared to question big tech’s brazen suppression of stories about Hunter Biden’s emails and foreign influence peddling. His story on it was killed by The Intercept. Commendably, Greenwald then resigned from that publication.

    With hundreds of other examples readily available, it was therefore entirely appropriate and urgent for the Judiciary Committee to take up the matter. Aside from the meltdown of free thinking and science that Prof. Jefferson described, many of America’s razor-thin elections beyond the presidential race could easily have been turned by false narratives rigged by big tech. Easily.

    But how did Illinois Senator Dick Durbin, a Judiciary Committee member, preface his comments?

    It’s a big waste of time and a political stunt, he told us. “I think there are more important and timely questions…but we are trying to determine whether or not the social media instruments of America are fair to the Republican Party.”

    What’s more important? Oh, national security, the pandemic and the possibility that Trump would refuse to leave when the election is certified, Durbin said.

    No, Senator Durbin. The Judiciary Committee is the top legislative oversight body on the rule of law in what is supposed to be the world’s leading democracy. National security and coronavirus are not within the committee’s charge. And a speculative case on presidential transition is premature for a hearing. What is within its jurisdiction, and should be top priorities, are freedom of expression and the hotly debated Section 230 of the Communications Decency Act, which gives big tech immunity and central the censorship issue.

    As for the censorship, bring it on. Durbin wants more.

    He wants more censorship to combat hate crimes, he said. That means stifling hate speech. Citing numbers on hate crimes, he said, “It’s clear to me that it’s more important that social media combat this more than ever.  “Are you looking the other way on that?” he asked Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg.

    We’ve seen repeatedly that hate speech, to many on the left, is pretty much everything said by anybody on the right.  Would Durbin include among his concerns the endless labeling of some 72 million Republican voters as white supremacists and fascists or violence by radical leftists who are encouraged by that kind of labeling? No, Durbin made it clear he didn’t mean that. “This is not Antifa. These are documented hate crimes from the FBI…”

    Under the First Amendment, hate speech is permitted as long as it doesn’t rise to the level of provoking violence. That’s as it should be. Everybody should be free to express hatred towards, for example, those they regard as fascists or communists, provided they don’t incite violence. But the First Amendment does not cover private entities like big tech and Durbin, like many on the left, showed no interest in letting First Amendment be the precedent for big tech censorship, provided it is targeted selectively at the right.

    Some of Durbin’s colleagues on the Judiciary Committee joined him with calls for more censorship by big tech. Sen. Chris Coons (D-DE), for example, asked Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey why Twitter doesn’t have a standalone climate change misinformation policy. “Helping to disseminate climate denialism in my view, further facilitates and accelerates one of the greatest existential threats to our world.”

    Illinois’ other senator, Tammy Duckworth, earlier had a particularly stupefying response to concerns about big tech censorship. Regarding a previous hearing on the topic by a different Senate committee, she said it was Repubicans “aiding Trump’s and Russia’s efforts to use social media for misinformation campaigns” and “undermine confidence in our democracy.”

    Got that? You’re helping Russia if you’re against censorship.

    Despite such attitudes, the Judiciary Committee hearing uncovered a major turn for the worse on tech censorship: They collude on who and what to censor. Facebook, Twitter and Google use a software communication tool called Centra to communicate on who and what they want to stifle, which magnifies the impact of any decision by any one of them. What’s clear, however, is that a solution must be found because a keystone of open society is shattered.

    A telling postscript to the hearing is that NBC, ABC and CBS all refused any coverage of it.

    How to address the problem of big tech censorship is challenging and reasonable minds differ. Their platforms are more powerful than any other public forum in history, yet their censors make no pretense of selectively enforcing their dictates or applying any of the time-honored principles our courts have developed under the First Amendment. And Section 230 is a complicated matter.

    Pending a solution, here is where we are:

    First, what tens of millions of people read for news is determined by the two people shown here.

    Second, the subversion of democracy by suppression of the free exchange of information and opinion is no longer just a threat. It’s here.

  • Massive Armada Of IRGC Boats Mobilize In Gulf Amid Rumors Israeli Strike Imminent
    Massive Armada Of IRGC Boats Mobilize In Gulf Amid Rumors Israeli Strike Imminent

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 18:45

    The naval forces of the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) on Thursday conducted large-scale exercises in the Strait of Hormuz at a moment Tehran believes Israel will launch a preemptive strike aimed at drawing Trump into ordering US military action in the region before he leaves office in January.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via IRNA/Press TV

    According to state-run English language PressTV, “The event saw sailors, enlisted with the popular volunteer Basij force, taking to the waters aboard more than 1,000 light and semi-heavy-lift vessels.”

    Photos showed an impressive number of small but fast military boats that are typically used by the IRGC Navy (which is separate from the much larger national navy of the Islamic Republic) to harass and encircle larger ships, whether tankers or foreign warships.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via IRNA/Press TV

     IRGC Admiral Ali Reza Tangsiri, who oversaw the maneuvers, called it a display of strength and a showcasing of Iran’s “maritime power” which provides security in the Arabian and Oman Seas. 

    Crucially the ‘show of force’ comes amid widespread reports that Trump is mulling some of kind of preemptive action against either Iran or its regional allies, such as the powerful Shia militias in Iraq.

    Earlier this month The New York Times reported that Trump’s advisers talked him down from ordering a strike, which they argued would certainly spiral into a larger war

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Included in the “strike options” were most likely plans to hit the Natanz enrichment facility, according to the report, which suffered sabotage and damage last summer in a likely Israeli covert operation but which is being repaired and rebuilt.

    Israel too is said to be preparing for such a scenario, with its armed forces said to be in a high state of readiness. Iran is apparently taking these reports very seriously. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Axios reported Wednesday based on unnamed senior Israeli sources: 

    The Israel Defense Forces have in recent weeks been instructed to prepare for the possibility that the U.S. will conduct a military strike against Iran before President Trump leaves office.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Middle East war correspondent for Al Rai Media, Elijah Magnier has cited unnamed Iranian military sources who say they believe Israeli leaders are planning to create a “pretext” designed to trigger US intervention just weeks before the inauguration of Joe Biden:

    In an unprecedentedly high level of military readiness, the “Axis of the Resistance” led by Iran has declared a maximum alert on all fronts, as a preparation for a possible battle or war breaking out in the Middle East prior to the arrival in office of President-elect Joe Biden.

    Sources within the “Axis of the Resistance” say that “the US may not be planning for a war against Iran with President Donald Trump leaving office soon. However, it is not excluded that the “bully of the neighborhood”, Prime Minister Benyamin Netanyahu, would like to carry out a swift hit on the Iranian nuclear facilities in order to sabotage the nuclear deal ready for when Biden takes over. In the case of an Israeli bombing followed by an Iranian retaliation, the Trump administration can then intervene with the pretext of “defending” Israel.

    This means that it’s more than likely we’ll see Iran ramp up its military exercises and shows of strength as the weeks wind down on the Trump presidency. 

  • YouTube Attempts To Silence The Mises Institute
    YouTube Attempts To Silence The Mises Institute

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 18:20

    By Jeff Diest of the Mises Institute

    YouTube, the dominant video platform owned by Google, decided yesterday to remove a Mises Institute video. This decision apparently lasts for all eternity, cannot be appealed to an actual human, and comes with this friendly admonition: “Because it’s the first time, this is just a warning. If it happens again, your channel will get a strike and you won’t be able to do things like upload, post, or live stream for 1 week.” 

    The video, a talk by Tom Woods titled “The Covid Cult” with more than 1.5 million views, was recorded at our live event in Texas two weeks ago. It offered challenges to the official narrative surrounding the coronavirus, particularly with respect to mask mandates. Woods’s talk featured several charts showing rises in Covid “cases” across multiple cities and countries not long after imposing mask rules, demonstrating how such rules apparently have little effect on slowing transmission of the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The speech was nothing less than a heartfelt tour de force against the terrible lockdowns and pseudoscience plaguing the debate over Covid, and a call to reexamine tradeoffs and priorities. It was, as you might imagine, a mix of unassailable data combined with our friend Tom’s strong prescription for liberty and personal choice rather than centralized state edicts.

    In other words, YouTube had no earthly business removing it. This kind of discourse seems to me the best and highest use for YouTube, its most important function.  

    “Big Digital,” as Professor Michael Rectenwald terms tech companies, have become “governmentalities”: supposedly private enterprises turned into instruments of state power and state narratives. This sordid process is different for each company, (some are more complicit than others, a few are heroically non-compliant) but it involves a mix of early start-up funding; connections and contracts with state agencies, particularly relating to defense and surveillance; and propaganda campaigns in service of state narratives. Rectenwald explains this phenomenon in his own recent talk titled “The Google Election“:

    In short, Google, Facebook and others are not strictly private sector entities; they are governmentalities in the sense that I have given to the term. They are extensions and apparatuses of the state. Furthermore, these platforms are governmentalities with a particular interest in the growth and extension of governmentality itself. This includes championing every kind of “subordinated” and newly created identity class that they can find or create, because such “endangered” categories require state acknowledgement and protection. Thus, the state’s circumference continues to expand. Big Digital is partial to the interests and growth of the state. It not only does business with statists but also shares their values. This helps makes sense of its leftist bent and their preference for the deep state Democrats. Leftism is statism.

    We encourage readers to consider the entirety of Rectenwald’s talk, and his sobering book Google Archipelago for his thorough treatment of the facts and realities behind tech companies and the US state. This is not alarmism or conspiracies, but documented examples of how Google, Facebook, YouTube, Twitter, Instagram, LinkedIn and others actively participate—including financially—in a melding of corporate and state power. 

    This, then, is real fascism. Big Digital—what writer Ilana Mercer calls “Deep Tech”— is not a collection of private companies in the sense we think of such. They are partners of the federal government, committed to ideological service as part and parcel of their own bottom line.

    Thankfully, the sneering call to “build your own platforms” is being answered. Companies like Bitchute and LBRY (its video platform is Odysee) continue to host Mises Institute content, and promise to continue doing so. In fact, you can view Dr. Woods’s forbidden talk at those respective source here and here.

    Truth tellers matter more than ever. It’s time for our own institutions and platforms, which is precisely why the Mises Institute exists.

  • Vornado Pulls $5 Billion Office Sale Plans On Buildings It Co-Owns With The Trump Organization
    Vornado Pulls $5 Billion Office Sale Plans On Buildings It Co-Owns With The Trump Organization

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 17:55

    The Trump Organization’s real estate partner, Vornado Realty Trust, reportedly had to shelve its plans to try and sell off office buildings that would have helped the Trumps pay off $400 million in upcoming debt. 

    Vornado co-owns an office tower in San Francisco and another in Manhattan and “couldn’t attract a buyer” at the price it was seeking, according to an exclusive by The Wall Street Journal. It had hoped to raise $5 billion from the deleveraging in total, of which $1.5 billion would have made its way to The Trump Organization. 

    Vornado Chief Executive Steven Roth had said this month there was “active interest from investors” for the deals. It looks as though the “active interest” may not have been at the right price, however. 

    The news comes as no surprise since both San Francisco and New York have been disproportionately clobbered due to the pandemic. At the beginning of the year, they were the most expensive markets in the U.S. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Building co-owned by TTO and Vornado (Source: WSJ)

    Trump’s organization was hoping to use the windfall to pay off more than $400 million in debt it owes over the next few years. The refinancing picture for the organization seems hazy, especially due to the commercial real estate climate. Some banks have been reluctant to do business with Trump given his political activities, as well, the Journal notes

    The Trump Organization attests that its business is financially sound, stating: “The Trump Organization is an incredible company with tremendous cash flow. We have never been stronger.”

    Since Trump’s Organization holds a minority stake in the buildings, it has “no control over the sales decision making”. 

    Vornado says it is now focused on refinancing the assets. Doug Harmon, an investment adviser at Cushman & Wakefield, said: “We are now focusing more on refinancing both assets. When international investors can travel with less restrictions, and the path back to normal is under way.”

    With the pandemic looking more likely than ever to “end” now with a President Biden in office and vaccines on the way, perhaps Trump will find his first foray back to the private sector met with a stroke of luck. 

  • A Thanksgiving Worthy Of America
    A Thanksgiving Worthy Of America

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 17:30

    Authored by Michael Warren via RealClearPublicAffairs.com,

    Turkey and stuffing. Detroit Lions Football. Turkey trots. Parades and the arrival of Santa followed by frenzied shopping on Black Friday and Cyber Monday. Maybe a bit of charity on Giving Tuesday. Thanksgiving is the ultimate American holiday. What more could you need?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How about this: gratitude, blessings, and humility. Unfortunately, the annual celebration has been overshadowed by consumerism and entertainment culture.

    Let’s explore the origins of Thanksgiving in colonial America, which centered around the virtues that are crucial to sustaining our way of life.

    The Pilgrims were English religious dissenters who settled in Plymouth in 1620. They made history by seeking asylum and signing the Mayflower Compact – quite possibly the first written agreement among men that founded a new government. They were quickly struck with a great sickness and began to starve; in the first year, nearly half died.

    In 1621, with the help of Wampanoag tribe – especially Samoset and Squanto – the Pilgrims survived and even flourished. They held a huge three day feast. But that multicourse meal is not the precursor to the Thanksgiving that we will celebrate later this week. That would come two years later when the Pilgrims faced a brutal drought.

    Then, Governor William Bradford led the people in fervent prayer to the Almighty for relief, and in a few hours, the heavens opened with torrents of rain. To commemorate that event, Bradford declared a day of Thanksgiving, which included a large feast and regular homage to God for His blessings.

    Afterwards, colonial governors periodically proclaimed days of Thanksgiving in response to favorable events and conditions. The first continent-wide celebration was in 1777 when the Continental Congress declared a Thanksgiving in light of the colonists’ victory at the Battle of Saratoga.

    When George Washington became President, Congress asked him to declare a Thanksgiving to honor the first Congress’s many accomplishments, which included the Bill of Rights and setting up a functioning federal government.

    Washington declared a Thanksgiving for the fourth Thursday in November. His proclamation recommended that the people devote the day “to the service of that great and glorious Being who is the beneficent author of all that good that was, that is, or that will be; that we may all unite in rendering Him our sincere and humble thanks for his Kind care and protection . . . for the signal and manifold mercies and favorable interpositions of His providence” during the American Revolution, in creating the Constitution, and protecting the “civil and religious liberty with which we are blessed.”

    Presidents Adams and Madison followed suit – but presidential encouragements of Thanksgiving soon stopped. 

    Thanksgiving’s resurrection occurred when Sarah Josepha Hale convinced President Lincoln to declare Thanksgiving during the Civil War. Despite the carnage, Lincoln’s Thanksgiving Proclamation explained several reasons why the nation should be thankful, remarking, “No human counsel hath devised nor hath any mortal hand worked out these great things. They are the gracious gifts of the Most High God, who, while dealing with us in anger for our sins, hath nevertheless remembered mercy.”

    Lincoln recommended that while offering up the ascriptions justly due to Him for such singular deliverances and blessings, they do also, with humble penitence for our national perverseness and disobedience . . . fervently implore the interposition of the Almighty Hand to heal the wounds of the nation and to restore it as soon as may be consistent with the Divine purposes to the full enjoyment of peace, harmony, tranquillity and Union.

    Since Lincoln, Thanksgiving has become an annual tradition. But like so much of our civic calendar, it has been gutted of its original meaning. Perhaps now, in the wake of the most contentious election in modern times and in the grips of the worst pandemic in a century, we can return to the foundations of this magnificent holiday.

    This Thanksgiving, take stock of our great blessings, including our Declaration of Independence, Constitution, and prosperity. Give thanks, express humility, and pray for your family and us all. That would be a Thanksgiving worthy of America.

  • 'Kraken' Lawsuit Accuses Iran Of 'Monitoring And Manipulating' 2020 Election, Stoking Deep Dive By Journalist
    'Kraken' Lawsuit Accuses Iran Of 'Monitoring And Manipulating' 2020 Election, Stoking Deep Dive By Journalist

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 17:05

    An interesting thread has popped up on Twitter in the wake of attorney Sidney Powell’s recently filed lawsuits alleging widespread election fraud in Michigan and Georgia (‘the Kraken’) – which claims in part that China and Iran monitored and manipulated elections, “including the most recent US general election in 2020.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Journalist and Iran expert Heshmat Alavi, who describes himself as a “political activist and supporter for regime change in Iran,” has compiled a lengthy exposé in response to this claim, and brings readers down the rabbit hole regarding Iran’s penetration into US politics.

    The thread is heavy on media, so it will be embedded in its entirety:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Doctor Who Demanded Mandatory Mask Law Pictured Partying Maskless On Boat Surrounded By Bikini-Clad Women
    Doctor Who Demanded Mandatory Mask Law Pictured Partying Maskless On Boat Surrounded By Bikini-Clad Women

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 16:40

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The world’s so-called “hottest doctor,” who has repeatedly called for mandatory mask laws and social distancing, was pictured maskless partying on a boat in Miami while surrounded by bikini-clad women.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mikhail Varshavski, known as ‘Dr. Mike’ online, completely contradicted his own advice by throwing a ‘super-spreader’ 31st birthday party for himself on November 12.

    “A picture of Varshavski on a boat in Sunset Harbor surrounded by 14 other people — most of them bikini-clad women — has since done the rounds with his fans calling him out for hypocrisy,” reports the Daily Mail.

    Another video shows the doctor massaging a woman’s neck on the deck of the boat while wearing a face scarf that isn’t even covering his nose.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Varshavski behavior is completely hypocritical given that he has repeatedly lectured others for ignoring social distancing and demanded mandatory mask laws to save lives.

    “If by not wearing a mask you put other’s lives at risk it might make sense to make it mandatory. Wouldn’t you agree?” Varshavski tweeted back in June.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A month later, the doctor appeared on Fox Business and asserted, “Wearing a mask decreases the spread of this virus and that is of utmost importance for people’s health and the health of our economy.”

    “So please, if you’re going outside in public and are going to be around other people, wear a mask,” he added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During a YouTube interview with Dr. Anthony Fauci, Varshavski also said, “Social distancing is incredibly important. That’s how we control the spread of this virus.”

    Varshavski has also appeared on CNN numerous times telling Americans to abide by coronavirus rules to which he is apparently not subject.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Varshavski’s fans savaged him after the embarrassing photos were leaked.

    “You are supposed to be the example. I admired and respected you. Now that is all lost,” said one.

    “I never cared about my health, I never trusted doctors before him, now I don’t know what to believe or do anymore,” added another. “I was able to bring my family back to reality only with the information and arguments he has provided in his videos.”

    Apparently for Varshavski (and numerous other prominent figures as highlighted in the video below), it’s very much ‘do as we say, not as we do’.

    *  *  *

    New limited edition merch now available! Click here. In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

  • Politico Exposes Secretive Consulting Firm Set To Dominate Biden Cabinet
    Politico Exposes Secretive Consulting Firm Set To Dominate Biden Cabinet

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 16:15

    A shadowy consulting firm which openly brags about its ability to connect clients to the White House is set to prominently feature in the Biden administration, according to Politico.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Vice President Joe Biden and former Deputy National Security Advisor Tony Blinken

    Founded in 2017 by Tony Blinken – Joe Biden’s pick for Secretary of State – WestExec Advisers advertises itself as “quite literally, the road to the Situation Room,” adding “and it is the road everyone associated with WestExec Advisors has crossed many times en route to meetings of the highest national security consequences.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another WestExec executive, Michèle Flournoy, is a top contender for Secretary of Defense, while former WestExec principal, Avril Haines, is Biden’s pick for director of national intelligence.

    Meanwhile, WestExec’s client list is just as secretive.

    Because its staffers aren’t lobbyists, they are not required to disclose who they work for. They also aren’t bound by the Biden transition’s restrictions on hiring people who have lobbied in the past year.

    Such high-powered Washington consulting firms are “the unintended consequence” of greater disclosure requirements for registered lobbyists, said Mandy Smithberger, director of the Center for Defense Information at the Project on Government Oversight.

    By not directly advocating for federal dollars on behalf of their clients, they don’t have to publicly divulge who is paying them and for what activities, such as the connections they make with government agencies, she said. But it is also impossible to assess the influence they have on federal expenditures. –Politico

    “They avoid becoming registered lobbyists or foreign agents and are instead becoming strategic consultants,” said Smithberger.

    What’s more, WestExec employs a ton of former Democratic national security and foreign policy officials who have been involved in fundraising for Biden’s campaign, have joined his transition team, or have acted as unofficial advisers. In fact, 21 of the 38 WestExec employees listed on the firm’s website donated to the Biden campaign – with Flournoy raising over $100,000 alone.

    Five WestExec staffers — all veterans of the Obama administration — are on leave from the firm to help staff Biden’s review teams for the Pentagon, the Treasury Department, the Council of Economic Advisers and other agencies, which are charged with coordinating the transfer of power between outgoing Trump officials and Biden’s appointees.

    Two other WestExec principals were among those who briefed Biden last week on national security: Bob Work, who served as deputy secretary of defense in the Obama administration and was asked to remain on for the first few months of the Trump administration, and David Cohen, a former deputy director of both the CIA and the Treasury Department who is also in the running for a top post.

    Former Obama White House communications director Jen Psaki – also a WestExec employee – is also advising Biden’s transition team, while two former WestExec’ers – Lisa Monaco and Julianne Smith – are under consideration for potential Biden administration hires.

    The firm was so well positioned to take over in a Democratic administration that they negotiated a clause in their office lease that they can break it if members are called back to public service, according to American Prospect.

    WestExec isn’t the first DC consulting firm staffed by former administration officials who “serve as the government in waiting for the party that’s out of power” according to Meredith McGehee – executive director of Issue One, a Washington good government group (per Politico), adding that while there’s nothing wrong with it – Blinken and other potential Biden Cabinet picks who have worked for firms such as WestExec should go further than the law requires and publicly disclose any clients for whom they’ve done significant work.

    Read the rest of the report here.

  • "Stand Down Officers!": Angry Crowd Heckles Cops After Toronto BBQ-Owner Arrested For Ignoring Lockdown
    "Stand Down Officers!": Angry Crowd Heckles Cops After Toronto BBQ-Owner Arrested For Ignoring Lockdown

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 15:50

    Authored by Lauren O’Neil via blogto.com

    The sauce has hit the fan at Toronto’s Adamson Barbecue restaurant, where, after opening for a third day in defiance of multiple lockdown orders, owner Adam Skelly was just taken away in handcuffs by police.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “A 33-year-old man was arrested for Attempting to Obstruct Police,” reads an update issued by TPS Operatins shortly after 1 p.m. on Thursday.

    “He has been taken into custody. More details will follow. Officers remain in the area. We continue to ask for calm.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It is unclear if any other new charges have been laid against Kelly today (in addition to nine announced yesterday against he and his incorporated restaurant chain), but the anti-maskers who’ve been supporting him are straight up freaking out right now.

    Livestreamed video posts from the scene of Skelly’s restaurant at Queen Elizabeth and Royal York Roads show police, some of them on horseback, surrounding the building in a united front.

    Hundreds of histrionic protesters have positioned themselves in front of the cops and are screaming things like “FREEDOM!,” “SHAME!” and “STAND DOWN OFFICERS! STAND DOWN!” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Police first arrived to the Texas-style BBQ joint early Thursday morning to change the establishment’s locks after Skelly vowed that he would once again reopen his restaurant for indoor dining after being ordered to close by Toronto Public Health.

    Flanked by crowds of people wearing Trump 2020 hats and carrying anti-lockdown signs, the infuriated restaurant owner eventually managed to gain access to the building and start serving meat.

    Police stayed on scene in an attempt to control the crowd of protesters, who have collectively come to be known in recent days as “BBQAnon.”

    Skelly was arrested and taken away for police obstruction shortly before 12:30 p.m. this afternoon.

    His supporters remain camped out around the Etobicoke location of Adamson Barbecue, however, where they are now starting to tussle with police.

    At least one additional male has been arrested so far for assaulting a police officer.

    Meanwhile, four days after Toronto and Peel were put into the “grey zone” of Ontario’s COVID-19 restriction framework, a massive anti-lockdown protest has broken out at Queen’s Park.

    The hashtag #IStandWithAdam is trending on Twitter in the U.S. and people on both sides of the debate are growing increasingly distressed over how the situation is being handled.

    Many are criticizing Skelly for blatantly flouting public health restrictions amid a deadly viral outbreak, while others are calling him  a “patriot” and a “hero.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Skelly is expected to appear in court on March 19 of 2021 to face multiple charges for hosting illegal gatherings, breaching indoor dining regulations and operating without a business license on both Tuesday and Wednesday. “Top to bottom, this thing stinks — it reeks of corruption,” said Skelly of the lockdown in an Instagram post announcing his plans to reopen earlier this week. “How many businesses — how many people — are going to lose everything? Enough is enough.” “We’re opening for anybody who is a fan of freedom and sovereignty,” said Skelly at the time. “The right to choose what you wear, where to go, who to have over at your house, what businesses you can go to.”

  • Comcast To Impose 1.2TB Data Cap On Northeast Customers 
    Comcast To Impose 1.2TB Data Cap On Northeast Customers 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 15:25

    More people than ever have shifted to the digital economy as remote working becomes standard across corporate America. Internet service providers (ISP) have reported record internet traffic this year due to the online shift, with some warning that computer networks have been stressed due to the rapid increase in data usage among households. 

    Demand for online video and chat tools, such as Slack, Zoom, and GoToMeeting, have been off the chart this year. Many of these online tools make work-at-home possible for millions of folks. Many of these tools are incredibly data-intensive, which is likely why Comcast has introduced data caps for customers. 

    According to The Verge, Comcast will charge Xfinity customers in Connecticut, Delaware, Massachusetts, Maryland, Maine, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, Vermont, West Virginia, and the District of Columbia, as well as parts of North Carolina and Ohio a fee of $10 per 50GB of data if they exceed 1.2TB in a given month. Customers will be eased into the data cap program in early 2021. 

    Data Cap Area

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The good news for customers fretting about a data cap and additional charges if the 1.2TB is breached is that 95% of the customer base has yet to exceed the level over the last six months. Median monthly data usage for customers this year has been around 300GB. Still, as the second wave of the virus pandemic continues to ravage many parts of the country and remote working continues to become a dominant working situation for many, Comcast expects data usage to surge during the COVID winter. 

    “Comcast has quietly updated its online customer support website to reflect the forthcoming introduction of data caps to the last remaining major regions of the country where it has avoided imposing them for years,” wrote Stop The Cap, an advocacy group against the ISP data cap. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stop The Cap said Comcast’s data cap in the northeast and mid-Atlantic states could push customers to competitor Verizon FiOS. 

     

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th November 2020

  • How To Celebrate Thanksgiving Amid Toxic Politics & COVID-19 Lockdowns
    How To Celebrate Thanksgiving Amid Toxic Politics & COVID-19 Lockdowns

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 11/26/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “War is over. If you want it.”

     – John Lennon

    If ever there were a year filled with an abundance of bad news and a shortage of good news, 2020 would take the prize. Between the toxic political theater, pandemic scares, nationwide lockdowns that smack of martial law, a rollercoaster economy, and the ever-present menace of the police state, it’s been a hard, heart-wrenching, stomach-churning kind of year overrun with too much hate and too little tolerance.

    It’s been a year in which tyranny took a few more steps forward, freedom got knocked down a few more notches, and politics and profit margins took precedence over decency, compassion and human-kindness.

    Now we find ourselves at this present moment, overwhelmed by all that is wrong in the world and missing the fellowship of family and friends kept apart by COVID-19 restrictions and concerns.

    No wonder this Thanksgiving finds so many struggling to reflect and give thanks for what is good. After all, how do you give thanks for freedoms that are constantly being eroded? How do you express gratitude for one’s safety when the perils posed by the American police state grow more treacherous by the day? How do you come together as a nation in thanksgiving when the powers-that-be continue to polarize and divide us into warring factions?

    Here’s what I’ve learned from living in a small community (population 1500) for the past year: you don’t have to agree on politics, or subscribe to the same religious beliefs, or have the same demographic makeup in order to live peaceably with one another.

    These small-town people don’t have a preponderance of fancy cars or advanced degrees or six-figure salaries or committees aimed at discussing problems to death, and yet they have mastered the art of getting along. They make no secret about their views on politics and religion and anything else on their minds, and yet they remain friendly—neighborly—respectful of those with opposing views, even when they wholeheartedly disagree.

    Yes, America, there is life beyond politics and it can be wonderful if you just give it a chance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s what I suggest: this Thanksgiving, do yourselves a favor and turn off the talking heads, tune out the politicians, and take a deep breath. Then try this exercise in gratitude: find something to be thankful for about the things and people in your community for which you might have the least tolerance or appreciation. Instead of just rattling off a list of things you’re thankful for that sound good, dig a little deeper and acknowledge the good in those you may have underappreciated or feared.

    When it comes time to giving thanks for your good fortune, put your gratitude into action: pay your blessings forward with deeds that spread a little kindness, lighten someone’s burden, and brighten some dark corner.

    Engage in acts of kindness. Smile more. Fight less. Build bridges. Refuse to let toxic politics define your relationships. Focus on the things that unite instead of that which divides.

    Do your part to push back against the meanness of our culture with conscious compassion and humanity. Moods are contagious, the good and the bad. They can be passed from person to person. So can the actions associated with those moods, the good and the bad.

    Even with COVID-19 restrictions in place throughout the country, there is still so much good that can be done to help those in need.

    Be a hero, whether or not anyone ever notices.

    Acts of benevolence, no matter how inconsequential they might seem, can spark a movement.

    Each of us has an inner hero we can draw upon in an emergency,” concludes psychologist Philip Zimbardo. “If you think there is even a possibility that someone needs help, act on it. You may save a life. You are the modern version of the Good Samaritan that makes the world a better place for all of us.”

    All it takes is one person breaking away from the fold to change the dynamics of a situation. “Once any one helps, then in seconds others will join in because a new social norm emerges,” notes Zimbardo.

    This is what Zimbardo refers to as “the power of one.”

    “If you find yourself in an ambiguous situation, resist the urge to look to others and go with your gut instinct,” advises Melissa Burkley in Psychology Today.

    “If you think there is even a possibility that someone is in need, act on it. At worst, you will embarrass yourself for a few minutes, but at best, you will save a life.”

    In other words, don’t turn away from suffering. Even smiling at a stranger in these fearful times can be a revolutionary act.

    All it takes is one person to start a chain reaction.

    For instance, a few years ago in Florida, a family of six—four adults and two young boys—were swept out to sea by a powerful rip current in Panama City Beach. There was no lifeguard on duty. The police were standing by, waiting for a rescue boat. And the few people who had tried to help ended up stranded, as well.

    Those on shore grouped together and formed a human chain. What started with five volunteers grew to 15, then 80 people, some of whom couldn’t swim.

    One by one, they linked hands and stretched as far as their chain would go. The strongest of the volunteers swam out beyond the chain and began passing the stranded victims of the rip current down the chain.

    One by one, they rescued those in trouble and pulled each other in.

    There’s a moral here for what needs to happen in this country if we only can band together and prevail against the riptides that threaten to overwhelm us.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, there may not be much we can do to avoid the dismal reality of the police state in the long term—not so long as the powers-that-be continue to call the shots and allow profit margins to take precedence over the needs of people—but in the short term, there are things we can all do right now to make this world (or at least our small corners of it) a little bit kinder, a lot less hostile and more just.

    It’s never too late to start making things right in the world.

  • San Antonio Food Bank Doubles Amount Of People It Serves 
    San Antonio Food Bank Doubles Amount Of People It Serves 

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 23:30

    Two Americas were visible on Tuesday as the Dow Jones Industrial Average crossed 30,000 for the first time. Simultaneously, hundreds of vehicles were snaked around a parking lot in Albuquerque, New Mexico, waiting in line at a local food bank. 

    This suggests the K-shaped economic recovery, one where the rich grow richer and the working-poor are crushed with job loss and insurmountable debts, is getting much worse by the month. 

    For more on the rapid reemergence of food bank lines, or what will be the new normal in a severely broken economy that is in desperate need of structural reform, Eric Cooper, CEO of the San Antonio Food Bank in Texas, on Tuesday, told CNBC’s Shepard Smith that demand at his food bank has more than doubled this year. 

    “Pre-pandemic we fed about 60,00 people a week and now we’re seeing about 120,000 per week, and most of those are new to the food bank, and have never had to ask for help before,” Cooper told Smith during an interview on Tuesday evening. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He said, “today, we had a distribution that fed 2,000, and we have these distributions all the time.” 

    “Food banks around the country have seen this unprecedented demand, and we’re just working as hard as we can to balance the private donations we get, with the public assistance to try to make sure people are fed,” he explained. 

    Cooper continued: “A child would miss ten meals in a week, and if a mom has two to three kids in school, she’s now feeling the impact of the cost of that food at home, and without employment, kids are going hungry. We hear from schools that kids struggle with their education because they don’t have access to good nutrition.” 

    Watch Full Interview 

    It was just last week that a food bank in Dallas, Texas, handed out, in one day, the “largest-ever” food distribution. 

    Nationwide, internet searches for “drive-thru food bank near me” is erupting.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And the problem we see here is that many of the key provisions in the CARES Act are set to expire on Dec. 31 – this could be catastrophic for millions of unemployed Americans and risk derailing the economic recovery. 

    “We just hope that Congress acts quickly, the stimulus package needs to support families to put food on their table,” Cooper said.

    And if elevated demand for food banks continues to persist, “meal shortage” could be seen within the next 12 months. 

    The new normal for millions of America’s working poor appears awfully similar to the 1930s. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     Maybe each future stimulus check should include a one-year subscription to Blue Apron or HelloFresh? 

  • Biden's Gun Control Plan Would Cost Gun Owners $34 Billion In Taxes
    Biden’s Gun Control Plan Would Cost Gun Owners $34 Billion In Taxes

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 23:00

    Submitted by Joseph Jankowski of Planet Free Will

    Under Joe Biden’s proposed gun control plan, American gun owners would cough up tens of billions dollars in taxes as millions of rifles and magazines now in their possession would be subject to a tax under the National Firearms Act.

    The center piece of Biden’s gun plan is to place a ban on the manufacture and sale of “assault weapons,” while bringing the regulation of possession of such firearms under the 1934 National Firearms Act.

    Currently, the NFA of 1934 applies to fully automatics firearms, silencers and short-barreled rifles. But Biden would drag “assault weapons”, meaning semiautomatic rifles, pistols and shotguns (think the AR-15) along with “high capacity magazines”, which have generally been understood to be magazines that carry more than 10 rounds, under the act.

    According to a National Shooting Sports Foundation report on firearm production figures, Americans in total own at least 20 million rifles and 150 million ammunition magazines that would be subject to the NFA regulations if Biden’s plan were put in place.

    Under the NFA, each rifle and each magazine would be taxed at $200 per item. On top of that, gun owners would be subjected to complicated paper work and an identification process.

    As Americans for Tax Reform reports:

    As detailed on Biden’s campaign website, “Biden will also institute a program to buy back weapons of war currently on our streets. This will give individuals who now possess assault weapons or high-capacity magazines two options: sell the weapons to the government, or register them under the National Firearms Act.” This triggers the $200 tax.

    In order to register a firearm (or a magazine, under Joe Biden’s plan), you have to send in a 13-page, complicated application form with the $200 tax included, your fingerprints, and a photograph of yourself. In this way, the hurdles to legally own your weapon or high-capacity magazine go far beyond the expensive tax. 

    With 20 million rifles and 150 million magazines to fall under the NFA with Biden’s plan, the amount of taxes paid by American gun owners would equate to $34 billion dollars.

    If a gun-owner chooses not to hand in his NFA regulated rifle or magazine, he or she would face up to 10 years in federal prison, and a potential $10,000 fine.

    The move would be in total violation of Biden’s pledge not to tax those who make under $400,000 annually and would put an even greater financial burden on Americans who have been hit hard by the COVID-19 pandemic and state induced economic shutdowns.

    More from Americans for Tax Reform:

    Many families who have already been struggling due to the economic damage done by the coronavirus would find themselves incapable of paying for the ability to practice a constitutional right of theirs.

    According to the Biden campaign, any magazine that holds more than 10 rounds is a “high capacity” magazine. Even if someone owns only one AR-15, if they have just four standard capacity magazines, they would owe the federal government $1,000.

    Suddenly, gun control becomes less about mere firearm ownership and more about controlling working-class Americans. In urban areas, where people are most vulnerable to crime, it’s not hard to imagine how crushing this could be. There is nothing new about leftist politicians taxing urban residents in order to dictate behavior, ownership, and lifestyle.

    While Biden’s gun control plan likely wont catch much fan fair in the more red, new congress taking hold at the start of 2021 – especially if Republicans can take at least one of the upcoming Georgia run-offs – the idea lends more credence to the suspicion that Trump’s America is likely to be flipped on its head under a Biden presidency.

  • Watch: F-35 Stealth Fighter Drops Mock Nuclear Bomb Over Nevada Desert
    Watch: F-35 Stealth Fighter Drops Mock Nuclear Bomb Over Nevada Desert

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 22:30

    We recently highlighted the possibility that the US and China “may well be on the road to war, and nuclear war is no longer unthinkable.” For years, we’ve discussed the relentless quest of Washington elites, preparing the empire for the inevitable collision with China as the battle for economic supremacy nears.

    The rapid modernization of the military under the Trump administration, costing taxpayers $2 trillion, was an important signal in gauging Washington Warhawks’ level of military preparedness as the threat of rising China increases by the day.

    President Trump has described the trillions of dollars allocated to the military as a “colossal rebuilding” effort – something he says has ‘never been done before.’ Trump has routinely described all sorts of new military technology, including fifth-generation stealth jets, hypersonic missiles, and increased nuclear weapon capability. 

    While dangers of confrontation have increased in 2020 as US warships continue to sail through the South China Sea, or Chinese warplanes buzz Taiwan’s airspace – Trump is still president for 57 days, meaning that anything is possible in the next two months. 

    In a show of force, the Air Force released a video Monday showing a Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II dropping a mock nuclear bomb at Sandia National Laboratories’ Tonopah Test Range over the Nevada desert. 

    “We’re showing the B61-12’s larger compatibility and broader versatility for the country’s nuclear deterrent, and we’re doing it in the world of COVID-19,” said Steven Samuels, a manager with Sandia’s B61-12 Systems Team.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Samuels said, “We’re not slowing down. We’re still moving forward with the B61-12 compatibility activities on different platforms.”

    We noted in June that another F-35 dropped a mock nuclear bomb at a test range in the California desert.  

    In 2018, the Pentagon upgraded its B61 nuclear gravity bombs, a move that would increase the lifespan for decades. 

    “The upgraded, B61-12 LEP will replace all of the bomb’s nuclear and non‐nuclear components for another two decades, and improve the bomb’s safety, effectiveness, and security. This life extension program will address all age-related issues of the weapon, and enhance its reliability, field maintenance, safety, and use control,” the National Nuclear Security Administration said in a tear off sheet

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “This was the first test to exercise all systems, including mechanical, electrical, communication and release between the B61-12 and the F-35A,” Samuels said.

    “The latest test is a critical piece in the F-35A and B61-12 program Aboard the newest fighter, the B61-12 provides a strong piece of the overall nuclear deterrence strategy for our country and our allies,” he said. 

    Meanwhile, the Navy disclosed last week that a missile interceptor from one of its warships at sea shot down and destroyed a “mock ICBM” that was put into flight for testing purposes.

  • Scientists: The Human Brain And The Entire Universe Have Odd Similarities
    Scientists: The Human Brain And The Entire Universe Have Odd Similarities

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Justin MacLachlan via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    An astrophysicist at the University of Bologna and a neurosurgeon at the University of Verona have claimed that the brain resembles the universe. The two Italian researchers came up with the galaxy-brain theory that is out of this world: The structures of the perceptible universe, they say, are astonishingly comparable to the neuronal networks of the human brain.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    University of Bologna astrophysicist Franco Vazza and University of Verona neurosurgeon Alberto Feletti document the extraordinary similarities between the cosmic network of galaxies and the complex web of neurons in the human brain. The detailed study was published in the journal Frontiers in Physics showcasing the human brain has roughly 27 orders of magnitude separated in scale, while similarly, the composition of the cosmic web shows comparable levels of complexity and self-organization, according to the researchers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The brain itself contains an estimated 69 billion neurons, while the visible universe is comprised of at least 100 billion galaxies, strung together like a mesh network. Even more intriguing both galaxies and neurons only account for about 30 percent of the total masses of the universe and brain. Further, both galaxies and neurons arrange themselves like pearls on a long string.

    Beginning from the shared features of the two systems, the two researchers examined a simulation of the network of galaxies in comparison to sections of the cerebral cortex and the cerebellum. Their purpose was to inspect how matter variations propagate.

    In the case of galaxies, the remaining 70 percent of mass is dark energy. The equivalent in the human brain, the pair said was water.

    “We calculated the spectral density of both systems,” Vazza said in a statement about the experiment. “This is a technique often employed in cosmology for studying the spatial distribution of galaxies. Our analysis showed that the distribution of the fluctuation within the cerebellum neuronal network on a scale from 1 micrometer to 0.1 millimeters follows the same progression of the distribution of matter in the cosmic web,” he added, “but, of course, on a larger scale that goes from 5 million to 500 million light-years.”

    The amount of interwoven connections originating from each node also were strangely alike sparking further interest to the researchers.

    “Once again, structural parameters have identified unexpected agreement levels,” Feletti said in the statement. “Probably, the connectivity within the two networks evolves following similar physical principles, despite the striking and obvious difference between the physical powers regulating galaxies and neurons.”

    The team is anticipating that their preliminary research could lead to new analysis procedures advancing knowledge about both cosmology and neurosurgery. Which would enable scientists to better comprehend how these compositions have developed over time.

  • Will Biden End The Yemen War That He & Obama Started?
    Will Biden End The Yemen War That He & Obama Started?

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 21:30

    Since 2015 the Saudi coalition which has been bombing Yemen back to the stone age with the close cooperation of the Pentagon has essentially gotten a “free pass” by the mainstream media, despite the United Nations within the past two years classifying the war as the world’s “worst humanitarian disaster”

    International rights groups and press reports commonly estimate the death toll at over 100,000 and with some putting it at up to a quarter million people killed, with a large percentage being civilian deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via The LA Times

    The war-torn country has also faced severe famine, rampant disease, malnutrition and a lack of medical supplies crisis especially impacting children.

    A recent report from In These Times included the following appeal to President-Elect Joe Biden ahead of him taking office on January 20:

    One thing Biden can do, start­ing on day one, is end U.S. involve­ment in the Yemen war — involve­ment that he helped ini­ti­ate. ​“By exec­u­tive order, Biden could get the Pen­ta­gon to end intel­li­gence shar­ing for the Sau­di coali­tion airstrikes, end logis­ti­cal sup­port, and end spare parts trans­fers that keep Sau­di war­planes in the air,” Has­san El-Tayyab, lead Mid­dle East pol­i­cy lob­by­ist for the Friends Com­mit­tee on Nation­al Leg­is­la­tion, a pro­gres­sive orga­ni­za­tion, tells In These Times. ​”He could restore human­i­tar­i­an assis­tance to north­ern Yemen. He could use his pow­er as pres­i­dent to put pres­sure on oth­er nations that are sup­port­ing the Sau­di coali­tion — like France, the Unit­ed King­dom and Cana­da — and get them to fol­low suit. He could have the State Depart­ment put a stop on all arms sales to Sau­di Ara­bia unless they meet cer­tain benchmarks.” 

    But given he’s stacked his top national security posts with Liberal Hawks, some of which had an active hand in forming the interventionist policies in Libya and Syria under Obama and his Secretary of State Hillary Clinton, this is very unlikely.

    Yemen has long been the “forgotten war” and will likely remain so, and all the while major defense contractors (tied closely to the incoming administration) will rake in the cash. 

    Will Biden finally end the Yemen War which he and Obama started in the first place?  The Grayzone delves into this very question in its latest interview:

    The segment introduces: “On the campaign trail, Joe Biden pledged to end US support for the Saudi-led war on Yemen, which the Obama-Biden administration authorized in 2015. Shireen Al-Adeimi, assistant professor of education at Michigan State University, discusses Biden’s responsibility to end the world’s worst humanitarian crisis.”

  • Thanksgiving Dinner Costs Soar In 2020
    Thanksgiving Dinner Costs Soar In 2020

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Adrian Mak via AdvisorSmith.com,

    With the Thanksgiving holiday fast approaching, Americans around the country are preparing their menus for the traditional holiday. This year, Thanksgiving celebrations may be a bit different given the effects of the coronavirus pandemic leading to smaller family gatherings with fewer people and potentially less holiday travel. Additionally, the pandemic has led to some disruption in food supply chains, as some food supply workers have been sickened with the virus. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AdvisorSmith examined a basket of staple foods from the Thanksgiving table to understand how these trends have affected the pricing of the ingredients for Thanksgiving dinner. We compared recent prices for common Thanksgiving foods in October and November compared with the previous year at both retail and wholesale, as reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the U.S. Department of Agriculture to find the change in the cost of a basket of Thanksgiving foods.

    Increase in Cost of Thanksgiving Foods

    AdvisorSmith found that a basket of Thanksgiving foods costs approximately 9.8% more in 2020 when compared to Thanksgiving of 2019. The foods included in our analysis were turkey, vegetables, and baking & bread. Vegetables included were potatoes, cranberries, squash, sweet potatoes, corn, green beans, and pumpkin. Baking and bread products included flour, white bread, milk, eggs, and butter.

    Turkey

    AdvisorSmith found that the average price of turkeys at wholesale increased by 11.9% from 2019 to 2020 as of mid-November. Fresh turkeys increased in price an average of 11.6% year-over-year, while frozen turkeys increased in price by about 12.2%.

    As Political Calculations notes, the population of farm-raised turkeys in the United States has generally fallen since 1996. In 2020, an estimated 222 million turkeys were raised on American farms, which is down some 27% from the peak of 302.7 million raised in 1996.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The figure for 2020 also represents a decline of 7 million from 2019’s level, which itself was revised downward from an initial estimate of 240 million.

    By contrast, the collective live weight of farm-raised turkeys has generally plateaued since 1996, falling within a range between 6.877 billion pounds (1999) and 7.922 billion pounds (2008). The initial estimate of the live weight of 2020’s 222 million farm-raised turkeys is 7.175 billion pounds.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The combination of a generally flat total live weight for all turkeys produced on American farms with a falling number of birds can only be explained by the growing size of individual turkeys. In 2020, we estimate the average weight of a live farm-raised turkey in the U.S. is 32.3 pounds, down slightly from 2019’s revised figure of 32.5 pounds.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Compared to the decade of the 1970s, when the average farm-raised turkey tipped the scale at 18.7 pounds, that represents a 73% increase in the typical size of turkeys produced in the U.S., where their average weight has steadily risen over the last four decades.

    That trend may be changing for 2020 however, because smaller turkeys are in high demand as Americans downsize for 2020’s Thanksgiving. With celebrations limited to immediate family members with the ongoing coronavirus pandemic, American consumers have been bypassing larger birds in favor of smaller ones.

    Vegetables

    We examined a basket of vegetables that are common for Thanksgiving, including potatoes, cranberries, squash, sweet potatoes, corn, green beans, and pumpkin. We found that prices for this basket increased an average of 7.4% during the period of October to mid-November 2020 compared with the same period in the prior year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Baking & Bread

    AdvisorSmith selected a basket of baking and bread products, which included flour, white bread, milk, eggs, and butter. The cost of these staples increased by approximately 7.1% on average during the period of October to mid-November compared with the prior year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Methodology

    AdvisorSmith selected a basket of common Thanksgiving staples from three major categories: turkey, vegetables, and baking & bread. To determine the average increase of the basket of Thanksgiving foods, we examined the difference in prices at retail or wholesale for each of the items individually. We then weighted each of the items to represent their percentage composition of a Thanksgiving meal. Turkey received the highest weight, at 55% of the meal, as the turkey accounts for a majority of the costs of the Thanksgiving meal. We used these weights to calculate the percentage increase in costs for the basket of Thanksgiving foods.

    To calculate the increase in turkey prices, we examined wholesale turkey prices for fresh and frozen turkeys from the USDA’s Turkey Market News Report from November 13, 2020. This report included turkeys weighing 8-16 pounds and 16-24 pounds. We used the average price of turkeys per pound from each of these turkey types, and compared the prices to a year ago, which were also included in the report.

    We calculated the increase in retail prices as reported by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics for the following items: flour, white bread, milk, eggs, and potatoes. We compared the average retail price for these items in October 2020 compared with October 2019. 

    For the following vegetable items, and butter, we used the weekly advertised retail price as recorded by the USDA: cranberries, squash, sweet potatoes, corn, green beans, and pumpkin. We compared the average price this year to the price a year ago for the week of November 7th through November 13th.

  • Penguin Random House Staff Melts Down After Learning They're Publishing Jordan Peterson's New Book
    Penguin Random House Staff Melts Down After Learning They’re Publishing Jordan Peterson’s New Book

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 20:30

    The staff at Penguin Random House Canada had a meltdown at an “emotional town hall” over the company’s decision to publish psychologist Jordan Peterson’s latest book, according to Vice. Dozens of additional employees have filed “anonymous complaints”, the report notes.

    On Monday, the publisher said they would publish Peterson’s new book, Beyond Order: 12 More Rules for Life by Peterson, which is going to be out in March 2021. We’re guessing none of these additional 12 rules includes setting fire to a Wendy’s or throwing a brick through a Target window to steal T-shirts. Hopefully instead, the book offers up a take on how to conduct yourself as an employee of a company without throwing an emotional temper tantrum anytime the boss makes a decision you don’t like. 

    One “junior employee” at PRH said of Peterson: “He is an icon of hate speech and transphobia and the fact that he’s an icon of white supremacy, regardless of the content of his book, I’m not proud to work for a company that publishes him.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I feel it was deliberately hidden and dropped on us once it was too late to change course,” they continued. 

    Perhaps Penguin Random House Canada can inform this person they can be a “junior employee” just about anywhere else instead of coddling them with “town hall” meetings and giving them the impression that their feelings actually matter to PRH’s bottom line.

    A second employee said “people were crying in the meeting about how Jordan Peterson has affected their lives.”

    “The company since June has been doing all these anti-racist and allyship things and them publishing Peterson’s book completely goes against this. It just makes all of their previous efforts seem completely performative,” they said.

    Another employee said: “[Peterson’s] the one who’s responsible for radicalizing and causing this surge of alt-right groups, especially on university campuses.”

    “They’re not going to acknowledge the reason they’re doing it is for money. I feel that would be the more honest route to go rather than making up excuses for Jordan Peterson,” one employee said, as though making money isn’t the main idea of running a business anyway. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The publisher said it welcomes the feedback from its employees. It put out a statement saying: “We announced yesterday that we will publish Jordan Peterson’s new book Beyond Order this coming March. Immediately following the announcement, we held a forum and provided a space for our employees to express their views and offer feedback.”

    It continued and appeared to stand firm on its decision: “Our employees have started an anonymous feedback channel, which we fully support. We are open to hearing our employees’ feedback and answering all of their questions. We remain committed to publishing a range of voices and viewpoints.” 

    We wouldn’t bet on Penguin Random House backing down. The book, which dares to offer a clinal professional’s uncensored opinion about the increasingly “woke” world we live in, will likely be wildly successful – just as Peterson’s first book “12 Rules for Life” was – selling 5 million copies.

    We think the folks over at PragerU put it best:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Mayo Clinic's Northwest Wisconsin Hospitals Placing Beds In Ambulance Garage, Lobbies
    Mayo Clinic’s Northwest Wisconsin Hospitals Placing Beds In Ambulance Garage, Lobbies

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 20:00

    By Becker’s Hospital Review

    To expand capacity at its northwest Wisconsin hospitals, Mayo Clinic Health System is placing beds in waiting rooms, surgical spaces and a heated parking garage, according to Wisconsin Public Radio.

    The rush to boost bed capacity comes two weeks after the health system warned that 100 percent of its beds were occupied at its hospitals in northwest Wisconsin and more than three weeks after it began postponing elective care.  That number fluctuates by the hour, but emergency room physician Paul Horvath said hospitals and emergency rooms have been forced into what is known as “diversion status.”

    “I worked a shift in one of the emergency departments the other evening,” Horvath said, “and literally every bed in northwest Wisconsin was full, and hospitals just weren’t able to admit new patients. Which means that I had the challenge of managing ICU level care in my ER for hours, which is obviously not routine.”

    Mayo Clinic’s hospital in Eau Claire, Wis., set up four emergency beds with privacy curtains in an ambulance garage due to an influx of COVID-19 patients. The hospital said all four beds were filled Nov. 18, but haven’t needed to be used since, according to WQOW.

    Additionally, a surge at Mayo’s hospital in Barron, Wis., forced it to move beds into a room designated for preparing patients for surgery. 

    Mayo’s surge plan also includes moving beds into lobbies, emergency room physician Sue Cullinan, MD, told Wisconsin Public Radio. 

    “Not where I’d want to put my grandfather or my grandmother,” she said, though it “may have to happen.”

    Mayo said that although patients may be placed in different spaces, they are all equipped with the necessary supplies to safely care for patients. 

    “We would never put them in any unsafe or unclean environment,” Pam White, DNP, RN, chief nursing officer for Mayo Clinic Health System Northwestern Region, told WQOW. “It’s very clean, it’s warm, it’s an environment that’s not ideal and we wouldn’t do this every day, but if you needed to be in there to receive the care, I would absolutely go there. It’s a comfortable environment and temporary.”

    Mayo Clinic Health System has clinics, hospitals and other facilities across Iowa, Minnesota and Wisconsin. 

  • Square And PayPal Helping Bolster Bitcoin's Boost, New Analysis Claims
    Square And PayPal Helping Bolster Bitcoin’s Boost, New Analysis Claims

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 19:30

    A new analysis out this week suggests that clients of FinTech companies PayPal and Square are responsible for helping drive the recent boost in Bitcoin, as it approaches $20,000. But we’re not entirely sold on that analysis, and we’ll explain why.

    First, a primer. Square clients have made up 40% of the buying of new bitcoin entering the market over the last two years, Hedge Fund Pantera Capital suggested to CNBC  this week. PayPal has also driven demand, as denoted by a spike in volume on Paxos’ exchange, which is crypto firm that has partnered with PayPal.

    Volumes on Paxos have “more than tripled” since PayPal’s service went live, the analysis notes, stating that PayPal clients were buying “roughly 70%” of new Bitcoin supply hitting the market. About 800 to 900 Bitcoin are hitting the market on a daily basis, as the total number of outstanding Bitcoin marches to its terminus at 21 million. 

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dan Morehead, founder and chief investment officer of Pantera Capital said: “It’s having a significant increase on price. You bring on two corporates that are already buying all of the newly issued bitcoins — supply and demand says the price has to go up.”

    CNBC talking head Brian Kelly says that the spike is about new demand, as FinTech companies make it easier to buy the crypto: “It’s now easier to buy and transact with, and it’s opening up new demand by taking down a barrier to entry.”

    But we’re not entirely sold on this analysis and we believe that institutions are playing a major role in keeping a bid under the crypto. As we noted over the weekend, large established banks like JP Morgan are starting to experiment with cryptocurrencies as Yahoo Finance reported: 

    “Indeed, at the DealBook Summit on Nov. 18, (Jamie) Dimon said, “The blockchain itself will be critical to letting people move money around the world cheaper. We will always support blockchain technology.”

    In May, JPMorgan went a step further when it began allowing customer transfers to and from Coinbase and Gemini, two U.S.-based regulated crypto exchange sites. And Dimon on Wednesday acknowledged that some “very smart people” are investing in bitcoin these days.”

    This stands in contrast to Dimon’s comments in 2017:

    “In September 2017, about three months before bitcoin hit an all-time high of nearly $20,000 per unit and crashed shortly thereafter, Dimon dropped a bomb on the crypto world. He called bitcoin a “fraud.”

    But, despite the naysyers, JPMorgan admits that Bitcoin continued to rally strongly over the past two weeks, nearing the $19k mark, challenging their previous assessment that bitcoin’s overbought positions by momentum traders such as CTAs could potential trigger profit taking or mean reversion flows over the near term. Other major investment banks have also released bullish scenarios for the crypto, including Citi who leaked a $300,000 possible target

    This is shown in the chart below by the open interest of CME bitcoin futures contract, a likely vehicle used by momentum traders such as CTAs, which continued to rise steeply over the past two weeks pointing to position build up rather than position unwinding.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The failure to see mean reversion flows kicking in in recent weeks might reflect the smaller role of momentum traders such as CTAs in bitcoin trading vs. their role in more traditional asset classes, such as gold and other commodities. 

    Indeed, the exponential ascent of the Grayscale Bitcoin Trust in recent weeks suggests that other institutional investors who look at bitcoin as a long-term investment have been playing perhaps a bigger role in recent weeks than quantitative funds, such as CTAs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is also the idea that some investors that previously invested in gold ETFs, such as family offices, may be looking at bitcoin as an alternative to gold.

    As JPMorgan previously highlighted, the potential longterm upside for bitcoin is considerable if it competes more intensely with gold as an “alternative” currency, given that the market cap of bitcoin (at $340B) would have to rise 8 times from here to match the total private sector investment in gold via ETFs or bars and coins which stands at $2.6T. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As JPM recently concluded:

    “the potential long-term upside for bitcoin is considerable we think as it competes more intensely with gold as an “alternative” currency given that Millennials would become over time a more important component of investors’ universe.”

    While it may be easy for CNBC or Pantera to cop out with the same “retail momentum” analysis they used for Bitcoin’s first run up to $20,000, as @BullyEsq recently noted, it is different this time…

    2017 was marked by unsustainable retail FOMO driven by scammy ICOs.

    2020 is being driven by institutions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

     

  • What The COVID Vaccine Hype Fails To Mention
    What The COVID Vaccine Hype Fails To Mention

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 19:00

    Authored by Gilbert Berdine, MD, via The Mises Institute,

    Pfizer recently announced that its covid vaccine was more than 90 percent “effective” at preventing covid-19. Shortly after this announcement, Moderna announced that its covid vaccine was 94.5 percent “effective” at preventing covid-19. Unlike the flu vaccine, which is one shot, both covid vaccines require two shots given three to four weeks apart. Hidden toward the end of both announcements, were the definitions of “effective.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Both trials have a treatment group that received the vaccine and a control group that did not. All the trial subjects were covid negative prior to the start of the trial. The analysis for both trials was performed when a target number of “cases” were reached. “Cases” were defined by positive polymerase chain reaction (PCR) testing. There was no information about the cycle number for the PCR tests. There was no information about whether the “cases” had symptoms or not. There was no information about hospitalizations or deaths. The Pfizer study had 43,538 participants and was analyzed after 164 cases. So, roughly 150 out 21,750 participants (less than 0.7 percent) became PCR positive in the control group and about one-tenth that number in the vaccine group became PCR positive. The Moderna trial had 30,000 participants. There were 95 “cases” in the 15,000 control participants (about 0.6 percent) and 5 “cases” in the 15,000 vaccine participants (about one-twentieth of 0.6 percent). The “efficacy” figures quoted in these announcements are odds ratios.

    There is no evidence, yet, that the vaccine prevented any hospitalizations or any deaths. The Moderna announcement claimed that eleven cases in the control group were “severe” disease, but “severe” was not defined. If there were any hospitalizations or deaths in either group, the public has not been told. When the risks of an event are small, odds ratios can be misleading about absolute risk. A more meaningful measure of efficacy would be the number to vaccinate to prevent one hospitalization or one death. Those numbers are not available. An estimate of the number to treat from the Moderna trial to prevent a single “case” would be fifteen thousand vaccinations to prevent ninety “cases” or 167 vaccinations per “case” prevented which does not sound nearly as good as 94.5 percent effective. The publicists working for pharmaceutical companies are very smart people. If there were a reduction in mortality from these vaccines, that information would be in the first paragraph of the announcement.

    There is no information about how long any protective benefit from the vaccine would persist. Antibody response following covid-19 appears to be short lived. Based on what we know, the covid vaccine may require two shots every three to six months to be protective. The more shots required, the greater the risk of side effects from sensitization to the vaccine.

    There is no information about safety. None. Government agencies like the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) appear to have two completely different standards for attributing deaths to covid-19 and attributing side effects to covid vaccines. If these vaccines are approved, as they likely will be, the first group to be vaccinated will be the beta testers. I am employed by a university-based medical center that is a referral center for the West Texas region. My colleagues include resident physicians and faculty physicians who work with covid patients on a daily basis. I have asked a number of my colleagues whether they will be first in line for the new vaccine. I have yet to hear any of my colleagues respond affirmatively. The reasons for hesitancy are that the uncertainties about safety exceed what they perceive to be a small benefit. In other words, my colleagues would prefer to take their chances with covid rather than beta test the vaccine. Many of my colleagues want to see the safety data after a year of use before getting vaccinated; these colleagues are concerned about possible autoimmune side effects that may not appear for months after vaccination.

    These announcements by Pfizer and Moderna are encouraging. I certainly hope that these vaccines protect people from the harm of covid-19. I certainly hope that these vaccines are safe. If both of these conditions are true, nobody will need to be coerced into taking the vaccine. However, you should pay even more attention about what is left out of an announcement than about what is stated. The pharmaceutical companies are more than happy for patients to misunderstand what is meant by efficacy. Caveat emptor (buyer beware)!

  • Zimbabwe Loses $1.5 Billion Annually To Gold Smuggling
    Zimbabwe Loses $1.5 Billion Annually To Gold Smuggling

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 18:30

    A report published Tuesday by the International Crisis Group calculates that cash-strapped Zimbabwe is losing at least $1.5 billion a year through the smuggling of gold, mainly to traders in Dubai. The figure is higher than the government’s own estimates of $1.2 billion a year lost through the illicit gold trade, according to Bloomberg.

    “Estimates suggest that more than $1.5 billion worth of gold leaves Zimbabwe illegally each year, often ending up in Dubai,” said the report by the International Crisis Group. Incidentally, the role of Dubai and the UAE in Zimbabwe’s gold smuggling operation has grown explosively in the past two years, with the reported difference between Zimbabwe gold exports and UAE gold imports soaring between 2016 and 2018.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Zimbabwe’s illicit gold trade is so extensive, the report stated that “some dealers estimate that illegal exports top official deliveries,” to the country’s formal refinery.

    The landlocked southern African country with chronic financial turmoil and endogenous corruption boasts vast gold reserves, with the sector accounting for 60% of Zimbabwean exports. The gold sector provides jobs to nearly 10% of the country’s population, according to the report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Alas, most of the output ends up in the black market, and just last month the head of Zimbabwe’s artisanal and small scale mining federation was arrested with six kilos (13 pounds) of gold worth over $360,000 (305,000 euros) in her hand luggage just before boarding a flight to Dubai.

    “Amid the collapsing economy, an estimated 1.5 million people have turned to artisanal mining as a safety net,” said the report, adding poverty and the fallout from the Covid-19 pandemic will likely drive more people towards the sector.

    According to official figures, gold production in the first eight months of 2020 rose 10%, driven especially by output from small-scale miners.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It isn’t clear how much of that gold ended up in official trade channels and how much was smuggled out of the country illegally. The reason: local miners are unhappy with a payment system which requires them to sell their gold to the state-owned buyer, Fidelity Printers and Refiners.

    They are paid 55% in foreign currency, with the remaining 45% in Zimbabwean dollars, which has been worthless ever since Zimbabwe’s infamous hyperinflation at the start of the century.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Zimbabwe’s centralized gold-buying scheme underpays producers, a practice that encourages smuggling and erodes industrial mining profits, leading companies to close mines,” said the ICG, adding that the idle industrial mines have become “targets for intrusion by artisanal miners”, it said.

    Meanwhile, the story of how Dubai has firmly rooted itself as the global gold-smuggling center may be even more fascinating. Regular readers will recall that back in 2015, we told a fascinating story about an unprecedented, multi-year smuggling ring involving Turkey and Iran, which was orchestrated and facilitated by Dubai, and which saw corruption reaching to the very top of the political and financial establishment: from president Erdogan in Turkey, to one of Turkey’s richest people, Iran-born Riza Sarraf, to Sheikh Sultan Bin Khalifa Al Nahyan, the son of the ruler of Abu Dhabi and one of the world’s richest people. The smuggled object in question was gold, billions of dollars worth of gold.

    The focus of the story was the previously unknown Dubai gold trading house, Gold.AE, until recently managed by one Mohammed Abu-Alhaj, which as we showed was the primary conduit by which Turkish physical gold found its way “legally” in Dubai, from where it subsequently left for Iran but not before pocketing millions in “commissions.”

    The role of Dubai as the global gold-smuggling hub was discussed by none other than Reuters all the way back in 2012:

    … pay a visit to Istanbul’s Ataturk International Airport and find a gate for a flight to Dubai. Couriers carrying millions of dollars worth of gold bullion in their luggage have been flying from Istanbul to Dubai, where the gold is shipped on to Iran, according to industry sources with knowledge of the business.

    The sums involved are enormous. Official Turkish trade data suggests nearly $2 billion worth of gold was sent to Dubai on behalf of Iranian buyers in August. The shipments help Tehran manage its finances in the face of Western financial sanctions.

    The sanctions, imposed over Iran’s disputed nuclear program, have largely frozen it out of the global banking system, making it hard for it to conduct international money transfers. By using physical gold, Iran can continue to move its wealth across borders.

    “Every currency in the world has an identity, but gold means value without identity. The value is absolute wherever you go,” said a trader in Dubai with knowledge of the gold trade between Turkey and Iran.

    The identity of the ultimate destination of the gold in Iran is not known. But the scale of the operation through Dubai and its sudden growth suggest the Iranian government plays a role.

    The Dubai trader and other sources familiar with the business spoke to Reuters on condition of anonymity, because of the political and commercial sensitivity of the matter.

    Iran sells oil and gas to Turkey, with payments made to state Iranian institutions. U.S. and European banking sanctions ban payments in U.S. dollars or euros so Iran gets paid in Turkish lira. Lira are of limited value for buying goods on international markets but ideal for a gold buying spree in Turkey.

    Fast forward to today, when the same thing is taking place with Zimbabwe (and who knows how many other countries), and we wonder just which “legitimate” Dubai gold trading house is making a killing be facilitating the world’s biggest illegal gold smuggling channel – one involving both in Zimbabwe and other corrupt gold producers – and more importantly, just who ends up acquiring all the newly created gold and where is it then stored?

  • Watch: Edward Snowden Opines On Censorship, Biden, And At-Risk Press Freedoms
    Watch: Edward Snowden Opines On Censorship, Biden, And At-Risk Press Freedoms

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 18:00

    Interview of Edward Snowden by Glenn Greenwald, via greenwald.substack.com (emphasis ours)

    The NSA reporting of 2013, enabled by the heroic whistleblowing of Edward Snowden, was widely perceived at the time time to be about violations of the right to privacy. It was, of course, about that, but the revelations implicated numerous other vital liberties, including free speech, a free press, the need for transparency over state actors and especially the always-lurking security state, and the dangers of allowing governments to make the most consequential decisions in the dark, with no democratic consent or accountability.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But the overarching cause uniting all of those specific concerns was a belief in and defense of internet freedom. In one of the earliest interviews we conducted with Snowden in Hong Kong, he explained that he was driven in large part by the central, vital role which the early version of the internet played in his life: one that was free of corporate and state control, that permitted anonymity and exploration free of monitoring, and, most of all, fostered unrestrained communication and dissemination of information by and among citizens of the world without corporate and state overlords regulating and controlling what they were saying.

    It was that Wild West vision of the internet that led so many to herald it at its inception as one of the greatest and most potent innovations in modern history for fostering individual freedom, human liberation, empowerment of ordinary citizens, and the ability of people to organize and communicate without having to depend on corporate giants and the governments they fund and control. In many ways, that vision is a feint memory — submersed in the mass surveillance Snowden exposed but which still persists, the corporatization of the most influential online venues and, increasingly, the control over the flow of speech and information by unseen oligarchical overlords whose decrees require no identifiable rationale and afford no appeal. The power of these unseen discourse-regulators is final, arbitrary and absolute.

    It does not have to be this way. A free internet is still worth fighting for and is still salvageable. But it faces growing threats: from corporate media outlets eager to suffocate anything that threatens their discourse-monopoly by ginning up pressure on Silicon Valley to censor various dissidents and independent voices even more so than they are now; from political parties and politicians who wield great influence with tech giants and know they can exploit that influence to silence their critics and adversaries; and the increasing concentration of power over the internet in the hand of a few monopolies whose power and wealth makes it irresistible for power centers to try to harness to suffocate dissent.

    On Monday I spoke with Snowden for a special episode of SYSTEM UPDATE, for roughly 40 minutes about the growing dangers of Silicon Valley censorship, why a tech industry that never wanted the power or responsibility to regulate discourse has had that obligation foisted upon them by politicians and journalists, the lurking dangers to press freedoms, and how a Biden/Harris administration may make all of this worse:

  • 5 Big Questions for a Double-Dip Recession
    5 Big Questions for a Double-Dip Recession


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 17:55

    Max Wiethe and Real Vision managing editor, Ed Harrison, discuss Ed’s outlook for a winter double-dip recession in the U.S. and the most important questions for determining the breadth, depth, and market implications of this prediction. How bad will the pandemic get before this wave can be arrested? How severe an economic brake will have to occur to get the virus under control? What short- and long-term impact will this have on businesses? What can policymakers do to mitigate downside risk and prevent worst-case outcomes? How will all of this feed through into asset markets? In the intro, Real Vision’s Haley Draznin, examines the juxtaposition between the markets hitting record highs and the broader economy as initial jobless claims rise for a second week in a row.

  • A Tale Of Two Markets: Visualizing The Huge Impact Of The Covid Vaccine Across Assets
    A Tale Of Two Markets: Visualizing The Huge Impact Of The Covid Vaccine Across Assets

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 17:41

    The story of the market since the March lows has been one of two parts, the first of massive FAAMG/tech/growth/momentum outperformance, and a second one in which value and cyclicals burst higher during a 15-sigma one day rotation out of momentum names that left countless quant funds near ruin; the only question is what date is the correct inflection point.

    According to one strategist, Deutsche Bank’s FX strategist Alan Riskin, that day is August 11, “when news of a Russian vaccine retrained the mind on how markets might respond to further positive vaccine developments.” The chart below shows asset returns from March until August 11, and is a representation of market price action dominated by risk negative virus news, versus a period when the virus story shifted progressively to ideas of an eventual vaccine helping risky assets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another suggestion comes from credit strategist Jim Reid who has done a similar chart but instead of August 11, he has picked the Nov 9 date as the critical inflection point in asset returns. As such the y-axis only looks at returns from just before the  Pfizer/BioNTech vaccine news just 16 days ago with the x-axis from March 20th to November 6th.

    Remarkably, and in keeping with the great rotation theme that has been discussed here extensively in the past two weeks, the US NYFANG index is only marginally down since the Pfizer news even though it went up +116% in the 8 months previously in response to the pandemic. At the same time, such formerly beaten down sectors as energy and bank stocks have led the charge post vaccine news. Additionally, as Bloomberg Ye Xie writes, while the S&P has gained just 3% since Nov. 6, the Russell 2000 index climbed 12%. Even more stunning is the S&P’s energy sector’s 35% rally since then.

    Meanwhile, the surprising winner across both interviews, is Bitcoin which “is a force of nature and is up an incredible +160% since March and +22% post vaccine.” Finally, Gold (-7.4%) and Silver (-9.1%) have languished over the last 16 days having been strong in the prior period.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking ahead, Reid writes that one of the key themes of 2021 could be that the S&P 500 might for once not be the global barometer of risk appetite, and adds that “it’s not impossible that we could have a good year for risk but with the S&P 500 down due to its heavy tech mega-cap weightings.” Notably, Deutsche Bank’s equity strategist Binky Chadha is the only strategist on Wall Street who forecasts a lower year-end price target for 2021, expecting the S&P500 to close next year at 3450, down around -5% from current levels, precisely because the rotation out of the current tech market leaders will be far more disruptive than what all of his far more optimistic Wall Street peers expect.

  • UPS Expands Dry Ice Production Ahead Of Vaccine Distribution
    UPS Expands Dry Ice Production Ahead Of Vaccine Distribution

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 17:30

    Global shipping giant UPS announced Tuesday it would begin producing thousands of pounds of dry ice per day and provide cold storage facilities along with transportation for COVID-19 vaccines. 

    In a corporate update, the Atlanta-based parcel delivery company said it would produce 1,200 pounds of dry ice per hour in its US facilities and be able to ship it the next day to hospitals across North America.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UPS is preparing for a significant surge in demand for dry ice and shipping services as the federal government’s Operation Warp Speed could distribute upwards of 6.4 million doses of the Pfizer-BioNTech vaccine in the first week after cleared for emergency use. The timing of the demand surge could be as early as Dec. 10. 

    Long-term storage requirements for the vaccine are -70 degrees Celsius, equivalent to -94 degrees Fahrenheit, and the company has developed special storage containers with dry ice to keep vaccines cold for up to two weeks. 

    “Enhancing our dry ice production capabilities increases our supply chain agility and reliability immensely when it comes to handling complex vaccines for our customers,” said Wes Wheeler, president of UPS Healthcare. 

    Wheeler continued: “Healthcare facilities in Louisville, Dallas, and Ontario will ensure we can produce dry ice to sufficiently pack and replenish shipments as needed to keep products viable and effective.”

    Also, UPS announced a partnership with freezer company Stirling Ultracold to distribute freezers to doctors’ offices, pharmacies, and urgent care facilities. 

    While “vaccine optimism” for weeks boosted the Dow Jones Industrial Average to new record highs, crossed the 30,000 mark on Tuesday – the COVID-19 vaccine will not immediately return things to normal. 

    See for yourself, while CNBC cheered as stocks hit new highs on Tuesday – food bank lines across America are quickly reappearing as millions of working poor folks face food and housing insecurity this holiday season. 

     

  • For What Are America's Wealthy Thankful? A Worsening Culture War: Taibbi
    For What Are America’s Wealthy Thankful? A Worsening Culture War: Taibbi

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 17:00

    Authored by Matt Taibbi via taibbi.substack.com

    Self-described “elected DNC member” and Washington Monthly contributor David Atkins tweeted this last week, garnering a huge response:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    You have to read the full thread to grasp the argument, a greatest hits collection of DNC talking points. Conservatives, Atkins writes, have no beliefs, being a “belligerent death cult against reality and basic decency.” There’s no reason to listen to them, since the “only actual policy debates” are “happening within the dem coalition between left and center-left.” He had over 61,000 likes last I checked.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, as Donald Trump kept describing the election as a “hoax,” newly re-upped South Carolina Senator Lindsey Graham tweeted this, perhaps offering a preview into Republican messaging in the post-Trump era:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    From the “vast right-wing conspiracy” through the “basket of deplorables” to now, the Democratic message increasingly focuses on the illegitimacy of the ordinary conservative voter’s opinion: ignorant, conspiratorial, and racist, so terrible that the only hope is mass-reprogramming by educated betters.

    On the other hand, Republicans from Goldwater to Trump have warned that coalitions of “marauders” from the inner cities and “bad hombres” from across the border are plotting to use socialist politics to seize the hard-earned treasure of the small-town voter, with the aid of elitist traitors in the Democratic Party.

    Spool these ideas endlessly and you get culture war. Any thought that it might abate once Trump left the scene looks naive now. The pre-election warnings from the right about roving bands of Pelosi-coddled Antifa troops looking to “attack your homes” haven’t subsided, while the line that Trump voters are not a political group but a stupidity death-cult is no longer hot take, but a mandatory element of mainstream press analyses.

    Continue reading here.

  • "Pandemic Of Crime" – LA Homicides Hit Decade Highs
    “Pandemic Of Crime” – LA Homicides Hit Decade Highs

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 16:30

    This past weekend, a surge in violent crime resulted in Los Angeles’ 300th homicide for 2020, a bloody benchmark not seen since the dark days of the 2009 financial crisis, reported LA Times

    Killings have risen 25% over last year, and shootings climbed by more than 32%, reflecting a similar trend across many other US metro areas (read: here & here) as defunding the police and socio-economic implosions and the virus-pandemic have left urban areas in chaos

    LAPD Police Chief Michel Moore said, “with the health pandemic, we don’t just cross our arms and say, ‘It is what it is.’ We’re taking all types of efforts to flatten the curve, to lower the impact, to save lives. And that’s what I’m asking for us to do with this violent crime. We have a pandemic of crime right now.”

    LA Murder Map 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Multiple crises are impacting Los Angeles come as the $3 billion police budget was slashed this year by $150 million following widespread social-unrest across the country against police brutality and misconduct. 

    “These cuts couldn’t come at a worse time,” Moore said. “My ability to put added resources [in the community] right now is hampered.”

    The last time the city passed the bloody benchmark was in 2009, during a brutal downturn in the economy. Recessions have commonly been associated with the rise of violent crime. 

    Compound a whole host of issues, from the virus pandemic to socio-economic implosions to defunding the police, well, the latest rash of violent crime in the metro area could continue well into 2021. This would force an even larger exodus of city dwellers to the countryside. 

  • President Trump Pardons Michael Flynn
    President Trump Pardons Michael Flynn

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 16:09

    Update (1730ET): The White House Press Secretary’s office has released a lengthy statement setting out the reasons for pardoning Gen. Flynn. The statement read that Flynn shouldn’t require a pardon because “he is an innocent man”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In reality, Flynn was the victim of a highly partisan campaign orchestrated by critics of the president within the FBI and the intelligence community, the WH added, while accusing the “complicit” media of perverting the facts and attacking the underpinnings of the Amerian system all because they couldn’t accept the fact that Trump won the 2016 race.

    The MSM, meanwhile, is already trying to make Flynn’s pardon an “issue” for the Jan. 5 runoff Senate races in Georgia.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Then again, the media already has plenty of fodder for those races.

    * * *

    Just minutes before the market closed on the day before Thanksgiving (typically one of the slowest, lowest-volume days of the year) John Solomon reported that President Trump has pardoned Michael Flynn, the man who briefly served as his national security advisor before being taken down (and then charged and convicted of lying to investigators) in an effort that some have described as a deep state-backed setup.

    Trump just confirmed the initial reports, published minutes ago by John Solomon and Just the News, and tweeted that: “It is my Great Honor to announce that retired Lieutenant General Michael T. Flynn has been granted a Full Pardon,” Trump tweeted. “Congratulations to @GenFlynn and his wonderful family, I know you will now have a truly fantastic Thanksgiving!”.

    Flynn was granted a full pardon by the president, who also commuted the sentence of former advisor Roger Stone back in July.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As the AP explains, Trump’s pardon effectively voids the criminal case against Flynn just as a federal judge was weighing, skeptically, whether to grant a Justice Department request to dismiss the prosecution despite Flynn’s own guilty plea to lying to the FBI about his Russia contacts.

    Already, Trump’s partisan opponents – including House Intelligence Committee head Adam Schiff, a longtime Trump critic – are lashing out at the president over the decision.

    “Well, it would send a message that at least as far as President Trump is concerned, if you lie on his behalf, if you cover up for him, he will reward you, he will protect you, but only if he thinks it’s in his interest.”

    “There are others that lied for him that he’s not going to extend that kind of service to,” Schiff added. “But it just frankly reflects so ill on our democracy, on the United States. Imagine what people around the world think when we have a president who’s acting like an organized crime figure,” Schiff added.

    Jerry Nadler, the New York Democrat and chairman of the House Judiciary Committee, also bashed Trump for the decision, which was hardly a surprise: Trump has been saying for months that a pardon for Flynn was likely.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s a safe bet that somebody – probably James Comey – will compare Trump to a mafia boss, especially since Flynn’s pardon follows Trump’s rant during a hearing in PA today where Trump egged on Rudy Giuliani and the others who are trying to overturn PA’s presidential election result. A judge handed them a major court victory earlier.

    Though Flynn pleaded guilty three years ago, his sentencing hadn’t yet been handed down as his legal team worked to dismiss the case, something that has become a cause celebre among conservatives.

    Flynn initially pleaded guilty to charges of lying to investigators that were related to his conversations with a Russian diplomat. He was the second Trump ‘associate’ convicted in the Mueller probe, according to the AP, and the only White House official to be convicted during the nearly two-year investigation (for more background, see the tweet below).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

     

    The general was fired just weeks after being confirmed as Trump’s first national security advisor after it came to light that he had lied about conversations Flynn had in December 2016 with the then-Russian ambassador Sergey Kislyak.

    Flynn reportedly urged Moscow not to escalate in response to sanctions imposed by the departing Obama administration over allegations that Russia interfered to try and hand Trump the election.

    Responding to news of the pardon, Jonathan Turley (author of the essay hyperlinked above), said “The idea of Trump pardoning a former aide still sits badly with me. However, so does the conduct of his judge and the refusal to end this saga.”

    While Sidney Powell battles on in her legal effort to overturn election results in several states, some pointed out that Flynn’s pardon is a ‘win’ for her.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    At a hearing for the Flynn case in September, Powell told the judge that she had discussed the case with President Trump but also said she did not want a pardon (presumably because she wanted Flynn to be vindicated on the merits).

    The DoJ said it wasn’t consulted by President Trump ahead of the pardon, but the department approves of the decision nonetheless.

    Though it wasn’t the ‘kraken’ we had come to expect from Powell, for conservatives, it’s a pleasant reminder that – for now at least – Trump is still president.

    To be sure, while Flynn might be the first and possibly most high-profile individual pardoned since Election Day, he likely won’t be the last: word around Washington is that Trump could pardon Edward Snowden as a kind of last-minute middle finger to the ‘Deep State’.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th November 2020

  • Escobar: Flying Dragon, Crashing Eagle
    Escobar: Flying Dragon, Crashing Eagle

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 11/25/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    Four geoeconomic summits compressed in one week tell the story of where we stand in these supremely dystopian times…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The (virtual) signing of RCEP in Vietnam was followed by the equally virtual BRICS meeting hosted by Moscow, the APEC meeting hosted by Malaysia, and the G20 this past weekend hosted by Saudi Arabia.

    Cynics have not failed to note the spectacular theater of the absurd of having the Top 20 – at least in theory – economies discussing what is arguably the turning point in the world-system linked to a beheading-friendly desert oil hacienda with a 7th century mentality.

    The Riyadh declaration did its best to lift the somber planetary mood, vowing to deploy “all available policy tools” (no precise details) to contain Covid-19 and heroically “save” the global economy by “advancing” global pandemic preparedness, vaccine development and distribution – in tandem with debt relief – for the Global South.

    Not a peep about The Great Reset – the Brave New World scheme concocted by Herr Schwab of Davos and fully supported by the IMF, Big Tech, transnational Big Capital interests and the oh so benign Prince Charles. Meanwhile, off the record, G20 sherpas moaned about the lack of real global governance and multiple attacks on multilateralism.

    And not a peep as well about the real life vaccine war between the expensive Western candidates – Pfizer, Moderna, AstraZeneca – and the much cheaper Russia-China versions – Sputnik V and Sinovac.

    What seems to be the case is that any agenda – sinister or otherwise – fits the one-size-fits-all vow by the G20 to provide “opportunities of the 21st century for all by empowering people, safeguarding the planet, and shaping new frontiers.”

    The House of Xi

    At the G20, President Xi Jinping did not waste the chance – after RCEP, BRICS and APEC – to once again emphasize China’s priorities: multilateralism, support for WTO reform, ample international cooperation on vaccine research and production.

    But then, in tandem with reducing tariffs and facilitating the trade of crucial medical supplies, Xi proposed a global health QR code – a sound way to restore global travel and trade: “While containing the virus, we need to restore the secure and smooth operation of global industrial and supply chains.”

    Predictably, there were howls about neo-Orwellian intrusion, comparing the QR code with the exceptionally misunderstood Chinese credit system. Herr Schwab’s Great Reset in fact proposes something similar, with even more neo-Orwellian overtones, disguised under an innocent “Covid Pass” app, or highly secure “health passport”.

    What Xi has proposed amounts to just a mutual recognition of health certificates, issued by different nations, based on nucleic acid tests. No gene altering vaccines coupled with nanochips. These QR codes, incorporated to health apps, are already used for domestic travel in China.

    Chinese officials have made it very clear that Beijing has been working as the representative of the Global South inside the G20. That’s multilateralism in action. And the multilateralist drive extends from RCEP – signed between 15 nations – to the brilliant Sun Tzu maneuver of China now accepting even the Comprehensive and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific Partnership (CPTPP), the successor of the Obama-promoted and Trump-detonated TPP.

    This revival – a case of Make TPP Chinese Again – can be envisaged because Beijing not only has mastered how to contain Covid-19 but is also recovering in lightning speed. China will be the only major economy growing in 2020 – de facto leading the world to a tentative post-Covid paradigm.

    What the APEC meeting made crystal clear is that with East Asia graphically hitting the economic limelight, as seen with RCEP, much vaunted US “leadership” inevitably diminishes.

    APEC promoted a so-called Putrajaya Vision 2040, condensing an “open, dynamic, resilient and peaceful” Asia-Pacific all the way to 2040. That neatly ties in with the three accumulated five-year Chinese plans all the way to 2035, approved last month at the CCP plenum in Beijing.

    The emphasis, once again, is on multilateralism and an open global economy.

    Few are more capable to capture the moment than Professor Wang Yiwei at the Institute of International Affairs at Renmin University, who wrote the best Chinese book on the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI). Wang stresses how China is in a period of “strategic opportunity” and is now “the most powerful leader of globalization”. China’s emphasis on multilateralism will “activate the connectivity and vitality of a trade platform like RCEP”.

    Stranger than fiction

    Now compare all of the above with Trump at the G20 tweeting about the election dystopia and privileging golfing instead of discussing Covid-19 containment.

    And then there’s The Elements of the China Challenge, the new 74-page delusional epic concocted by the office of secretary Mike “We Lie, We Cheat, We Steal” Pompeo.

    Diplomatic howls comparing it with the notorious George Kennan “long telegram” that codified the containment of the USSR in the Cold War are nonsense. Chinese Foreign Ministry reaction was more to the point: this was concocted by some “living fossils of the Cold War” and is doomed to end up “being consigned to the dustbin of history”.

    President Xi Jinping, at RCEP, BRICS, APEC and the G20, concisely laid out the Chinese case: multilateralism, international cooperation on multiple fields, an open global economy, due representation of Global South’s interests.

    As we wait for a set of imponderables all the way to January 20, 2021, perhaps an angular approach to what may lie ahead for the world economy is best offered by fiction.

    Enter Billions, season 5, episode 2, dialogue written by Andrew Ross Sorkin.

    Axe: “You know they call us traders ‘gamblers’. The world’s economy is one big casino, fueled by a giant debt bubble and computer driven derivatives. And there’s only one thing better than being a gambler at a casino.”

    Wags: “That’s being the house.”

    Axe: “That’s right. There’s a systemized machine out there, sucking capital from localities and injecting it into the global markets, where it can be used to speculate and manipulate. And if something goes wrong there are bailouts and bail-ins, federal aid and easing. Where the government doesn’t hunt you down, but instead gives you a nice soft net to land in.”

    Wags: “That’s your answer to the fireside chat: You want to become a bank.”

    Axe: “I want to become a bank.”

    Wags: “In order to rob it?”

    Axe: “In order that I don’t have to.”

  • Mississippi Cops Can Now Use Your Ring Doorbell Camera To Live Stream Your Neighborhood
    Mississippi Cops Can Now Use Your Ring Doorbell Camera To Live Stream Your Neighborhood

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 23:45

    Today in “those who surrender their liberty for security” news…

    The Jackson, Mississippi police department is piloting a 45 day program that allows them to live stream private security cameras, including Amazon Ring cameras, at the residences of its citizens. 

    It’s no surprise that Amazon’s Ring cameras were the only brand named for the pilot program, as EFF pointed out, since they have over 1,000 partnerships with local police departments. 

    The program allows Ring owners to patch their camera streams to a “Real Time Crime Center” – i.e. a dispatcher on desk duty whose new favorite way of passing the time is to watch you bring out your garbage twice a week in a bathrobe. 

    While the pilot program is supposedly “opt-in” only, meaning residents have to volunteer to be a part of it, it is an obvious step in the wrong direction of mass privacy invasion without a warrant. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The worst part is that even if you don’t participate and a neighbor’s cameras are pointed off center, perhaps towards a portion of your property, that footage can now be reviewed and combed through by law enforcement officials. 

    Police have used Ring cameras to “build comprehensive CCTV camera networks blanketing whole neighborhoods”, EFF notes, reducing the hardware burden on the department and slipping their presence into a neighborhood where it may otherwise not be welcomed. 

    Amazon published a statement distancing themselves from the program: “[Amazon and Ring] are not involved in any way with any of the companies or the city in connection with the pilot program. The companies, the police and the city that were discussed in the article do not have access to Ring’s systems or the Neighbors App. Ring customers have control and ownership of their devices and videos ,and can choose to allow access as they wish.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Saudi Arabia Receives Dangerous Gifts From Houthi-Iranian Alliance
    Saudi Arabia Receives Dangerous Gifts From Houthi-Iranian Alliance

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 23:25

    Submitted by South Front,

    The Yemeni Houthis have fired their new cruise missile, the Quds-2, at a Saudi Aramco oil company distribution station in the kingdom’s city of Jeddah, the group’s media news wing announced early on November 23. A spokesperson for the Armed Forces of the Houthi-led government, Yahya Sarea, said foreign companies and residents in Saudi Arabia should stay away from the military and oil infrastructure of Saudi Arabia as “operations will continue”. He emphasized that the missile precisely hit its target causing notable damage.

    The Houthis claim that the Quds-2 is a new generation “winged missile” produced by their Missile Forces. As always, the missile was likely assembled thanks to technical assistance from Iran or Iranian-supplied components.  That facility is located southeast of Jeddah’s King Abdulaziz International Airport. Over the past years, the Houthis have repeatedly pounded the military section of the airport with missiles and drones. Therefore, it was just the question of time, when the nearby oil infrastructure would be hit.

    At the same time, the Saudi side remains silent regarding the impact of the Houthi missile strike. This is an ordinary posture of Saudi Arabia towards Houthi missile and drone strikes. The Kingdom censors social media, denies any damage and claims that all targets were intercepted, if it appears possible and that no visual evidence of destruction are leaked immediately. Also, the main oil production and export facilities of Aramco are mostly in Saudi Arabia’s Eastern Province, more than 1000km across the country from Jeddah. Therefore, Riyadh likely believes that it can silence another setback in the ongoing war with the Yemeni movement.

    In September 2019, when the Houthis, with probable help from Iran, put out of service almost a half of Saudi oil infrastructure by hitting targets in Abqaiq and Khurais, the Kingdom was vowing a powerful response and the full destruction of Houthi missile and drone capabilities. However, a year later, the situation on the ground in Yemen for Saudi-backed forces became even worse and the widely-promoted ‘great Saudi victory’ over the Houthis turned into ashes.

    In recent month, Saudi-led forces lost the battle for the Yemeni province of Bayda, and now they seem to be losing the battle for Marib. Recently they retreated from the key Maas Base and the route for the potential Houthi advance on the provincial capital is almost open. The denial of the facts on the ground and the air dominance of the Kingdom did not help it to achieve a victory in the war. In turn, it’s the Houthis who have put themselves in the position that allowed them to turn the tide of the conflict. With the current trend in the Yemeni conflict, Saudi Arabia will apparently have to pay an even bigger price for its intervention in the Arab country.

  • Rich Americans Scrambling To Buy 'Golden Passports' To Second Country
    Rich Americans Scrambling To Buy ‘Golden Passports’ To Second Country

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 23:05

    Wealthy Americans are rushing to secure second passports, as a growing club of individuals have begun participating in government programs abroad which allow foreigners to acquire them, according to Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A person holds up an image of a Cypriot passport during a protest against corruption last month after the latest scandal to surround the investment scheme.

    Eric Schmidt acquired all the typical trappings of a mega-rich U.S. citizen: a superyacht, a Gulfstream jet, a Manhattan penthouse.

    One of his newest assets is far less conventional: a second passport.

    Alphabet Inc.’s former chief executive officer applied to become a citizen of Cyprus, according to an announcement last month in a Cypriot newspaper that was first reported by the website Recode. –Bloomberg

    According to the report, Americans rarely sought to buy so-called ‘golden passports’ in prior years, with such programs historically appealing to people from countries with far fewer travel freedoms than the United States – such as China, Pakistan and Nigeria.

    “We haven’t seen the likes of this before,” said Paddy Blewer, a London-based citizenship and residency advisory director at Henley & Partners. “The dam actually burst — and we didn’t realize it — at the end of last year, and it’s just continued getting stronger.

    A second passport can be had for as ‘little’ as $100,000 – and include potential benefits such as lower taxes, greater investment freedom, and hassle-free travel.

    The so-called citizenship-by-investment programs haven’t historically been as popular with Americans since one of their main draws — the favorable tax regimes of adopted countries — has been of little benefit to citizens of the U.S., one of the few nations to tax its people regardless of where they live.

    The current heightened interest among U.S. citizens predates the coronavirus pandemic, but the crisis has helped turbo-charge demand as they plan for how to maintain some freedom of movement with lockdown measures increasing amid a swelling second wave of Covid-19 cases. –Bloomberg

    Americans are thinking: ‘I want to have that ability to move as quickly as possible and not be stuck,” said Nestor Alfred, CEO of St. Lucia’s citizenship-by-investment unit.

    Another factor stoking interest is the prospect of a President Biden and a flipped Senate in January resulting in massive tax hikes on the wealthy. Others are securing the passports out of fear of social unrest according to Apex Capital Partners, which says its clients have increased 650% since the November 3 election.

    “We’re seeing this interest from Americans who are all saying the same things that Chinese, or Middle Eastern or Russian clients are saying,” said Apex founder Nuri Katz. “They’re saying, ‘We’re not leaving the U.S. right now, but we’re concerned and we want to have something else, just in case.’”

    Over half-a-dozen countries are now offering a citizenship-by-investment program, after St. Kitts and Nevis was the first country to do so in the early 1980s. Malta, for example, has raised $1 billion through June 2019 following the launch of their program last decade. The Carribean territory of Dominica has raised over $350 million in five years.

    That said, the programs have also invited their share of scandal.

    Fugitive Malaysian financier Jho Low was among 26 individuals to lose their Cyprus citizenship last year. The speaker of the Cypriot House of Parliament, Demetris Syllouris, resigned last month after offering to help a Chinese businessman with a criminal record get citizenship.

    Following the scandal, Cyprus said it would end its current passport-for-investment program on Nov. 1. The European Union, meanwhile, issued legal ultimatums to Malta and Cyprus about their citizenship-by-investment programs, claiming they may have violated the EU law. Representatives for Malta’s government, which announced plans to revise its program before the EU’s action, didn’t respond to requests for comment. –Bloomberg

    What’s next, golden immunity passports?

  • US, UK Intel Agencies Declare Cyber War On Independent Media
    US, UK Intel Agencies Declare Cyber War On Independent Media

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 22:45

    Authored by Whitney Webb via UnlimitedHangout.com,

    British and American state intelligence agencies are “weaponizing truth” to quash vaccine hesitancy as both nations prepare for mass inoculations, in a recently announced “cyber war” to be commanded by AI-powered arbiters of truth against information sources that challenge official narratives.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In just the past week, the national-security states of the United States and United Kingdom have discreetly let it be known that the cyber tools and online tactics previously designed for use in the post-9/11 “war on terror” are now being repurposed for use against information sources promoting “vaccine hesitancy” and information related to Covid-19 that runs counter to their state narratives. 

    A new cyber offensive was launched on Monday by the UK’s signal intelligence agency, Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ), which seeks to target websites that publish content deemed to be “propaganda” that raises concerns regarding state-sponsored Covid-19 vaccine development and the multi-national pharmaceutical corporations involved. 

    Similar efforts are underway in the United States, with the US military recently funding a CIA-backed firm—stuffed with former counterterrorism officials who were behind the occupation of Iraq and the rise of the so-called Islamic State—to develop an AI algorithm aimed specifically at new websites promoting “suspected” disinformation related to the Covid-19 crisis and the US military–led Covid-19 vaccination effort known as Operation Warp Speed.

    Both countries are preparing to silence independent journalists who raise legitimate concerns over pharmaceutical industry corruption or the extreme secrecy surrounding state-sponsored Covid-19 vaccination efforts, now that Pfizer’s vaccine candidate is slated to be approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) by month’s end. 

    Pfizer’s history of being fined billions for illegal marketing and for bribing government officials to help them cover up an illegal drug trial that killed eleven children (among other crimes) has gone unmentioned by most mass media outlets, which instead have celebrated the apparently imminent approval of the company’s Covid-19 vaccine without questioning the company’s history or that the mRNA technology used in the vaccine has sped through normal safety trial protocols and has never been approved for human use. Also unmentioned is that the head of the FDA’s Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, Patrizia Cavazzoni, is the former Pfizer vice president for product safety who covered up the connection of one of its products to birth defects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pedestrians walk past Pfizer world headquarters in New York on Monday Nov. 9, 2020. Pfizer says an early peek at its vaccine data suggests the shots may be 90% effective at preventing COVID-19, but it doesn’t mean a vaccine is imminent. (AP Photo/Bebeto Matthews)

    Essentially, the power of the state is being wielded like never before to police online speech and to deplatform news websites to protect the interests of powerful corporations like Pfizer and other scandal-ridden pharmaceutical giants as well as the interests of the US and UK national-security states, which themselves are intimately involved in the Covid-19 vaccination endeavor. 

    UK Intelligence’s New Cyberwar Targeting “Anti-Vaccine Propaganda”

    On Monday, the UK newspaper The Times reported that the UK’s GCHQ “has begun an offensive cyber-operation to disrupt anti-vaccine propaganda being spread by hostile states” and “is using a toolkit developed to tackle disinformation and recruitment material peddled by Islamic State” to do so. In addition, the UK government has ordered the British military’s 77th Brigade, which specializes in “information warfare,” to launch an online campaign to counter “deceptive narratives” about Covid-19 vaccine candidates.

    The newly announced GCHQ “cyber war” will not only take down “anti-vaccine propaganda” but will also seek to “disrupt the operations of the cyberactors responsible for it, including encrypting their data so they cannot access it and blocking their communications with each other.”  The effort will also involve GCHQ reaching out to other countries in the “Five Eyes” alliance (US, Australia, New Zealand and Canada) to alert their partner agencies in those countries to target such “propaganda” sites hosted within their borders.

    The Times stated that “the government regards tackling false information about inoculation as a rising priority as the prospect of a reliable vaccine against the coronavirus draws closer,” suggesting that efforts will continue to ramp up as a vaccine candidate gets closer to approval.

    It seems that, from the perspective of the UK national-security state, those who question corruption in the pharmaceutical industry and its possible impact on the leading experimental Covid-19 vaccine candidates (all of which use experimental vaccine technologies that have never before been approved for human use) should be targeted with tools originally designed to combat terrorist propaganda. 

    While The Times asserted that the effort would target content “that originated only from state adversaries” and would not target the sites of “ordinary citizens,” the newspaper suggested that the effort would rely on the US government for determining whether or not a site is part of a “foreign disinformation” operation. 

    This is highly troubling given that the US recently seized the domains of many sites, including the American Herald Tribune, which it erroneously labeled as “Iranian propaganda,” despite its editor in chief, Anthony Hall, being based in Canada. The US government made this claim about the American Herald Tribune after the cybersecurity firm FireEye, a US government contractor, stated that it had “moderate confidence” that the site had been “founded in Iran.” 

    In addition, the fact that GCHQ has alleged that most of the sites it plans to target are “linked to Moscow” gives further cause for concern given that the UK government was caught funding the Institute for Statecraft’s Integrity Initiative, which falsely labeled critics of the UK government’s actions as well as its narratives with respect to the Syria conflict as being related to “Russian disinformation” campaigns.

    Given this precedent, it is certainly plausible that GCHQ could take the word of either an allied government, a government contractor, or perhaps even an allied media organization such as Bellingcat or the Atlantic Council’s DFRLab that a given site is “foreign propaganda” in order to launch a cyber offensive against it. Such concerns are only amplified when one of the main government sources for The Times article bluntly stated that “GCHQ has been told to take out antivaxers [sic] online and on social media. There are ways they have used to monitor and disrupt terrorist propaganda,” which suggests that the targets of GCHQ’s new cyber war will, in fact, be determined by the content itself rather than their suspected “foreign” origin. The “foreign” aspect instead appears to be a means of evading the prohibition in GCHQ’s operational mandate on targeting the speech or websites of ordinary citizens.

    This larger pivot toward treating alleged “anti-vaxxers” as “national security threats” has been ongoing for much of this year, spearheaded in part by Imran Ahmed, the CEO of the UK-based Center for Countering Digital Hate, a member of the UK government’s Steering Committee on Countering Extremism Pilot Task Force, which is part of the UK government’s Commission for Countering Extremism. 

    Ahmed told the UK newspaper The Independent in July that “I would go beyond calling anti-vaxxers conspiracy theorists to say they are an extremist group that pose a national security risk.” He then stated that “once someone has been exposed to one type of conspiracy it’s easy to lead them down a path where they embrace more radical world views that can lead to violent extremism,” thereby implying that “anti-vaxxers” might engage in acts of violent extremism. Among the websites cited by Ahmed’s organization as promoting such “extremism” that poses a “national security risk” were Children’s Health Defense, the National Vaccine Information Center, Informed Consent Action Network, and Mercola.com, among others.

    Similarly, a think tank tied to US intelligence—whose GCHQ equivalent, the National Security Agency, will take part in the newly announced “cyber war”—argued in a research paper published just months before the onset of the Covid-19 crisis that “the US ‘anti-vaxxer’ movement would pose a threat to national security in the event of a ‘pandemic with a novel organism.’”

    InfraGard, “a partnership between the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) and members of the private sector,” warned in the paper published last June that “the US anti-vaccine movement would also be connected with ‘social media misinformation and propaganda campaigns’ orchestrated by the Russian government,” as cited by The Guardian. The InfraGard paper further claimed that prominent “anti-vaxxers” are aligned “with other conspiracy movements including the far right . . . and social media misinformation and propaganda campaigns by many foreign and domestic actors. Included among these actors is the Internet Research Agency, the Russian government–aligned organization.”

    An article published just last month by the Washington Post argued that “vaccine hesitancy is mixing with coronavirus denial and merging with far-right American conspiracy theories, including Qanon,” which the FBI named a potential domestic terror threat last year. The article quoted Peter Hotez, dean of the School of Tropical Medicine at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston, as saying “The US anti-vaccination movement is globalizing and it’s going toward more-extremist tendencies.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Simone Warstat of Louisville, Colo., waves a placard during a rally against a legislative bill to make it more difficult for parents to opt out for non-medical reasons to immunize their children Sunday, June 7, 2020, in Denver. 

    It is worth pointing out that many so-called “anti-vaxxers” are actually critics of the pharmaceutical industry and are not necessarily opposed to vaccines in and of themselves, making the labels “anti-vaxxer” and “anti-vaccine” misleading. Given that many pharmaceutical giants involved in making Covid-19 vaccines donate heavily to politiciansin both countries and have been involved in numerous safety scandals, using state intelligence agencies to wage cyber war against sites that investigate such concerns is not only troubling for the future of journalism but it suggests that the UK is taking a dangerous leap toward becoming a country that uses its state powers to treat the enemies of corporations as enemies of the state.

    The CIA-Backed Firm “Weaponizing Truth” with AI

    In early October, the US Air Force and US Special Operations Command announced that they had awarded a multimillion-dollar contract to the US-based “machine intelligence” company Primer. Per the press release, “Primer will develop the first-ever machine learning platform to automatically identify and assess suspected disinformation [emphasis added]. Primer will also enhance its natural language processing platform to automatically analyze tactical events to provide commanders with unprecedented insight as events unfold in near real-time.”

    According to Primer, the company “builds software machines that read and write in English, Russian, and Chinese to automatically unearth trends and patterns across large volumes of data,” and their work “supports the mission of the intelligence community and broader DOD by automating reading and research tasks to enhance the speed and quality of decision-making.” In other words, Primer is developing an algorithm that would allow the national-security state to outsource many military and intelligence analyst positions to AI. In fact, the company openly admits this, stating that their current effort “will automate the work typically done by dozens of analysts in a security operations center to ingest all of the data relevant to an event as it happens and funnel it into a unified user interface.”

    Primer’s ultimate goal is to use their AI to entirely automate the shaping of public perceptions and become the arbiter of “truth,” as defined by the state. Primer’s founder, Sean Gourley, who previously created AI programs for the military to track “insurgency” in post-invasion Iraq, asserted in an April blog post that “computational warfare and disinformation campaigns will, in 2020, become a more serious threat than physical war, and we will have to rethink the weapons we deploy to fight them.” 

    In that same post, Gourley argued for the creation of a “Manhattan Project for truth” that would create a publicly available Wikipedia-style database built off of “knowledge bases [that] already exist inside many countries’ intelligence agencies for national security purposes.” Gourley then wrote that “this effort would be ultimately about building and enhancing our collective intelligence and establishing a baseline for what’s true or not” as established by intelligence agencies. He concludes his blog post by stating that “in 2020, we will begin to weaponize truth.”

    Notably, on November 9, the same day that GCHQ announced its plans to target “anti-vaccine propaganda,” the US website NextGov reported that Primer’s Pentagon-funded effort had turned its attention specifically to “Covid-19 related disinformation.” According to Primer’s director of science, John Bohannon, “Primer will be integrating bot detection, synthetic text detection and unstructured textual claims analysis capabilities into our existing artificial intelligence platform currently in use with DOD. . . . This will create the first unified mission-ready platform to effectively counter Covid-19-related disinformation in near-real time.”

    Bohannon, who previously worked as a mainstream journalist embedded with NATO forces in Afghanistan, also told NextGov that Primer’s new Covid-19–focused effort “automatically classifies documents into one of 10 categories to enable the detection of the impact of COVID” on areas such as “business, science and technology, employment, the global economy, and elections.” The final product is expected to be delivered to the Pentagon in the second quarter of next year.

    Though a so-called private company, Primer is deeply linked to the national-security state it is designed to protect by “weaponizing truth.” Primer proudly promotes itself as having more than 15 percent of its staff hailing from the US intelligence community or military. The director of the company’s National Security Group is Brian Raymond, a former CIA intelligence officer who served as the Director for Iraq on the US National Security Council after leaving the agency. 

    The company also recently added several prominent national-security officials to its board including:

    • Gen. Raymond Thomas (ret.), who led the command of all US and NATO Special Operations Forces in Afghanistan and is the former commander of both US Special Operations Command and Joint Special Operations Command (JSOC).

    • Lt. Gen. VeraLinn Jamieson (ret.), the former deputy chief of staff for Air Force Intelligence, Surveillance and Reconnaissance who led the Air Force’s intelligence and cyber forces. She also personally developed “strategic partnerships” between the Air Force and Microsoft, Amazon, Google, and IBM in order “to accelerate the Air Force’s digital transformation.”

    • Brett McGurk, one of the “chief architects” of the Iraq War “surge,” alongside the notorious Kagan family, as NSC Director for Iraq, and then as special assistant to the president and senior Director for Iraq and Afghanistan during the Bush administration. Under Obama and during part of the Trump administration, McGurk was the special presidential envoy for the Global Coalition to Defeat ISIS at the State Department, helping to manage the “dirty war” waged by the US, the UK, and other allies against Syria.

    In addition to those recent board hires, Primer brought on Sue Gordon, the former principal deputy director of National Intelligence, as a strategic adviser. Gordon previously “drove partnerships within the US Intelligence Community and provided advice to the National Security Council in her role as deputy director of national intelligence” and had a twenty-seven-year career at the CIA. The deep links are unsurprising, given that Primer is financially backed by the CIA’s venture-capital arm In-Q-Tel and the venture-capital arm of billionaire Mike Bloomberg, Bloomberg Beta.

    Operation Warp Speed’s Disinformation Blitzkrieg   

    The rapid increase in interest by the US and UK national-security states toward Covid-19 “disinformation,” particularly as it relates to upcoming Covid-19 vaccination campaigns, is intimately related to the media-engagement strategy of the US government’s Operation Warp Speed. 

    Officially a “public-private partnership,” Operation Warp Speed, which has the goal of vaccinating 300 million Americans by next January, is dominated by the US military and also involves several US intelligence agencies, including the National Security Agency (NSA) and the Department of Homeland Security (DHS), as well as intelligence-linked tech giants Google, Oracle, and Palantir. Several reports published in The Last American Vagabondby this author and journalist Derrick Broze have revealed the extreme secrecy of the operation, its numerous conflicts of interest, and its deep ties to Silicon Valley and Orwellian technocratic initiatives. 

    Warp Speed’s official guidance discusses at length its phased plan for engaging the public and addressing issues of “vaccine hesitancy.” According to the Warp Speed document entitled “From the Factory to the Frontlines,” “strategic communications and public messaging are critical to ensure maximum acceptance of vaccines, requiring a saturation of messaging across the national media.” It also states that “working with established partners—especially those that are trusted sources for target audiences—is critical to advancing public understanding of, access to, and acceptance of eventual vaccines” and that “identifying the right messages to promote vaccine confidence, countering misinformation, and targeting outreach to vulnerable and at-risk populations will be necessary to achieve high coverage.”

    The document also notes that Warp Speed will employ the CDC’s three-pronged strategic framework for its communications effort. The third pillar of that strategy is entitled “Stop Myths” and has as a main focus “establish[ing] partnerships to contain the spread of misinformation” as well as “work[ing] with local partners and trusted messengers to improve confidence in vaccines.”

    Though that particular Warp Speed document is short on specifics, the CDC’s Covid-19 Vaccination Program Interim Playbook contains additional information. It states that Operation Warp Speed will “engage and use a wide range of partners, collaborations, and communication and news media channels to achieve communication goals, understanding that channel preferences and credible sources vary among audiences and people at higher risk for severe illness and critical populations, and channels vary in their capacity to achieve different communication objectives.” It states that it will focus its efforts in this regard on “traditional media channels” (print, radio, and TV) as well as “digital media” (internet, social media, and text messaging). 

    The CDC document further reveals that the “public messaging” campaign to “promote vaccine uptake” and address “vaccine hesitancy” is divided into four phases and adds that the overall communication strategy of Warp Speed “should be timely and applicable for the current phase of the Covid-19 Vaccination program.” 

    Those phases are:

    • Before a vaccine is available

    • The vaccine is available in limited supply for certain populations of early focus

    • The vaccine is increasingly available for other critical populations and the general public

    • The vaccine is widely available

    Given that the Covid-19 vaccine candidate produced by Pfizer is expected to be approved by the end of November, it appears that the US national-security state, which is essentially running Operation Warp Speed, along with “trusted messengers” in mass media, is preparing to enter the second phase of its communications strategy, one in which news organizations and journalists who raise legitimate concerns about Warp Speed will be de-platformed to make way for the “required” saturation of pro-vaccine messaging across the English-speaking media landscape.

  • Internet Searches For "Bidet" Begin To Soar As Toilet Paper Shortage Intensifies
    Internet Searches For “Bidet” Begin To Soar As Toilet Paper Shortage Intensifies

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 22:25

    Consumers are panic-hoarding toilet paper, food, and ammo as coronavirus surges across the country. Kroger, Giant, Target, and other supermarket chains have recently placed limits on toilet paper and other high demand goods to prevent shortages. 

    Last week, we reminded readers that the next round of “panic hoarding” was about to begin – and as of this week – that is certainly the case with reports across Twitter of empty store shelves. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While everyone scrambles to find toilet paper in stores and or online, there’s a more hygienic way to wipe than using a roll of Charmin ultra-soft, that is, a bidet. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Americans are quickly catching on about bidets, commonly found in European and Asian countries. The neat thing about a bidet, it requires no toilet paper and seamlessly cleans the undercarriage after nature calls. 

    Internet search trends for “best bidet” are surging again, the second time this year. The first eruption occurred in March after lockdowns resulted in a shortage of essential items. Now, as states and cities reimpose strict social distancing measures, with threats of lockdowns if a Biden presidency is seen early next year, bidet searches are back to April levels. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is the panic-hoarding of bidets next? 

  • Trump Plans To Pardon Michael Flynn: Report
    Trump Plans To Pardon Michael Flynn: Report

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 22:15

    President Trump plans to pardon his former national security adviser Michael Flynn, who pleaded guilty in December 2017 to lying to the FBI about contacts with the former Russian ambassador during the 2016 presidential transition – only to have the Justice Department drop the case after Flynn’s attorney, Sidney Powell, fought for the release of information suggesting that the FBI laid a ‘perjury trap‘ to try and get him to lie.

    The ‘deep state’ judge in the case, Emmet G. Sullivan, refused to drop the case, and has instead asked a federal appeals court – twice – whether he can ignore the DOJ, after asking a government-paid private lawyer to argue against Flynn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The rumored pardon, reported by Axios, will be “part of a series of pardons that Trump issues between now and when he leaves office,” as is typical of outgoing presidents.

    That said, according to Fox News’ Greg Jarrett, Flynn doesn’t want a pardon. “He wanted full exoneration and the case dismissed,” adding that “it’s clear” that presiding judge Emmett Sullivan is trying to ‘run out the clock’ until Biden takes office, and recommends Trump go through with a pardon.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As Axios notes, a Flynn pardon would come on the heels of Trump commuting the sentence of longtime associate Roger Stone, who Trump said was unfairly targeted as part of a political ‘witch hunt.’

    According to FBI documents released in Flynn’s case, senior FBI officials discussed strategies for targeting and setting up Flynn, prior to interviewing him at the White House on Jan. 24, 2017. It was that interview at the White House with former FBI Special Agent Peter Strzok and FBI Special Agent Joe Pientka that led Flynn, now 61, to plead guilty after months of pressure by prosecutors, financial strain and threats to prosecute his son.

  • On Fumes Of Stimulus & Frustration: California Legal Cannabis Sales Explode
    On Fumes Of Stimulus & Frustration: California Legal Cannabis Sales Explode

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by Wolf Richter via WolfStreet.com,

    You just knew this would be coming. It was bound to show up in the data. And California is cashing in…

    Cannabis tax revenues in Q3 collected by the State of California soared by a record 80% year-over-year, and by a record of $136 million year-over-year, to a $307 million, the California Department of Tax and Fee Administration reported Monday afternoon. This does not include tax revenues collected by cities and counties. All three categories surged: Excise Tax (+89%), Cultivation Tax (+80%), and Sales Tax (+67%).

    This brought California’s cannabis taxes during the first nine months of 2020 to $775 million, and on track to exceed $1 billion for the whole year, a sorely needed injection of moolah during these trying times:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cannabis has always been a popular product and business in California in a huge black market that persists today, but what we’re looking at is the shift of black-market weed to regulated and taxed legal weed, much of it locally grown, and sold at retailers that are paying rent, unlike other retailers that have shut down or stopped paying rent.

    California cannabis tax revenues had been surging by around $60 million every quarter compared to the same quarter a year earlier, since the beginning of legalization in January 2018. This rate of growth was fairly stable through the fourth quarter 2019.

    Then in February 2020, Covid was beginning to run around in California, and people began to react. On February 26, San Francisco declared a state of emergency. By that time, traffic had already died down. On March 17, the five most populous counties of the Bay Area began the lockdown. And people, to soothe their pains and anxieties…

    In Q1, cannabis tax revenues surged by $76 million year-over-year to $206 million. In Q2, the stimulus money and extra unemployment benefits of $600-a-week kicked in, and cannabis tax revenues surged by $103 million to $260 million. And in Q3, the stock market gains were ladled on top of it, and the state started sending out the additional $300-a-week in unemployment benefits in $900-lumpsum payments, and cannabis tax revenues exploded by $135 million to $307 million.

    This chart shows the year-over-year increases in millions of dollars for each quarter. Note how through 2019, the year-over-year increases were roughly stable at around $60 million, and then they surged:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the cannabis sales tax rate of 7.25% (state 6% and mandatory local 1.25%), and $106 million in sales taxes reported, we can figure that $1.46 billion in weed was retailed by regulated retailers in the quarter. For the year 2020, legal weed retail sales will likely exceed $5 billion, and at this rate, exceed $6 billion in 2021. This is starting to add up.

    The regulations that followed California Proposition 64, approved by voters in November 2016, legalized the production, distribution, sale, and use of recreational cannabis by adults as of January 2018. The regulations are complex. Three regulatory offices are in charge: The California Bureau of Cannabis Control; the California Department of Food and Agriculture; and the California Department of Public Health. And things are not always clear-cut and have led to legal entanglements, one of which a judge just ruled on: Advertising cannabis products and businesses on highway billboards.

    Proposition 64 included a ban on highway billboards that advertise cannabis products and businesses. The California Bureau of Cannabis Control had interpreted the language to mean that there could be no cannabis billboard within 15 miles of the California border, but were OK elsewhere. Soon, cannabis billboards started popping up everywhere, including on along 101 Freeway, near San Louis Obispo, where a construction contractor with two kids that frequently used the freeway decided enough was enough and sued.

    On Friday, a San Luis Obispo County Superior Court Judge said in a ruling that the Bureau of Cannabis Control had improperly allowed these cannabis billboards along California highways and that the bureau and its director “exceeded their authority in promulgating the advertisement placement regulation.”

    The ruling prohibits billboards along 4,315 miles of interstate highways and along state highways that cross state borders, according to one of the attorneys for the plaintiff, cited by the Los Angeles Times (state law allows cannabis ads on city streets, subject to local ordinances, but not within 1,000 feet of daycare centers, K-12 schools, or playgrounds). The bureau said it was “still reviewing the ruling” and hadn’t decided if would appeal. No one said it would be smooth sailing to bring the huge weed business out of the black market and integrated it into legal commerce. But it seems to have been worth the effort.

    *  *  *

    Enjoy reading WOLF STREET and want to support it? Using ad blockers – I totally get why – but want to support the site? You can donate. I appreciate it immensely.

  • China Slams NatSec Advisor O'Brien As Sowing "Chaos" & Cold War Tensions In Asia
    China Slams NatSec Advisor O’Brien As Sowing “Chaos” & Cold War Tensions In Asia

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 21:45

    Top Chinese diplomatic officials have hit back against US national security advisor Robert O’Brien over his “unreasonable remarks” in the Philippines while on an official visit there this week. 

    The Chinese embassy in Manila on Tuesday slammed what diplomatic officials called his deliberate efforts at “stirring up trouble in the South China Sea” and “provoking a rift between China and the Philippines.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump’s national security adviser Robert O’Brien, Getty Images

    The Manila embassy further harangued Washington for not promoteing regional peace and stability, instead creating “chaos in the region” for US self-interest.

    “In recent years, to safeguard its regional and global hegemony, the US has regarded itself as ‘patron’ and ‘judge’ of regional countries and directly intervened in the South China Sea and other issues,” the statement said.

    His statements were said to have “fanned the flames everywhere” and “seriously” undermined regional security by seeking to create tensions between China and its regional allies. 

    The statement said further, “The US is the biggest driver of the militarization of the South China Sea and the most dangerous external factor endangering the peace and stability of the South China Sea” – something which has been emphasized by Beijing many times in the recent past. 

    O’Brien has been on a surprise tour of Vietnam and the Philippine’s this week in a mission seen as attempting to counter the ASEAN (Association of Southeast Asian Nations) countries’ (and key allies) recent signing of a historic trade pact, the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), hailed as the biggest free trade deal ever among fifteen Asia Pacific Nations and widely reported as a huge win for China.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    O’Brien weighed in heavily on soaring tensions in the South China Sea and US efforts to maintain ‘freedom of navigation’ by its beefed up naval presence there:

    During his speech at the building of the Department of Foreign Affairs on Monday, O’Brien reiterated Washington’s support for Manila’s fight for control over the West Philippine Sea.

    “I just want to say that those resources belong to the children and grandchildren of the people here. They belong to the [Filipino] people,” O’Brien said.

    “They don’t belong to some other country that just because they may be bigger than the Philippines, they can come take away and convert the resources of the Philippine people. That’s just wrong,” he added.

    The Chinese embassy called the whole speech “full of Cold War mentality” and which was intended to “wantonly incite confrontation.”

    O’Brien had vowed that “Any armed attack on Philippine forces aircraft or public vessels in the South China Sea will trigger our mutual defense obligations.”

    He also provocatively confirmed that $18 million in missiles the Trump administration pledged to the Philippines last April would soon be delivered on, and that the deal is currently progressing.  

  • Majority Of Republicans Would Support Trump As A 2024 Candidate, New Poll Finds
    Majority Of Republicans Would Support Trump As A 2024 Candidate, New Poll Finds

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 21:25

    Authored by Annaliese Levy via SaraACarter.com,

    According to a new national tracking poll by Morning Consult and Politico, Donald Trump will continue to have a powerful platform with the GOP base even after he leaves office.

    The Nov. 21-23 survey collected data among 669 Republicans and 1,990 registered voters overall and found that he will most likely continue to have immense influence over the Republican Party from outside the government.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump is also the favored Republican candidate for a 2024 run according to a hypothetical test of 14 potential candidates. Trump received 53% of support among Republicans and Republican-leaning independents. Vice President Mike Pence came in second at 12% support. Donald Trump Jr. got the third-highest support at 8%, while other Republican figures, including Sen. Tom Cotton, Ted Cruz, Mitt Romney and Rick Scott, and Nikki Haley each received less than 5% support.

    With Trump losing the 2020 presidential election, he is still eligible to run for a second term. Trump has given permission to begin the transition process to the next administration, while he has still not conceded. Trump has delayed conceding the election to President-elect Joe Biden as his legal team is continuing its fight against alleged election fraud in key swing states.

    If Trump were to run in 2024, he would be a dominant force in the Republican party.

    Nearly 68% said they consider Trump to be more in touch with the party’s rank and file, compared with 20% who said the same of Republicans in Congress. Trump was also more likely to be considered effective and committed to the country’s best interests. 56% of Republican voters say Trump is predominantly looking out for the party’s best interests.

    Trump has told White House officials he could announce his 2024 candidacy as soon as he leaves the White House in January.

    Some Republicans think Trump should step away and allow other candidates to emerge.

    But others say that’s unlikely. As he leaves the White House, Trump will continue to have a resilient and powerful hold on the GOP, with loyal followers who will support him throughout another candidacy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump received at least 68 million votes in 2020, five million more than he did in 2016, and about 48% of the popular vote, meaning he retained the support of nearly half of the public. If he decides to run for a second term, he will be a difficult candidate to beat.

  • Bill Gross' Neighbor "Forced To Flee" Mansion During Coordinated Harassment Campaign
    Bill Gross’ Neighbor “Forced To Flee” Mansion During Coordinated Harassment Campaign

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 21:05

    The civil court battle between Bill Gross (joined by his girlfriend, former tennis pro Amy Schwartz) and his neighbors, tech entrepreneur Mark Towfiq (and his wife), continues, with more juicy details coming to light this week, portraying Gross’s heavy-handed approach toward dealing with an annoying neighbor who chafed at the sight of one of Gross’s lawn statues.

    In previous testimony, we’ve heard that Gross retaliated against his neighbor by turning the house’s sound-system up full-blast playing the theme song to “Gilligan’s Island” on repeat at volumes that one Laguna Beach compliance officer described as being even louder than the Pacific Coast Highway and the Ocean.

    But in the latest testimony, Towfiq shared how Gross threatened him, claiming he would take drastic measures to punish the Towfiq’s if they proceeded to lodge a complaint with the town about Gross’s lawn sculpture. Towfiq told the court that Gross’s threat “filled me with dread”, yet he persisted, according to Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So Gross made him face the music, so to speak.

    When Towfiq texted Gross’s girlfriend – whom Gross and his legal team have claimed is the object of a “prurient obsession” on the part of Mr. Towfiq – Gross apparently took his girlfriend’s phone and texted back the following: “peace on all fronts or well just have nightly concerts big boy.”

    To dispel any confusion, Gross even signed one of his tweets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Towfiq explained that he initially complained to Gross because the netting surrounding his lawn sculpture, which is adjacent to Towfiq’s property, was “unsightly” and detracted from his “enjoyment” of the $25 million palace he constructed for himself and his wife. But after he filed a complaint about the sculpture, Gross dropped all pretense of neighborly respect and resorted to threats, Towfiq said.

    “I had a sinking feeling in my stomach,” Towfiq testified when asked by his lawyer what his reaction to the text was. “That is, a total dread that I’m going to be the target of his rage or something.”

    But once Gross turned up the music, Towfiq said he and his wife were “forced to flee” the property and call the police. At one point, Towfiq said he recorded Gross and Schwartz dancing on their balcony, while giving him the finger and “taunting” him. Towfiq said the music was so loud it penetrated the extra-thick double pane windows that Towfiq said he’d installed in his home.

    Gross’s antics didn’t stop there: he repeatedly interrupted proceedings to complain that he “couldn’t hear” Towfiq. At one point, Gross’s attorney asked the judge if Gross could be seated right next to Towfiq so he could more adequately hear his testimony.

    Towfiq complained that Gross wouldn’t stop “staring” at him during the testimony, but Gross complained he was simply trying to understand Towfiq because “he mumbles.”

    Gross is suing Towfiq for installing cameras on his property to harass Gross and his girlfriend, while Towfiq is suing for psychological distress, arguing that Gross subjected him to a form of “torture” for refusing to simply drop his complaint to the town about Gross’s lawn sculpture.

    Gross has a history of high-profile feuds, including with his ex-wife, whom he terrorized with fart spray and old fish. And that was before he retired from his day job as a portfolio manager at Janus Henderson.

  • The Blizzard Of Bogus Journalism On COVID
    The Blizzard Of Bogus Journalism On COVID

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 20:45

    Authored by Jeffrey Tucker via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    This game of hunt-and-kill Covid cases has reached peak absurdity, especially in media culture…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Take a look at Supermarkets are the most common place to catch Covid, new data reveals. It’s a story on a “study” assembled by Public Health England (PHE) from the NHS Test and Trace App. Here is the conclusion. In the six days of November studied, “of those who tested positive, it was found that 18.3 per cent had visited a supermarket.”

    Now, if the alarm bells don’t go off with that one, you didn’t pay attention to 7th grade science. If the app had also included showering, eating, and breathing, it might have found a 100% correlation. Yes, the people who tested positive probably did shop, as do most people. That doesn’t mean that shopping gives you Covid and it certainly doesn’t mean that shopping kills you. 

    Even if shopping is a way to get Covid, this is a very widespread and mostly mild virus for 99.8% percent of the population with an infection fatality rate as low as 0.05% for those under 70. Competent infectious disease experts have said multiple times that test, track, and isolate strategies are nearly useless for controlling viruses such as this. 

    This story/study was so poor and so absurd that it was too much even for Isabel Oliver, Director of the National Infection Service at Public Health England. She sent out the following note:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Thank you. One down, a thousand to go. 

    The New York Times pulled a mighty fast one with this piece: “States That Imposed Few Restrictions Now Have the Worst Outbreaks.” This would be huge news if true because it would imply not only that lockdowns save lives (which no serious study has thus far been able to document) but also that granting people basic freedoms are the reason for bad health outcomes, an astonishing claim on its own. 

    The piece, put together by two graphic artists and seemingly very science-like, speaks of “outbreaks,” which vaguely sounds terrible: packed with mortality. It’s odd because anyone can look at the data and see that New York, New Jersey, Massachusetts, and Connecticut lead the way with deaths per million, mostly owing to the fatalities in long-term care facilities. These were the states that locked down the hardest and longest. Indeed they are locking down again! Deaths per million in states like South Dakota are still low on the list. 

    How in the world can the NYT claim that states that did not lock down have the worst outbreaks? The claim hinges entirely on a trivial discovery. Some clever someone discovered that if you reflow data by cases per million instead of deaths per million, you get an opposite result. The reasons: 1) when the Northeast experienced the height of the pandemic, there was very little testing going on, so the “outbreak” was not documented even as deaths grew and grew, 2) by the time the virus reached the Midwest, tests were widely available, 3) the testing mania grew and grew to the point that the non-vulnerable are being tested like crazy, generating high positives in small-population areas. 

    By focusing on the word “outbreak,” the Times can cleverly obscure the difference between a positive PCR result (including many false positive and perhaps half or more asymptomatic cases) and a severe outcome from catching the virus. In other words, the Times has documented an “outbreak” of mostly non-sick people in low-population areas. 

    There are hundreds of ways to look at Covid-19 data. The Times picked the one metric – the least valuable one for actually discerning whether and to what extent people are sick – in order to generate the result that they wanted, namely that open states look as bad as possible. The result is a chart that massively misrepresents any existing reality. It makes the worst states look great and the best ones look terrible. The visual alone is constructed to make it looks as if open states are bleeding uncontrollably.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How many readers will even know this? Very few, I suspect. What’s more amazing is that the Times itself already debunked the entire “casedemic” back in September:

    Some of the nation’s leading public health experts are raising a new concern in the endless debate over coronavirus testing in the United States: The standard tests are diagnosing huge numbers of people who may be carrying relatively insignificant amounts of the virus.

    Most of these people are not likely to be contagious, and identifying them may contribute to bottlenecks that prevent those who are contagious from being found in time….

    In three sets of testing data that include cycle thresholds, compiled by officials in Massachusetts, New York and Nevada, up to 90 percent of people testing positive carried barely any virus, a review by The Times found.

    All of which makes one wonder what precisely is going on in this relationship between cases and severe outcomes. The Covid Tracking Project generates the following chart. Cases are in blue while deaths are in red. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Despite this story and these data, the graphic artists at the Times got to work generating a highly misleading presentation that leads to one conclusion: more lockdowns.

    (My colleague Phil Magness has noted further methodological problems even within the framework that the Times uses but I will let him write about that later.) 

    Let’s finally deal with Salon’s attack on Great Barrington Declaration co-creator Jayanta Bhattacharya. Here is a piece that made the following claim of the infection fatality rate: “the accepted figure of 2-3 percent or higher.” That’s an astonishing number, and basically nuts: 10 million people will die in the US alone. 

    Here is what the CDC says concerning the wildly disparate risk factors based on age: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These data are not inconsistent with the World Health Organization’s suggestion that the infection fatality rate for people under 70 years of age is closer to 0.05%

    The article further claims that “herd immunity may not even be possible for COVID-19 given that infection appears to only confer transient immunity.” And yet, the New York Times just wrote that:

    How long might immunity to the coronavirus last? Years, maybe even decades, according to a new study — the most hopeful answer yet to a question that has shadowed plans for widespread vaccination.

    Eight months after infection, most people who have recovered still have enough immune cells to fend off the virus and prevent illness, the new data show. A slow rate of decline in the short term suggests, happily, that these cells may persist in the body for a very, very long time to come.

    How is it possible for people to make rational decisions with this kind of journalism going on? Truly, sometimes it seems like the world has been driven insane by an astonishing blizzard of false information. Just last week, an entire state in Australia shut down completely – putting all its citizens under house arrest – due to a false report of a case in a pizza restaurant. One person lied and the whole world fell apart. 

    Meanwhile, serious science is appearing daily showing that there is no relationship at all, and never has been, between lockdowns and lives saved. This study looks at all factors related to Covid death and finds plenty of relationship between age and health but absolutely none with lockdown stringency. “Stringency of the measures settled to fight pandemia, including lockdown, did not appear to be linked with death rate,” says the study, echoing a conclusion of dozens of other studies since as early as March. 

    It’s all become too much. The world is being seriously misled by major media organs. The politicians are continuing to panic and impose draconian controls, fully nine months into this, despite mountains of evidence of the real harm the lockdowns are causing everyone. If you haven’t lost faith in politicians and major media at this point, you have paid no attention to what they have been doing for the better part of this catastrophic year. 

  • Cops Swarm Toronto BBQ For Defying COVID Lockdown, Shut It Down
    Cops Swarm Toronto BBQ For Defying COVID Lockdown, Shut It Down

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 20:25

    A popular Toronto restaurant, Adamson Barbecue, had a swarm of cops show up after owner Adam Skelly fought back against COVID lockdown restrictions and reopened both indoor and outdoor dining in defiance of Ontario’s new ‘Gray zone‘ restrictions.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    People could be seen dining as Skelly showed cops and inspectors around.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Skelly lashed out against the restrictions in a Monday night video, where he announced that he would reopen.

    //www.instagram.com/embed.js

    “The data from Toronto Public Health that came out two weeks ago shows that two of the over 10,000 Ontario COVID deaths were linked to bars, restaurants and retail. So why are we getting we getting singled out? And the big multinational corporations are all essential while they’re packed?” Skelly said.

    And to nobody’s surprise, Adamson BBQ was shut down by the authorities.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsRestaurant owner Jason Lake drove three hours to support Skully.

    Skully came under fire in April after questioning the severity of COVID-19 and calling social media naysayers retards.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Gingrich: The Thieves Who Stole Our Election Got Sloppy
    Gingrich: The Thieves Who Stole Our Election Got Sloppy

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 20:05

    Authored by Newt Gingrich, op-ed via The Epoch Times,

    Laziness leads to sloppiness, and sloppiness is how the most brazen heist in American history is being exposed…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stealing the 2020 election was a mammoth undertaking, involving widespread lawlessness and illicit partnerships between private actors and public officials. They’ve been working to cover their tracks since Election Day, but they didn’t work fast enough. Now, the courts need to stop them from destroying any more evidence so that the people of Pennsylvania—and the rest of the country—can accurately assess the ramifications of their wrongdoing.

    Explosive new litigation filed in federal district court on Nov. 21 details and documents a wide variety of illegal practices that were used to inflate the number of votes received by Democrat presidential candidate Joe Biden, including disparate treatment of voters based on where they live and outright manipulation of Pennsylvania’s voter registration system by partisan activists.

    An unprecedented number of mail-in and absentee ballots were cast this year, and practically everyone expected that this would result in a higher-than-usual rate of ballots being rejected for various flaws, such as lacking a secrecy envelope or missing information. In Pennsylvania, tens or hundreds of thousands of ballots were likely to be rejected, based on historical patterns. Instead, a mere 0.03 percent of mail-in ballots were ultimately rejected—somewhere in the neighborhood of about 1,000 votes.

    Considering that a significant majority of mail-in votes were cast for Biden, the Democrat candidate benefited handsomely from this discrepancy. But how did this anomaly happen?

    It turns out that election officials in Democrat strongholds such as Allegheny County (Pittsburgh), Philadelphia County, and Philadelphia’s collar counties—particularly Delaware County—exceeded their authority in order to give voters preferential treatment that wasn’t afforded to voters in Republican-leaning areas of the state.

    Specifically, election workers illegally “pre-canvassed” mail-in ballots to determine whether they were missing a secrecy envelope or failed to include necessary information. When ballots were found to be flawed, voters were given an opportunity to correct, or “cure,” their ballots to make sure they counted. In at least some cases, Democrat Party officials were even given lists of voters to contact about curing their ballots.

    Election officials in Republican-leaning counties rightly interpreted this as a violation of Pennsylvania’s election code, but Democrat Secretary of State Kathy Boockvar issued guidance authorizing the illegal practices despite lacking the statutory authority to do so.

    That’s not the only way Democrats broke the law to give their candidate an unfair advantage, though. Extensive on-the-ground investigations conducted over the past year and a half by attorneys and investigators with the Amistad Project of the nonpartisan Thomas More Society have uncovered another element of the plot that involved even more egregious behavior.

    Boockvar also exceeded her authority by granting private, partisan organizations—including the notoriously pro-Democrat group “Rock the Vote”—access to the Commonwealth’s Statewide Uniform Registry of Electors (SURE).

    “Rock the Vote’s web tool was connected to our system, making the process of registering voters through their online programs, and those of their partners, seamless for voters across Pennsylvania,” the lawsuit quotes Boockvar as saying.

    That’s not supposed to happen. It’s one thing for outside groups to submit registration applications to the state on behalf of would-be voters, but election clerks are the only ones who are supposed to enter this sort of information directly into the records.

    It’s easy to see why by inspecting post-election voter lists, which contain names such as “Mary April Smith,” followed by “Mary May Smith,” “Mary June Smith,” “Mary July Smith,” and so forth through the rest of the calendar. When the same voter lists were purchased just a week later, however, those suspicious names had mysteriously disappeared from the rolls.

    Under the circumstances, that’s direct evidence of a systematic effort to conceal wrongdoing. All further alterations to the SURE system should be immediately halted to allow a thorough investigation of the records before any more evidence can be destroyed.

    The thieves who attempted to hijack the 2020 presidential election were bound to slip up somewhere, and now they’re trying to clean up the glaring evidence of their wrongdoing before the full extent of their crimes can be exposed to the American public. We can’t allow that to happen, or we may never be able to trust the integrity of our elections again.

  • $500 Million In Coal Stranded Off China's Coast As Australian Trade Spat Intensifies
    $500 Million In Coal Stranded Off China’s Coast As Australian Trade Spat Intensifies

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 19:45

    At least 50 giant bulk carriers loaded with Australian coal, worth $500 million, are anchored off several Chinese ports, as the latest diplomatic spat between Canberra and Beijing intensifies. 

    Bloomberg, citing shipping data from Kpler, said 66 vessels are loaded with Australian coal had been moored off China’s coast for more than a month. The ships collectively have 5.7 million tons of coal and about 1,000 seafarers onboard. Vessel sizes range from Capesize to Panamax. 

    The ban on Australian coal is occurring as both countries are locked in a one-sided trade war, with Beijing slapping tariffs and blacklisting commodities from the country this year

    According to Braemar ACM Shipbroking, Beijing has halted Australian coal imports, with vessels unable to clear customs. 

    “Some ships have been waiting for months,” said Nick Ristic, a dry bulk analyst with Braemar. 

    A recent report from the shipbroker said some of the vessels were being diverted from China’s coast to other countries, such as India or Vietnam. 

    Bulk Carriers Hauling Coal Around China

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The ban comes as Beijing rushes to support domestic coal prices and prop up ailing coal mining companies.

    Research firm Wood Mackenzie said China’s monthly coal imports had fallen to a decade low. Readers may recall Beijing has already told local firms to ditch Australian iron ore and cotton. 

    For more color on the diplomatic spat that has morphed into a trade war between both countries, China Daily, a China-run state publication and mouthpiece for the Chinese Communist Party, accused Australian politicians and media of “constantly concocting lies about China and stoking Sinophobia.”

    Australia was “shirking” its responsibility for “worsening bilateral relations” between the two countries and “misleading the public.”

    “Some ill-intentioned Australians have pinned the blame on the Chinese side by claiming that China’s control measures on some Australian exports are “economic coercion” and even accusing China of weaponizing economic ties.”

    “It is both ridiculous and in vain for those in Australia to dress up their country as a victim. Facts speak louder than words.”

    “Any objective observer can see that it is Canberra that has single-handedly undermined the political and economic premises for cooperation with Beijing.” – China Daily 

    Meanwhile, in a wake-up call to the US, despite the trade spat, 15 Asia-Pacific countries, including China and Australia, recently signed a huge trade deal. Also, with a Biden presidency, global trade disputes may soften. 

  • World's Largest Model Agency Attempt To Go Public Via SPAC Collapses
    World’s Largest Model Agency Attempt To Go Public Via SPAC Collapses

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 19:25

    Just how ridiculous is the blank check IPO fever that has gripped markets in 2020? Consider this: SPACs, or blank-check companies which go public for the express purpose of buying an existing firm and which also exploded in 2007 just before the housing/credit bubble burst, now make up a record share of U.S. initial public offerings this year. According to Bloomberg, SPACs have collectively raised $66.4 billion year-to-date, accounting for nearly half of all the $138.9 billion raised in U.S. IPOs (SPACs only accounted for 19% of the $71.4 billion IPO pie last year).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while there is no stopping the blank check juggernaut absent a full-blown market crash – so far in November, the SPAC pipeline has continued to grow with 18 more filings on deck to list on U.S. exchanges – one company that won’t be going public via a SPAC merger is the world’s largest model agency, Elite Model World, whose merger discussions with blank-check firm Galileo Acquisition have fallen apart without a deal being reached according to Bloomberg, which reported that Elite informed investors this month that the talks had collapsed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maybe the models demanded that the SPAC be denominated in Euros?

    In any case, with the deal dead, Galileo is searching for a new merger target. The $138 million SPAC is focused on “the consumer, retail, food & beverage, specialty industrial, technology or medtech sectors which are headquartered in Western Europe, with an emphasis on Italian family-owned businesses, portfolio companies of private equity funds, or corporate spin-offs, and that have significant North American exports and a clearly defined North American high growth strategy.”  That’s a real kitchen sink, so for simplicity’s sake, let’s just say “Western Europe/Italy”.

    Elite Model has in recent years diversified into representing social media influencers, as well as its traditional fashion model clientele. Unfortunately, judging by the sudden collapse of the SPAC, it does not appear to have diversified into actually being profitable.

    Galileo and Elite Model held talks last month with potential investors about raising new equity for a merger that would have taken the agency public, Bloomberg reported at the time.

  • "We Feel Like We Are Drowning" – Rural Hospitals Overwhelmed By Shortages Of Bed, Staff
    “We Feel Like We Are Drowning” – Rural Hospitals Overwhelmed By Shortages Of Bed, Staff

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 19:05

    As the coronavirus ravages rural parts of the US, areas it largely ignored during the spring and summer, hospitals are being overwhelmed.

    We pointed out earlier that only four US states have hospitalization rates below 100 per million, with the Midwest being the worst hit region, though down in Texas, El Paso has stood out for the severity of its outbreak, and the degree to which deaths have overwhelmed the city’s morgues, forcing Gov. Greg Abbott to send in the national guard.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    On Tuesday, Reuters published a story recounting stories from some of the most overburdened hospitals in the country right now. They can be found in places like rural Lakin, Kansas, or other “critical access” hospitals spread out across a dozen states in the midwest and the mountain west. Sparsely populated states like North and South Dakota are being hit particularly hard.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since mid-June, daily new COVID-19 cases reported in the midwest have increased by 20x. For the week ending Nov. 19, North Dakota reported an average of 1,769 daily new cases per 1 million residents, while South Dakota recorded nearly 1,500 per million residents, Wisconsin and Nebraska around 1,200, and Kansas nearly 1,000. Even during New York’s worst week from April, the state never averaged more than 500 new cases per million people. California hasn’t topped 253.

    Across the Midwest, hospital directors told Reuters that they’re at capacity, or dangerously close. Most have tried to increase availability by repurposing wings or cramming multiple patients in a single room, and by asking staffers to work longer hours and more frequent shifts.

    Kearny County Hospital in rural Lakin, Kansas is one such example. The hospital is classified as a “critical access hospital” by federal authorities since it’s the only hospital servicing a patch of southwestern Kansas, not far from the border with economically desolate Oklahoma.

    Some medical workers complained to Reuters that they see a “disconnect” between the grim scene inside the ICU, and families who are out planning Thanksgiving dinner parties, while some young people continue frequenting bars.

    “There’s a disconnect in the community, where we’re seeing people at bars and restaurants, or planning Thanksgiving dinners,” said Dr. Kelly Cawcutt, an infectious disease doctor at the University of Nebraska Medical Center. As health workers, she said, “we feel kind of dejected.”

    Dr. Drew Miller, the chief medical officer at Kearny, told Reuters about how he almost lost a 30-year-old patient who needed to be moved to the ICU, but there were no beds. The man survived after he briefly stopped breathing. Dr. Miller said he was astonished when the patient’s pulse returned.

    Still, while some forecasters see even more dire numbers ahead, Dr. Miller warned “I don’t think the worst is here yet.”

    But for remote hospitals, an even bigger than space is staff. COVID-19 patients must be monitored more closely than others, requiring more nurses to be on duty per shift. When infection rates rise, rural hospitals typically hire from a pool of traveling nurses. However, thanks to the pandemic, that pool is now empty.

    Melisa Hazell, a critical care nurse at Hutchinson Regional Medical Center in Hutchinson, Kansas, told Reuters she recently recovered from COVID-19 herself, but she returned to work as soon as she was certain she wouldn’t spread the virus. After being off for 12 days, she said she wasn’t “mentally and physically ready” to go back to work. However “my teammates needed me,” she said.

    Thousands of miles away, Mary Helland, a chief nursing officer with CommonSpirit Health in North Dakota, said she has put in requests for traveling nurses for all 11 “critical access hospitals” she oversees, spread across a region covering North Dakota and Minnesota.

    But “bigger hospitals are using them all up,” she said. At 190-bed Hutchinson Regional, Chief Nursing Officer Amanda Hullet said she has started taking floor shifts for the first time in years after moving to a managerial position that requires much more desk work. Another nurse said that the refusal of some governors to mandate mask-wearing in public is frustrating. But even people who wear masks are still frequently infected with the virus.

    Doctors say trying to change such behavior can feel like a hopeless task. One infectious disease doctor in Wisconsin told Reuters that “Everyone [is] continuing to go about their lives”…but “we sort of feel like we’re drowning.”

  • There Were Two Americas Today As Dow Struck 30,000 
    There Were Two Americas Today As Dow Struck 30,000 

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 18:50

    The K-shaped economic recovery, one where the rich grow richer and the working-poor are crushed with job loss and insurmountable debts, was on full display Tuesday afternoon as the Dow Jones Industrial Average crossed 30,000 for the first time. 

    By mid-afternoon, hours after the DJIA soared to new highs, Bloomberg tweeted a disturbing video of yet, another massive food bank line, something we’ve been highlighting this fall as an increasing occurrence as covid winter continues to crush the working-poor.   

    Today’s food bank lines were situated in Albuquerque, New Mexico, where hundreds of vehicles were lined up “at a local stadium parking lot,” Bloomberg said. The lines snaked around a parking lot, with an overflow of vehicles pouring out onto the city street. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Monday, we noted that on Dec. 31, many of the key provisions in the CARES Act are set to expire if there is no action from Congress. This could be catastrophic for 12 million America who will lose access to their Emergency unemployment benefits activated in the aftermath of the covid pandemic, which alone could be a drag of up to 1.5% to growth in 1Q, according to a recent Bank of America report. 

    Additionally, the expiration of eviction moratorium, mortgage forbearance programs, and suspension of student loan payments could compound the working poor’s financial stresses, many of whom, about 21 million of them, are unemployed and receiving benefits from the government. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In today’s America, massive food bank lines are becoming a common occurrence once more – similar to what was seen in the early days of the pandemic. 

    Earlier this month, the North Texas Food Bank (NTFB) handed out more than 600,000 pounds of food to 25,000 hungry people – one of the largest-ever food giveaways, explained NTFB officials. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While other stimulus packages could be introduced under the Biden administration, America’s working poor has been permanently scarred for years and financially set back a decade. 

    The K-shaped recovery is getting worse – dropping helicopter money has yet to fix the economy as promised earlier in the year as millions of families are set to go without food this holiday season. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Just a reminder, a rising stock market tide doesn’t lift all boats. 

  • AOC & 'The Squad' Confront Biden About Lack Of 'Progressive' Cabinet Picks
    AOC & ‘The Squad’ Confront Biden About Lack Of ‘Progressive’ Cabinet Picks

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 11/24/2020 – 18:30

    Now that Joe Biden has announced all of his nominations for key positions shaping the administration’s foreign policy and domestic economic policy, it’s pretty clear that “the Squad” (which some have quietly blamed for the Democrats’ surprisingly poor performance in House races across the country) and their progressive allies got shafted. Biden took none of their recommendations for top positions (neither Elizabeth Warren nor Bernie Sanders will play prominent roles).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AOC and her allies are badly in need of a win to try and show their backers that they didn’t completely fold on their principles by backing Biden. And with a few more progressive members joining their ranks in the upcoming Congress, AOC needs to step up and be a leader if she has any hope of running for president in 2028 (she won’t quite meet the minimum age in 2024).

    ‘The Squad’ is looking for a scalp, and they’re going after a key player in the incipient Biden Administration: Bruce Reed, Biden’s former chief of staff during his years as VP. Biden and his team have picked Reed to lead the OMB, a relatively sleepy office that makes recommendations about the federal budget.

    According to a report in Axios, AOC and Ilhan Omar are circulating a petition calling on Biden to drop Reed, criticizing him as a deficit hawk.

    It’s an interesting choice considering that Biden’s National Security team is filled with deep state stalwarts who have never said no to a foreign entanglement.

    But, apparently, AOC & Co. are okay with that. But the fact that Reed once recommended cuts to Social Security and Medicare makes him unpalatable to leftists. Reed led the Bowles-Simpson Commission under Barack Obama, which progressives opposed because of the cuts. “Biden must not repeat Obama’s mistake,” the petition warns.

    The petition which has been signed by AOC, Omar and fellow Squad member Rashida Tlaib, objects to Reed, characterizing him as a “major test for the soul of the Biden presidency,” and demanding that OMB “be staffed with people who will prioritize working people, not Wall Street deficit scaremongers.”

    Two other new progressive lawmakers – Reps. Jamaal Bowman and Cori Bush — are also backing the petition. They recently joined a protest movement urging Biden to keep his promise to pass a $2 trillion version of the “Green New Deal”./p>

    In a separate incident, the Progressive Change Campaign Committee hired the actor Mark Ruffalo to record and then blast out an e-mail to their nearly 1 million members urging Biden to pick Rep. Deb Haaland for secretary of the Interior, one of the few remaining cabinet-level positions that’s still up for grabs.

    The climate justice democrats are urging Biden to consider creating a climate mobilization office within the White House, to ensure that climate hysteria will continue to inform policy even after Biden’s time in office is up.

    Right now, leftists are terrified that a Biden presidency will simply morph into ‘Obama Part 3’ and everyone will forget about them and all the protest movements they helped organize as the fever of ‘Democratic socialism’ finally breaks.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th November 2020

  • Will Trump Release The Files Exposing The Cunning Plot To Kill Kennedy?
    Will Trump Release The Files Exposing The Cunning Plot To Kill Kennedy?

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 23:40

    Authored by Jacob Hornberger via The Future of Freedom Foundation,

    With President Trump’s critics decrying his lack of respect for America’s democratic system by his refusal to concede to Joe Biden, now would be a good time to remind such critics of one dark-side aspect of America’s much-vaunted democratic system – the national-security’s state’s violent regime-change operation in Dallas on November 22, 1963.

    From the beginning, the official story has been that a lone-nut communist ex-U.S. Marine, with no apparent motive, assassinated the president. Nothing to see here, folks, time to move on – U.S, officials said. Just a plain old ordinary murder case.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If anyone murders a federal official, you can be assured of one thing: the feds will do everything they can to ensure that everyone involved in the crime is brought to justice. It’s like when someone kills a cop. The entire police force mobilizes to capture, arrest, and prosecute everyone involved in killing the cop. The phenomenon is even more pronounced at the federal level, especially given the overwhelming power of the federal government

    Yet, the exact opposite occurred in the Kennedy assassination. The entire effort immediately became to pin the crime solely on a communist ex-U.S. Marine named Lee Harvey Oswald and to shut down any aggressive investigation into whether others were involved in the crime.

    What’s up with that? That’s not the way we would expect federal officials to handle the assassination of any federal official, especially the president of the United States. We would expect them to do everything — even torture a suspect — in order to capture and arrest everyone who may have participated in the crime.

    For example, just three days after the assassination and after Oswald himself had been murdered, Deputy Attorney General Nicholas Katzenbach sent out a memo stating,

    “The public must be satisfied that Oswald was the assassin; that he did not have confederates who are still at large; and that evidence was such that he would have been convicted at trial.”

    How in the world could he be so certain that Oswald was the assassin and that he had no confederates? Why would he want to shut down the investigation so soon? Does that sound like a normal federal official who is confronted with the assassination of a president?

    The answer to this riddle lies in the brilliantly cunning scheme of the U.S. national-security establishment to ensure that the investigation into Kennedy’s assassination would be shut down immediately and, therefore, not lead to the U.S. national-security establishment.

    The assassination itself had all the earmarks of a classic military ambush, one in which shooters were firing from both the front and back of the president. It is a virtual certainty that responsibility for the ambush lay with the Joint Chiefs of Staff, who had been waging a vicious war against Kennedy practically since the time he assumed office. (See FFF’s book JFK’s War with the National Security Establishment: Why Kennedy Was Assassinated by Douglas Horne, who served on the staff of the Assassination Records Review Board in the 1990s.)

    While the JCS were experts at preparing military-style ambushes, they lacked the intellectual capability of devising the overall plot and cover-up, given its high level of cunning and sophistication. That responsibility undoubtedly lay with the CIA, whose top officials were brilliant graduates of Ivy League Schools. Moreover, practically from its inception the CIA was specializing in the art of state-sponsored assassinations and in how to conceal the CIA’s role in them.

    To ensure that the role of the Pentagon and the CIA in the Kennedy assassination would be kept secret, they had to figure out a way to shut down the investigation from the start. Their plan worked brilliantly. While the normal thing would have been all out investigations into the murder, in this particular murder the state of Texas and U.S. officials did the exact opposite. They settled for simply pinning the crime on Oswald, the purported lone nut communist ex-U.S. Marine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here is how they pulled it off.

    As the years have passed, it has become increasingly clear that Oswald was a government operative, most likely for military intelligence or maybe the CIA and the FBI as well. His job was to portray himself as a communist, which would enable him to infiltrate not only domestic communist and socialist organizations but also communist countries, such as Cuba and the Soviet Union.

    After all, how many communist Marines have you ever heard of? The Marines would be a good place to recruit people for intelligence roles. Oswald learned fluent Russian while in the military. How does an enlisted man do that, without the assistance of the military’s language schools? When he returned from the Soviet Union after supposedly trying to defect and after promising that he was going to give up secret information he had acquired in the military, no federal grand jury or congressional investigation was launched into his conduct, even though this was the height of the Cold War.

    Thus, Oswald would make the perfect patsy. He could be stationed wherever his superiors instructed. And he would have all the earmarks of a communist, which would immediately prejudice Americans at the height of the Cold War.

    But simply framing Oswald wouldn’t have been enough to shut down the investigation. An aggressive investigation would undoubtedly be able to pierce through the pat nature of the frame-up. They needed something more.

    If you’re going to frame someone who is supposedly firing from the rear, then doesn’t it make sense that you would have shots being fired only from the rear? Why would they frame a guy who is supposedly firing from the rear by having shots fired from the front?

    That’s where the sheer brilliance of this particular regime-change operation came into play. The plan was much more cunning than even the successful regime-change operations and assassinations that took place prior to the one against Kennedy — i.e., Iran in 1953, Guatemala in 1954, Cuba from 1959-1963, and the Congo in 1961.

    There is now virtually no doubt that Kennedy was hit by two shots fired from the front. Immediately after Kennedy was declared dead, the treating physicians at Parkland Hospital described the neck wound as a wound of entry. They also said that Kennedy had a massive, orange-sized wound in the back of his head. Nurses at Parkland said the same things. Two FBI agents said they saw the big exit-sized wound. Secret Service agent Clint Hill saw it. Navy photography expert Saundra Spencer told the ARRB in the 1990s that she developed the JFK autopsy photos on a top-secret basis on the weekend of the assassination and that they depicted a big exit-sized wound in the back of JFK’s head. A bone fragment from the back of the president’s head was found in Dealey Plaza after the assassination. That is just part of the overwhelming evidence that establishes beyond a reasonable doubt that the shot that hit Kennedy in the head came from the front.

    Okay, if you’ve got a shooter firing from the back and he’s a communist, and if you have other shooters firing from the front, then they have to be working together. So, who would the shooters be who were firing from the front? The logical inference is that they had to be communist cohorts of Oswald.

    That’s what Oswald’s supposed visits to the Cuban and Soviet embassies in Mexico just before the assassination were all about —making it look like Oswald was acting in concert with the Soviet and Cuban communists to kill Kennedy.

    If the assassination was part of the Soviet Union’s supposed quest to conquer the world, retaliation would mean World War III, which almost surely would have meant nuclear war, which was the biggest fear among the American people in 1963.

    But why not retaliate in some way? Would U.S. officials at the height of the Cold War hesitate to retaliate for the communist killing of a U.S. president, simply because they were scared of nuclear war? Not a chance! In fact, throughout Kennedy’s term in office the Pentagon and the CIA were champing at the bit to attack Cuba and go to war with the Soviet Union.

    But here’s the catch: How do you take action that is going to destroy the world when it was your side that started the assassination game in the first place? Remember: It was the CIA that started the assassination game by partnering with the Mafia to assassinate Cuban leader Fidel Castro.

    Thus, Lyndon Johnson, the CIA, and the JCS had the perfect excuse to shut down the investigation and pin the crime only on Oswald: If they instead retaliated, it would be all-out nuclear war based on an assassination game that the U.S. had started.

    In fact, when Dallas District Attorney Henry Wade alleged from the start that Oswald was part of a communist conspiracy, Johnson told him to shut it down for fear that Wade might inadvertently start World War III.

    Moreover, when U.S. Supreme Court Justice Earl Warren initially declined Johnson’s invitation to serve on what ultimately became the Warren Commission, Johnson appealed to his sense of patriotism by alluding to the importance of avoiding a nuclear war. Johnson used the same argument on Senator Richard Russell Jr.

    From the start, the Warren Commission proceedings were shrouded in “national-security” state secrecy, including a top-secret meeting of the commissioners to discuss information they had received that Oswald was an intelligence agent. When Warren was asked if the American people would be able to see all the evidence, Warren responded yes, but not in your lifetime.

    Does that make any sense? If the assassination was, in fact, committed by some lone nut, then what would “national security” and state secrecy have to do with it?

    That’s undoubtedly how they induced the three military pathologists to conduct a fraudulent autopsy — by telling them that they had to hide the fact that shots had been fired from the front in order to ensure that there was no all-out nuclear war. That’s how we ended up with a fraudulent autopsy. (See my books The Kennedy Autopsy and The Kennedy Autopsy 2.)

    Thus, the plan entailed operating at two levels: One level involved what some call the World War III cover story. It entailed shutting down the investigation, as well as a fraudulent autopsy, to prevent nuclear war. The other level involved showing the American people that their president had been killed by only one person, a supposed lone nut communist former Marine.

    Obviously, secrecy and obedience to orders were essential for the plan to succeed. That was why the autopsy was taken out of the hands of civilian officials and given to the military. With the military, people could be ordered to participate in the fraudulent autopsy and could be forced to keep everything they did and witnessed secret.

    That’s why Navy photography expert Saundra Spencer kept her secret for some 30 years. She had been told that her development of the JFK autopsy photos was a classified operation. Military people follow orders and keep classified information secret. Imagine if Spencer had told her story suggesting a fraudulent autopsy in the week following the assassination.

    Gradually, as the years have passed, the incriminating puzzle has come together. The big avalanche of secret information came out in the 1990s as part of the work done by the Assassination Records Review Board.

    Of course, there are still missing pieces to the puzzle, many of which are undoubtedly among the records that the CIA and national-security establishment are still keeping secret. But enough circumstantial evidence has come to light to enable people to see the contours of one of the most cunning and successful assassination plots in history.

    *  *  *

    It’s time to release all of the official assassination records of the CIA, the FBI, the Pentagon, and all other federal agencies. The national-security rationale for continued secrecy is ludicrous and baseless. The only reason for continued secrecy is that the national-security establishment knows that the records will fill in more pieces to its November 22, 1963, regime-change operation.

    In the 1990s, the JFK Records Collection Act gave federal agencies another 25 years to release their assassination-related records, based on the ridiculous claim of “national security.” That period of time expired early in Trump’s administration. After promising to release the files, Trump surrendered to the CIA’s demands for more secrecy, extending the time for secrecy until October 2021.

    But we all know what’s going to happen in 2021. The CIA is going to tell President Biden that national security requires more years of secrecy and Biden is going to defer to the CIA.

    Time’s up. Amidst all the hoopla over whether Trump is behaving disrespectfully of America’s democratic system, how about ordering the release of the estimated 15,000 records of the CIA and the federal agencies that are still being kept secret from the American people? After all, it’s pretty hard to reconcile regime-change and cover up with America’s much-vaunted democratic system, isn’t it?

    President Trump — Do the right thing. Order the National Archives to release those long-secret assassination records to the American people now. Who cares if the CIA, the Pentagon, and other federal agencies get upset?

  • Feds Deploy Firefighting Drones With "Dragon Eggs" To Combat Wildfires 
    Feds Deploy Firefighting Drones With “Dragon Eggs” To Combat Wildfires 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 23:20

    California has experienced its worst year of fire on record. According to Digital Trends, to better combat the wildfires this year, the federal government deployed a fleet of drones to conduct backburn operations by releasing miniature fireballs. 

    Containing fires by setting prescribed burns, called backburns, is one method firefighters can control wildfires because it deprives fires of combustible material. 

    Helicopters equipped with flamethrowers are generally used for backburning operations. But a new process via an unmanned aerial system that releases “dragon eggs” has revolutionized the process this fire season. 

    Drone Amplified’s IGNIS System Dropping Combustible Dragon Eggs 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The Dragon Eggs are a brand name for a specific type of what is more generally known as an ignition sphere,” Carrick Detweiler, CEO of Drone Amplified, told Digital Trends.

    “The ignition spheres have been used for decades by manned helicopters to perform prescribed burns and backburns on wildfires. One of the main ways to contain wildfires is to use backburns to remove the fuels — [such as] dead wood — in advance of the main wildfire. This then allows firefighters to contain and put out the wildfire,” Detweiler said. 

    The dragon eggs are spheres that contain potassium permanganate and can explode into flames when dropped. 

    “Our system, called IGNIS, carries 400 ignition spheres and is attached to a drone. 

    “When commanded by the operator, IGNIS punctures and injects the ignition sphere with glycol. This starts a chemical reaction that will cause the ignition sphere to ignite 30 to 60 seconds later. IGNIS contains onboard sensing and intelligence to safely and quickly inject the spheres at up to 120 per minute. This allows firefighters to precisely and safely start controlled burns while staying out of harm’s way,” he said. 

    IGNIS is controlled by artificial intelligence that is being fed data about its surrounding through sensors embedded on the drone. This allows the drone to drop firebombs without putting firefighters in even more danger. 

    Backburn Operation With Dragon Egg Drop On Predefined Flight Route

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Digital Trends said “hundreds of thousands of the ignition spheres” have been dropped this year to contain fires in California, Colorado, Oregon, and elsewhere in 2020. This has saved the USDA more than $14,000 per day, compared with using helicopters to perform the same job. 

    Watch: Dragon Eggs Dropped In Colorado 

  • Armed Baltimore Gangs Target Delivery Drivers In Recent Wave Of Carjackings And Robberies
    Armed Baltimore Gangs Target Delivery Drivers In Recent Wave Of Carjackings And Robberies

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 23:00

    As the coronavirus pandemic drives online holiday shopping – USPS, FedEx, UPS, and Amazon delivery workers distribute more mail and packages than ever. The increased number of deliveries has left delivery vans densely packed with a treasure trove of consumer goods and other valuable items, which have become sitting ducks for armed criminal gangs. 

    Armed criminal gangs in Baltimore City have recognized the online shopping boom. They’re giving up on robbing brick and mortar stores and have now opted to hijack or rob delivery service vehicles.

    Just this week alone, there’s been a series of mail and package delivery drivers targeted in lawless Baltimore City. 

    According to FOX45 News, the first incident occurred on Monday along Mosher Street, in west Baltimore, an area known for criminal gangs, widespread homicides, and out of control opioid crisis. Investigators said armed suspects hijacked a USPS mail carrier. The van was recovered hours later, but it appears the suspects were able to loot it. USPS is offering a $50,000 reward for any information about the gang involved.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The second incident occurred Tuesday evening at Mary Avenue in northeast Baltimore. A UPS driver had their truck stolen and has since been recovered. 

    On Wednesday night, investigators say an Amazon delivery van was targeted along Highland Avenue in east Baltimore. Police say the Amazon worker was able to prevent the armed suspect from commandeering the delivery vehicle.  

    “There’s been an increase in the number of deliveries of packages, parcels and boxes,” Jeffrey Ian Ross, a criminologist with the University of Baltimore, told FOX45. 

    Ross said the attacks on delivery vans are”unusual.” He said with increased mail volume because of the virus pandemic and holiday season creates an opportunity for armed gangs. 

    “It’s a cost-benefit calculation,” Ross said. “They may find that other avenues of normal criminality are drying up for them so they’re innovating.”

    With the pandemic resulting in increased brick and mortar store closures – criminal gangs are now targeting delivery vehicles as online shopping booms. How long until delivery service workers carry weapons and ride in armored vans? 

  • The Great Relocation: Americans Are Relocating By The Millions Because They Can Feel What Is Coming
    The Great Relocation: Americans Are Relocating By The Millions Because They Can Feel What Is Coming

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 22:40

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    This is a really odd time to be having a “housing boom”.  We are in the middle of the worst public health crisis in 100 years, endless civil unrest has been ravaging many of our largest cities, and we are experiencing the worst economic downturn since the Great Depression of the 1930s.  But even though more than 70 million Americans have filed new claims for unemployment benefits this year, home sales are absolutely rocking.  How in the world is this possible?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Well, this phenomenon is actually quite easy to explain.  As our society comes apart at the seams all around us, vast numbers of Americans are seeking greener pastures.  According to ABC News, the chaotic events of 2020 have caused “millions of Americans” to relocate.  In New York City alone, more than 300,000 former residents have permanently moved to new addresses.

    We have never seen anything quite like this before, and it is anticipated that this trend will continue into 2021.  Even though most Americans don’t know exactly what is ahead, I think that on some level many of them can feel what is coming, and they are getting out of the big cities while they still can.

    So even though we are literally in the midst of a horrifying economic depression, homes are selling like hotcakes right now

    Home sales rose again in October, at their highest pace in 14 years, according to the National Association of Realtors.

    But a record low inventory of available homes and a greater number of luxury homes sold have pushed the median home price up to a record $313,000, almost 16% more than a year ago.

    With so many interested buyers and such little inventory, it has definitely become a seller’s market

    At the current pace of sales, it would take just 2.5 months to clear the existing inventory — a record low.

    If you want to sell your home, now is a really good time to do so.

    But then good luck finding a new place.

    This incredible surge in demand for housing has also fueled a tremendous boom in housing starts

    Single-family starts experienced continued gains in October, according to data from the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development and the Census Bureau. Single-family construction is up 8.6% year-to-date, with notable gains in 2020 for the Midwest and other lower-density markets.

    The pace of single-family starts in October was the highest production rate since the spring of 2007.

    So even though so many other sectors of the economy are deeply hurting at the moment, those that build homes are loving life right now.

    Real estate websites are also doing extremely well.  In particular, “Zillow surfing” has become a new national pastime

    Zillow usage has climbed since March, with online visitors to for-sale listings up more than 50 percent year-over-year in the early months of the pandemic.

    People bond over listings on Discord servers, group chats and “Zillow Twitter,” and their obsession has made many strange and obscure listings go viral. Curbed, a website covering city life, real estate and design, recently started a column called My Week in Zillow Saves, in which people (myself included) share the homes they’ve admired on the site.

    If you can believe it, “Zillow surfing” has become “especially popular among teenagers”

    Zillow surfing is especially popular among teenagers. A TikTok meme over the summer consisted of users talking about knowing where the bathrooms were in their friend’s or crush’s house before ever visiting it because they had toured all of their classmates’ homes on Zillow. Many young people have extensive lists of saved homes and discuss and share listings with friends.

    When life is miserable, people like to daydream about something better, and “Zillow surfing” allows them to do that.

    Personally, I have been hearing from so many people that have either recently relocated or that would like to move.  So many that I know are feeling an urgency like never before, because they sense that really dark times are fast approaching.

    Interestingly, one of the most important things that people look at when they are thinking of relocating is the political orientation of an area.  In fact, one recent survey found that 42 percent of Americans “would be hesitant to move to an area where most people have political views different from their own”…

    Forty-two percent of U.S. residents would be hesitant to move to an area where most people have political views different from their own, up from 32% in June, according to a new report from Redfin (redfin.com), the technology-powered real estate brokerage. That’s the highest share since 2017, when Redfin began posing this question to survey respondents.

    Increasingly, Democrats are moving to “blue states” and conservatives are moving to “red states”.

    Could this potentially have some very serious implications down the road?

    I don’t know.  I am just asking the question.

    For other Americans, leaving the country entirely seems like a promising option

    Americans are leaving the country or seeking foreign visas in record numbers, according to immigration lawyers and expatriate organizations, during an oppressive year of political violence, racial strife and an uncontrolled pandemic that has kept families locked in their homes for months – with no clear end in sight.

    As the economic suffering in the U.S. intensifies, the number of people wanting to leave will almost certainly go even higher.

    With each passing day, more new restrictions are being put in place to try to control the COVID pandemic, and these new restrictions are going to make our ongoing economic depression a whole lot worse.

    Already, it has become clear that another huge wave of economic pain is upon us.

    The Greater Los Angeles Food Bank says that demand is up 145 percent compared to last year, and the other day people waited in absolutely massive lines for up to 12 hours at a food bank in Texas just to get some food.

    Other Americans are stockpiling huge quantities of toilet paper and other supplies in anticipation of a very difficult winter.

    No matter what happens with the election, things are about to get really crazy in this country.

    Whatever you need to do to get prepared for what is ahead, I would do it as soon as possible.

    The clock is ticking, and it appears that our day of reckoning is nearly here.

    *  *  *

    Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

  • TikTok-Mansions-For-Top-Influencers Company Goes Public
    TikTok-Mansions-For-Top-Influencers Company Goes Public

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 22:20

    “Strike while the iron is hot,” the 15th-century proverb from the Medieval Times states. That’s what one New Jersey-based real estate firm that provides TikTok influencers with mansions has done through an unusual reverse takeover deal to go public. 

    On Nov. 12, West of Hudson Group Inc., the sole owner of “The Clubhouse,” a real estate portfolio of mansions in Southern California that houses top social media influencers with an estimated follower base of 90 million, was acquired by a shell company, Tongji Healthcare Group, Inc.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Subject to FINRA’s approval, “Tongji Healthcare Group, Inc.” will change its name to “Clubhouse Media Group, Inc.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Called a “content house,” The Clubhouse operates a network of mansions with social media influencers living rent-free. There’s a catch – these influencers must give up a certain amount of revenues they collect from making videos about products. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    Content houses have been an emerging trend in Los Angeles over the last year. Companies that run these unique properties, like The Clubhouse, are exploring options for sustainable business models. We’re surprised The Clubhouse didn’t excite the market with a special purpose acquisition company deal…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Clubhouse is a network of three social media content creation houses (Clubhouse BH, Clubhouse Europe, and Not a Content House) that has received substantial press from top media organizations. 

    Clubhouse BH

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Clubhouse Europe

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not a Content House

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Heading to the capital markets may be part of a broader strategy, but like any penny stock, the name of the game is to launch a promotion for the pump as company insiders liquidate their positions in the dump. The Clubhouse could find a flurry of 10-year old hedge fund managers on Robinhood that would purchase shares. 

    … maybe these influencers will pump the stock? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What a bizarro world for capital markets as tens of millions of Americans face food and housing insecurity

  • Cooperate With China Or World War 3: Kissinger
    Cooperate With China Or World War 3: Kissinger

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Gordon Chang via The Gatestone Institute,

    “I would think we need first of all a dialogue with the Chinese leadership in which we are defining what we’re attempting to prevent and in which the two leaders agree that whatever other conflicts they have they will not resort to military conflict,” Henry Kissinger told Bloomberg News Editor-in-Chief John Micklethwait on November 16 at the Bloomberg New Economy Forum.

    “Unless there is some basis for some cooperative action, the world will slide into a catastrophe comparable to World War I.”

    Of course no one wants war of any type with China, but in a little over 14 minutes Kissinger managed to totally misinterpret Chinese history, support Beijing’s most important foreign policy goal, and give deeply misguided advice to Joe Biden. Kissinger has evidently learned nothing from years of dangerous Chinese behavior, which is partly the result of his policy formulations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We start with history, because Kissinger was once an accomplished historian and his incorrect opinions on China today appear to flow from his unsupportable views of the Chinese past. He makes the case that Americans cannot understand Beijing’s insecurity.

    “Americans have had a history of relatively uninterrupted success,” he noted.

    “The Chinese have had a very long history of repeated crises. America has had the good fortune of being free of immediate dangers. Chinese have usually been surrounded by countries that have had designs on their unity.”

    Even if his comments were true, no country now threatens China. China, in fact, has not faced any credible external threat to its unity for more than seven decades. The Communist Party dwells on history, such as the so-called “Century of Humiliation,” the subject of ruler Xi Jinping’s National Day speech last October, because that telling of history suits the needs of today’s insecure regime.

    China’s troubled past, in short, is an excuse. What, after all, is it in history that justifies present-day Chinese aggression against India, Bhutan and Nepal, or its designs on Tajikistan, the Philippines and Malaysia?

    Moreover, what justification is there for the Communist Party’s declaration of a “people’s war” on the United States in May of last year?

    China is aggressive and militant at this moment because of the nature of its communist regime, which is quickly driving the country back to one-man rule and totalitarianism. Xi Jinping, the one man in China’s system, is now propagating the audacious concept of tianxia, that “all under heaven” owe allegiance to Beijing.

    There are, unfortunately, some points in history when dialogue makes matters worse because hardline leaders perceive others’ desire to talk as a sign of weakness.

    In any event, dialogue assumes that Chinese leaders can compromise, which at this point is a dubious proposition. For instance, Beijing last compromised a territorial claim in 2011 — with Tajikistan, when it took Tajik territory — but now is trying to reopen the settlement to grab even more. Since then, Beijing has added new claims — to the South China Sea — and has laid the groundwork for additional ones, especially over Japan’s Ryukyu chain.

    The absence of Chinese goodwill leaves America a last resort: deterrence.

    Kissinger, often cited as a deterrence expert, is now not a fan of it. When Micklethwait asked him whether he favored the notion of Biden advisors that democracies should unite in a coalition, the 97-year-old “grand consigliere of American diplomacy” — the Financial Times‘s description — was noncommittal. “I think democracies should cooperate wherever their convictions allow it or dictate it,” he replied. “I think a coalition aimed at a particular country is unwise, but a coalition to prevent dangers is necessary where the occasion requires it.” In Kissinger-speak, that is a “no” to international cooperation against Beijing.

    Given what could be happening inside Communist Party political circles, there may now be no way to avoid war with a militant Chinese state. Yet whether peace is possible or not, it should be clear to Kissinger that the approach he has supported, and which has been adopted by every American president since President Nixon went to China in 1972, has contributed to Chinese aggressiveness. Kissinger, by urging conciliation when Beijing has made clear it cannot be appeased, has helped produced today’s grave situation.

    Let us remember that Kissinger has always been intimidated by large communist states. He advocated détente in the early 1970s when he assumed there was no way to prevail over the Soviet Union. Reagan, after refusing to accept the USSR as a given, proved him dead wrong.

    And Kissinger is dead wrong now.

    “Trump has a more confrontational method of negotiation than you can apply indefinitely,” Kissinger told Micklethwait, appearing to speak to Joe Biden. That, James Fanell, the noted Swiss-based China strategist told Gatestone, is “an unambiguous declaration of Dr. Kissinger’s defeatism.”

    As Fanell, a former director of Intelligence and Information Operations of the U.S. Pacific Fleet, said, Kissinger believes the U.S. “cannot compete with the People’s Republic of China.”

    America, however, is far stronger than China’s regime and has allies, which China, other than North Korea, does not. Moreover, the U.S. is knitting together a formidable coalition — the Quad with Australia, India, and Japan — giving Washington the ability to continue to confront Beijing on every front. The Chinese state is no match for nations, both near and far, it seems determined to antagonize.

    What is the best indication that Kissinger is wrong?

    Beijing at the moment is waging a concerted propaganda campaign to push his views as widely as possible. When your enemy wants you to do something, it is almost always not in your interest.

    Kissinger essentially said the choice for America is cooperation or war, a narrative he has propagated in recent interviews. Yet repetition will not make his false dichotomy so. Countries can, between these two extremes, choose confrontation and deterrence. World War II in Europe, for example, started because Britain and France chose not to confront the Third Reich when doing so — in 1936 during the attempted remilitarization of the Rhineland — would have ended the German military threat.

    Micklethwait started out the interview by asking about the Congress of Vienna, the subject of Kissinger’s A World Restored: Metternich, Castlereagh and the Problems of Peace 1812-22.

    “Whenever peace—conceived as the avoidance of war—has been the primary objective of a power or a group of powers, the international system has been at the mercy of the most ruthless member of the international community,” he wrote. “Whenever the international order has acknowledged that certain principles could not be compromised even for the sake of peace, stability based on an equilibrium of forces was at least conceivable.”

    Kissinger ducked the question and, for some reason, is now suggesting the United States put itself at the mercy of the world’s most ruthless regime.

  • Tech Adviser Primed For "Major Role" In Biden Admin Recently Authored Book Denouncing Section 230
    Tech Adviser Primed For “Major Role” In Biden Admin Recently Authored Book Denouncing Section 230

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 21:40

    The frontrunner to be Joe Biden’s technology adviser is seen as someone who would likely pave the way to more technology regulation. And among that regulation could be a roll back of the coveted Section 230, which big tech companies have been hiding behind while selectively censoring their users in the name of wokeness. 

    As of now, the President-elect’s top technology adviser, Bruce Reed, could wind up playing a key role for the Biden administration in dealing with how big tech companies are regulated. Reed is expected to “take a major role” in Biden’s administration, according to a Reuters report.

    He had formerly helped negotiate with tech companies over the 2018 California Consumer Privacy Act, which is being seen as a potential precursor for a national privacy law. 

    Even more interesting, however, is the fact that Reed also helped write a chapter in a book a month ago that denounces Section 230, which makes it impossible to sue internet companies over the content of user postings. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He wrote: “If they sell ads that run alongside harmful content, they should be considered complicit in the harm. If their algorithms promote harmful content, they should be held accountable for helping redress the harm. In the long run, the only real way to moderate content is to moderate the business model.”

    Reed’s resume includes working as Biden’s Chief of Staff from 2011 to 2013 while he was Vice President. He also served “as president of the Broad Foundation, a major Los Angeles philanthropic organization, and then as an adviser to Laurene Powell Jobs’ Emerson Collective in Palo Alto, California,” according to Reuters. 

    He also helped smooth the waters with tech companies during the California privacy campaign. Tech companies had initially been resistant to the change until Reed was able to compromise with Apple on the bill’s language. Other companies then fell in line. 

    Alastair Mactaggart, the real estate developer who masterminded the ballot initiative, said: “He understands that there needs to be good regulation. He wants to get something done. He wasn’t an ideologue who would take his toys and go home if it wasn’t perfect.”

    We have a feeling the battle over Section 230 could wind up necessitating slightly more negotiation. We hope Reed is up to the task…

  • "They Think You're Stupid!"
    “They Think You’re Stupid!”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 21:20

    Authored by Andrea Widburg via AmericanThinker.com,

    Yesterday, I expended considerable time and effort to write about “The Great Reset,” a leftist movement that imagines a brave new leftist world built around climate purity and socialist economic principles, with wise elites governing the masses.  If I’d waited a day, I could have just shown you Paul Joseph Watson’s latest video – “They think you’re stupid” – which covers “The Great Reset” and the “Great Cover-Up about the Great Reset.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you’re debating whether to spend time to watch the video (at the end of this post), let me tell you a bit about it.  Watson doesn’t stop with just the Great Reset that I’d described.  Along the way, Watson torches just about everything that the elites are raining down on the masses, all courtesy of the extremely beneficial Wuhan virus.

    Sure, the virus killed people (although I think it’s clear that, at least in America, mortality numbers have been inflated for political ends).  But for the left, the virus has been an extraordinary blessing, allowing leftists to exert unimagined control over people, enrich themselves, and shift large sections of America into the government dependency category.

    Watson hasn’t missed the fact that, while we’re being locked down and bankrupted, the rich are behaving just as they always do.  Masks?  Pfeh!  Masks are for the little people.  The same goes for social distancing.

    And why shouldn’t our elites shut down religious holidays and the consolations of worship?  For them, the fact that Judaism and Christianity give a strong moral fabric to Western society is an inconvenience.  Of course, it’s different when it comes to leftist rallies.  Americans need those — or at least that’s what the world’s elite are telling us.

    Watson spares a moment to remind us that the leaders reveling in the benefits flowing to them from the Wuhan virus are becoming increasingly punitive as to those people who protest the loss of their rapidly diminishing liberties.  You’d better be creative if you want to hug Granny, because the government thinks it’s a bad idea.

    Meanwhile, the media, both at home and abroad, no longer make any effort to investigate the powerful or to learn more about events around the world.  Whether in America, England, or elsewhere, the media exist solely as propaganda arms for the globalist elites.  Even ostensibly conservative institutions, whether Fox News or activist groups, are getting in on the act.

    Watson wraps up by reminding the “resistance” that they too were used by the monoparty elites.  The Biden administration, should it come to pass, is every bit as committed to corporatism as any other modern administration (except for Trump’s, of course).

    What’s clear is that this New Age socialism is not Karl Marx’s socialism.  Marx envisioned the world’s exploited workers breaking down national barriers and uniting to create a world defined by common ownership of the means of production for the benefit of the people.  In this scenario, it’s the elite — the educated and the plutocrats — who get re-educated or executed.  This vision has failed everywhere it’s been tried and this failure has always been accompanied by endless pain and death.

    What we’re experiencing now is Woodrow Wilson’s socialism: Wilson’s shtick was that the elite (i.e., the rich and educated) should rule the world.  The elite would use their superior knowledge and intelligence to improve the lives of the little people in ways beyond the people’s abilities and imaginations.  (It’s always about re-imagining things.)

    One of the early progressives’ “superior” ideas was eugenics.  Blacks were inferior, although they were useful for doing the elite’s dirty work.  Mostly, though, abortion and breeding programs would purify the nation.  The Nazis found Wilsonian Progressives inspirational.

    Wilson also came up with the “bass-ackwards” idea that America should never use her military for something as crass as her own defense.  Instead, the American people should expend their blood and gold to “make the world safe for Democracy.”  The Obama administration embraced this notion under the rubric of U.N. ambassador Samantha Power’s “Responsibility to Protect.”

    Watson’s video may make you see red, but it’s worth watching.  As always, his videos come with a language warning.

  • California Exodus: Silicon Valley Legend Keith Rabois Leaving 'Massively Improperly Run' San Francisco
    California Exodus: Silicon Valley Legend Keith Rabois Leaving ‘Massively Improperly Run’ San Francisco

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 21:00

    Silicon Valley tech legend Keith Rabois is leaving San Francisco and “moving immediately” to Florida, adding to the list of tech heavyweights who have left the Bay Area.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I think San Francisco is just so massively improperly run and managed that it’s impossible to stay here,” said Rabois, an early executive at PayPal, Square, Linkedin, Yelp who has been a Bay Area resident of two decades, telling Forbes that many in his social circles are leaving as well.

    “COVID sort of masks this stuff. It’s not quite as obvious where people are moving to and if they’ve actually moved since everybody’s working remotely.”

    Rabois is one of many Bay Area forsakers. His planned departure follows the flight of Peter Thiel, Rabois’s old Stanford buddy and PayPal partner, to Los Angeles in 2018. (Rabois joined Thiel’s venture capital firm Founder’s Fund last year.) In a much-read IPO prospectus this year, Alex Karp, CEO of Palantir, a PayPal spinout and Rabois investment, also said he was relocating the company to Colorado after laying into the Valley’s tech firms, calling them unpatriotic for pooh-poohing military contracts. And Jack Dorsey, CEO of Twitter and Square, where Rabois worked as chief operating officer for three years, planned to move to Africa before the pandemic struck.Forbes

    An August “Suburban Market Report” by Zillow revealed that home prices in San Francisco had fallen 4.9% year-over-year, while inventory had jumped 96% during the same period as a flood of new listings hit the market. Zillow noted that they aren’t seeing the same trend in cities such as Miami, Los Angeles, Washington D.C. or Seattle.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It may be tempting to credit the city of San Francisco’s inventory boom to the advent of remote work that came with the pandemic, but one only has to look at to San Jose to question that narrative,” Zillow economist Josh Clark told SFGATE, adding “The San Jose metro, which like the city of S.F. is dominated by tech workers, has not seen a similar rise. Two things that could drive the difference are San Francisco’s density and its smaller share of family households.”

  • Ghislaine Maxwell In Quarantine After Covid Breakout In Her Unit
    Ghislaine Maxwell In Quarantine After Covid Breakout In Her Unit

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 20:40

    To keep him quiet, Jeffrey Epstein was “suicided” last summer. A little over a year later, Ghislaine Maxwell may get the covid treatment.

    Federal prosecutors in the Southern District of New York reported on Monday that Epstein’s girlfriend and madam, Ghislaine Maxwell, 58, who faces criminal charges of sex trafficking and is being held in a federal lockup in Brooklyn, is in quarantine after a staffer working in her area of pre-trial lockup in the Metropolitan Detention Center (MDC) contracted the coronavirus, the Law & Crime blog reported. Maxwell herself has tested negative and is not exhibiting symptoms, for now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Metropolitan Detention Center in Brooklyn, New York, Photo: AP

    “Last week, a staff member who was assigned to work in the area of the MDC where the defendant is housed tested positive for COVID-19,” Assistant U.S. Attorney Maurene Comey wrote in a two-page letter. “In response, the MDC implemented the same quarantine protocols that apply whenever an inmate has potentially been exposed to the virus. Specifically, on November 18, 2020, the defendant was tested for COVID-19 using a rapid test, which was negative. That same day, the defendant was placed in quarantine.”

    “As with any other quarantined inmate, the defendant will remain in quarantine for fourteen days, at which point she will be tested again for COVID-19,” the letter went on. “If that test is negative, she will then be released from quarantine. To date, the defendant has not exhibited any symptoms of COVID-19.”

    The Bureau of Prisons reports that Brooklyn’s Metropolitan Detention Center currently has six active COVID-19 cases among staff and one inmate infection. Maxwell is awaiting trial there following her federal indictment for allegedly grooming underaged girls for sexual abuse by Jeffrey Epstein and his powerful friends. Epstein was found dead in a different prison — Manhattan’s Metropolitan Correctional Center — in August 2019, after he reportedly killed himself.

    Since Ghislaine remains the last surviving link to exposing an underworld of powerful and connected pedophiles, jailhouse authorities in Brooklyn are reportedly taking no chances to avoid the same fate as Epstein’s accused confederate, although if indeed Epstein did not kill himself, Ghislaine’s days are likely numbered.

    “During her time in quarantine, the defendant will be housed in the same cell where she was already housed before she was placed in quarantine, and medical staff and psychology staff will continue to check on the defendant every day,” the letter states.

    Still, since allowances must be made for her pre-trial preparations, Ghislaine – who has been held without bail since her July arrest – will have ample opportunities to catch the virus before her day in court.

    “Like all other MDC inmates in quarantine, the defendant will be permitted out of her cell three days per week for thirty minutes,” prosecutors wrote. “During that time, the defendant may shower, make personal phone calls, and use the CorrLinks email system. In addition, the defendant will continue to be permitted to make legal calls every day for up to three hours per day. These calls will take place in a room where the defendant is alone and where no MDC staff can hear her communications with counsel.”

    Maxwell’s attorneys did not respond to a different press inquiry earlier today, in response to the release of deposition excerpts by Epstein’s former house manager John Alessi who testified that Maxwell “constantly” took photographs of topless girls brought to his boss’s pool.

    The worker, John Alessi, told lawyers for one of Maxwell’s accusers, Virginia Giuffre, in a June 2016 deposition that Maxwell had a “high-tech” camera and was constantly taking photographs by the money manager’s pool of European and American girls, most of whom were topless.

    Maxwell, who was Epstein’s girlfriend and close aide, kept the photographs in an album on her desk, said Alessi, who said he last spoke to Epstein in 2014. A partial transcript of the deposition was unsealed in federal court in New York after failed efforts by the former socialite to keep it secret.

     

  • MacroVoices: Are Markets Mispricing COVID-19 Vaccine Risks?
    MacroVoices: Are Markets Mispricing COVID-19 Vaccine Risks?

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 20:20

    Daniel Lacalle, economist and fund manager at Tressis, joined Erik Townsend for an interview on this week’s episode of MacroVoices. With COVID cases soaring in Europe and the US, markets are trying to balance the promise of a COVID vaccine, which has helped goose markets in recent weeks, with the risks of more restrictive public-health measures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With stocks near record highs, Townsend asks Lacalle for his view on whether markets are perhaps being too hasty in pricing in all this vaccine optimism. As Lacalle sees it, investors have lazily latched on to the positive headlines, while failing to really understand and analyze the risks that could create problems in the coming months.

    Vaccines

    Daniel: I completely agree. I think that markets are only accepting the positive newsflow without analyzing the real path to the widespread distribution of a vaccine. And even if you look at (for example) the messages that Pfizer, AstraZenec, and Moderna are saying, you’re absolutely right, we’re talking about the latter part of the second half – best case – third quarter of 2021. And in the meantime, you have a much worse situation in Europe, much worse situation in the United States. The hospitalization rates are much higher. The level of tightness in the intensive care units is extremely, extremely complex right now. And very, very, very, very challenging. So I think that you are absolutely right: Things will get worse before they will get better.

    However, I think that for the average investor it is almost the following: When you get very bad news, as you’ve seen for example in Europe, what you bet on is that central banks, European Central Bank will massively increase the stimulus package, increase the purchasing program, launch a bazooka as they call it, etc.

    And when the news are good, you just buy it because the news are good. You see what I mean? That the level of risk taking that an average investor is adding on to a portfolio is completely disconnected with the reality of the path of the vaccine – obviously a very, very, very positive piece of newsflow, however very challenging in terms of distribution.

    You just mentioned the storage complications. But even in the most benign scenario (which I recently put in my Twitter feed), the most benign scenario assumes that by the end of 2021, less than 38% of the population at risk will have access to a vaccine, which means that the situation is getting very, very difficult in developed economies.

    In the United States it is quite probably that if there is a new administration, lockdowns will be implemented. We are seeing lockdowns implemented in countries that rejected the idea – like for example Austria recently, in Europe.

    So you’re absolutely right. The erosion of the potential of growth and the weakness of the economy is something that is much more important and certainly much more challenging than what markets are willing to take into account.

    And everybody seems to be betting aggressively on the combination of massive monetary stimulus plus the idea that vaccines will solve everything at some point.

    Stagflation

    Does Lacalle see all this monetary and fiscal stimulus leading to a surge in inflation coupled by slowing growth? Maybe in the long term, but not right away.

    Daniel: Well, I think that there is certainly a risk of stagflation. But more in the mid-term. We will first probably see a very aggressive level of deflation. Because inflation only happens when the newly-created money is going to the real economy. And therefore it becomes a massive devaluation of the purchasing power of the currency, which leads to a widespread rise in prices despite no economic growth. In this case, what is happening is that newly-created money is going to bonds – and fundamentally to sovereign bonds, obviously. And therefore inflation is being generated – and massively in sovereign bonds. We have in the Eurozone countries that are all but bankrupt or completely insolvent financing themselves at the lowest yields in history.

    That is massive inflation. Okay? And when all of that newly-created money is utilized by governments to do two things – one is to perpetuation overcapacity and current spending that does not generate real economic return. The reality is that it does not create inflation the way that we would expect, because you’re basically adding overcapacity to overcapacity that makes it impossible to generate inflation. Second, the newly-created money goes actually to current spending with no real economic return.

    So it’s very difficult to see the levels of inflation that we saw in the ‘70s. And, also, economies are much more open. Everybody is exporting, so that makes it more difficult. However, on the other side, what you have is a situation that I find fascinating, is that while official CPI, official index of consumer prices, is very low, the goods and services that people actually want to buy are actually rising much faster than real wages, than nominal wages, and than the official CPI. So, for example, we’re seeing how health care, education, food, clothing, utility bills, those elements are actually growing faster. And what’s coming down is everything that is subject to technology.

    So non-replicable goods go up faster than official CPI and replicable goods go down significantly. Technology, tourism, hospitality. You name it.

    So I think that what we are seeing right now is that, on one side, central banks do not see inflation. And, on the other side, you have a growing discontent among the lower classes, the less well-off, and the middle class because the access to goods and services is more challenging.

    Cost of living is rising faster than nominal and real wages.

    So, in my opinion, the risk of what is going on right now with the policy of central banks is, first, ignoring that the cost of living for the people in the middle to lower classes is rising much faster.

    Second is to ignore the fact that there is actually a level of inflation in financial assets that is significantly more worrying than what anybody would imagine.

    Think about this.

    Just an increase of 100 basis points in the yields of sovereign countries would really bring them to absolute collapse in an environment in which 100 basis points would still be at a completely abnormal level of yield.

    The problem from the central bank perceptive is that they are doing the following: Central banks are looking at the rearview mirror. It’s like somebody driving down the road at 250 miles an hour, looking at the rearview mirror, and saying “We haven’t crashed yet. Let’s accelerate.”

    And the point here is that the risk of stagflation is rising very, very rapidly because of those factors that I mentioned. Because the non-replicable goods and services are rising faster than expected and because, at the same time, the economy is stagnating because of the debt saturation effect.

    Another debt crisis in Europe?

    As Europe pushes to pass its biggest-ever pan-European rescue package, what’s the risk that this seeds another round of core vs. peripheral frustrations in Europe, potentially tearing apart the EU?

    Daniel: It’s a very, very good question.

    Monetary policy in the Eurozone should be what it was designed to be, which is a tool to provide countries time to implement the structural reforms that are going to allow them to be stronger, more productive, and more solvent in the future.

    However, monetary policy in the Eurozone had gone from being a tool that looks to provide some time for governments to implement structural reforms to being an excuse not to implement them.

    And that tension between the north and the south is already happening.

    You’ve seen it, for example, with the European Recovery Fund. How immediately there was this idea that the frugal countries were attacking the southern European countries because they did not want to monetize and mutualize all of the spending without question.

    Because solidarity mechanisms exist in the Eurozone, but they don’t have to be something that goes from being a solidarity mechanism to a donation mechanism. And especially a donation to perpetuate and accelerate the structural imbalances and the weaknesses of the economy.

    So what I think that the European Central Bank should do is to be a lot less strict about the rule. I think that the only thing that they need to do is to follow very, very simple rules by which both sides feel that there is a support. But at the same time it’s not a perverse incentive to undo reforms.

    Which is what we’re seeing, for example, in Spain or, at some point, we saw in Italy.

    And everything, just like in the United States it would be solved as well, would be solved by a set of measures in which discretionality of the individuals at the European Central Bank is limited.

    So, for example, you have an asset purchase program. The asset purchase program goes to X amount of bonds but it doesn’t go beyond that.

    And you say it very clearly, you explain it well in advance – communication consistent and constant about those rules – so that it’s very clear that those are the rules and those have to be implemented.

    And then you have at least some level of security that governments will not use the period of expansionary monetary policies to simply get worse and to become almost too big to fail, as you were mentioning.

    Because what’s happening right now is the following, and we saw it between 2014 and 2017 with Mario Draghi. Mario Draghi used to go to the market and say monetary policy is not enough. Countries have to implement structural reforms. If structural reforms are not implemented, monetary policy is not going to work.

    And, literally, governments heard that the same way as they could hear a commercial on TV. They just didn’t even pay any attention.

    What ends up happening is that governments would be at least aware that they could not use monetary policy to continue to increase the imbalances of the economy and the European Central Bank. The only thing it needs to do is to follow very strictly those rules. That would certainly prevent the perverse incentive that is being created right now.

    As Lacalle claimed, the first signs of trouble ahead for the dollar and the dollar-based financial system will be when demand for greenbacks really starts to decelerate. Of course, one could argue that we’re already seeing that as Russia and China work to use both of their respective currencies more frequently to settle bilateral trade.

    Listen to the full interview below:

  • 7 Things That Used To Be "Crazy Conspiracy Theories" Until 2020 Happened
    7 Things That Used To Be “Crazy Conspiracy Theories” Until 2020 Happened

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Remember back in the old days of, say, 2019, when anyone who talked about microchip implants, Americans being forced to show travel papers, and re-education camps was thought to be a crazy conspiracy theorist? And then 2020 rolled around and voila! It turns out those conspiracy theories weren’t so “crazy” after all.

    And I’m not just talking about the government releasing info about UFOs.

    We’re living in a time when someone will attempt to beat the crap out of you, burn your house down, or even kill you if you voted for the “wrong” presidential candidate. We’re being subjected to curfews, our movement is restricted, and our businesses have been forcibly shut down. One day, people will look back on this as the year that everything changed – or depending on how Americans respond to the mandates – the year we finally said enough.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are seven things that were considered crazy conspiracy theories…until now, when they’re becoming far too real.

    #1) Universal Basic Income

    Did you ever really think we’d live in a country where the government would tell private business owners when and how they could operate? Where workers would be told, “You can no longer go to work for your own good?”

    Well, welcome to 2020.

    22 million jobs were lost and only 42% of those were recovered by last August, when the country began to reopen. Millions of the lost jobs were permanent losses, as businesses across the country fold under the weight of the restrictions that either don’t allow them to operate or the money problems of their former customers.

    “It’s clear that the pandemic is doing some fundamental damage to the job market,” said Mark Zandi, chief economist for Moody’s Analytics. “A lot of the jobs lost aren’t coming back any time soon. The idea that the economy is going to snap back to where it was before the pandemic is clearly not going to happen.”

    …More than 10 million Americans are currently categorized as temporarily out of work. But historically, nearly 30% of people who tell the Labor Department that they are temporarily unemployed never get their job back, said Heidi Shierholz, senior economist at the Economic Policy Institute, a liberal think tank.

    “Even though we don’t know if the historical record will hold in this case, it’s an extremely valid concern that not all of those people are going to get called back,” she said.

    People who are counting on businesses reopening their doors may be surprised to find that a temporary loss has become permanent one, said Zandi. (source)

    Of the businesses that have closed, many will never reopen. Most harshly affected were small businesses.

    About 60% of businesses that have closed during the coronavirus pandemic will never reopen, and restaurants have suffered the most, according to new data from Yelp. (source)

    So we have not only people who became unemployed, but we also have business owners who’ve lost everything. As we go into the second round of lockdowns across the United States, it’s not a stretch of the imagination to think that some of the small businesses that have thus far managed to stay afloat will succumb to the economic effects of these mandates…taking with them even more jobs and plunging even more people into poverty.

    Poverty is a vicious cycle and one seemingly small thing can suck those who are struggling into a vortex of fees and penalties from which emerging seems impossible. I’ve written about my own experiences with poverty here. The concern is that even fewer people will recover financially after this round of government mandates, leaving even more Americans broke, hungry, and homeless.

    But don’t worry – the government is here to help and I mean that in the President Reagan threatening kind of way. They provided a “stimulus” check to everyone in America, gave such huge unemployment money to people that they made more staying home than they did going to work, and went so much deeper into debt that the number is simply unfathomable.

    In effect, they paid people not to work. And it isn’t the fault of those people in most cases – the government forced their places of employment to close unless it was considered “essential.”

    And that sounds a whole lot like Universal Basic Income. Or as I like to call it, modern feudalism.

    Quite a few people are ready to give up their freedom so that someone else can take care of them.

    They don’t think they’re giving up freedom. They’re convinced that they are embracing a smart, fair system that eliminates poverty. The greed, entitlement, and lack of ambition that seems inherent in many people today will have them slipping on the yoke of servitude willingly.

    They feel like they deserve a living just for drawing breath. As Gawker’s headline reads, “A Universal Basic Income Is the Utopia We Deserve.”

    The idea of a universal basic income for all citizens has been catching on all over the world. Is it too crazy to believe in? We spoke to the author of a new book on the ins, outs, and utopian dreams of making basic income a reality.

    The basic income movement got a significant boost this week when the charity GiveDirectly announced that it will be pursuing a ten-year, $30 million pilot project giving a select group of Kenyan villagers a basic income and studying its effects. As an anti-poverty solution, universal basic income appeals to impoverished people in Africa, relatively well-off Scandinavians, and Americans automated out of their jobs alike. (source)

    Sure, money for nothing sounds great on the surface.

    But what would the real result of a Universal Basic Income be?

    Feudalism. Serfdom. Enslavement.

    UBI would fast-track us back to the feudalism of the Middle Ages. Sure, we’d be living in slick, modern micro-efficiencies instead of shacks. We’d have some kind of modern job instead of raising sheep for the lord of the manor.

    But, in the end, we wouldn’t actually own anything because private property would be abolished for all but the ruling class. We’d no longer have the ability to get ahead in life. Our courses would be set for us and veering off of those courses would be harshly discouraged.

    People will be completely dependent on the government and ruling class for every necessity: food, shelter, water, clothing. What better way to assert control than to make compliance necessary for survival? (source)

    With this second round of lockdowns how many more jobs will go permanently down the tubes? What are all those people going to do for food? For rent? The government is going to give them money. And we can’t even argue, really, because everyone knows someone who has lost a job they had for decades and who can’t find other work.

    They might call it something else, but Universal Basic Income is coming. And it’s coming soon.

    #2) Travel Papers

    Don’t be ridiculous. We’ll never have to show our “papers” to travel freely in the United States.

    Doh.

    Not until a COVID pandemic with all its subsidiary restrictions occurred. Back in March, days after I warned about the first lockdown, I wrote:

    For everyone who thought the article about the Lockdown of America was a “hysterical overstatement” and that they could still do whatever they wanted because it wasn’t really being enforced, what are you thinking now that “travel papers” are being handed out? To me, this sounds like the lockdowns I wrote of yesterday were just the first incremental step toward a society that nobody hopes to see.

    Yesterday, readers sent me photos of “travel papers” provided to them by employers so they could get to and from work. These are employees who work in industries like healthcare, pharmacies, and foodservice, as well as those who work in the production, transport, and sales of essential supplies.

    One reader wrote, “We were told to show these if we got stopped on the way to or from work and that if the authorities gave us any trouble, to not argue and just go back home.”

    Papers that people sent were from Pennsylvania, New York, Arizona, Michigan, North Carolina, Kansas, New Jersey, West Virginia, Virginia, Oregon, Florida, Louisiana, and Ohio. Industries mentioned in the papers were trucking, grocery stores, medical clinics, hospitals, nursing homes, city transit workers, railroads, food production plants, pharmacies, gas stations, stores like Target and Walmart, and automotive repair facilities.

    Most people were given their papers on Friday or Saturday and told they’d need them to get to and from work starting the week ahead. (source)

    You can see some of the papers that people sent me here.

    #3) Mandatory GPS tracking of humans

    “Don’t be silly. Nobody is actually tracking you with your phone. You’re not Jason Bourne.”

    Whoops. 2020 proved that was a lie when they rolled out contact tracing apps to make sure you didn’t breathe the same air as somebody who got a positive COVID test.

    Not only do sick or potentially sick people need to worry about being phoned or questioned by contact tracers, but there’s also a whole new world of dystopian technology being rapidly developed.

    Apple and Google formed a partnership to develop a phone app with the potential to monitor one-third of the world’s population. The Australian government has developed an app called COVIDSafe to “protect you, your family and friends and save the lives of other Australians. The more Australians connect to the COVIDSafe app, the quicker we can find the virus.”

    In fact, all sorts of potentially invasive new technology tools are springing up to “fight COVID.” Some use AI to detect signs of COVID and the Department of Defense is deploying thermal imaging to detect signs of COVID.

    These things won’t just go away when the pandemic is over. If they’re in use for a year or two years – however long this virus is with us – chances are, they’re here to stay. (source)

    So…if you have a smartphone, rest assured, at some point you’re probably going to have an app like this forcibly installed during one of those relentless updates. Of course, they’ll say that the app is just the framework and you have to enable it for it to work. Oh, wait, they already said that. After installing “the framework.”

    #4) Cashless societies

    Somehow, the United States ran out of change.

    There were no coins to be had…anywhere…for a while. Bloomberg reported in August:

    As if a deep recession and a never-ending pandemic wasn’t enough, the U.S. now faces another crisis: a coin shortage. Thanks to the lockdowns, fewer coins are in circulation, leaving businesses unable to make change when customers hand over paper money. (source)

    This had a lot of people concerned, especially since Venezuela used COVID to push citizens toward a cashless society. Here in the United States, the “change shortage” was so extensive is caused many stores to give you your change on a store loyalty card or invite you to donate that change to some cause. A true cashless society would allow significant control over our day to day lives. See this article for some of the totalitarian ways it would affect us.

    #5) Microchips

    Darpa got involved early on, touting it as a way to “save” us all from COVID. Robert Wheeler wrote:

    But governments aren’t having to market the chip as a method to track, trace, and control their populations. Instead, they are marketing the chip as a way to track and detect COVID and other coronaviruses. Clearly, this is a much easier sell to a public literally terrorized by their governments and mainstream media outlets for the last six months.

    Raul Diego details the creation and coming rollout of the new biochip in his article, “A DARPA-Funded Implantable Microchip to Detect COVID-19 Could Hit Markets By 2021,” where he writes,

    The most significant scientific discovery since gravity has been hiding in plain sight for nearly a decade and its destructive potential to humanity is so enormous that the biggest war machine on the planet immediately deployed its vast resources to possess and control it, financing its research and development through agencies like the National Institutes of Health (NIH), the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) and HHS’ BARDA.

    The revolutionary breakthrough came to a Canadian scientist named Derek Rossi in 2010 purely by accident. The now-retired Harvard professor claimed in an interview with the National Post that he found a way to “reprogram” the molecules that carry the genetic instructions for cell development in the human body, not to mention all biological lifeforms.

    These molecules are called ‘messenger ribonucleic acid’ or mRNA and the newfound ability to rewrite those instructions to produce any kind of cell within a biological organism has radically changed the course of Western medicine and science, even if no one has really noticed yet. As Rossi, himself, puts it: “The real important discovery here was you could now use mRNA, and if you got it into the cells, then you could get the mRNA to express any protein in the cells, and this was the big thing.” (Source)

    The microchip talk died down but the fact it as even a discussion and topic of COVID research should be troubling. Anyway, after the initial microchip hubbub, the push got redirected toward our next conspiracy theory.

    #6) Mandatory vaccines

    Remember back when nobody thought that adults would ever be forced to take vaccines except for “crazy conspiracy theorists?”  Well, that day is coming sooner than many people expect.

    A much-heralded COVID vaccine could be rolled out in a matter of days. Pfizer and BioNTech have both concluded Phase 3 of rushing their jabs to market. There are still many, many questions.

    The return to many of our old familiar ways will take time, and how much time remains unclear. The answers await more research into the vaccines, how they can be distributed and how many people are willing to get them.

    “A vaccine won’t be available immediately for everybody,” says Arthur Reingold, a professor of epidemiology at the School of Public Health at the University of California, Berkeley…

    …“It probably will take four to six months,” he says. “What that says to me is that people will have to keep wearing masks at least until spring. We won’t be in a magically different situation by February or March. I don’t see how that can possibly happen.”

    Equally important are the unknowns about the vaccines themselves. Scientists still don’t know how long vaccine-induced protection will last, for example, or whether inoculations can block actual infection, or only prevent the onset of disease. If the latter turns out to be the case, meaning the vaccines keep us from getting sick, but not infected, we still could be infectious to others. Until we know, don’t toss those masks into the trash…

    …Andrew Badley, an immunovirologist who chairs Mayo Clinic’s covid-19 task force, says the return of any normal activities depends on numerous factors, including how many people get vaccinated.

    “The only possibility that life will return to normal by summer is if the majority of the population receives the vaccines by then and the early efficacy data is borne out in ongoing studies,” he says. He adds, however: “I think it is unlikely we will be able to vaccinate the majority of the population by then.” (source)

    And how will they make sure that “the majority” of the population gets the vaccines? It’ll start out easy – there are tons of people who will gladly roll up their sleeves to get a vaccination that was rushed to market with no testing on the long-term effects. And then, the rest of us will be coerced by being unable to go to work, to a concert, to school, or into a public building without proof we’ve been vaccinated.

    YOU WALK TOWARD the arena, ready for a big game, tickets in hand. But what you see is a long line wrapping around the corner of the building and a bottleneck at the entrance as people search their pockets and purses for a small piece of paper. To be cleared to enter, you’ll also need that document—proof that you’ve received a COVID-19 vaccination.

    This is the future as some experts see it: a world in which you’ll need to show you’ve been inoculated against the novel coronavirus to attend a sports game, get a manicure, go to work, or hop on a train.

    “We’re not going to get to the point where the vaccine police break down your door to vaccinate you,” says Arthur Caplan, a bioethicist at New York University’s School of Medicine. But he and several other health policy experts envision vaccine mandates could be instituted and enforced by local governments or employers—similar to the current vaccine requirements for school-age children, military personnel, and hospital workers…

    …The mandates can be directed toward customers, as well. Just as business owners can bar shoeless and shirtless clients from entering their restaurants, salons, arenas, and stores, they can legally keep people out for any number of reasons, “as long as they’re not running afoul of any antidiscrimination laws,” says Dorit Rubinstein Reiss, a professor of health and vaccine law at the University of California, Hastings College of the Law.

    When a COVID-19 vaccine becomes available, some experts think states will require targeted industries to enforce vaccine mandates for their employees, especially those we’ve come to know as “essential workers.”

    “Grocery store workers get exposed to a lot of people, but also have the chance to infect a lot of people because of the nature of their work and the fact that virtually everybody needs to buy food,” says Carmel Shachar, executive director of the Petrie-Flom Center for Health Law Policy, Biotechnology, and Bioethics at Harvard Law School. Hospitality industry workers—those who work in restaurants, bars, and coffee shops, for example—could also see similar mandates.

    “It’s in an employer’s interest to make sure that their workplace is protected and that you can’t infect your colleagues,” Shachar says. “Having a widely accessible vaccine gets a lot of employers out of having to control their clients’ behavior.” And with a vaccinated workforce, “you don’t need to worry if the people you’re serving at the restaurant have COVID-19.”

    Even the general public could be incentivized to get vaccinated. “Oddly enough, the best way to impose a mandate is to reward people with more freedom if they follow that mandate,” Caplan says. For example, with proof of inoculation, you would be able to attend a sporting event “as a reward for doing the right thing,” he says. “And I can imagine people saying, If you want to go to my restaurant, my bowling alley, or my tattoo parlor, then I want to see a vaccine certificate, too.”

    Booster shots could also be required, depending on the efficacy of future vaccines.  (source)

    Doesn’t it just make you feel all warm and fuzzy inside how all these experts are planning to force an unwilling populace to accept an untested vaccine? It’s all for our own good, you know.

    #7) Re-education camps

    Remember how we all used to joke about being put into FEMA camps? Well…..

    Finally, for those of us who believed these conspiracy theories were conspiracy facts all along – oh – and for Trump voters – there’s the discussion about how to re-educate us so we can rejoin society.

    In a Twitter thread run amok, we saw the dark side of some “well-educated” Democrats who were sincerely trying to figure out how to redeem those of us who did not vote for Joe Biden.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, he doesn’t really mean re-education camps. Of course not.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And Laura found she bit off a bit more than she intended to chew. So of course she blamed non-Americans. (Probably those darned Russians, right?)

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Welcome to my inbox for the past 8 years, Laura. Every time I have posted a pro-gun, pro-self-defense article, I’ve been barraged with “creative” rape threats with a vast variety of implements and violent threats by the “peaceful” left. People have wished my children dead in a school shooting. So cry me a river, Laura, if your “thoughtful discussion” of putting me and people like me into anti-cult deprogramming in a gulag put you in an unpleasant position.

    Trust me, you get used to it. Heck, you might even begin to understand why I’m a gun owner.

    Is it just me or has 2020 been like reading every “crazy conspiracy” rabbit hole on the internet while dropping acid? Except you can’t come down from the trip because it’s all actually happening.

  • "Just Let Me Go" – Shanghai Airport Plunged Into Chaos After Workers Sealed In For COVID Testing 
    “Just Let Me Go” – Shanghai Airport Plunged Into Chaos After Workers Sealed In For COVID Testing 

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 19:40

    Thousands of airport workers at Shanghai’s largest international airport were sealed inside Sunday after an outbreak of COVID-19 was detected, reported WaPo

    On Sunday night, hazmat suit-clad health workers were seen on video, herding thousands of airport workers into the basement of Shanghai Pudong International Airport. 

    Chaos shortly broke out as people screamed: 

    “Just let me go,” shouts one man in the crowd. “I don’t want to die here,” cries out another.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Sunday night, Shanghai officials took action to test more than 17,000 airport workers following two new positive COVID-19 cases at the airport, bringing total cases this month to seven. The new cases were detected at the airport’s international cargo shipments area. 

    By Monday morning, 17,719 airport workers were tested for the virus – about 11,544 results came back negative so far, airport officials said. 

    During a news conference Monday, Shanghai officials blamed the latest cluster in cases at the airport on cargo shipped from North America. 

    “There was a lot of foam cushioning inside, and it was damp. 

    “Research has shown the coronavirus can survive in sealed, damp conditions, and neither of the two was wearing a face mask while cleaning it,” said Sun Xiaodong, vice director of the city’s pandemic control center.

    The officials also said the airport would implement stricter virus prevention measures for inbound international cargo.  

    This isn’t the first time China has tried to portray imported goods from heavily-infected countries for creating outbreaks in the country. 

    In July, China claimed imported shrimp from Ecuador was carrying traces of the virus. 

    Then in September, China was at it again, when it urged domestic companies to halt frozen imports of food from countries that have been severely impacted by the pandemic due to the risk of transmission through packaging.

    Virus cases tied to imports are just another tool for Beijing to keep the narrative alive. The virus originated outside China – Beijing has been caught implicitly supporting these conspiracy theories. 

  • "Why I'm Hopeful About 2021, But…"
    “Why I’m Hopeful About 2021, But…”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 19:20

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    What we need is not a return to the corrupt, tottering kleptocracy of 2019, but a re-democratization of capital, agency and money.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’m hopeful about 2021, and no, it’s not because of the vaccines or the end of lockdowns or anything related to Covid. The status quo is cheering the fantasy that we’ll soon return to the debt-soaked glory days of 2019 when everything was peachy.

    The problem with this “brand” of magical thinking is that stripped of self-serving PR, the world of 2019 was an autocratic kleptocracy stripmining the planet to enrich the few at the expense of the many. Viewed through this lens, what’s hopeful isn’t returning to an autocratic kleptocracy but moving beyond it.

    The most hopeful thing in my mind is that the Status Quo is devolving from its internal contradictions and excesses. Here’s the status quo in a nutshell:

    • The solution to too much debt is more debt.

    • The solution to autocratic elites hogging wealth and power is to give the elites more wealth and power.

    And so on: every status quo “solution” boils down to doing more of what’s failed spectacularly because it serves the interests of the few at the top of the wealth-power pyramid.

    The Great Reset is a perfect example of this insanity: now that we’ve destroyed the planet with our private jets, greed and corruption, give us even more power over you.

    The status quo is a perverse, intensely destructive system with powerful incentives for predation, exploitation, fraud and complicity. That’s the world of 2019; do we really want to go back to that? And even if we could, how long would it last? Another year or two? And at what cost to social cohesion and the planet?

    A more humane, sustainable world lies beyond the Status Quo. The problem is those reaping the immense rewards of the privileged insiders will fight any reform tooth and nail, so the only real way to advance the interests of the common good is for the rigged, rotten, corrupt, unsustainable status quo to crumble to dust.

    I know many smart, well-informed people expect the worst once the Status Quo (the Savior State and its kleptocratic banking / corporatocracy partners) devolves, and there is abundant evidence of the ugliness of human nature under duress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But we should temper this Id ugliness with the stronger impulses of community and compassion. If greed and rapaciousness were the dominant forces within human nature, then the species would have either died out at its own hand or been limited to small savage populations kept in check by the predation of neighboring groups, none of which could expand much because inner conflict would limit their ability to grow.

    The remarkable success of humanity as a species is not simply the result of a big brain, opposable thumbs, year-round sex or even language; it is ultimately the result of social and cultural associations that act as a “network” for storing knowledge and relationships– what we call intellectual and social capital.

    I have devoted significant portions of my books–

    –to an explanation of how community, sustainability, the public good and self-reliance have all atrophied under the relentless expansion of the autocratic Corporate-State kleptocracy.

    The social capital and “return on investment” earned from investing time and energy in community and other social networks has been replaced by a check from the Central State–an MMT/UBI (Universal Basic Income) transfer payment that surely beats the troublesome work of investing in community in terms of risk and return.

    The net result of the Savior State dominating society and the economy is the rise of a pathological mindset of entitlement and resentment–the two are simply two sides of the same coin. You cannot separate them.

    Once self-reliance has been lost, so too has self-confidence been lost, and the Savior State dependent–individual and corporation alike–soon distrusts their ability to function in an open market.

    This is a truly sad, self-destructive state of affairs, and deeply, tragically ironic. The calls for “help” quickly lead to dependence on the Savior State and corporate monopolies, and that dependence quickly breeds complicity and silence in the face of repression and predation by the State and its corporate partners.

    In a very real sense, citizens relinquish their citizenship along with their self-reliance and self-worth once they accept dependence on the State. Citizenship in the original Greek concept was not simply the granting of rights to do as one pleased; it also demanded a commitment to serve the interests of the many via personal sacrifice.

    I often mention that the U.S. has much to learn from so-called Third World countries that are poorer in resources and credit. In many of these countries, the government is the police, the school and the infrastructure of roadways and energy. Many of these countries are systemically corrupt, and the State is the engine and enforcer of corruption.

    Rather than something to be embraced and lobbied, involvement with the State is something to be avoided as a risk. As a result, people depend on their social capital and community for sustenance, support, work and connections.

    This is not altruism, it is mutually beneficial.

    Once a community dissolves into atomized individuals who each get a payment from the Central State, then they no longer need each other. Rather, other dependents on the State are viewed as competitors for the State’s resources.

    These atomized, isolated individuals have a perverse relationship with the State and what remains of the community around them: lacking the self-worth earned from work or engagement/investment in a community, then their only outlet for self-identity is consumption: what they wear, eat, drink, etc. as consumers. This lack of purpose and meaning is destructive to well-being; we all want to be needed and valued by our circle and society.

    This dependence on the State and corporate monopolies also serves the State’s goal, which is a passive, compliant populace of dependents, and distracted, passive workers who enrich the owners of corporations with their labor and pay their taxes to the state. This dependence on the State and a hollow consumerism are ontologically bound: each feeds the other.

    The era of debt-based consumption as the engine of “growth” and “prosperity” is coming to an end. Adding debt no longer creates growth; it actually takes away from the economy by expanding debt service (interest payments).

    The vast majority of developed-world people have had the basics of life since the late 1960s — transport, food, shelter and utilities. The “growth” since then depended on cheap, abundant oil and a consumerist mentality in which one constantly re-defines one’s identity not from social investments in the shared community but from consumption of corporate goods and services funded by credit.

    Not coincidentally, this dominance of consumption as the only metric for “growth” (as opposed to, say, productive activity) has been paralleled by the dominance of the Central State.

    The end of credit-based consumption will be a very positive development, as will the devolution of the Savior State. The Savior State is like cheap oil–both are at their peaks and are starting their inevitable slide down the S-curve. The world they created was not as positive for human fulfillment and happiness as we have been told.

    Indeed, study after study has found that people with the basics for life, a higher purpose that requires sacrifice and a tight-knit community are far and away happier than isolated, atomized, insecure consumers, regardless of their wealth and consumption.

    This potential to re-humanize and re-democratize our economy and society is why I am hopeful. What we need is not a return to the corrupt, tottering kleptocracy of 2019, but a re-democratization of capital, agency and money. 

    More on that later this week…

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.

     

  • US Attorney Gives Antifa Pass On Rand Paul Attack After Refusing To Investigate
    US Attorney Gives Antifa Pass On Rand Paul Attack After Refusing To Investigate

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 19:00

    The US Attorney’s Office for the District of Columbia has declined to investigate who is funding the ‘thugs’ who attacked him on video following President Trump’s August 2020 White House nomination acceptance ceremony.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The DC U.S. Attorney today confirmed to me that they will not pursue an investigation of who is funding the thugs who attacked my wife and me and sent a DC police officer to the hospital,” wrote Paul via Twitter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsShortly after the incident, Rand and his wife Kelley appeared on “Tucker Carlson Tonight,” where he said “It was terrifying.”

    “I have never experienced anything like that in my life. We felt completely powerless.”

    “At first I was trying to look in their eyes and trying to have any kind of reason … to see someone as a human being and I realized they did not see us as human beings,” said Kelley Paul, adding “We were Trump supporters, so they absolutely despised us.

    in that moment, it was a bloodthirsty mob, and all I could think of was the man who was kicked in the head in Portland … or the man whose jaw was broken [in Kenosha] or an eight-year-old Secoriea Turner. I really thought we were going to lose our lives, I thought someone was going to throw a brick. It was the most terrifying moment of my entire life,” she continued.

     

  • Bitcoin's Gut Check: The Time Of Crisis As The Moment Of Truth
    Bitcoin’s Gut Check: The Time Of Crisis As The Moment Of Truth

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 18:40

    Authored by Marc Bernegger via CoinTelegraph.com,

    If Bitcoin weathers the current financial storm, our monetary system will be on the brink of dramatic changes or even a revolution.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    We are at a turning point in history. The coming months will show how institutional investors will react in the medium term to the countless rescue packages in the wake of the coronavirus crisis. One thing is certain: States and central banks have been hard-pressed for solutions. Moreover, it looks like their efforts have been exhausted already at the start. Should investors end up losing faith in the measures taken, the consequences would be far more dramatic than a short-term stock market crash.

    No one can foresee today what our future monetary system will look like, but the history of money has been marked sometimes by radical system changes. Today’s historical interventions in the free market are unparalleled, especially given their magnitude, and will no doubt in hindsight be seen as the beginning of the end of our current monetary system with its fiat currencies “made out of nothing.”

    Is Bitcoin (BTC) “digital gold” and a “safe haven” currency? Yes, now more than ever before.

    Bitcoin was created in 2008 in response to the financial crisis­, and the present-day chaos on the global financial markets is the first major test of its ability to assert itself as an alternative and a new asset class. However, when liquidity is needed, as it is now, everything is sold, especially risky assets. John Bollinger, the creator of the so-called Bollinger Band, a technical indicator for price developments, rightly noted that in times of crisis, investors will “sell whatever they can sell,” and only after assets have been turned into cash is an investment made in crisis-proof assets — e.g., gold.

    Flee toward “hard money”

    In contrast to state-run monetary watchdogs who have been trying to safeguard “a continuously functioning market” by pumping in “avalanches” of money (and not just since the coronavirus outbreak), the pricing of Bitcoin is regulated without any intermediary interference and is solely based on supply and demand. There is also a cap to the number of Bitcoins that can be created — 21 million — and this means that in contrast to traditional fiat currency, no new Bitcoins can be arbitrarily printed. 

    New Bitcoins are “mined” in the same way that other commodities are — e.g., gold — but through a complex and clearly defined process. No one is able to alter the number of newly generated Bitcoins.

    It will be a clear advantage for our traditional monetary system to have alternatives to fall back on in the likely event of hyperinflation. “Creative instruments,” such as helicopter money and similar interventionist measures, are not possible in the same way with Bitcoin, and neither governments, (central) banks nor other institutions are able to manipulate and/or change the parameters of this new decentralized asset class. 

    Since the hegemonic power of the United States has been also weakening, the topic of reserve currency will at some point be on the table. Already today, it is foreseeable that Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies will compete with digital currencies issued by state governments. 

    Is Bitcoin a “global digital currency?” This might sound like science fiction, but it is actually not that unfounded.

    Meanwhile, institutional investors have started to see the attraction of crypto assets. However, in times of crisis, they are often quick to withdraw their capital from risky investments, and Bitcoin is still classified as such by the majority.

    Personally, I am convinced that Bitcoin, as well as other digital assets, can only benefit from the current developments and their dramatic long-term consequences.

  • Trump Tells GSA To Allow Biden Transition To Proceed "In The Best Interest Of Our Country"
    Trump Tells GSA To Allow Biden Transition To Proceed “In The Best Interest Of Our Country”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 18:29

    In what is the closest words yet to a concession, President Trump agreed to let GSA proceed with the Biden administration transition. In a pair of tweets, Trump noted:

    “I want to thank Emily Murphy at GSA for her steadfast dedication and loyalty to our Country. She has been harassed, threatened, and abused – and I do not want to see this happen to her, her family, or employees of GSA.”

    Trump added that while the election litigation battle continues…

    “Our case STRONGLY continues, we will keep up the good fight, and I believe we will prevail!”

    … He will allow the transition to proceed:

    “Nevertheless, in the best interest of our Country, I am recommending that Emily and her team do what needs to be done with regard to initial protocols, and have told my team to do the same.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a gentle reminder, this is NOT what happened in 2000 Bush vs Gore

    After Vice President Al Gore conceded the presidential election to Texas Gov. George W. Bush Wednesday night, General Services Administration chief David Barram announced that GSA would release transition funds and provide office space to the Bush transition team.

    The 2000 Presidential Transition Act, passed in October, allocates more than $5 million for the transition and expands GSA’s role in it. GSA will publish a transition directory with information on each agency, and will help arrange briefings and furnish appointees with information on topics such as ethics and financial disclosure regulations. GSA’s transition office is at 1800 G Street NW in Washington.

    Republican lawmakers had criticized Barram’s decision to withhold transition funds pending Gore’s challenge to election results in Florida. Last week, Rep. Steve Horn, R-Calif., chairman of the House Government Reform Subcommittee on Government Management, Information and Technology, held hearings on the issue. Rep. Spencer Bachus, R-Ala., then introduced a bill that would’ve required GSA to support the Bush transition.

    Barram had said he would not release the funds until an “apparent successful candidate” had been determined, as mandated in the Presidential Transition Act of 1963. The Transition Act requires GSA to provide federal money, office space and other logistical support to the incoming and outgoing administrations.

    Trump’s tweets follow a letter from Emily Murphy (see below), the General Services Administration chief, in which she told Biden that “because of recent developments involving legal challenges and certifications of election results, I have determined that you may access the post-election resources and services described in Section 3 of the Act upon request,” which includes some $6.3 million in funding and other government resources, as well as access to current agency officials and briefing books.

    The biggest change now is that the Biden transition team will be able to flood federal agencies with officials focused on preparing the way for his administration. They will have access to agency staff and briefing books assembled earlier this year.

    Until today’s GSA letter, the Biden transition team had worked informally to establish a new administration, including assembling a coronavirus task force and consulting with public health officials outside of the federal government, mimicking the approach former Vice President Dick Cheney took during the disputed 2000 election.

    In the letter, Murphy also said that she had received “threats online, by phone, and by mail directed at my safety, my family, my staff, and even my pets in an effort to coerce me into making this determination prematurely.” She added that she was not “directly or indirectly pressured by any Executive Branch official” into the making or timing of a decision on the presidential transition.

    The full letter from the GSA’s Murphy details what she has gone through and what steps take place next… (emphasis ours)

    Dear Mr. Biden:

    As the Administrator of the U.S. General Services Administration, I have the ability under the Presidential Transition Act of 1963, as amended, to make certain post-election resources and services available to assist in the event of a presidential transition. See 3 U.S.C. § 102 note (the “Act”). I take this role seriously and, because of recent developments involving legal challenges and certifications of election results, am transmitting this letter today to make those resources and services available to you.

    I have dedicated much of my adult life to public service, and I have always strived to do what is right. Please know that I came to my decision independently, based on the law and available facts. I was never directly or indirectly pressured by any Executive Branch official—including those who work at the White House or GSA—with regard to the substance or timing of my decision. To be clear, I did not receive any direction to delay my determination. I did, however, receive threats online, by phone, and by mail directed at my safety, my family, my staff, and even my pets in an effort to coerce me into making this determination prematurely. Even in the face of thousands of threats, I always remained committed to upholding the law.

    Contrary to media reports and insinuations, my decision was not made out of fear or favoritism. Instead, I strongly believe that the statute requires that the GSA Administrator ascertain, not impose, the apparent president-elect. Unfortunately, the statute provides no procedures or standards for this process, so I looked to precedent from prior elections involving legal challenges and incomplete counts. GSA does not dictate the outcome of legal disputes and recounts, nor does it determine whether such proceedings are reasonable or justified. These are issues that the Constitution, federal laws, and state laws leave to the election certification process and decisions by courts of competent jurisdiction. I do not think that an agency charged with improving federal procurement and property management should place itself above the constitutionally-based election process. I strongly urge Congress to consider amendments to the Act.

    As you know, the GSA Administrator does not pick or certify the winner of a presidential election. Instead, the GSA Administrator’s role under the Act is extremely narrow: to make resources and services available in connection with a presidential transition. As stated, because of recent developments involving legal challenges and certifications of election results, I have determined that you may access the post-election resources and services described in I have determined that you may access the post-election resources and services described in Section 3 of the Act upon request. The actual winner of the presidential election will be determined by the electoral process detailed in the Constitution.

    Section 7 of the Act and Public Law 116-159, dated October 1, 2020, which provides continuing appropriations until December 11, 2020, makes $6,300,000 available to you to carry out the provisions of Section 3 of the Act. In addition, $1,000,000 is authorized, pursuant to Public Law 116-159, to provide appointee orientation sessions and a transition directory. I remind you that Section 6 of the Act imposes reporting requirements on you as a condition for receiving services and funds from GSA.

    If there is anything we can do to assist you, please contact Ms. Mary D. Gibed, the Federal Transition Coordinator.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, ‘ascertainment’ has not been reached but presumably, “democracy” is “safe” once again.

  • Leveraged Finance at Full Throttle
    Leveraged Finance at Full Throttle


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 18:25

    Real Vision editor Jack Farley hosts Tyler Neville of Real Vision for a spirited debate about the fate of risk assets. Tyler makes the case that U.S. equities have a lot more room to run, basing his case on tight credit spreads and the Federal Reserve’s ever-expanding balance sheet. Tyler incorporates market breadth as well as venture capital funding to argue that the punch bowl may never be removed. Jack challenges Tyler’s bullish thesis, asking Tyler about the upcoming expiration of the Fed’s emergency lending programs and the possibility that the holiday season will accelerate the spread of the COVID-19 virus. Jack and Tyler then explore the future of so-called “zombie companies,” whose liabilities have swelled to over $1.2 trillion. In the intro, Real Vision’s Haley Draznin analyzes the promising developments of a coronavirus vaccine, how it impacts the markets, and why some sectors will benefit a lot more than others. For charts from Tyler as well as Jack, click here: https://rvtv.io/2URRNAH

  • Pennsylvania Governor Bans Alcohol Sales On The Day Before Thanksgiving
    Pennsylvania Governor Bans Alcohol Sales On The Day Before Thanksgiving

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 18:20

    Democratic Pennsylvania Governor Tom Wolf is tapping into his state’s Quaker roots to deliver an economy-sized dose of Thanksgiving disappointment. In an effort to avert a coronavirus-inspired lockdown, the governor said Monday that he would ban alcohol sales in the state on the day before Thanksgiving via executive order.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bars and restaurants should stop selling alcohol starting at 1700ET on Wednesday until 0800ET Thanksgiving morning. Since Thanksgiving is typically “the biggest day for drinking”, the governor hopes the mandate could help slow the spread of the virus.

    So, for the millions of Americans who ignored the CDC’s warnings and traveled home for the holidays anyway, the traditional pre-Thanksgiving tradition of hooking up with an old high school classmate while out at the ol’ stomping ground bars on the night before Thanksgiving will be – like pretty much everything else in 2020 – ruined, in Pennsylvania and many other states.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Because while alcohol sales can legally continue in New York and New Jersey, those states have curfews in place or other restrictions to stop bars from opening to patrons this holiday season.

    “This is an advisory,” Wolf said. “All Pennsylvanians, in order to stay safe, ought to stay home. It is vital that every single Pennsylvanian takes these mitigation steps seriously.”

    The ban on alcohol sales follows orders to limit holiday gatherings to members of one’s immediate family or household. The governor warned that all of these restrictions would help the state avoid “greater strain” on its health-care system, which is more vulnerable in rural parts of the vast Keystone state.

    “As our hospitals and health care system are facing greater strain, we need to redouble our efforts to keep people safe,” Wolf said in a statement. “If our health care system is compromised, it isn’t only COVID-19 patients who will suffer. If we run out of hospital beds, or if hospital staff are over-worked to the breaking point, care will suffer for every patient – including those who need emergency care for illnesses, accidents, or chronic conditions unrelated to COVID-19.”

    To be sure, many Pennsylvanians had probably grown weary of Wolf’s aggressive restrictions even before this latest executive order.

    They’ll have their chance to get their revenge at the polls some day. But for now, at least the Steelers game is still on.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd November 2020

  • James Wesley Rawles: Ready Yourself For A Turbulent 2021 And Beyond
    James Wesley Rawles: Ready Yourself For A Turbulent 2021 And Beyond

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 11/23/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by James Wesley Rawles via Survivalblog.com,

    The year 2020 will be remembered as an exceptionally turbulent year, marked by multiple worldwide crises and massive urban protests and riots. It has been a year of significant drama and trauma. I do not expect that 2021 will mark a “return to normality.”  If anything, 2021 will be just as jarring to our collective psyche. Parenthetically, I should mention that I created a meme for that.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In this essay, I’m posting my recommendations for SurvivalBlog readers on how to ready yourself and your family for any of the following in 2021:

    • Economic Turmoil

    • Sociopolitical Upheaval

    • Global Military and Terrorism Threats

    • Supply Chain Disruptions

    • Renewed Pandemic Lockdowns

    • Anti-Second Amendment Legislation

    • Urban Outmigration

    • A Resurgence of Inflation

    I don’t claim to be any sort of prophet. I simply extrapolate from current events, trends, and my study of history.

    ECONOMIC TURMOIL

    The massive debts that many governments have racked up since the outbreak of COVID-19 are staggering.  In just the past 11 months nearly $2 Trillion Dollars has been added to our national debt. Federal debt, as a share of the economy, hit 98 percent in the 2020 fiscal year. To put the mountain of new debt in perspective: It took about 200 years for the Federal Government to build up its first $1 trillion in debt. (That threshold was reached circa 1976.) The debt is now north of $28 trillion, and climbing. And that figure does not include out-year obligations such as Federal pensions. So, I realistically, think of it as a $50+ trillion debt!

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Because we can expect layoffs, develop a second income stream from a home-based business.

    • Reduce your consumer debt as much as possible.

    • Invest in anticipation of both a weaker U.S. Dollar on the Forexand much higher currency inflation. (More on that, later in this article.)

    SOCIOPOLITICAL UPHEAVAL

    The Antifa and BLM rioting of 2020 may carry over into 2021, even if Sleepy-Creepy Joe Biden is sworn in as President. And if the Federal courts intervene to throw out any tainted (late-arriving and back-dated) ballots and hence DJT gets a second term, then we can expect the leftist rioters to come absolutely unglued. The riots will be even more severe and protracted. Plan accordingly.

    Specific Recommendations:

    • The late Ol’ Remus said it best: Avoid crowds.

    • Avoid visiting urban areas unless absolutely necessary. If you must, then carry body armor and full battle rattle in the trunk of your car.

    • Never travel unarmed!

    • Avoid targeting yourself. If you live in a liberal city or suburb then go “Gray Man”. Part of that is displaying no political or firearms-related bumper stickers or yard signs.

    GLOBAL MILITARY AND TERRORISM THREATS

    Or planet is not a very safe place. The state of “Peace” is the exception, and peaceful locales are also exceptions. Warfare, tyranny, brutal policing, and coercive taxation are the norm.

    Some hotspots and issues to watch:

    • South China Sea

    • Taiwan Straits (Invasion of Taiwan unlikely in the Trump era, but more likely, with Biden in charge)

    • China/India Border

    • Continuation or expansion of the Nagorno-Karabakh war

    • Expansion of the Syrian Civil War into a regional war or world war.

    • A new wave of Islamic terrorism

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Avoid international travel in contested regions.

    • Mitigate the risks of interruption of commerce with contested regions. Try to minimize your purchases of goods that are made in mainland China. Stock up on items that would be in short supply if any of these conflicts “go hot” in 2021.

    • Don’t live in a locale that is a likely terrorist target.

    SUPPLY CHAIN DISRUPTIONS

    The shortages that we witnessed in the first few months of the COVID-19 pandemic (February though May, 2020) illustrated how vulnerable the nation’s supply chains are. This includes not just the import and manufacturing supply chains but also the consumer level supply chain. Even local Farmers’ Markets were shut down by the Wuhan Flu pandemic.

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Stock up early on items that are likely to be in short supply, such as gardening seeds, canning jars, plenty of canning jar lids, cleaning supplies, bleach, and paper products.

    • Finding replacement car parts may become problematic. If you drive a foreign-made car, then consider selling it and replacing it with an American-made car. One exception would be a pre-2018 Toyota  Camry. It is a best-selling import car, so the car dismantling yards are full of parts for those.

    RENEWED PANDEMIC LOCKDOWNS

    Assuming that the COVID-19 pandemic continues, we can expect to see State-level lockdowns reinstated. And if Biden takes office, then there might be a Federal (nationwide)  lockdown, as well. There also might be Federally-mandated coronavirus vaccinations and/or travel restrictions.

    Further lockdowns will undoubtedly hamstring the U.S. economy. That could very well tip us over into another recession.

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Be prepared to telecommute for an extended period of time.

    • If you have a job that would require “getting the jab” and you refuse to do so, then prepare to be fired from your job, or laid off under some other pretense. You might consider proactively taking a different job from a small, private employer where you are less likely to be required to be vaccinated.

    • Try to transition your work situation to be as “recession-proof” as possible.

    ANTI-SECOND AMENDMENT LEGISLATION

    If Joe Biden takes office but yet a republican majority is maintained in the U.S. Senates, then chances are that not much gun legislation will be enacted at the Federal level. In that sense, legislative gridlock is a good thing. But regardless, the Biden/Harris administration is likely to attempt to legislate on its own via Executive Orders. For firearms, that will very likely be restrictions on the importation of guns, ammunition, gun parts, and magazines.  For that reason, buying extra magazines for all of the imported guns that you own should be your top priority. Joe Biden is also likely to direct the ATF to reclassify various guns and gun parts–most notably shotguns with detachable magazines, pistol arm braces, and binary triggers.

    While we can’t escape Federal legislation, we can avoid bad state-level legislation by living in the right state. I’ve long been a proponent of voting with your feet. Here are 20 states that in my estimation are the least likely to enact any new anti-gun laws:

    1. Wyoming

    2. Idaho

    3. Montana

    4. Utah

    5. North Dakota

    6. South Dakota

    7. Missouri

    8. Alaska

    9. Arkansas

    10. South Carolina

    11. Kentucky

    12. Tennessee

    13. Mississippi

    14. Kansas

    15. Alabama

    16. Oklahoma

    17. West Virginia

    18. Indiana

    19. Louisiana

    20. Ohio

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Remain active in gun politics. We need to hound our elected representatives at all levels of government. Tell them bluntly:  No more gun laws!

    • Seriously consider moving to a low-tax, low-population density, and gun-friendly state. Be wary of Oregon, Washington, Nevada, Arizona, and Texas. Those are all “destination states” for liberal California refugees. They are bringing their leftist politics with them.

    • Round out your gun collection soon, preferably via private party purchases of used guns. That is legal in +/- 37 of the 50 States.

    • Stock up on 11+ round magazines

    • Stock up on  ammunition and reloading components

    • Hedge into a few pre-1899 cartridge guns.  (Because you may have to make the rest of our collection disappear!)

    • There might also be new restrictions on the civilian ownership of night vision gear and body armor.  (Most likely with Grandfather Clauses.) So stock up!

    URBAN OUTMIGRATION

    The current trend toward migration from cities to the hinterlands will accelerate, especially in the spring and summer of 2021.

    Specific Recommendations:

    • Again: Seriously consider moving to a low-tax, low-population density, and gun-friendly state.

    • If you live in a rural region, then anticipate that everyone in the building trades will be fully booked for several years. One consequence of a shortage of contractors that is that manufactured houses (read: double-wides) will soon be sold out, whether they are new or used.

    • With so many people relocating to the hinterboonies there will be shortages of major appliances — especially chest freezers.

    • And with umpteen newbies wanting to become self-sufficient there will probably be shortages of prefabricated greenhouses, small tractors, and power equipment such as chainsaws, rototillers, and utility ATVs. So If you have been needing any of those and delaying making such a purchase, then stop delaying. Buy it ASAP!

    A RESURGENCE OF INFLATION

    The inflation of the U.S. Dollar has been low for more than a decade.  This has been attributed to artificially depressed interest rates, orchestrated by the Federal reserve banking cartel. But given the gross overspending by the Federal government, we can expect inflation to re-emerge in the 2020s.

    Specific Recommendations:

    1. Keep a close eye on both the prime interest rate and the US Dollar Index (USDI). If interest rates spike by 1 percent of more, or the USDI dips below 90, then watch out!  General price inflation will follow, soon after.

    2. As I’ve already mentioned: Invest in anticipation of both a weaker U.S. Dollar and much higher currency inflation.

    3. Avoid making any new investments that are U.S. Dollar denominated.

    4. Become more self-sufficient with vegetable gardening and small livestock, so that you won’t face as much “Sticker Shock”, when buying groceries.

    5. Reduce your U.S. Dollar exposure, by:

    A.) Hedging into practical, barterable tangible items. (Guns, tools, et cetera.)

    B.)  Hedging into silver, platinum, and gold.

    C.) Hedging into Swiss Franc currency.

    D.) If you are age 50, buying a Swiss Franc-denominated annuity.

    CONCLUSION

    In summary, we need to be prepared for a turbulent or downright tumultuous 2021. The Drama Quotient for the remainder of the 2020s may resemble the 1930s more than the 2010s.

  • FBI Investigating "Orgasmic Meditation" Company For Sex Trafficking, Prostitution, & Violation Of Labor Laws
    FBI Investigating “Orgasmic Meditation” Company For Sex Trafficking, Prostitution, & Violation Of Labor Laws

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 23:30

    Because here at ZeroHedge, we always like to ask the hard hitting questions, back in 2019 we wrote about whether or not a company in the business of “orgasmic meditation” was really just a prostitution sex cult. Apparently the FBI is now asking that same question.

    In our 2019 article, we focused on OneTaste – a controversial “business” that focused on a practice that the company calls “orgasmic meditation” (OM). The company called OM “a unique wellness practice that combines mindfulness with the power of the deeply human, deeply felt experience of Orgasm” on its website.

    Bloomberg revealed the practice to be “a trademarked procedure that typically involves a man using a gloved, lubricated fingertip to stroke a woman’s clitoris for 15 minutes”. 

    Well it turns out the FBI wasn’t as “stimulated” by the company’s business plan as many of the group’s members, and is investigating the company over allegations of sex trafficking, prostitution and violations of labor laws, according to the Daily Mail

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    OneTaste founder Nicole Daedone

    The company is not being allowed to offer classes while the FBI is conducting its investigation. 

    BBC journalist Nastaran Tavakoli-Far, who did an expose podcast on the issue called The Orgasm Cult, spoke to dozens of people associated with the company prior to the FBI investigation.

    She said: “For years there have been rumors that OneTaste is basically a sex cult, complete with a messianic leader who everyone adored and worshiped and who expected full allegiance.”

    One ex-employee told her she left the company with “full blown PTSD”. “I was very, very scarred and very afraid. I was, for about two years, suffering from nightmares, a deep sense of depression, and loneliness and low self-esteem,” the employee said. 

    Founded in San Francisco (of course), the company was focusing mostly on emotionally walled-off women, while allowing nerdy men to finger them (in exchange for a price) in “interactive classes”, where participants are encouraged to learn by doing. Or, as we noted in 2019, it appeared to us that the company was simply selling sex. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We pointed out last year that some of the company’s former members, including 16 of them profiled by Bloomberg, were eager to point out the dark side of OneTaste: expensive classes, preying on emotionally vulnerable people and being shunned by group members after leaving. 

    Former members spoke anonymously for fear of retribution from the company. Some called the company a “kind of prostitution ring” that would exploit trauma victims and others searching for healing. Some members believed that the company used flirtation and sex to lure in targets that were emotionally vulnerable. It is also accused of having employees be conditioned to work for free and “ordering staffers to have sex or OM with each other”, or customers. 

    The company’s classes ranged from $199 for an introduction to $4,000 for a retreat, to $16,000 for an “intensive”. The company also started charging $60,000 for an annual membership in 2014. According to the company, about 1,400 people have taken its coaching program, 6,500 have come to an intro class, and more than 14,000 have signed up for online courses and its app.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One former sales person said: “You fluff someone to get them energetically and emotionally hard. You were the dangled bait, like ‘You can have more of this if you buy this $10,000 course.’ ”

    At the time, the company denied this characterization, calling it “outrageous”. Chief Executive Officer Joanna Van Vleck said in 2019: “OneTaste is the Whole Foods of sexuality—the organic, good-for-you version. The overarching thing is, orgasm is part of wellness.”

    The company has said “any allegations of abusive practices are completely false”.

  • "Pandemic is Over" – Former Pfizer Chief Science Officer Says "Second Wave" Faked On False-Positive COVID Tests
    “Pandemic is Over” – Former Pfizer Chief Science Officer Says “Second Wave” Faked On False-Positive COVID Tests

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 23:00

    This video provides one of the most erudite and informative looks at Covid-19 and the consequences of lockdowns. As AIER notes, it was remarkable this week to watch as it appeared on YouTube and was forcibly taken down only 2 hours after posting.

    The copy below is hosted on LBRY, a blockchain video application. In a year of fantastic educational content, this is one of the best we’ve seen.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Consider the presenter’s bio:

    Dr. Michael Yeadon is an Allergy & Respiratory Therapeutic Area expert with 23 years in the pharmaceutical industry. He trained as a biochemist and pharmacologist, obtaining his PhD from the University of Surrey (UK) in 1988.

    Dr. Yeadon then worked at the Wellcome Research Labs with Salvador Moncada with a research focus on airway hyper-responsiveness and effects of pollutants including ozone and working in drug discovery of 5-LO, COX, PAF, NO and lung inflammation. With colleagues, he was the first to detect exhaled NO in animals and later to induce NOS in lung via allergic triggers.

    Joining Pfizer in 1995, he was responsible for the growth and portfolio delivery of the Allergy & Respiratory pipeline within the company. He was responsible for target selection and the progress into humans of new molecules, leading teams of up to 200 staff across all disciplines and won an Achievement Award for productivity in 2008.

    Under his leadership the research unit invented oral and inhaled NCEs which delivered multiple positive clinical proofs of concept in asthma, allergic rhinitis and COPD. He led productive collaborations such as with Rigel Pharmaceuticals (SYK inhibitors) and was involved in the licensing of Spiriva and acquisition of the Meridica (inhaler device) company.

    Dr. Yeadon has published over 40 original research articles and now consults and partners with a number of biotechnology companies. Before working with Apellis, Dr. Yeadon was VP and Chief Scientific Officer (Allergy & Respiratory Research) with Pfizer.

    What likely triggered the Silicon Valley censor-mongers is the fact that a former Chief Science Officer for the pharmaceutical giant Pfizer says “there is no science to suggest a second wave should happen.” The “Big Pharma” insider asserts that false positive results from inherently unreliable COVID tests are being used to manufacture a “second wave” based on “new cases.”

    As Ralph Lopez write at HubPages, Yeadon warns that half or even “almost all” of tests for COVID are false positives. Dr. Yeadon also argues that the threshold for herd immunity may be much lower than previously thought, and may have been reached in many countries already.

    In an interview last week (see below) Dr. Yeadon was asked:

    “we are basing a government policy, an economic policy, a civil liberties policy, in terms of limiting people to six people in a meeting…all based on, what may well be, completely fake data on this coronavirus?”

    Dr. Yeadon answered with a simple “yes.”

    Even more significantly, even if all positives were to be correct, Dr. Yeadon said that given the “shape” of all important indicators in a worldwide pandemic, such as hospitalizations, ICU utilization, and deaths, “the pandemic is fundamentally over.”

    Yeadon said in the interview:

    Were it not for the test data that you get from the TV all the time, you would rightly conclude that the pandemic was over, as nothing much has happened. Of course people go to the hospital, moving into the autumn flu season…but there is no science to suggest a second wave should happen.”

    In a paper published this month, which was co-authored by Yeadon and two of his colleagues, “How Likely is a Second Wave?”, the scientists write:

    “It has widely been observed that in all heavily infected countries in Europe and several of the US states likewise, that the shape of the daily deaths vs. time curves is similar to ours in the UK. Many of these curves are not just similar, but almost super imposable.

    In the data for UK, Sweden, the US, and the world, it can be seen that in all cases, deaths were on the rise in March through mid or late April, then began tapering off in a smooth slope which flattened around the end of June and continues to today. The case rates however, based on testing, rise and swing upwards and downwards wildly.

    Media messaging in the US is already ramping up expectations of a “second wave.”

    The survival rate of COVID-19 has been upgraded since May to 99.8% of infections. This comes close to ordinary flu, the survival rate of which is 99.9%. Although COVID can have serious after-effects, so can flu or any respiratory illness. The present survival rate is far higher than initial grim guesses in March and April, cited by Dr. Anthony Fauci, of 94%, or 20 to 30 times deadlier. The Infection Fatality Rate (IFR) value accepted by Yeadon et al in the paper is .26%. The survival rate of a disease is 100% minus the IFR.

    Dr. Yeadon pointed out that the “novel” COVID-19 contagion is novel only in the sense that it is a new type of coronavirus. But, he said, there are presently four strains which circulate freely throughout the population, most often linked to the common cold.

    In the scientific paper, Yeadon et al write:

    “There are at least four well characterised family members (229E, NL63, OC43 and HKU1) which are endemic and cause some of the common colds we experience, especially in winter. They all have striking sequence similarity to the new coronavirus.”

    The scientists argue that much of the population already has, if not antibodies to COVID, some level of “T-cell” immunity from exposure to other related coronaviruses, which have been circulating long before COVID-19.

    The scientists write:

    “A major component our immune systems is the group of white blood cells called T-cells whose job it is to memorise a short piece of whatever virus we were infected with so the right cell types can multiply rapidly and protect us if we get a related infection. Responses to COVID-19 have been shown in dozens of blood samples taken from donors before the new virus arrived.”

    Introducing the idea that some prior immunity to COVID-19 already existed, the authors of “How Likely is a Second Wave?” write:

    “It is now established that at least 30% of our population already had immunological recognition of this new virus, before it even arrived…COVID-19 is new, but coronaviruses are not.”

    They go on to say that, because of this prior resistance, only 15-25% of a population being infected may be sufficient to reach herd immunity:

    “…epidemiological studies show that, with the extent of prior immunity that we can now reasonably assume to be the case, only 15-25% of the population being infected is sufficient to bring the spread of the virus to a halt…”

    In the US, accepting a death toll of 200,000, and a survival rate of 99.8%, this would mean for every person who has died, there would be about 400 people who had been infected, and lived. This would translate to around 80 million Americans, or 27% of the population. This touches Yeadon’s and his colleagues’ threshold for herd immunity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, the former Pfizer executive and scientist singles out one former colleague for withering rebuke for his role in the pandemic, Professor Neil Ferguson. Ferguson taught at Imperial College while Yeadon was affiliated. Ferguson’s computer model provided the rationale for governments to launch draconian orders which turned free societies into virtual prisons overnight. Over what is now estimated by the CDC to be a 99.8% survival rate virus.

    Dr. Yeadon said in the interview that “no serious scientist gives any validity” to Ferguson’s model.

    Speaking with thinly-veiled contempt for Ferguson, Dr. Yeadon took special pains to point out to his interviewer:

    “It’s important that you know most scientists don’t accept that it [Ferguson’s model] was even faintly right…but the government is still wedded to the model.”

    Yeadon joins other scientists in castigating governments for following Ferguson’s model, the assumptions of which all worldwide lockdowns are based on. One of these scientists is Dr. Johan Giesecke, former chief scientist for the European Center for Disease Control and Prevention, who called Ferguson’s model “the most influential scientific paper” in memory, and also “one of the most wrong.”

    It was Ferguson’s model which held that “mitigation” measures were necessary, i.e. social distancing and business closures, in order to prevent, for example, over 2.2 million people dying from COVID in the US.

    Ferguson predicted that Sweden would pay a terrible price for no lockdown, with 40,000 COVID deaths by May 1, and 100,000 by June. Sweden’s death count is under 6,000. The Swedish government says this coincides to a mild flu season. Although initially higher, Sweden now has a lower death rate per-capita than the US, which it achieved without the terrific economic damage still ongoing in the US. Sweden never closed restaurants, bars, sports, most schools, or movie theaters. The government never ordered people to wear masks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Yeadon speaks bitterly of the lives lost as a result of lockdown policies, and of the “savable” countless lives which will be further lost, from important surgeries and other healthcare deferred, should lockdowns be reimposed.

    Watch the full discussion below:

    Yeadon’s warnings are confirmed by a new study from the Infectious Diseases Society of America., summarized succinctly in the following twitter thread from al gato malo (@boriquagato)

    Anyone still presuming that a Positive PCR test is showing a COVID case needs to read this very carefully:

    • even 25 cycles of amplification, 70% of “positives” are not “cases.” virus cannot be cultured. it’s dead.

    • by 35: 97% non-clinical.

    • the US runs at 40, 32X the amplification of 35.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    a lot of people still seem to not understand what this means, so let’s lay that out for a minute.

    PCR tests look for RNA. there is too little in your swab. so they amplify it using a primer based heating and annealing process.

    Each cycle of this process doubles the material

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    the US (and much of the world) is using a 40 Ct (cycle threshold). so, 40 doublings, 1 trillion X amplification.

    This is absurdly high.

    The way that we know this is by running this test, seeing the Ct to find the RNA, and then using the same sample to try to culture virus.

    If you cannot culture the virus, then the virus is “dead.” it’s inert. if it cannot replicate, it cannot infect you or others. it’s just traces of virus, remnants, fragments etc

    PCR is not testing for disease, it’s testing for a specific RNA pattern and this is the key pivot 

    When you crank it up to 25, 70% of the positive results are not really “positives” in any clinical sense.

    i hesitate to call it a “false positive” because it’s really not. it did find RNA.

    but that RNA is not clinically relevant.

    It cannot make you or anyone else sick

    so let’s call this a non-clinical positive (NCP).

    • if 70% of positives are NCP’s at 25, imagine what 40 looks like. 35 is 1000X as sensitive.

    • this study found only 3% live at 35

    • 40 Ct is 32X 35, 32,000X 25

    no one can culture live virus past about 34 and we have known this since march. yet no one has adjusted these tests.

    This is more very strong data refuting the idea that you can trust a PCR+ as a clinical indicator.

    That is NOT what it’s meant for. at all.

    Using them to do real time epidemiology is absurd.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The FDA would never do it, the drug companies doing vaccine trials would never do it… it’s because it’s nonsense.

    And this same test is used for “hospitalizations” and “death with covid” (itself a weirdly over inclusive metric)

    PCR testing is not the answer, it’s the problem.

    It’s not how to get control of an epidemic, it’s how to completely lose control of your data picture and wind up with gibberish and we have done this to ourselves before.

    A quick word what this data does and does not mean.

    Saying “a sample requiring 35 Ct to test + has a 3% real clinical positive rate” does not mean “97% of + tests run at 35 Ct are NCP’s”

    People seem to get confused on this, so lets explain:

    Most tests are just amplified and run. they don’t test every cycle as these academics do. that would make the test slow and expensive, so you just run 40 cycles then test.

    Obviously, a real clinical positive (RCP) that would have been + at 20 is still + at 40.

    but when you run the tests each cycle as the academics do, that test would already have dropped out.

    so saying that only 3% at 35 are RCP really means that 3% of those samples not PCR + at 34 were PCR and RCP + at 35.

    this lets us infer little about overall NCP/RCP rate.

    so we cannot say “at 25 Ct, we have a 70 NCP rate.” in fact, it’s hard to say much of anything. it depends entirely on what the source material coming in looks like.

    you cannot even compare like to like.

    This is what i mean by “the data is gibberish”

    Today at 40 Ct, 7% PCR positive rate could be 1% RCP prevalence when that same thing meant 6% RCP prev in april.

    If there is lots more trace virus around, more people who have recovered and have fragments left over, etc this test could be finding virus you killed 4 months ago.

    So if we consider RCP rate/PCR+ rate, we would expect that number to drop sharply late in an epidemic because there is more dead virus around for PCR to find, but we have no idea what that ratio is or how it changes.

    This spills over in to deaths, reported hospitalization etc.

    Testing is being made out to be like the high beams on a car, but when it’s snowing like hell at night, that is the LAST thing you want. It is not illuminating our way, it’s blinding us.

    A bad inaccurate map is much worse than no map at all, and this is a world class bad map…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’re basing policy that is affecting billions of humans on data that is uninterpretable gibberish.

    It’s a deranged technocrat’s wet dream, but for those of us along for the ride, it’s a nightmare.

    Testing is not the solution, it’s the problem.

    Any technocrat or scientist that does not know this by now is either unfit for their job or has decided that they just don’t care and prefer power to morality.

    This is, of curse, precisely the kind of person who winds up running a gov’t agency… oopsie.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The head of the NIH is not the best scientist, it’s the best politician.

    All this wild and reckless government policy has never been about the science.

    It’s politics and panic.

    You can read the whole paper here:

  • KFC Launches Autonomous 5G Food Trucks In China 
    KFC Launches Autonomous 5G Food Trucks In China 

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 22:30

    In China, Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) has launched a new food truck program, using 5G autonomous vehicles that allow hungry customers to purchase finger-licking good chicken without human interaction. 

    Twitter handle “shanghaineko” snapped a couple of pictures of the unmanned vehicles with KFC chicken for sale outside a metro station in the city of Shanghai. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t shanghaineko

    In another tweet, shanghaineko shows there is more than one autonomous KFC food truck. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Malaysian media outlet SoyaCincau, customers can “place an order on the screen, and it accepts payment via QR-code. After payment is made, the door will open for you to collect your order.”

    SoyaCincau states the food trucks are manufactured by Neolix, a self-driving logistics startup based in Beijing.

    The startup offers autonomous delivery vehicles that are level 4 as defined by the Society of Automotive Engineers. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Neolix’s autonomous delivery vehicles have a range of up to 62 miles on a single battery charge. 

    And it’s not autonomous delivery that is revolutionizing the food industry via the adaption of automation and artificial intelligence, White Castle has recently announced it will begin automating its US kitchens. 

    The virus pandemic is being used as an excuse to automate millions of jobs worldwide. 

  • Shrem: Bretton Woods 2.0 Is Knocking At The Door, And It's Not Here To Help
    Shrem: Bretton Woods 2.0 Is Knocking At The Door, And It’s Not Here To Help

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Charlie Shrem via CoinTelegraph.com,

    A second Bretton Woods era will be even more centralized and even further from a true democracy…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    Barely 100 years ago at the start of the 20th century, people were able to exchange dollars for gold at their local bank. While gold was too hard to trade between people, banking institutions held gold and gave people cash for it. This was during what was known as the gold standard. Each sovereign currency’s value was determined relative to a fixed amount of gold. However, in the decades ahead, that standard quickly changed.

    Toward the end of World War II, dozens of powerful people organized a meeting to discuss a new monetary agreement designed to minimize the economic damage done by the war. This meeting was named after the location where it took place: Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, in the United States.

    It was a long-term plan with several parts that spanned over decades. And the Bretton Woods delegates decided that multiple fiat currencies would now be backed by the U.S. dollar as opposed to gold itself. At first, the dollar proved to be stable enough to support the Bretton Woods agreement in 1944 — until it wasn’t in the decades ahead. During the Vietnam War, President Richard Nixon called for more money. There wasn’t any more money in circulation. So, he started printing.

    In 1971, President Nixon ended the dollar’s convertibility to gold, which effectively ended the Bretton Woods agreement after nearly 30 years.

    The removal of the gold standard turned each country’s fiat currency into a floating exchange rate that was no longer fixed. Money was not measured by the dollar anymore; now, each currency was measured in relation to every other currency, with prices that constantly changed, creating foreign exchange market volatility.

    Bitcoin as an opposition

    Today, one asset that fiat currencies are measured against is Bitcoin (BTC). As I mentioned in 2019, I think Bitcoin is the best investment when it comes to currencies in the sense of sound money.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In certain countries — such as Brazil, Argentina and Venezuela, to name a few — Bitcoin’s price is currently at an all-time high compared with their national fiat. Relatively speaking, that’d be equivalent to Bitcoin price already being around $20,000.

    The problem is that Bitcoin is not ready to be a monetary system in and of itself. Most people who have Bitcoin are just holding it — they’re not selling it or using it as currency due to its potential to rapidly appreciate, despite the downside risks.

    Bretton Woods 2.0

    Meanwhile, the International Monetary Fund is now calling for a second Bretton Woods era to be announced in 2020. This would establish the Special Drawing Right, or SDR, as the new reserve currency as opposed to the U.S. dollar. The SDR serves as the most stable investment option for the IMF. Its value consists of the top five global fiat currencies as a protection against volatile movements in forex markets. The problem with the SDR approach is that it could make the economic situation even worse than it is today.

    History has shown that when people have an inflated amount of power with regard to money, they will use it. Just look at President Nixon during the Vietnam War and the original Bretton Woods agreement in the mid-20th century. Even worse is that now, nearly all central banks are printing more money, which in turn leads to inflation as fiat currencies lose their purchasing power.

    We can’t have a single powerful entity with the power to print itself out of temporary trouble, especially while it would be putting us in future debt that would be impossible to manage. This is the opposite of democracy, where only a few people control big monetary decisions that affect everyone. Cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin aim to solve this dilemma, thanks to their limited supply, among other favorable qualities inherent in blockchain technology.

    Blockchain tech has a solution

    Blockchain has raised our standards to expect decentralization in the institutions that are meant to serve us. True decentralization is reached when the hierarchy is broken. Everything becomes transparent, and incentives are offered to push the system forward in the right direction.

    Sogur, for example, is a startup tackling the ambitious challenge of creating a new monetary system based on its cryptocurrency SGR that models the SDR while leveraging blockchain and an intelligent economic design advised by world-renowned economists.

    I like the idea of currency baskets that serve as a much more reliable, stable means of exchange. I don’t like that the IMF gets endless decision-making power over our global monetary system. Blockchain-based solutions are different — they have a foundation that’s governed by an assembly and, for example, can give SGR holders veto power over every decision at any given time.

    Blockchain technology can combine the elements of decentralized governance into a classical corporate structure, in order to comply with international laws and Anti-Money Laundering requirements, while using a smart-contract-based bonding curve to tame inflation and volatility, which remain two of the biggest problems with traditional fiat currencies that can be solved.

  • Former Harvard Fencing Coach Accused Of Taking $1.5 Million To Secure Admission For Students
    Former Harvard Fencing Coach Accused Of Taking $1.5 Million To Secure Admission For Students

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 21:30

    In the latest chapter of high profile college admission scandals across the U.S., former Harvard fencing coach Peter Brand was arrested last week for taking more than $1.5 million from Maryland-based businessman Jie “Jack” Zhao to secure spots at the school for Zhao’s two sons. 

    Harvard began investigating the issue in May 2019 and, shortly thereafter, Brand was dismissed from his job, according to the Wall Street Journal

    Andrew E. Lelling, U.S. attorney for the District of Massachusetts, said: “This case is part of our longstanding effort to expose and deter corruption in college admissions. Millions of teenagers strive for college admission every year. We will do our part to make that playing field as level as we possibly can.”

    The complaint alleges that Brand recruited Zhao’s sons in exchange for money and allegedly said in 2012 that the boys “don’t have to be great fencers.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 2013, Zhao donated $1 million to a fencing charity run by a co-conspirator of Brand. Zhao’s son was admitted into Harvard, as a fencing recruit, in December. He enrolled the following fall. The charity then sent $100,000 to the Peter Brand foundation, a second charity set up by Brand and his spouse.

    Zhao also allegedly “paid for Mr. Brand’s car, covered college tuition payments for the coach’s son, paid the mortgage on his house in Needham, Mass., and later bought the house for more than its market value.”

    Both Zhao and Brand deny the allegations. 

    William D. Weinreb, a partner at Quinn Emanuel Urquhart & Sullivan LLP said: “Jack Zhao’s children were academic stars in high school and internationally competitive fencers who obtained admission to Harvard on their own merit. Both of them fenced for Harvard at the Division One level throughout their college careers.”

    Douglas Brooks, partner at Libby Hoopes Brooks PC, said: “The students were academic and fencing stars. Coach Brand did nothing wrong in connection with their admission to Harvard. He looks forward to the truth coming out in court.”

    The Harvard case is unrelated to the college admissions scandal called “Operation Varsity Blues” that has been playing out over the last 24 months in the U.S. and was masterminded by William “Rick” Singer. 

  • John Williams Warns Hyperinflationary Great Depression Coming
    John Williams Warns Hyperinflationary Great Depression Coming

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 21:00

    Via Greg Hunter’s USAWatchdog.com,

    Economist John Williams says don’t think the happy news on CV19 vaccines is going to get the economy back to normal anytime soon. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Williams explains, “Put all the political turmoil aside for the moment.  The markets respond that this (CV19 vaccines) is going to turn the economy.  My point is it is not going to turn the economy…”

    “…at least not soon because of what has happened to the economy and the severe structural damage.  We have had a lot of companies go out of business, in particular, small companies.  A lot of people have suffered, and we are going to have more of that going ahead.”

    Because they has been so much damage done to the economy, Williams says there will have to be stimulus no matter who eventually makes it into the White House.  Williams contends,

    “Let’s say Trump gets re-elected.  He’s not going to have any choice but to increase stimulus to try to help the economy and help people.  If Biden takes over, he’s going to have to do the same.  He is already promising massive stimulus.  Where it gets really scary is if the Democrats can take control of the House, the Senate as well as the White House… The stimulus there is going to be unbelievable

    The more radical Democrats will just print the money you need and spend whatever you need to spend it on, and don’t worry about it… Whoever gets into power, there is going to be more deficit spending.  It’s just a matter of how radical it will be… There is no way we are escaping massive stimulus for at least the next year and into 2022.”

    Williams expects to see some very large inflation because of all the stimulus coming and predicts,

    The more left we go, the more rapid will be the demise of the dollar.  Eventually, it will be a hyperinflation in the United States. 

    What I am looking at here is this evolving into a hyperinflationary Great Depression. 

    To save yourself, you have to preserve your wealth, your dollar assets.  To do that, you have to convert your dollars into physical gold and silver, precious metals and just hold them.  They will retain value over time as opposed to paper dollars that will effectively become worthless.  You’ll be getting a lot of money from the government, and they will keep giving you more and more and more, but that’s going to be an environment of rising and rising inflation.  It’s not necessarily going to buy you more…

    Hyperinflation will bring political disruption. . . . Hyperinflation is a form of default.  Gold is telling us hyperinflation is straight ahead of us.

    Williams says,

    “When the Fed finally gets the more than 2% inflation it wants, the real inflation will be 12% to 15%. . . .  Hyperinflations happen quickly.”

    Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with John Williams, founder of ShadowStats.com.

    To Donate to USAWatchdog.com Click Here

  • The Collapse In Luxury Sales This Year "Wiped-Out More Than Six Years Of Growth"
    The Collapse In Luxury Sales This Year “Wiped-Out More Than Six Years Of Growth”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 20:30

    Luxury retail sales for 2020 are forecasted to crash globally as a result of the pandemic, with estimates that luxury apparel, jewelry and beauty products could fall by 23% for the year.

    The plunge “wipes out more than six years of growth,” according to AP. The silver lining, if there is one, is that the crash is actually lower than the 35% plunge that was predicted at the beginning of the pandemic. That has mostly been due to a recovery in China, which generates about 33% of all luxury goods sales.

    The sector is expected to generate $256 billion in sales for 2020, which is lower than 2014 levels and is down nearly $80 billion from 2019. It’s the first decrease in the sector, which has been buoyed just like all senselessly expensive assets have by Central Bank policies globally, since 2009. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A further bounce back is uncertain, especially as global governments brace for a second set of shutdowns heading into the winter. 

    Bain partner Claudia D’Arpizio, who helped write the report on the sector, said: “I see a lot of uncertainty for next year, with less uncertainty for the longer term.”

    Additionally, forecasts for 2021 have been unclear. While they fall in a growth range of 10% to 19%, it’s a small respite after profits have dropped an estimated 60% this year. They are only expected to recover half of that in 2021.

    In China, Bain sees a “full global recovery” heading from 2022 into 2023. They expect Chinese consumers will make up almost half of all sales by 2025. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Apparel sales plunged 30% and footwear sales fell 12% due to the pandemic and its ensuing lockdowns. Jewelry sales fell 15%, even after being “cushioned” by a recovery in Asia. 

    D’Arpizio warned some brands could wind up “running out of cash” and being forced to restructure. She concluded: “The pandemic has eliminated the excuses for brands that didn’t understand the trends, to give a sense of urgency to the right investments. The more the situation is sustained, the more we risk the crisis will be permanent.”

    We wonder: are politicians advocating for more draconian lockdowns capable of understanding this?

  • Orwell's 1984 Is Prophetic: How Leftists Are Already Trying To Erase President Trump & Change History
    Orwell’s 1984 Is Prophetic: How Leftists Are Already Trying To Erase President Trump & Change History

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Sara Carter,

    I’m literally sickened by the actions of some in the main stream media, leftists and their minions in the education system that are seeking to rewrite history and ostracize anyone that supported President Donald Trump. Regardless of where anyone stands politically, everyone should oppose these un-American tactics and disinformation war against the Commander-in- Chief.

    The media, however, along with the help of powerful tech giants, are doing everything in their power to control the narrative of the Trump administration and by doing so change the history of our nation.

    Sharyl Attkinson’s book Slanted: How the media taught us to love censorship and hate journalism, lays it out perfectly. She, like others who are concerned about censorship and the media’s devolving role in our Republic, compared the situation to George Orwell’s dystopian novel 1984. She describes the protagonist in Orwell’s book, Winston Smith, whose job is to edit history for the Ministry of Truth. Of course, Orwell naturally was describing a society that was rewriting history with lies and a world where Big Brother was watching everyone.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is essentially happening to our country now, but not by the dystopian government described by Orwell but by a complex network of ideologists that are now in control of some of the most essential industries to America’s freedom.

    Look at this headline from Yahoo. It is the first headline from the publication’s Friday story revealing Donald Trump Jr’s diagnosis with COVID-19: Former reality TV show host’s son tests positive for COVID-19, by Patrick Gomez.

    What an insult to the American people and to President Trump. Yes, he is still the president of the United States. What was the point of this headline and others like this but to slowly rewrite history and to erase this President and the administration’s achievements.

    Benny Johnson is right “the media is already trying to erase the fact that he is President.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This didn’t just start after the 2020 election.

    This has been happening since Trump became the Republican candidate nominee in 2016.

    Think about the last four years of Trump’s presidency. Think about the onslaught of lies against him in the media. In fact, the outrageous lies that were perpetrated against Trump, his campaign and the White House before, during and after his 2016 election. The Russia Hoax was truly a conspiracy against the President by former senior Obama Administration officials who didn’t want him in office. They weaponized both federal law enforcement and the intelligence community against him and then used the media to spread the lies that were later proven to be false by investigations conducted by those of us who believed in seeking the truth.

    This is the truth about the 2020 election: 73 million Americans voted for Trump, the most of any Republican President in history. Moreover, if you, like me, believe that there may be a significant chance that this election was plagued with enough fraudulent behavior that only a thorough investigation could ever uncover, then he may have garnered the most votes of any American President.

    If Americans don’t start demanding better we will only have ourselves to blame for what will come in our future.

    It’s not going to end with President Trump. Others will be the target of these actions in what is truly becoming a new dystopian world. Republicans and Democrats alike that don’t fit the mold of this new shadow government will meet a similar fate.

    The actions of these leftists Marxist ideologues embedded in our nation’s schools, combined with left leaning social media platforms and their virulent spread of these unAmerican ideas is what we have been witnessing.

    I certainly hope we wake up, expose it and stop the infection before it kills our liberty and shreds our Constitution.

  • Bacon (Oh, And Toilet Paper) Shortages Erupt As Americans 'Panic Hoard' Ahead Of COVID Winter
    Bacon (Oh, And Toilet Paper) Shortages Erupt As Americans ‘Panic Hoard’ Ahead Of COVID Winter

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 19:30

    America is transforming into a nation of preppers as COVID winter sets in. We outlined weeks ago (see: here & here), round two of panic hoarding was well underway if that was for toilet paper, non-perishable food, and or ammunition.  

    Bloomberg is only now reporting, “households across the US are once again filling grocery carts brimful in the second round of panic buying as the virus surges and states clamp down on economic activity. Defensive purchasing is affecting everything from paper towels to bacon. Even the world’s biggest retailer is reporting shortages of high-demand items, including cleaning supplies, breakfast foods — and the most important commodity in any bathroom.” 

    Several executives from major corporations are warning about supply chain stress as consumers gobble up high-demand items as the second virus wave spirals out of control

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    h/t Reuters 

    “It really does have everything to do with what’s happening with Covid cases in any particular community,” Walmart’s chief executive officer, Doug McMillon, said on an earnings call last week. 

    “We’re going to be able to respond in this instance better than we did in the first half of the year, although we’re still — as a total supply chain — stressed in some places,” McMillon said. 

    According to Centricity Inc., a firm that tracks online search activity, demand for non-perishable items has skyrocketed 60-70% in the last several weeks. 

    Mike Brackett, Centricity’s chief executive officer, said the recent surge in panic hoarding trends is on top of the “meteoric” year-over-year increases for pantry staples. 

    Jim Dudlicek, a spokesman for the National Grocers Association, said consumers would start to see purchase limits again as the COVID winter has led to another surge in high-demand items at supermarkets nationwide. 

    Kraft Heinz Co. chief executive officer Miguel Patricio said investing in product lines comes as high-demand items fly off the shelves. 

     “New machinery, or even bringing back to lifelines that we considered in the past as obsolete,” Patricio said, adding that the company is “increasing capacity of products like Philadelphia Cream Cheese or macaroni and cheese.” 

    Mark Schiller, chief executive officer of Hain Celestial Group Inc., said his company has been ready for the next round of buying panic – during the pandemic, he said his Terra vegetable chips and plant-based Dream milk were hot items among consumers. 

    “We are far better prepared,” Schiller said. “We have about 50 million more dollars of inventory on hand, of all the things that have the longest supply chain and the least amount of backups.”

    And now for the toilet paper shortage, we alerted readers as supermarkets were placing limits on rolls, outlining weeks ago how internet searches for “where can I buy toilet paper online” and “toilet paper shortage” were beginning to rise. 

    Kimberly-Clark Corp., Scott and Cottonelle toilet paper makers, told Bloomberg that production has been “accelerated” since March. 

    Procter & Gamble Co. spokeswoman Jennifer Corso said the maker of Charmin continues “to work around the clock to produce the product as quickly as possible.”

    “Paper towel consumption is related to increased cleaning situations, as consumers are cleaning more frequently,” Corso said. “Toilet paper consumption is tied to the increased amount of time consumers are spending at home. For both, people are consuming more and stocking their pantries at a higher level than before the pandemic.”

    We also pointed out the toilet paper shortage, and resulting purchase limits at supermarkets have led to the increased search activity of “best bidet.”

    Panic hoarding 2.0 comes as searches across the country for “panic attacks” and “night terror” have soared, coinciding with the rise of virus cases across the US. 

    A nation of panic hoarders is indicative of an uncertain future as cases, hospitalizations, and deaths are climbing into the holiday season as the economy risks a double-dip recession. Somehow the stock market, at all-time highs, misses the fact the nation is still in an economic and health crisis. 

  • Guitar Center, Largest US Retailer Of Music Instruments, Files For Bankruptcy
    Guitar Center, Largest US Retailer Of Music Instruments, Files For Bankruptcy

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 19:25

    Back in May, Guitar Center – the largest U.S. retailer of music instruments and equipment – dodged bankruptcy after missing interest payments on a group of bonds. At the time, the retailer was able to work out a deal with bondholders that allowed it to preserve its cash while it tried to survive the disruption from the COVID-19 pandemic. But analysts expected more restructuring down the road, and in recent weeks media reports had pointed to an inevitable bankruptcy filing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Saturday, the clock for Guitar Center, which began in 1959 as a store selling home organs in Hollywood, finally ran out when the company filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection as music lovers moved their shopping online during the coronavirus pandemic.

    As part of a pre-packaged bankruptcy filing the retailer negotiated to have a total of $375 million in debtor-in-possession financing from its existing lenders and announced its intention to raise $335 million in new senior secured notes, the company said in a statement.

    The Plan is intended to allow Guitar Center and its related brands (including Music & Arts, Musician’s Friend, Woodwind Brasswind and AVDG) to continue to operate in the normal course while the transaction is implemented. As a result of the Plan, Guitar Center will continue to meet its financial obligations to vendors, suppliers, and employees, and intends to make payments in full to these parties without interruption in the ordinary course of business.

    Ron Japinga, CEO of Guitar Center, said: “This is an important and positive step in our process to significantly reduce our debt and enhance our ability to reinvest in our business to support long-term growth. Throughout this process, we will continue to serve our customers and deliver on our mission of putting more music in the world. Given the strong level of support from our lenders and creditors, we expect to complete the process before the end of this year.”

    The filing followed an agreement with key stakeholders reached earlier this month according to which the company would see its debt cut by nearly $800 million alongside new equity investments of up to $165 million from its equity sponsor, a fund managed by the Private Equity Group of Ares Management Corporation, and new equity investors, which include a fund managed by The Carlyle Group and funds managed by Brigade Capital Management.

    In its filing in the US Bankruptcy Court of the Eastern District of Virginia, the company said it has between $1 billion and $10 billion of both assets and liabilities. The company, which owns nearly 300 stores across the country, also said business operations will continue without any interruption.

    Milbank LLP served as legal counsel, BRG served as restructuring advisor, and Houlihan Lokey was financial advisor to the company.

  • LA County Orders Bars, Restaurants To Close As California Sees Record COVID Cases: Live Updates
    LA County Orders Bars, Restaurants To Close As California Sees Record COVID Cases: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 19:05

    Summary:

    • LA County orders bars, restaurants to close
    • UK to suspend quarantine for holidays
    • Dr. Fauci says most Americans need to be vaccinated
    • Sen Loeffler receives conflicting test results
    • NY reports another 5,391 cases
    • More than 1 million ppl traveled through US airports Friday
    • US cases top 12 million
    • WH vaccine czar targets Dec. 11 for first shots
    • OWS head lays out vaccination timeline
    • US cases near records
    • Portugal imposes travel freeze
    • France outbreak slows
    • Greece sees back-to-back days of record deaths

    * * *

    Update (1900ET): One day after California reported the most new cases in a 24 hour period of any state in the union, LA County has just announced that, starting Wednesday at 2200PT, restaurants, bars, breweries and wineries and other establishments won’t be allowed to serve food indoors or outdoors at their establishments. Starting Wednesday, restaurants will only be allowed to offer takeout, delivery and drive-thru. 

    These restrictions come on top of the curfew and other restrictions imposed by Gov Newsom last week. Wineries and breweries can also continue their retail operations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Wineries and breweries may continue their retail operations adhering to current protocols. In person dining will not be allowed, at minimum, for the next 3 weeks,” the county’s Department of Public Health said in a news release.

    Although restaurants in NYC can still have a small number of customers in their dining rooms, LA County has become the biggest county in the country to order restaurants and bars to close completely with no on-site dining allowed. Officials warned earlier in the week that mroe restrictions would be enacted if the county’s five-day average of new cases moved above 4,000. Sunday’s five-day average was 4,097 cases.

    The market reaction so far has been muted, but with NYC also on the verge of imposing similar restrictions after closing schools, investors likely won’t be able to ignore it forever.

    * * *

    Update (1645ET): After facing considerable public pressure, British Prime Minister Boris Johnson and the leaders of the UK’s constituent nations have decided to lift quarantine restrictions so families can travel to “red list” countries at Christmas. Restrictions will be slashed if holidaymakers test negative five days after returning, according to the Telegraph.

    Additionally, the leaders of all four constituent nations have agreed to allow members of up to 4 households to mix for five days corresponding with the holidays between Christmas Eve and New Years.

    The plan must be approved by Parliament; if so, Britons will be able to travel and visit relatives anywhere else in the country.

    * * *

    Update (1600ET): Following comments from OWS head on CNN’s “State of the Union” earlier, Dr. Fauci said Sunday that he wouldn’t hesitate to take an FDA-approved vaccine, and that herd immunity won’t be possible unless enough people take the vaccine.

    “They’ll be able to say okay, on the basis of our determination and our advisory committee, this is the prioritization of people who will get it,” he said, adding that if things go well, “and I think that they will,” and the vaccines get the EUA which is expected, “we will have maybe 20 million people will be able to get vaccinated by the middle to the end of December and then as we get into January, February, even more,” though Dr. Fauci said he didn’t think life would go “back to normal” by May, pushing back against the optimism of Slaoui.

    Dr. Fauci then said the government wants to be “very transparent” about the vaccine approval process to give people confidence because “we need to get as many people as possible vaccinated.”

    “If you have a highly efficacious vaccine, and only a relatively small 40, 50% of the people get vaccinated, you’re not going to get the herd immunity you need,” Fauci said. “What we do need is we need to get as many people as possible vaccinated.”

    Sen. Kelly Loeffler of Georgia said Sunday that she would be quarantining after receiving conflicting COVID test results. After initially testing negative, the Senator’s office said her re-test was negative. She is one of two senators from Georgia who are running for re-election in a special election in January.

    Her situation is reminiscent of a similar conflict reported by Tesla CEO Elon Musk.

    * * *

    Update (1420ET): NY reported another 5k+ new cases on Sunday, along with another 30 deaths.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In NYC, the 7-day positivity rate remained above the 3% threshold.

    * * *

    As we reported last night, COVID-19 cases in the US surpassed 12 million, adding a million new cases in under a week, the fastest rate yet. Meanwhile, the pace of deaths has accelerated globally; on Friday, the world reported more than 11k new deaths in a single day, the highest daily number yet. In the US and Europe, deaths are finally creeping higher alongside hospitalizations as rising case numbers finally start to translate to more serious cases as well. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    California set a new record yesterday by reporting more than 15k cases in a single day, the highest daily tally for any state in the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    With US cases at record highs, the CDC on Sunday elevated its travel warnings about traveling on cruise ships and venturing across state lines to see relatives. The agency raised its cruise ship travel warning level to ‘Level 4’ from ‘Level 3’, while Reuters reported that millions of Americans were set to flout the agency’s warnings about travel. More than 1 million people traveled through American airports on Friday, according to data from the Transportation Security Administration, fueling fears of even greater spread of the virus. It was the second-heaviest domestic air traffic day since the start of the pandemic.

    “This is the 2nd time since the pandemic passenger volume has surpassed 1 million,” TSA spokeswoman Lisa Farbstein wrote on Twitter on Saturday.

    On Sunday morning, White House vaccine czar Dr. Moncef Slaoui told CNN’s Jake Tapper that a coronavirus vaccine could be available by Dec. 11. The doctor also talked up the potential of the vaccine, saying data showing the vaccine to be “95% effective” surpassed expectations, and offers almost a “full insurance policy” against the virus.

    Slaoui also laid out another expected milestone: a 70% immunization rate across the US which “would allow for true herd immunity to take place,” some time around May.

    In Europe, Portugal will freeze movement between towns between Nov. 28-Dec. 1 and Dec. 5-8, two periods that include weekends and national holidays on each following Tuesday. The number of daily new infections continues to be “worrying,” even if the pace of growth has decelerated, Prime Minister Antonio Costa said.

    Here’s some more COVID-19 news from Sunday morning and overnight:

    France’s virus cases rose by 17,881 to 2.13 million on Saturday, with the pace of new infections continuing the slowdown of the past two weeks. The seven-day average of new cases fell to 24,636 cases, the lowest in a month and less than half the pace two weeks ago (Source: Bloomberg).

    New Jersey reported a record 4,679 new coronavirus cases, bringing its total to more than 300,000 since the start of the outbreak in March. The state has reported more than 60,000 cases this month amid a resurgence. Hospitalizations have more than doubled since Nov. 1, to 2,552 as of Nov. 20. New Jersey has 486 patients in intensive care, up from 212 on Nov. 1 (Source: Bloomberg).

    Greece reported 108 more deaths, a second straight record increase, and intensive-care units in Greek hospitals are 82% occupied. Plans to begin a gradual lifting of nation-wide lockdown restrictions on Dec. 1 are no longer realistic, government spokesman Stelios Petsas said Friday (Source: Bloomberg).

  • Top Biden Advisors Flournoy & Blinken Promise More Secretive 'Permanent War' Policy
    Top Biden Advisors Flournoy & Blinken Promise More Secretive ‘Permanent War’ Policy

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by Dan Cohen via TheGrayZone.com,

    Throughout his campaign, Joe Biden railed against Donald Trump’s ‘America First’ foreign policy, claiming it weakened the United States and left the world in disarray. “Donald Trump’s brand of America First has too often led to America alone,” Biden proclaimed.

    He pledged to reverse this decline and recover the damage Trump did to America’s reputation. While Donald Trump called for making America Great Again, Biden seeks to Make the American Empire Great Again.

    Joe Biden: “Tonight, the whole world is watching America. And I believe at our best, America is a beacon for the globe. We will lead not only by the example of our power, but by the power of our example.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Among the president-elect’s pledges is to end the so-called forever wars – the decades-long imperial projects in Afghanistan and Iraq that began under the Bush administration.

    “It’s long past time we end the forever wars which have cost us untold blood and treasure,” Biden has said.

    Yet Biden – a fervent supporter of those wars – will delegate that duty to the most neoconservative elements of the Democratic Party and ideologues of permanent war

    Michele Flournoy and Tony Blinken sit atop Biden’s thousands-strong foreign policy brain trust and have played central roles in every U.S. war dating back to the Bill Clinton administration. 

    During the Trump era, they’ve cashed in through WestExec Advisors – a corporate consulting firm that has become home for Obama administration officials awaiting a return to government.

    Flournoy is Biden’s leading pick for Secretary of Defense and Blinken is expected to be the president’s National Security Advisor.

    Biden’s foxes guard the henhouse

    Since the 1990s, Flournoy and Blinken have steadily risen through the ranks of the military-industrial complex, shuffling back and forth between the Pentagon and hawkish think-tanks funded by the U.S. government, weapons companies, and oil giants.

    Under Bill Clinton, Flournoy was the principal author of the 1996 Quadrinellial Defense Review, the document that outlined the U.S. military’s doctrine of permanent war – what it called “full spectrum dominance.”

    Flournoy called for “unilateral use of military power” to ensure “uninhibited access to key markets, energy supplies, and strategic resources.”

    This video report was originally published at Behind The Headlines. Support the independent journalism initiative here.

    As Bush administration officials lied to the world about Saddam Hussein’s supposed WMD’s, Flournoy remarked that “In some cases, preemptive strikes against an adversary’s [weapons of mass destruction] capabilities may be the best or only option we have to avert a catastrophic attack against the United States.”

    Tony Blinken was a top advisor to then-Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chair Joe Biden, who played a key role in shoring up support among the Democrat-controlled Senate for Bush’s illegal invasion of Iraq.

    During the run-up to the invasion of Iraq, Biden declared, “In my judgment, President Bush is right to be concerned about Saddam Hussein’s relentless pursuit of weapons of mass destruction.”

    As Iraq was plunged into chaos and bloodshed, Flournoy was among the authors of a paper titled “Progressive Internationalism” that called for a “smarter and better” style of permanent war. The paper chastised the anti-war left and stated that  “Democrats will maintain the world’s most capable and technologically advanced military, and we will not flinch from using it to defend our interests anywhere in the world.”

    With Bush winning a second term, Flournoy advocated for more troop deployments from the sidelines.

    In 2005, Flournoy signed onto a letter from the neoconservative think tank Project for a New American Century, asking Congress to “increase substantially the size of the active duty Army and Marine Corps (by) at least 25,000 troops each year over the next several years.”  

    In 2007, she leveraged her Pentagon experience and contacts to found what would become one of the premier Washington think tanks advocating endless war across the globe: the Center for a New American Security (CNAS). CNAS is funded by the U.S. government, arms manufacturers, oil giants, Silicon Valley tech giants, billionaire-funded foundations, and big banks.

    Flournoy joined the Obama administration and was appointed as under secretary of defense for policy, the position considered the “brains” of the Pentagon. She was keenly aware that the public was wary of more quagmires. In the 2010 Quadrennial Defense Review, she crafted a new concept of warfare that would expand the permanent war state while giving the appearance of a drawdown.

    Flournoy wrote that “unmanned systems hold great promise” – a reference to the CIA’s drone assassination program. This was the Obama-era military doctrine of hybrid war. It called for the U.S. to be able to simultaneously wage war on numerous fronts through secret warfare, clandestine weapons transfers to proxies, drone strikes, and cyber-attacks – all buttressed with propaganda campaigns targeting the American public through the internet and corporate news media. 

    Architects of America’s Hybrid wars

    Flournoy continued to champion the endless wars that began in the Bush-era and was a key architect of Obama’s disastrous troop surge in Afghanistan. As U.S. soldiers returned in body bags and insurgent attacks and suicide bombings increased some 65% from 2009 and 2010, she deceived the Senate Armed Services Committee, claiming that the U.S. was beginning to turn the tide against the Taliban: “We are beginning to regain the initiative and the insurgency is beginning to lose momentum.”

    Even with her lie that the U.S. and Afghan government were starting to beat the Taliban back, Flournoy assured the senate that the U.S. would have to remain in Afghanistan long into the future: “We are not leaving any time soon even though the nature and the complexion of the commitment may change over time.”

    Ten years later – as the Afghan death toll passed 150,000 – Flournoy continued to argue against a U.S. withdrawal: “I would certainly not advocate a US or NATO departure short of a political settlement being in place.”

    That’s the person Joe Biden has tasked with ending the forever war in Afghanistan. But in Biden’s own words, he’ll “bring the vast majority of our troops home from Afghanistan” implying some number of American troops will remain, and the forever war will be just that. Michele Flournoy explained that even if a political settlement were reached, the U.S. would maintain a presence.

    Michele Flournoy: “If we are fortunate enough to see a political settlement reached, it doesn’t mean that the US role or the international community is over. Afghanistan without outside investment is not a society that is going to survive and thrive. In no case are we going to be able to wash our hands of Afghanistan and walk away nor should we want to. This is something where we’re going to have to continue to be engaged, just the form of engagement may change.”

    In 2011, the Obama-era doctrine of smart and sophisticated warfare was unveiled in the NATO regime-change war on Libya. 

    Moammar Gaddafi – the former adversary who sought warm relations with the U.S. and had given up his nuclear weapons program  – was deposed and sodomized with a bayonet.

    Flournoy, Hillary Clinton’s State Department, and corporate media were in lockstep as they waged an elaborate propaganda campaign to deceive the U.S. public that Gadaffi’s soldiers were on a Viagra-fueled rape and murder spree that demanded a U.S. intervention.

    Fox News: “Susan Rice reportedly told a security council meeting that Libyan troops are being given viagra and are engaging in sexual violence.”

    MSNBC jumped on the propaganda bandwagon, claiming: “New reports emerge that the LIbyan dictator gave soldiers viagra-type pills to rape women who are opposed to the government.”

    So did CNN.

    As the Libyan ambassador to the US alleged “raping, killing, mass graves,” ICC Chief Prosecutor Manuel Ocampo claimed: “It’s like a machete. Viagra is a tool of massive rapes.”

    All of this was based on a report from Al Jazeera – the media outlet owned by the Qatari monarchy that was arming extremist militias in Libya to overthrow the government.

    Yet an investigation by the United Nations called the rape claims “hysteria.” Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch found no credible evidence of even a single rape.

    Even after Libya was descended into strife and the deception of Gadaffi’s forces committing rape was debunked, Michele Flournoy stood by her support for the war: “I supported the intervention in Libya on humanitarian grounds. I think we were right to do it.”

    Tony Blinken, then Obama’s deputy national security advisor, also pushed for regime change in Libya. He became Obama’s point man on Syria, pushed to arm the so-called “moderate rebels” that fought alongside al-Qaeda and ISIS, and designed the red line strategy to trigger a full-on U.S. intervention. Syria, he told the public, wasn’t anything like the other wars the U.S. had waging for more than a decade.

    Tony Blinken: “We are doing this in a very different way than in the past. We’re not sending in hundreds of thousands of American troops. We’re not spending trillions of American dollars. We’re being smart about this. This is a sustainable way to get at the terrorists and it’s also a more effective way.”

    Blinken added: “This is not open-ended, this is not boots on the ground, this is not Iraq, it’s not Afghanistan, it’s not even Libya. The more people understand that, the more they’ll understand the need for us to take this limited but effective action.”

    Despite Blinken’s promises that it would be a short affair, the war on Syria is now in its ninth year. An estimated half a million people have been killed as a result and the country is facing famine.

    Largely thanks to the policy of using “wheat to apply pressure” – a recommendation of Flournoy and Blinken’s CNAS think tank.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    When the Trump administration launched airstrikes on Syria based on mere accusations of a chemical attack, Tony Blinken praised the bombing, claiming Assad had used the weapon of mass destruction sarin. Yet there was no evidence for this claim, something even then-secretary of Defense James Mattis admitted: “So I can not tell you that we had evidence even though we had a lot of media and social media indicators that either chlorine or sarin were used.”

    While jihadist mercenaries armed with U..S-supplied weapons took over large swaths of Syria, Tony Blinken played a central role in a coup d’etat in Ukraine that saw a pro-Russia government overthrown in a U.S.-orchestrated color revolution with neo-fascist elements agitating on the ground.

    At the time, he was ambivalent about sending lethal weapons to Ukraine, instead opting for economic pressure.

    Tony Blinken: “We’re working, as I said, to make sure that there’s a cost exacted of Russia and indeed that it feels the pressure. That’s what we’re working on. And when it comes to military assistance, we’re looking at it. The facts are these: Even if assistance were to go to Ukraine that would be very unlikely to change Russia’s calculus or prevent an invasion.”

    Since then, fascist militias have been incorporated into Ukraine’s armed forces. And Tony Blinken urged Trump to send them deadly weapons – something Obama had declined to do. 

    But Trump obliged.

    The Third Offset

    While the U.S. fueled wars in Syria and Ukraine, the Pentagon announced a major shift called the Third Offset strategy – a reference to the cold war era strategies the U.S. used to maintain its military supremacy over the Soviet Union.

    The Third Offset strategy shifted the focus from counterinsurgency and the war on terror to great power competition against China and Russia. It called for a technological revolution in warfighting capabilities, development of futuristic and autonomous weapons, swarms of undersea and airborne drones, hypersonic weapons, cyber warfare, machine-enhanced soldiers, and artificial intelligence making unimaginably complex battlefield decisions at speeds incomprehensible to the human mind. All of this would be predicated on the Pentagon deepening its relationship with Silicon Valley giants that it birthed decades before: Google and Facebook. 

    The author of the Third Offset, former undersecretary of defense Robert Work, is a partner of Flournoy and Blinken’s at WestExec Advisors. And Flournoy has been a leading proponent of this dangerous new escalation.

    In June, Flournoy published a lengthy commentary laying out her strategy called “Sharpening the U.S. Military’s Edge: Critical Steps for the Next Administration.”

    She warned that the United States is losing its military technological advantage and reversing that must be the Pentagon’s priority. Without it, Flournoy warned that the U.S. might not be able to defeat China in Asia: “That technological investment is still very important for the United States to be able to offset what will be quantitative advantages and home theater advantages for a country like China if we ever had to deal with a conflict in Asia, in their backyard.”

    While Flournoy has called for ramping up U.S. military presence and exercises with allied forces in the region, she went so far as to call for the U.S. to increase its destructive capabilities so much that it could launch a blitzkrieg style-attack that would wipe out the entire Chinese navy and all civilian merchant ships in the South China Sea. Not only a blatant war crime but a direct attack on a nuclear power that would spell the third world war. 

    At the same time, Biden has announced he’ll take an even more aggressive and confrontational stance against Russia, a position Flournoy shares: “We need to invest to ensure that we maintain the military edge that we will need in certain critical areas like cyber and electronic warfare and precision strike, to again underwrite deterrence, to make sure Vladimir Putin does not miscalculate and think that he can cross a border into Europe or cross a border and threaten us militarily.”

    As for ending the forever wars, Tony Blinken says not so fast: “Large scale, open-ended deployment of large standing US forces in conflict zones with no clear strategy should end and will end under his watch…. But we also need to distinguish between, for example, these endless wars with the large scale open ended deployment of US forces with, for example, discreet, small-scale sustainable operations, maybe led by special forces, to support local actors… In ending the endless wars I think we have to be careful to not paint with too broad a brush stroke.”

    The end of forever wars?

    So Biden will end the forever wars, but not really end them. Secret wars that the public doesn’t even know the U.S. is involved in – those are here to stay.

    In fact, leaving teams of special forces in place throughout the Middle East is part and parcel of the Pentagon’s shift away from counterinsurgency and towards great power competition. 

    The 2018 National Defense Strategy explains that, “Long-term strategic competitions with China and Russia are the principal priorities” and the U.S. will “consolidate gains in Iraq and Afghanistan while moving to a more resource-sustainable approach.”

    As for the catastrophic war on Yemen, Biden has said he’ll end U.S. support; but in 2019, Michele Flournoy argued against ending arms sales to Saudi Arabia.

    Biden pledged he will rejoin the Iran deal as a starting point for new negotiations. However, Trump’s withdrawal from the deal discredited the Iranian reformists who seek engagement with the west and empowered the principlists who see the JCPOA as a deal with the devil.

    In Latin America, Biden will revive the so-called anti-corruption campaigns that were used as a cover to oust the popular social democrat Brazilian president Lula da Silva. 

    His Venezuela policy appears little different from Trump’s – sanctions and regime change.

    In Central America, Biden has presided over a four billion dollar package to support corrupt right-wing governments and neoliberal privatization projects, fueling destabilization and sending vulnerable masses fleeing north to the United States.

    Behind their rhetoric, Biden, Flournoy, and Blinken will seek nothing less than global supremacy, escalating a new and even more dangerous arms race that risks the destruction of humanity. That’s what Joe Biden calls “decency” and “normalcy.”

  • Trump Appeals PA Suit Dismissal As Dershowitz Outlines Narrow Path To Victory
    Trump Appeals PA Suit Dismissal As Dershowitz Outlines Narrow Path To Victory

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 18:45

    President Trump’s campaign filed a notice of appeal after a federal judge dismissed a lawsuit aimed at blocking Pennsylvania from certifying the results of the election until tens of thousands of mail-in ballots are invalidated.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The late-Sunday filing with the US Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit in Philadelphia was an expected development, with Trump attorney Rudy Giuliani declaring in a Saturday statement:We hope that the Third Circuit will be as gracious as Judge Brann in deciding our appeal one way or the other as expeditiously as possible,” adding “This is another case that appears to be moving quickly to the United States Supreme Court.”

    US District Judge Matthew Brann, an Obama appointee, issued scathing commentary in his dismissal of the case – comparing the lawsuit to “Frankenstein’s monster” which had been “haphazardly stitched together” without evidence.

    “In the United States of America, this cannot justify the disenfranchisement of a single voter, let alone all the voters of its sixth most populated state,” he continued.

    Meanwhile, Harvard Law professor emeritus (and former Jeffrey Epstein associate), Alan Dershowitz, has outlined several legal paths to a 2020 victory for Trump.

    As Jack Phillips of the Epoch Times writes (emphasis ours):

    Dershowitz said there are a few “constitutional paths to victory” for the president’s legal team, but he stipulated that Trump will face legal hurdles in all of them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For example, in Pennsylvania, they have two very strong legal arguments. One, that the courts changed what the legislature did about counting ballots after the end of Election Day. That’s a winning issue in the Supreme Court. I don’t necessarily support it, but it’s a winning issue in the Supreme Court,” Dershowitz told Fox Business on Sunday. The team, meanwhile, has “a winning issue in the Supreme Court on equal protection, that some counties flawed ballots to be cured while others didn’t. Bush v. Gore suggests that an Equal Protection argument can prevail.”

    Dershowitz, who helped defend Trump during the Senate impeachment trial earlier this year, said that due to Democratic candidate Joe Biden’s lead over the president, Trump’s team may not be able to contest enough ballots in Pennsylvania.

    The other legal theory they have, which is a potentially strong one, is that the computers, either fraudulently or by glitches, changed hundreds of thousands of votes. There, there are enough votes to make a difference, but I haven’t seen the evidence to support that,” he elaborated. “So, in one case, they don’t have the numbers. In another case, they don’t seem yet to have the evidence, maybe they do. I haven’t seen it. But the legal theory is there to support them if they have the numbers and they have the evidence.”

    And he said that for Trump’s legal team, time is running out.

    “You need to have witnesses, experts subject to cross-examination, and findings by a court,” he said, adding that there is no “legal route to undoing that” after the election is certified. “Their strongest case, if they have the evidence, is that computers may have turned hundreds of thousands of votes,” Dershowitz said.

    Last week, Dershowitz noted that if Trump can “keep the Biden count below 270, then the matter goes to the House of Representatives, where, of course, there is a Republican majority among the delegations of states, and you vote by state if it goes to the House.

    You need a perfect storm for it to work,” he said. “You need to get enough states, enough state attorneys general, or state departments, or whoever, secretaries of state or governors that are Republican that legitimately refuse to certify the results because they’re under challenge on the day the Electoral College meets by statute.”

    Rep. Mo Brooks (R-Ala.), a former prosecutor, told The Epoch Times last week that Congress has the “ultimate say over whether to accept or reject” Electoral College votes.

    “Congress has the absolute right to reject the submitted Electoral College votes of any state, which we believe has such a shoddy election system that you can’t trust the election results that those states are submitting to us, that they’re suspect,” Brooks said. “And I’m not going to put my name in support of any state that employs an election system that I don’t have confidence in.”

    Brooks noted that “on January 6th at 1 p.m. Eastern time, the 50 states will report to Congress, the president [of the] Senate will preside over this meeting” and “will report to Congress what they contend are their Electoral College results in their state.” The president of the Senate is Vice President Mike Pence under the U.S. Constitution.

  • "The Chips Will Fall Where They May": Sidney Powell Responds To Trump Distancing, Will Forge Ahead With Dominion Lawsuit
    “The Chips Will Fall Where They May”: Sidney Powell Responds To Trump Distancing, Will Forge Ahead With Dominion Lawsuit

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 18:40

    Update (1955ET): Sidney Powell has responded to the Trump Campaign’s Sunday night announcement that she was not part of their legal team, telling CBS News “I understand today’s press release. I will continue to represent #WeThePeople who had their votes for Trump and other Republicans stolen by massive fraud through Dominion and Smarmatic, and we will be filing suit soon.

    Powell continues, “The chips will fall where they may, and we will defend the foundations of this great Republic,” and ends with the hashtag #KrakenOnSteroids.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    The Trump Campaign issued a Sunday evening statement to clarify that attorney Sidney Powell, who has promised to unleash a ‘biblical’ election lawsuit in Georgia, is not part of the campaign’s legal team.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump Campaign general counsel Jenna Ellis tweeted a joint statement with Rudy Giuliani which reads: “Sidney Powell is practicing law on her own. She is not a member of the Trump Legal team. She is also not a lawyer for the President in his personal capacity.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The announcement comes on the heels of a Saturday interview Powell gave to Newsmax, during which she said an upcoming election lawsuit in Georgia “will be biblical.”

    “Georgia’s probably going to be the first state I’m gonna blow up,” she told the conservative news network, adding “We’ve got tons of evidence. It’s so much, it’s hard to pull it all together.”

    “Hopefully, this week we will get it ready to file, and it will be biblical.”

    Powell then claimed that Georgia Governor Brian Kemp and Secretary of State Brad Raffensperger were being paid as part of a conspiracy with Dominion Voting Systems.

    “And Mr. Kemp and the secretary of state need to go with it because they’re in on the Dominion scam with their last-minute purchase or reward of a contract to Dominion of $100 million,” Powell alleged, while encouraging Georgia law enforcement officials to investigate.

    Powell claimed at a press conference last week, standing next to Giuliani and Ellis, that Dominion Voting Systems machines had flipped millions of votes in favor of former Vice President Joe Biden – a claim she presented no evidence for, which has divided the MAGA camp between those demanding receipts (she notably bailed on an appearance with Tucker Carlson), and those who say she should be given time to assemble her case and present it in court.

    Oddly, Trump seemed to consider Powell a member of his legal team last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Earlier Saturday, Trump attorney Jordan Sekulow hinted on Newsmax that there would be a “shocking” lawsuit filed in Georgia.

    “I can’t tell you right now what is coming in Georgia, but what is coming in Georgia will be shocking,” he said.

    Some on team MAGA did not respond kindly to the Trump Campaign’s statement

    Others have noted that Ellis herself tagged Powell as a member of the team:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Washington Post, meanwhile (so take with appropriate grains of salt) is reporting that Trump told his advisers Powell was ‘too much’ for him, and doesn’t view her as helpful anymore.

  • Pandemics Are Over When The Public Decides They're Over
    Pandemics Are Over When The Public Decides They’re Over

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 18:15

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    In Colorado, reported cases and hospitalizations of Covid-19 patients are at higher levels than ever before. And yet politicians are worried that if they issue new stay-at-home orders, the public won’t obey them. For instance the Denver Post last week reported Colorado Democrats admitted the public isn’t listening very closely anymore:

    [State Senator Steve] Fenberg and many other state leaders are worried … about whether a stay-at-home order would even work this time around. People have grown accustomed to certain freedoms since the spring, and already there are some in the population resistant even to the least oppressive rules, such as wearing masks.

    “They don’t want to have restrictive orders that people just entirely ignore,” Fenberg said. “Once you cross that line, that seriously, then it really starts to unravel, when people completely check out from following the orders.”

    We’ll ignore the creepy framing of the issue around how citizens have lamentably “grown accustomed to certain freedoms” like being able to leave one’s home. But Fenberg is right to think the public is unlikely to be nearly as compliant this time around.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And what happens if Americans start acting as if there is no pandemic? Then, the pandemic is at a de facto end, even if “experts” insist that it is still a de jure reality.

    Medical Pandemics vs. Social Pandemics

    In other words, government agencies may issue declarations of when Pandemics end, but as noted in The New York Times last May,

    pandemics typically have two types of endings: the medical, which occurs when the incidence and death rates plummet, and the social, when the epidemic of fear about the disease wanes.

    “When people ask, ‘When will this end?,’ they are asking about the social ending,” said Dr Jeremy Greene, a historian of medicine at Johns Hopkins. In other words, an end can occur not because a disease has been vanquished but because people grow tired of panic mode and learn to live with a disease

    This has happened before. During the 1957-1958 Asian flu pandemic, for example, the public took little notice of the fact the flu was especially virulent that year. It is now estimated that more than 100,000 died from the flu in the period, which would be the equivalent of 220,000 Americans today. Indeed, American continued to die from the Asian flu into the 1960 flu season and beyond. But as far as the public was concerned, there had been no pandemic that required staying home or closing schools.

    Many Americans are apparently already moving in that direction now. According to a new report this month from Gallup, the percentage of Americans saying they are “very likely” to shelter in place has fallen from 67 percent in late March to 49 percent as of November 1. The percentage of respondents saying they are “very likely” or “somewhat unlikely” to adhere to stay-at-home orders has doubled from 15 percent to 33 percent. Notably, this trend has occurred in spite of more Americans in the survey also saying they think the virus situation is “getting worse.”

    In other words, Americans don’t think the disease is about to go away, but less than half say it’s very likely they’ll be sitting at home.

    At this point, it’s a fairly safe bet that even as more and more Americans conclude they can’t put their lives on hold indefinitely, government bureaucrats will continue to insist that the pandemic puts everyone at grave risk.

    But the public and the technocrats often function on different schedules. After all, sitting at home for months or even years may work for childless, white-collar intellectuals and bureaucrats who can easily work from home and need not worry about the social and emotional development of children and others in their care. But many others are likely to view that model of daily life as thoroughly untenable.

    Moreover, many currently unemployed Americans—who number in the millions—may conclude collecting unemployment checks indefinitely is not a satisfactory substitute for making a living the ordinary way.

    Making Risk Assessments

    All of this will go into calculating risk, and this is why the public’s recognized end to pandemics is often different than the “official” end. The public is made up of countless individuals who make their own risk assessments based on the available facts.

    This also is why it’s impossible to declare with finality when “herd immunity” has been reached. As Michel Accad explained last month at mises.org:

    while herd immunity may indeed be a real phenomenon that can take place under certain circumstances when populations are subjected to a contagious disease, it is important to recognize that herd immunity is not a concept that has any practical value for setting public health policy.

    For one thing, there is no objective way to establish that herd immunity has been achieved, since a “stable” rate of new infection is a subjective notion. What is a stable or tolerable rate of infection for me may not be so for you.

    Whether or not the presence of a disease presents an acceptable risk to “the public” depends on countless individual risk assessments.

    With stay-at-home orders, on the other hand, government officials have taken it upon themselves to apply an arbitrary bureaucrat-enforced definition of acceptable risk. These officials insist they must have the power to force the public to retreat to their home until some central political authority has determined that the risk level has dropped to an acceptable level.

    How Much Risk Are We Willing to Accept When Driving?

    Governments have tried this in other contexts as well.

    When it comes to highway safety, for instance, federal and state government agencies spent years trying to convince Americans that “55 saves lives” and that driving at slower speeds would save thousands of American lives per year.

    This in itself was not an unreasonable goal, of course. Nowadays, more than 38,000 people die every year in crashes on US roadways. An additional 4.4 million are injured seriously enough to require medical attention, and auto accidents are the leading cause of death in the US for people aged 1–54.

    A concerted effort to bring down highway deaths could save hundreds of thousands of lives over a single decade. Moreover, the act of driving on the highway—especially at high speeds—heightens the risk not only for one’s self but for other motorists as well. This means if Americans would consent to drive at slow speeds, wear helmets when driving, and refrain from driving for “non-essential” reasons, countless lives could be saved.

    Yet, clearly, most Americans have long since concluded that maximizing safety on the highway isn’t worth the trouble, either to increase their own safety or the safety of others. Countless American drivers routinely drive at high speed. Some don’t even wear seat belts. Many people drive to the store or the movies when they could “be safe” by just staying at home. Yet these non-essential motorists continue to put others at risk in this manner.

    Few Americans seem to regard this as a serious problem. Most everyone just accepts the risk of highway accidents as another part of life. 

    The same thing, of course, has always occurred in the context of disease, and it is likely to occur in the context of Covid-19. As time goes on, more and more Americans will simply accept that the risk of catching various diseases as a part of life. This long ago occurred with the flu which still kills tens of thousands of Americans per year.

    When this does finally happen with most of the public in regards to Covid-19, the pandemic will be de facto over, although may politicians and bureaucrats will no doubt disagree. 

  • China's Financial Distress Floods Shadow Banks As Trust Giant Scrambles For Liquidity
    China’s Financial Distress Floods Shadow Banks As Trust Giant Scrambles For Liquidity

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 17:50

    The wave of financial distress flooding China’s corporate sector, which has seen a furious selloff in bonds following the unexpected default of several state-owned enterprises, is spilling over into a key financing conduit used by China’s giant shadow banking sector — the trust industry.

    As Caixin reports, Huaxin Trust Co. one of 68 companies licensed to conduct trust business in China and one of the largest “shadow banks” in the mainland , is trying to raise as much as 6.8 billion yuan ($1 billion) from strategic investors as it faces a growing liquidity squeeze that’s already forced it to skip repayments on dozens of investment products over the past few months.

    The Dalian, Liaoning province-based institution announced last Tuesday that it is seeking one or more strategic investors to inject 3.4 billion yuan to 6.8 billion yuan into the firm, which would increase its registered capital to 10 billion yuan to 13.4 billion yuan.

    But, as Caixin’s Timmy Shen writes, what drew the market’s attention was a condition stipulated by Huaxin that any investor would need to agree to “support the company’s liquidity before the completion of their investment to allow the firm to protect the interests of investors in its trust products.” And while this is tantamount to a pledge to backstop a bailout of the core shadow banking pillar, one veteran trust-industry source told Caixin that it can be difficult to persuade strategic investors to provide liquidity support before even making their investment, although investors can use this as leverage to get better terms.

    Even before the current episode of corporate bond turmoil triggered by the sudden defaults of state owned Yongcheng Coal and Brilliance Auto, China’s regulators had already become increasingly concerned about the hidden risks in the trust sector which plays an key role in the shadow banking sector by providing loans to higher-risk companies and those who have difficulty getting credit from traditional banks. The loans are packaged into high-yielding products which are then sold to retail investors and institutions.

    For half a year, China’s Banking and Insurance Regulatory Commission (CBIRC) has been preparing regulations to put the country’s $3.1 trillion trust industry under closer oversight. The draft rules, which were put out for public comment in May, will govern how trust companies manage client funds, clarify requirements on trust products and toughen regulation of their loan-related investments.

    Then in June, as part of a wave of wholesale systemic deleveraging which hammered such real-estate development firms as China Evergrande and nearly brought it to the edge of insolvency, the CBIRC told some trust firms to downsize their trust financing business according to tailored specifications provided by the regulator. The unofficial orders from the regulator followed a surge in demand for loans as companies scrambled for cash to help them weather the impact of the Covid-19 outbreak or to repay maturing loans. We detailed China’s regulatory push to limit debt in October in “China Crackdown On Property Developer Debt Sparks Fears About Systemic Crisis” when we laid out the new “Three red lines” policy espoused by Beijing limiting the amount of new debt issuance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Enter Huaxin Trust, which has around 20 shareholders, and is controlled by a Beijing-registered privately owned company called Huaxin Huitong Group Co. Ltd. whose low-profile chairman, Dong Yongcheng, holds a 9.1% stake in the trust firm, according to corporate data provider Qichaha. Huaxin Trust’s second- and third-largest shareholders are both linked to Dong’s company. Huaxin Huitong held a 60% stake in Huaxin Trust in 2015, according to a Hong Kong stock exchange filing by Shengjing Bank Co. which is based in the northeastern province of Liaoning and which was negotiating to buy a 20% stake in the trust firm for 3.2 billion yuan. The deal subsequently fell through.

    Fast forward to today, when Huaxin’s hunt for investors comes as it has struggled to pay out on maturing trust products amid growing stress on its corporate borrowers. As of Thursday, the trust firm had only repaid four products that matured recently, and extended repayment on 23 products, with the earliest coming due in September, according to its website. Huaxin Trust said in announcements  on its website that enterprises had failed to repay the principal and interest on the products forcing the company to extend the repayment dates as allowed in the terms and conditions of the trust products sold to investors.

    In essence, the repackager of high-yielding debt was pushing off blame on what may soon be a cascade of falling dominoes on companies it had lent money to.

    The company also said  that in addition to looking for strategic investors it is speeding up efforts to offload some of its underlying trust assets and its own assets, adding that any money raised through these liquidations would be used to repay investors in its trust products.

    Meanwhile, there has been growing speculation that Huaxin Trust may have had funds embezzled by its largest shareholder, but the company put out a statement  on Nov. 10 denying that its largest shareholder had used or embezzled funds from the firm and saying that Huaxin Huitong “continued to give liquidity support to aid the company.”

    At the end of last year, Huaxin Trust had about 61.6 billion yuan of trust assets under management, according to its 2019 annual report but that had fallen to about 49.2 billion yuan by the end of June, according to Tuesday’s strategic investment statement.

    In short, Huaxin Trust is the latest trust firm and “shadow bank” to run into trouble in a sector already reeling from the effects of a crackdown on shadow banking and an economic slowdown exacerbated by the coronavirus pandemic.  Among them are Sichuan Trust Co. which has failed to repay investors more than 20 billion yuan, and Shanghai-listed Anxin Trust Co. once the darling of the trust sector, which collapsed last year and was found to have a “modest” 50 billion yuan black hole on its books.

    The total assets in China’s shadow bank sector have shrunk consistently since peaking in early 2018 as Beijing focused on aggressively limiting the amount of high-yielding debt issued by the sector.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, with tens of trillions in yuan-denominated debt still outstanding within this loosely regulated offshoot of China’s financial system, which still represents a last-ditch option for liquidity-challenged companies, as China’s economy continues to shrink from the consequences of the pandemic regardless of the rosy and goalseeked data that Beijing is publishing on a monthly basis to convince the world – and China’s massive depositor base – that all is well, we expect after the initial round of early tremors to hit China’s trust companies such as Huaxin, the real shock to China’s financial system is yet to come.

  • Border Patrol Reports Surge In Illegal Immigration Since Election
    Border Patrol Reports Surge In Illegal Immigration Since Election

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 17:25

    Authored by Monica Showalter via AmericanThinker.com,

    Migrants, and more important, the people who traffic and profit from migrants, are like the stock market: They’re forward-looking. They make decisions now based on what they see coming down the pike.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So surprise, surprise, the media’s crowning of Joe Biden president, along with many world leaders congratulating him and conducting their affairs of state with him, even as legal challenges are going on, has sent a message to Central America’s gangs and Mexico’s cartels, who control migrant smuggling routes to the U.S. It’s time to profit. It’s time to go. A new border surge has begun, in anticipation of a Biden open-borders presidency, which comes just as Democrat-run states and Biden himself are prescribing new COVID lockdowns.

    According to the Washington Times’s Stephen Dinan:

    Border Patrol agents are already seeing a Biden surge in illegal immigration at the southwest border, officials said Thursday, with the numbers surging 21% over the last month alone.

    Acting Customs and Border Protection Commissioner Mark Morgan said worsening economic conditions south of the border are largely responsible for the uptick, but he also blamed “perceived and or anticipated shifts in policies” here in the U.S.

    He said it’s particularly dangerous at a time when the coronavirus pandemic is taking a toll on CBP personnel. At least 1,300 CBP staffers are currently quarantined, 700 are currently COVID-positive and 15 have died of the virus.

    “I’ve attended way too many funerals,” Mr. Morgan said.

    Border Patrol agents and CBP officers snared about 69,000 unauthorized border crossers in October, up from about 58,000 in September.

    Based on the number of COVID cases the Border Patrol is suffering, the unvetted migrants are bringing it in.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which pretty well negates the Biden/Democrat effort to enforce more lockdowns — the closed schools, the targeted bars, gyms and restaurants, the limited travel, the cancelled Thanksgiving, and more.

    So long as there is no lockdown at the border, and COVID is rolling in from unvetted migrants with enough money to pay smuggling syndicates, any efforts to contain COVID from the stateside is nonsense. Too bad about all the boarded-up businesses.

    It highlights the fundamental contradition of Biden’s love for lockdowns, and support for open borders. You can have one or the other, but you can’t have both. Biden’s policy of open borders stands in stark contradiction to his vow to contain COVID. Which one do you think he’s more serious about?

    Issues & Insights had an excellent item the other day on just what he says he intends:

    Instead of expelling illegals to protect U.S. neighbors and families, the Biden-Sanders priority is to make sure that “health coverage is available to everyone for testing, treatment, medical services, rehabilitation, and that vaccines are available free of charge, regardless of immigration or economic status.”

    Beyond this, Biden has promised to dismantle Trump policies that had been working to restrain the flow of illegals – sorry, “undocumented people” – across the border.

    Wall construction will stop. Biden promises to implement a 100-day freeze on deportations “while his administration issues guidance narrowing who can be arrested by immigration agents,” according to one news account.

    He plans to reinstate catch-and-release, which created a massive loophole for illegals who are set free into the country while their asylum claim is adjudicated, never to return for their final hearing.

    Up until now, President Trump has used Title 42 of the U.S. Code to expel illegal border crossers because of COVID.

    That’s one of the very regulations that a President Biden can end instantly with the stroke of a pen, according to this Time magazine analysis:

    Biden could also end Trump’s “expulsions” that have taken place since March 2020 as COVID-19 has spread across the U.S. and most of the world.

    DHS’s expulsion rule allows U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) to immediately remove anyone who crosses the border without authorization to their last country of transit without traditional processing or a chance to have their claims heard in court because of the risks posed by COVID-19. Since the rule was adopted in March, U.S. Border Patrol has conducted more than 197,000 expulsions, according to CBP data.

    And yes, these places the illegal migrants are coming from are seeing big surges in COVID as well as the terrible economic effects of local lost tourism, lost trade, lockdowns, and shutdowns, as noted in this Focus Economics report here. The migrants looking for economic opportunity in the U.S. will find the same lockdowns here, but with generous welfare and free medical care. 

    For Americans, there will just be more imported COVID.

    Which, to get cynical, might just be what Democrats want — a permanent COVID that keeps the country locked down and themselves powerful, and millions and millions of COVID-filled migrants coming in to ensure that the lockdowns extend, ensuring that COVID is never contained.

    You can bet Joe Biden won’t be addressing this fundamental contradiction of policy. He’s not serious about ending COVID. And in any case, he never answers questions. Not beyond what kind of ice cream he ordered. As long as migrants are surging the border, there will always be more waves of imported COVID.

  • Hedge Fund CIO: "There Is A Vague Sense That Something Powerful, Apolitical, Transnational, Is Emerging"
    Hedge Fund CIO: “There Is A Vague Sense That Something Powerful, Apolitical, Transnational, Is Emerging”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 16:35

    By Eric Peters, CIO of One River Asset Management

    “I am requesting that the Federal Reserve return the unused funds to the Treasury,” wrote Steve Mnuchin, in a letter addressed to Fed Chairman Powell, shutting the lights off on his way out.

    “In the unlikely event that it becomes necessary in the future to reestablish any of these facilities, the Federal Reserve can request approval from the Secretary of the Treasury,” continued Mnuchin.

    Days earlier, Chairman Powell had stated, “The Fed will be strongly committed to using all of our tools to support the economy for as long as it takes until the job is well and truly done. When the right time comes, and I don’t think that time is yet or very soon, we will put those tools away.”

    So apparently, the time has come. In any other period, such a public disagreement between the Treasury Secretary and Fed Chairman would have sparked an abrupt 10% decline in the S&P 500, particularly when the Fed has so few tools at its disposal and fiscal policy is the only true lever capable of lifting the real economy.

    But not now. Equity markets barely budged, the S&P 500 finishing the week -0.8%. Bond markets rallied, 10yr Treasury yields falling 7bps to 0.83%.

    In fact, the only thing that really moved was Bitcoin and its brethren, which staged a stunning rally on the accelerating loss of faith in fiat along with a vague sense that something powerful, apolitical, transnational, is emerging in the cloud.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You see, the market seems to have so little confidence in our politicians that they no longer even trust them to engage in a proper fiscal fight. Instead, markets increasingly believe that no matter how dysfunctional our political parties, how damaged our democratic institutions, how deep our self-inflicted wounds, in the end, all paths lead to an increasingly abundant supply of debt and dollars.

    And the market is not wrong.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd November 2020

  • The Triumph Of Mankind Over 'The Great Reset': Guns, Books, & The Social Contract
    The Triumph Of Mankind Over 'The Great Reset': Guns, Books, & The Social Contract

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 11/22/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Joaquin Flores via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In The Dystopic Great Reset and the Fight Back: Population Reduction and Hope for the Children of Men , our Part I, we developed on our previous essays on planned obsolescence and the problems of the old paradigm as we enter the 4th Industrial Revolution. We looked at how several science fiction works like ‘The Virus’ and ‘Children of Men’ in culture actually predicted and lent to us an understanding the new reified nightmare being built around us. Finally, we looked at Althusser’s ‘ISA’, Ideological State Apparatus and how this was developed towards a politically correct elite culture which opened the door to the so-called ‘new normal’, where slavery and self-harm are virtue signals.

    At the end of ‘The Dystopic Great Reset and the Fight Back […]’ we noted that it would be necessary to trace aspects of the history of the social contract in order to lay the foundation of understanding

    In our previous essay ‘Capitalism After Corona Lockdown: Having the Power to Walk Away, we also then posed the question of the social contract itself.

    Because the vast majority of us today are born into civilization, we don’t always think about its origins in terms of the agency of individuals who joined or formed the first civilizations. We tend to be taught through our institutions that it was something in between voluntary and natural, and the great 19th century nationalist romanticism promoted a view of self-determination of peoples, a view that would later be taken up by nationalist and leftist movements around the world in the 20th century – later enshrined in the UN.

    But much of the story of the first state-building civilizations, understanding that people are a resource when organized and put to work, is that some balance between slavery and half-freedom rests at its foundation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The mass production of books and guns, which came about within the same historical period, entirely upended the old foundation of class society. The mass production of guns and books may have, at a certain point, been seen as powerful reinforcements for the status quo. Larger armies could be effectively armed at lower cost. The Ideological State Apparatus, as we can infer from Althusser, could be disseminated and internalized more effectively. But as with technology, came its dual-use features. The very technologies developed with an eye at perfecting the control mechanisms within the status quo of oligarchic orders, in keeping up with the technologies that other competing power networks (countries, kingdoms, nations, etc.), can be turned on its head if these technologies were democratized and fell into the hands of the broadest possible numbers of people. Such was the process both in the American Revolution, and also for instance in the Vietnamese resistance to Japanese, French, and American colonialism in the last century.

    For the first time in many centuries, knowledge and brute force were no longer an insurmountable near-monopoly held by the state or those it could compromise. The gun – the great equalizer of men, and the book – the great liberator of minds.

    Since that epoch of great emancipation and promise, technology has continued with this contradictory path of dual-use. However, the balance of power and the natures of technologies hitherto developed has shifted tremendously, favoring the status quo and disempowering the broad masses. This lamentable condition, however, is upended by the applied technologies which the real 4th Industrial Revolution (not the World Economic Forum’s model) brings into being.

    In the last epoch of the 20th century, we had begun a dangerous trajectory to a blind-sighted overspecialization (compartmentalization/fachidiotizmus) which are the hallmarks of technocracy, and away from the liberatory epoch of centuries past which gave rise to constitutional republics.

    In the past, before the old liberatory epoch, just as a military class was reliant on exclusive access to armaments, today is characterized by a combination of pharmaceutical and social programming through media which are powers out of the reach of the people. This rise and perfection of what Heidegger would define and what Marcuse would characterize as a permanently stable techno-industrial bureaucratic mode of society, characterizes today’s world of social-media influencing, anti-depressants, mass psychological operations such as virtual or holographic pandemics (HIV, Covid-19, etc.), and the surveillance state.

    This part is most important in establishing that for the foreseeable future, escaping the 4th Industrial Revolution is an impossibility. At the same time, the dual-use nature of the technologies still hold some liberatory potential, but the past methods of arriving at these has changed.

    This means that the ideology of the ruling class is tremendously important. Unlike revolutionary republican and bolshevist conceptions of power and change which share an insurrectionist presumption premised in the liberatory age of guns and books (which made the ‘political soldier’ a possibility), we have increasingly entered a zenith point in social-control technologies wherein the likelihood of a controlled group winning a contest for power against the controlling group approaches zero, if we imagine this as a contest between armed groups wherein the military acts not in the interests of their extended families, but in the interests of those writing the checks.

    Such limitations were already understood by those influenced by bolshevism, such as Antonio Gramsci in his discussion of hegemony in his Quaderni del Carcere. Cultural hegemony is a war of attrition over the entire ideological terrain, a component of what today we might call full-spectrum dominance. This parallels (and must have influenced) the later Althusserian conception of the Ideological State Apparatus (ISA).

    The single-most revolutionary legal document to have arisen in the course of the last three-hundred years in the western tradition was the U.S. Constitution. At its foundation rests the assumption that man is born free, and enters into a social contract willingly, a view supported by a view of natural rights, natural law, and an equality of the soul endowed by the creator.

    It is a social contract that man enters into every-day, and can exit any-day.

    To understand the liberatory potential of a 4th Industrial Revolution is to understand the dual-use nature of technology in the history of liberatory epochs.

    Before the rise of computers and robots performing much of the labor in society, societies grew in strength as they grew in people. With automation and roboticization, human beings become a surplus cost of no consequence to production provided that society itself is not anthropocentric.

    The new normal being proposed, is one with no freedom of thought, let alone expression. It is one with social credit, tagging people as if they were animals on a wildlife reserve, and the total regimentation of every-day life. The contours of what techno-industrial civilization can lead to, of what scientific tyranny looks like, is not only visible to us now, but has been creeping into our lives for the past century.

    The response to this in the U.S. has been an increasing support for Trump and the phenomenon that can really be described as ‘Trumpism’, which despite the media hologram of a Biden victory will most probably result in a second Trump administration. Trumpism has become synonymous with Constitutionalism, despite the revenge-fantasy language and tropes employed by a disconcerting segment of its base. In England, we have seen a parallel movement of the post-left, and a rise in ‘common law’ activism and an activist education campaign surrounding the meaning of the Magna Carta. For these parallel reasons, we had also previously characterized the Trump phenomenon as the child of a frustrated Occupy Wall Street movement after its affair with the Tea Party, but back in numbers and strength by a dispossessed working class long ago betrayed by organized labor, the DNC, and imbalanced trade deals with China.

    But while these responses (with their defects and limitations) are a healthy sign, they do not yet have the depth to articulate a countering vision for society which also takes into account the state of technology as it exists today. That is why we have not seen a very thorough public discussion on the reality of technology, and the state of matters which are real and present.

    Instead, we see from the conservative reaction to the 4IR – a reaction which raises all of the correct concerns and levies all of the correct criticisms against the banker’s version of it. This historically parallels the Luddites, who saw at the start of the 19th century that mass industry was replacing the work of the skilled trades and craftsmen with machines.

    Their solution, to destroy the machines, failed primarily because machines produce more in volume than men. Even if they had won the political battle, it would have only been a matter of time before a competing society fully utilizing industry would over-take theirs. And perhaps this here tells the entire story of the conquest over nomadic and agriculturalist societies at the hands of the state-building, techno-industrial societies even thousands of years ago.

    And so we arrive at the stark truth – there is no running or hiding from the future.

    It is the task of free citizens to take a hold of the emerging new technologies into their own hands, for their own purposes: to live in society that acts towards human freedom and dignity of the soul. A world where our small children can grow up in a world without unnecessary humility or fear. A world where there is promise and hope, a promise truly justified by a real-existing society around them based upon what is true, what is beautiful, and what is good.

  • Navy To Test Resupply Drones For Warships 
    Navy To Test Resupply Drones For Warships 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 23:30

    The Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division (NAWCAD) recently launched a pilot program to assess just how useful delivery drones are for hauling critical cargo to surface ships, read a US Navy press release

    NAWCAD engineers and military pilots are set to evaluate a commercially procured logistics Unmanned Air System (UAS) prototype – called the Blue Water Maritime Logistics UAS – for long-range naval ship-to-ship and ship-to-shore cargo transport. 

    “The Blue Water logistics UAS will be further developed and tested by the Navy, for the Navy,” said NAWCAD Commander Rear Adm. John Lemmon.

    “NAWCAD has organic talent and facilities you can’t find anywhere else. Combined with increased acquisition freedom granted by Congress, this effort shows how we’re doing business differently,” Lemmon said. 

    “This requirement is unlike other cargo requirements that online retailers like Amazon are exploring,” said Blue Water’s project lead, Bill Macchione. 

    “Naval cargo transport requires vehicles that can successfully operate through difficult environments that include heavy winds, open water, and pitching vessels at sea,” Macchione said. 

    On the modern battlefield, cargo deliveries to warships are usually conducted via boats and or helicopters. The drone will revolutionize the delivery of critical goods to military vessels. Testing starts in early 2021 at Naval Air Station Patuxent River. 

    Blue Water logistics UAS can autonomously haul 20 pounds of cargo for a maximum distance of 25 miles. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The announcement of the Blue Water logistics UAS pilot program comes as the Navy recently delivered supplies to a nuclear submarine for the first time using a drone. 

    Readers may recall, in September, a helicopter drone for private industry flew a 3D-printed part to an offshore gas platform off the coast of Norway. 

    In the next couple of years, the surge in flying drones will easily disrupt mobility and transportation. As shown above, the military and private corporations are already testing and or have implemented drones into their logistical chains. 

  • US Urgently Needs To Challenge China's Chokehold On Rare Earth Materials
    US Urgently Needs To Challenge China's Chokehold On Rare Earth Materials

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 23:00

    Authored by Lawrence Franklin via The Gatestone Institute,

    One of China’s most significant advantages in the race to dominate future hi-tech industrial production, among just about everything else, is its chokehold on “rare earth materials” (REM). These are materials — and the raw minerals from which they are extracted and processed — vital to the manufacture, for instance, of advanced weapons, fossil-free alternative energy systems, communication devices, computer products, and microelectronic networks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is an area in which China has already established dominance . The Chinese Communist Party’s near monopoly on most of these 17 rare earth materials is by now a US national security vulnerability of enormous strategic importance. China’s October 13 decision to curtail the export of these vitally needed rare earth materials should serve as an urgent warning to the US to seriously begin developing an independent supply chain of these materials.

    The good news is that the Trump Administration had the foresight in 2017 to issue an Executive Order to begin the process of decoupling the US from its dependency on the Communist Chinese regime for REM. This Executive Order was followed up in early October by a Presidential declaration of a national emergency in mining, in an apparent effort to establish a US domestic REM stockpile for military requirements. China’s announced intent to ban the export of strategic REM to foreign countries could spur the US quickly and fully to implement President Trump’s directive to establish an independent REM supply chain. The Defense Department has not acted with the sense of urgency demanded by the President. In short, the DOD is dragging its feet. Consequently, if US-China relations plummet to the point where conflict appears imminent, America’s military would be disadvantaged should the Chinese decide to sever exports of REM to the US.

    Presently, the US Air Force’s most advanced fighter jet, the F-35, requires about 1,000 pounds of rare earth materials, most of which are presently acquired from China. The US is also dependent on China for REM required for laser guidance missiles, other advanced weapons systems and space satellites.

    Many US quality-of-life domestic products — many medical devices, such as scanners, electric automobiles, and fluorescent lighting — also rely on the availability of the Chinese REM.

    To decouple, the US could establish new supply lines with countries that have unexploited deposits of REM. These include Australia, Afghanistan, India, Russia, Brazil and countries in Central Asia. The US also could capitalize on its considerable undersea technological expertise to extract REM deposits from the ocean floor. US allies, such as NATO nations, could invest in independent REM supply lines as well as create stockpiles of REM to lessen their own vulnerability regarding China,

    The US, to nurture a national and internationally competitive industry, could also borrow a tactic from China by subsidizing domestic companies to invest in REM extraction and processing enterprises. Current REM sites in the US that have the potential to expand rapidly, particularly if the government provides financial and tax-free incentives, include Elk Creek Mine in Nebraska, Bokan Mine in Alaska, and Bear Lodge Mine in Wyoming. Presently, the most profitable REM site in the US is Mountain Pass Mine in California. Potentially, the most valuable US site is an area in West Texas which contains 16 of the 17 known rare earth materials.

    Some of these REM and their related end products include:

    • Barite – fracking process for natural gas extraction

    • Cerium – camera lenses for telescopes

    • Dysprosium – magnets in electric vehicles and wind turbines

    • Erbium – nuclear power plant rods

    • Europium – lasers

    • Gallium – semiconductors

    • Lanthanum – specialized lighting

    • Lithium – batteries

    • Praseodymium – jet airplane engines

    • Promethium – batteries for nuclear powered systems

    • Yttrium – laser-guided missiles and bombs.

    In addition to these REM, there are other critical materials that the US no longer produces. Consequently, industries are forced to import these items. An additional benefit is that the natural gas extracted by fracking helps to keep the US energy independent. Graphite, a necessary ingredient for smartphone batteries, is another critical substance.

    If the US were to decide that breaking China’s monopolistic stranglehold on most of these materials was a national priority, Washington could also build REM processing plants and supply chains. Not only would these investments provide jobs, but also only then could the US proceed to transform these critical REM oxides into metallic alloys from which end products are created.

    If the US remains dependent on China for REM, there may come a time when America might be forced to sacrifice a foreign policy interest — a dilemma experienced by Japan, also heavily dependent on China for REM. When China and Japan became involved in a maritime fishing dispute, Beijing cut off shipments of REM to its neighbor. The dispute was settled only when Tokyo pleaded with China to resume the export of REM and the Japanese Coast Guard in the East China Sea released the captain of a Chinese trawler that had been fishing in disputed waters. The US would do well to avoid a similar predicament by quickly decoupling its economy from dependency on China for rare earth materials — and if possible, from everything else.

  • Struggling Retailers Owe $52 Billion In Overdue Rents 
    Struggling Retailers Owe $52 Billion In Overdue Rents 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 22:30

    The virus pandemic – with its temporary and permanent store closures, strict social distancing requirements, e-commerce boom, and supply chain disruption – since March has fueled uncertainty among US retailers as many find themselves in a $52 billion hole.

    Bloomberg, citing new data via CoStar Group Inc., outlines how restaurants, gyms, and other businesses have accumulated insurmountable rent payments that have been deferred for months. This has resulted in landlords demanding outstanding balances be immediately paid, could drive some retailers into bankruptcy.

    “You’re going to have big bubbles that are going to be hitting next year or even in the fourth quarter,” said Andy Graiser, co-president of A&G Real Estate Partners, an advisory firm. “I’m not sure if they are going to be able to make those payments in addition to their existing rent.”

    The problem with overdue rents, totaling $52 billion as of November, is that retail sales growth in October slumped and is expected to wane into year-end. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Furthermore, coronavirus cases are exponentially increasing in almost every US state. Local governments across the country are reimposing strict social distancing measures that will stymie retail sales and increase the threat of a double dip recession. 

    CoStar reveals the amount of rent collected from retailers rose from 54% at the end of April to 86% this month. Only 79% of rent due this month for malls was collected.

    “It’s going to take a period of years, not months, to get through this,” said Michael Hirschfeld, vice chairman at JLL, a real estate services firm.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From Signet Jewelers Ltd. to Red Robin Gourmet Burgers Inc. to Bed Bath and Beyond, Bloomberg lists the major retailers who have deferred rent payments. Their unpaid rents total in the tens of millions of dollars per company – the question, with slumping retail sales and a virus pandemic that continues to rage – how will these retailers ever pay back past rents? 

    Signet Jewelers Ltd., for one, deferred about $78 million of its rent payments, according to a September quarterly filing. In its most recent quarterly filing, Bed Bath & Beyond Inc. said it’s held back $50.6 million in rent payments and is in negotiations with landlords, while Francesca’s Holdings Corp. has said it owed $14.6 million in deferred rents and related costs as of Aug. 1. The women’s clothing chain has since said it plans to shutter about 140 locations by the end of January and that it’s in danger of financial collapse.

    Red Robin Gourmet Burgers Inc., meanwhile, said that it’s received default notices from some landlords after it stopped making full payments in April. Chief Financial Officer Lynn Schweinfurth told investors on a Nov. 5 call that the restaurant chain had negotiated amendments for about half of its leases by the end of its third quarter and continues in talks for the rest.

    Many of these unpaid bills won’t go away, but are instead being pushed into next year. Signet said it plans to pay back its overdue rent by the middle of next year, while Francesca’s plans to repay the amount over the course of next year, it said in a quarterly filing in September, and is asking landlords for more concessions.

    Representatives for Bed Bath and Beyond, Francesca’s, and Red Robin didn’t immediately respond to requests for comment. A representative for Signet didn’t have a comment beyond recent filings. -Bloomberg 

    Earlier this month, deferred rents and a tidal wave of tenants exiting leases helped two mall REITs, Pennsylvania Real Estate Investment Trust and CBL & Associates Properties file for Chapter 11 protection – together the two REITs account for 87 million square feet of real estate across the US. 

    Even though collections are improving at high-quality malls – mall giant Simon Property Group Inc. only collected 85% of rents in the third quarter, up from 72% in the previous quarter. Brookfield Property Partners LP said it collected 75% of rents from mall tenants over the same quarter. 

    Jay Indyke, a lawyer who chairs Cooley LLP’s restructuring practice, said landlords and lenders are willing to make accommodations out of court to resolve overdue rent payments because of the recent news of a promising vaccine. 

    “There are certainly some players that are willing to at least convert some of their debt to equity,” Indyk said.

    While the brick and mortar retail “apocalypse” was already a problem for the US economy ahead of the virus pandemic thanks to the destructive forces of Amazon and the e-commerce boom, the pandemic continues to complicate the outlook for retailers that may extend the bankruptcy wave well into 2021. 

  • Michigan AG Calls For Criminal Charges Against GOP Certifiers Who Won't 'Fall In Line'
    Michigan AG Calls For Criminal Charges Against GOP Certifiers Who Won't 'Fall In Line'

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    We have been discussing the campaign of The Lincoln Project and others to harass and abuse lawyers who represent the Trump campaign or other parties bringing election challenges. Similar campaigns have targeted election officials who object to counting irregularitiesNow, the Michigan Attorney General and others are suggesting that Republicans who oppose certification or even meet with President Donald Trump on the issue could be criminally investigated or charged. Once again, the media is silent on this clearly abusive use of the criminal code target members of the opposing party in their raising objections under state law.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Michigan AG Dana Nessel

    On Friday afternoon, leaders of Michigan’s Republican-controlled state legislature met with Trump in the White House at his invitation.  My column today explores the difficulty in any strategy to trigger an electoral college fight. However, the objections from legislators could focus on an host of sworn complaints from voters or irregularities in voting counts. I remain skeptical of the sweeping claims made by some Trump lawyers and I was highly critical of Rudy Giuliani’s global communist conspiracy claim at the press conference this week. State legislators have a right to raise electoral objections and seek resolution in the legislative branch.

    According to the Washington Post, Dana Nessel “is conferring with election law experts on whether officials may have violated any state laws prohibiting them from engaging in bribery, perjury and conspiracy.”  It is same weaponization of the criminal code for political purposes that we have seen in the last four years against Trump.  Notably, the focus is the same discredited interpretation used against Trump and notably not adopted by the impeachment-eager House Judiciary Committee: bribery.

    In Politico, Richard Primus wrote that these legislators should not attend a meeting with Trump because “it threatens the two Michigan legislators, personally, with the risk of criminal investigation.”

    This ridiculous legal claims is based on the bribery theory:

    The danger for Shirkey and Chatfield, then, is that they are being visibly invited to a meeting where the likely agenda involves the felony of attempting to bribe a public official.

    Under Michigan law, any member of the Legislature who “corruptly” accepts a promise of some beneficial act in return for exercising his authority in a certain way is “forever disqualified to hold any public office” and “shall be guilty of a felony, punishable by imprisonment in the state prison not more than 10 years[.]”

    We repeatedly discussed this theory during the Trump presidency. As I have previously written, a leading proponent has been former prosecutor and Washington Post columnist Randall D. Eliason, who insisted that “allegations of a wrongful quid pro quo are really just another way of saying that there was a bribe … it’s bribery if a quid pro quo is sought with corrupt intent, if the president is not pursuing legitimate U.S. policy but instead is wrongfully demanding actions by Ukraine that would benefit him personally.” Eliason further endorsed the House report and assured that “The legal and factual analysis of bribery and honest services fraud in the House report is exactly right” and “outlines compelling evidence of federal criminal violations.” 

    The theory was never “exactly” or even remotely right, as evidenced by the decision not to use it as a basis for impeachment. And yet, it’s back. Indeed, the greatest danger of the theory was not that it would ever pass muster in the federal court system but that it would be used (as here) in the political system to criminalize policy and legal disagreements. (Eliason recently defended the attacks on fellow lawyers who are represented those challenging election results or practices).

    In my testimony, I went into historical and legal detail to explain why this theory was never credible.  While it was gleefully presented by papers like the Washington Post, it ignored case law that rejected precisely this type of limitless definition of the offense.  As I told the House Judiciary Committee, the Supreme Court has repeatedly narrowed the scope of the statutory definition of bribery, including distinctions with direct relevance to the current controversy in cases like McDonnell v. United States, where the Court overturned the conviction of former Virginia governor Robert McDonnell. Chief Justice John Roberts eviscerated what he called the “boundless interpretation of the federal bribery statute.” The Court explained the such “boundless interpretations” are inimical to constitutional rights because they deny citizens the notice of what acts are presumptively criminal: “[U]nder the Government’s interpretation, the term ‘official act’ is not defined ‘with sufficient definiteness that ordinary people can understand what conduct is prohibited,’ or ‘in a manner that does not encourage arbitrary and discriminatory enforcement.’” 

    I will not repeat the litany of cases rejecting this type of broad interpretation. However, the case law did not matter then and it does not matter now to those who believe that the criminal code is endless flexible to meet political agenda.

    It doesn’t even matter that the Supreme Court reaffirmed prior rejections of such broad interpretations in a recent unanimous ruling written by Justice Elena Kagan. In Kelly v. United States, the Supreme Court threw out the convictions in the “Bridgegate” case involving the controversial closing of lanes on the George Washington Bridge to create traffic problems for the mayor of Fort Lee, N.J., who refused to endorse then-Gov. Chris Christie. The Court observed:

    “That requirement, this Court has made clear, prevents these statutes from criminalizing all acts of dishonesty by state and local officials. Some decades ago, courts of appeals often construed the federal fraud laws to “proscribe[] schemes to defraud citizens of their intangible rights to honest and impartial government.” McNally, 483 U. S., at 355. This Court declined to go along. The fraud statutes, we held in McNally, were “limited in scope to the protection of property rights.” Id., at 360. They did not authorize federal prosecutors to “set[] standards of disclosure and good government for local and state officials.” Ibid.”

    That is the argument that I raised in the impeachment against the proposed articles of impeachment — supported by a host of experts on MSNBC and CNN as well as Democratic members — that the Ukrainian allegations could be charged as mail and wire fraud as well as crimes like extortion.

    What is most disturbing is that, if there was an objection to voting irregularities or fraud, these legislators would be acting under their state constitutional authority. They would be investigated for carrying out their official duties under state law. Many of us can disagree with such objections. (I have stated repeatedly that I do not see the evidence of systemic voting problems to reverse such state results and  I have criticized President Trump’s rhetoric). However, when Democrats like Sen. Barbara Boxer (D., Cal.) challenged the certification of Ohio’s electoral votes in 2004, no one suggested criminal investigations. Nessel is threatening state legislators that, if they meet to discuss such objections, they might be targets of criminal investigations. That would seem an effort to use the criminal code for the purposes of intimidation or coercion. Imagine if this was U.S. Attorney General Bill Barr threatening Democratic legislators with possible criminal investigation for challenging Trump votes. The media would be apoplectic. Yet, when used against Republicans, major publications and politicians are celebrated for the use of the criminal code for such politically motivated threats.

    As with the attacks on Republican lawyers, the threats against Republican legislators has been met with utter silence in the media. Just the familiar sound of crickets.

  • More Than 200 Firearms Mysteriously Went Missing From Philadelphia Sheriff's Office, Investigation Finds
    More Than 200 Firearms Mysteriously Went Missing From Philadelphia Sheriff's Office, Investigation Finds

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 21:30

    More than 200 firearms mysteriously disappeared from a Philadelphia Sheriff’s Office between 1977 and 2015, a new report from the City Controller’s Office found last week.

    An investigation was sparked into the office after a confidential complaint was filed in 2019, according to CBS 3 Philly. The investigation took a year to unfold.

    The complaint initially alleged that 15 rifles and shotguns were missing from the office’s gun inventory, but the ensuing investigation revealed that 101 service firearms and 109 Protection From Abuse Act (PFA) weapons were also missing from the office’s inventory. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    City Controller Rebecca Rhynhart commented: “It’s unacceptable that more than 200 guns that should be in the Sheriff’s Office custody cannot be located. The public needs to trust that the Sheriff’s Office is a reliable steward of its own property, as well as the personal property given to the Sheriff’s Office for safekeeping.”

    She continued: “While many of the issues identified pre-date Sheriff Bilal’s administration, I hope that she will take quick action to track down the missing guns, if possible, and ensure proper maintenance of the gun inventory moving forward.”

    Sheriff Rochelle Bilal said changes will be implemented. The investigation revealed that many of the issued could be traced to inadequate record keeping and “no formal procedures” regarding inventory management.

    In the office’s armory, investigators found “guns piled on the floor as well as haphazardly in boxes, cabinets and barrels”. Some of the weapons were loaded. 

  • Every Sheriff In LA Region Refuses To Enforce Gavin Newsom's COVID Curfew
    Every Sheriff In LA Region Refuses To Enforce Gavin Newsom's COVID Curfew

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by Thomas Lifson via AmericanThinker.com,

    Sheriffs in 5 Southern California counties with a total population of 17.25 million people – equivalent to the fifth most populous state – are defying that state’s governor. They will not arrest people for violating the statewide curfew that Governor Gavin Newsom has imposed starting today, apparently on the belief that the virus wakes up, and goes out at 10 PM.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bill Melugin of KTTV, Fox 11 in Los Angeles (hat tip: Breitbart) contacted them about enforcing the statewide curfew:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some city police departments are also demurring:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Newsom has lost all credibility for restricting activity in the name of suppressing the spread of Covid.  He was caught and exposed flouting his own ridiculous strictures on eating in restaurants (put your mask back on between bites of food).  Public exposure of his mask-less attendance at a party full of lobbyists at one of the fanciest restaurants in the world with no social distancing was bad enough. But his subsequent lying, smirking  non-apology apology may well be the death knell for his political career.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    His behavior was in utter disregard of his own guidelines for Californians observing Thanksgiving:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Other sheriffs in Northern California, including Sacramento County, where the Governor now lives, are also refusing to enforce the curfew.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Newsom is facing an existing recall effort, with a deadline of March 17, 2021 to collect 1,495,709 valid signatures. In practice, because some signatures will be challenged, at least 1,700,000 signatures will be required to get the recall election on the ballot. According to Rescue California, which is sponsoring the recall effort, there is already a running start:

    In a telephone conversation with Paul Olson on November 18, whose company, GoCo Consulting, is doing the petition verification for the recall, he confirmed that his firm has already processed 494,000 signed petitions which have either just been turned in or are now being delivered to the county clerks around the state. Olson also confirmed that his firm is currently processing another 230,000 signatures.

    When combined with the 55,000 that were turned in earlier in the year, and the ones already signed but still being delivered, conservatively estimated at 60,000, this campaign has already collected over 800,000 signed recall petitions.

    Californians may go here and download hard copies of the recall petition and obtain up to 5 signatures for each copy, for submission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Californians have already recalled one governor, Gray Davis, which ended his political career. Newsom, who long has had his sights on the Oval Office, and who is related by marriage to Nancy Pelosi, is now the focus of public resentment over arbitrary restrictions in the name of Covid. It is a status he has earned.

  • Growing Food Bank Lines Across America Signal Economic Crisis Far From Over 
    Growing Food Bank Lines Across America Signal Economic Crisis Far From Over 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 20:35

    Millions of Americans face food and housing insecurity this holiday season. The unemployment rate stands around 6.9%, with more than ten million folks still out of work. Permanent job loss continues to soar, now about 3.8 million, as a double-dip recession becomes increasingly likely by year-end. 

    We recently pointed out that food bank lines continue to increase across the country as the virus-induced downturn continues to inflict financial devastation on the working poor. 

    Last weekend, the North Texas Food Bank (NTFB) handed out more than 600,000 pounds of food to 25,000 hungry people – one of the largest-ever food giveaways, explained NTFB officials. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Daily Mail has compiled a list of food banks across the country reporting a surge in demand ahead of the holidays next week. 

    On Friday, US military personnel handed out food in a “massive food drive” at a food bank in Arlington, Texas. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hundreds of cars were seen at the event organized by Tarrant Area Food Bank. It was described as the “largest food drive” in their history. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a woman rummaging through a food bank set up inside a church in Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A food bank in Fort Washington, Maryland, handing out care packages to hungry people. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Volunteers at a food bank in Los Angeles distributed 1,500 meals on Friday. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    People entering a drive-thru food bank in Montgomery, Alabama. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In New York City, a food bank is handing out care packages to hungry folks as the city continues to deal with depressionary unemployment amid a Covid winter. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Saturday, hundreds of cars were lined up for a food bank distribution in North Jersey. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A Twitter user records huge lines outside one food bank. No location was given. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A Milwaukee food bank this morning has a traffic jam of hungry people waiting for care packages. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Nationwide, food bank lines are surging ahead of the holiday season. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This all comes as the Covid winter begins, and the economic recovery is faltering. JPMorgan warned Friday that a dark winter is ahead.

    Citi econ surprise index clearly shows the recovery is stalling. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JPM chief economist Michael Feroli, who writes that while the economy powered through the July coronavirus wave, “at that time the reopening of the economy provided a powerful tailwind to growth. The economy no longer has that tailwind; instead it now faces the headwind of increasing restrictions on activity.” Meanwhile, “the holiday season—from Thanksgiving through New Year’s—threatens a further increase in cases. This winter will be grim, and we believe the economy will contract again in 1Q, albeit at “only” a 1.0% annualized rate.”

    In other words, the double-dip is about to hit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what about the “V-shaped” recovery?? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Internet searches for “food bank” jump this past week. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Food bank near me” also surges. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Remind you of anything? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And for those wondering if the virus-induced downturn in the economy is over – well – you might want to listen to SoftBank CEO Masa Son’s latest warning about an imminent economic crash. 

  • Pennsylvania Judge Throws Out Trump Campaign Lawsuit, Setting Stage For Supreme Court Showdown
    Pennsylvania Judge Throws Out Trump Campaign Lawsuit, Setting Stage For Supreme Court Showdown

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 20:28

    A federal judge on Saturday dismissed the Trump campaign’s lawsuit in Pennsylvania seeking to invalidate millions of votes, rejecting the “startling” request due to a lack of evidence and ruling that the state can move forward with certifying its election results. U.S. Middle District Judge Matthew Brann, an Obama appointee, ruled that the campaign presented “strained legal arguments without merit and speculative accusations” that were “unsupported by evidence.”

    The ruling is a major blow to the Trump campaign’s efforts to overturn election results, with Biden leading Trump by more than 81,000 votes in Pennsylvania.

    “In the United States of America, this cannot justify the disenfranchisement of a single voter, let alone all the voters of its sixth most populated state. Our people, laws, and institutions demand more,” the judge wrote.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump’s personal attorney Rudy Giuliani personally argued against the state’s motion to dismiss before Brann on Tuesday, arguing that the commonwealth should not certify its results and making claims of a vast Democratic conspiracy to steal the election. In reaching his conclusion, Brann said the campaign was not “formidably armed with compelling legal arguments and factual proof of rampant corruption” needed to win such a case.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “This court has been presented with strained legal arguments without merit and speculative accusations, unpled in the operative complaint and unsupported by evidence,” the judge wrote.

    The suit’s core claim was that certain Democratic-led counties had more lenient rules in accepting “defective” ballots or letting voters “cure” such ballots than Republican-led ones, which the campaign claimed violated the Constitution’s due process and equal protection guarantees. The state denied those claims and also said the campaign’s proposed remedy of disenfranchising tens of thousands of voters was implausible.

    Pressed by Brann on Tuesday if he was actually alleging voter fraud, Giuliani acknowledged that he was not. The judge said in his decision that while Pennsylvania law doesn’t explicitly allow for election officials to let voters cure their ballot errors, it also doesn’t forbid it, and the state’s highest court declined to clarify the issue.

    The campaign has also suggested that hundreds of thousands of ballots in Philadelphia and Pittsburgh should be invalidated because they were allegedly counted without proper oversight by Republican observers, exposing them to potential fraud. Claims tied to such allegations were left out of an amended complaint filed on Sunday but partially reinstated in a second revised complaint filed on Wednesday.

    The second amended complaint also added a proposal that Brann declare the entire Pennsylvania vote “defective” and let the Republican-controlled state legislature decide the election in favor of Trump. Civil rights groups on Friday evening blasted the argument and urged the judge to dismiss the case, saying it was based on an “incoherent conspiracy theory.”

    “That plaintiffs are trying to mix-and-match claims to bypass contrary precedent is not lost on the court,” Brann wrote.

    “These claims were meritless from the start and for an audience of one,” Pennsylvania Attorney General Josh Shapiro said in a statement. “The will of the people will prevail. These baseless lawsuits need to end.”

    The ruling is the highest-profile courtroom defeat for Trump in his attempt to overturn the election outcome. Suits filed by the campaign and its GOP allies have failed in Michigan, Georgia, Nevada and Arizona as judges declined to toss out millions of votes based on vague assertions by lawyers and sworn affidavits from voters who interpreted perceived irregularities as evidence of a Democratic conspiracy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    After Georgia certified its results on Friday, Michigan and now Pennsylvania are both likely to do so on Monday, leaving the president an uncertain path to flip enough electoral votes to reverse his defeat.

    Trump will now likely petition the Supreme Court: as Bloomberg notes, Pennsylvania, the largest of the six battleground states, was a particular focus of the Trump campaign’s legal challenges, with suits filed in both state and federal courts. The Trump campaign has suggested it will appeal, and Giuliani has said he sees the case as a “vehicle” to get the U.S. Supreme Court’s 6-3 conservative majority to decide the election.

    In other words, it’s all up to the Supreme Court now. For now, however, the Trump campaign said that it will seen an expedited appeal to the Third Circuit according to a statement issued by Rudy Giuliani, who said that he hopes that “the Third Circuit will be as gracious as Judge Brann in deciding our appeal one way or the other as expeditiously as possible” rather than “simply trying to run out the clock.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, as expected, Giuliani said that the final showdown will be in the Supreme Court: “this is another case that appears to be moving quickly to the United State Supreme Court.”

  • Do Trump Supporters Live In An Alternate Universe?
    Do Trump Supporters Live In An Alternate Universe?

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 20:10

    Authored by Bryce Buchanan via The Burning Platform blog,

    On Monday, in her MSNBC show, “Deadline”, Nicolle Wallace said that “right wing media”, like Fox were creating an “alternate reality” for their viewers.  Nicolle said, “You now have a true, a true alternate reality…  I mean, they are pumping flagrant lies into millions of viewers. They’re interviewing lunatics..”  Nicolle’s guest, the brilliant Al Sharpton (of Tawana Brawley hoax fame) said, “We’re now in a nation where facts don’t matter. You make up facts. And not only do you have an alternative reality, how do you debate someone that is dealing with a totally fictitious premise?

    This talk of the alternate, fictional reality inhabited by Trump supporters has been expressed many times by those on the left.  After the Nunes memo was released, exposing parts of the Russia Hoax, CNN’s Brian Stelter said that Sean Hannity was promoting the Nunes lies and he called the story an “alternate reality”.  Stelter’s viewers knew for sure that Trump colluded with Russia,  just like the honorable Adam Schiff said.  Stelter was proud that his viewers knew the truth.

    Regarding the current claims of possible election fraud, Stelter said, “This is not an alternative reality. This is a parallel universe of disinformation.”  Other reporters have added that Fox is, “ presenting you with absolute utter lies and nonsense and conspiracy theories.  … These viewers slash victims are not able to differentiate between fantasy and reality. That’s dangerous.”

    It is instructive to make a list of ‘Things That Are True’, as asserted by the leftist media and contrast it with the ‘Delusions’ that are commonly held by the foolish Trump supporters

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the list below, “T” indicates the certainly ‘True Things’, as reported by the very wise people in leftist media.  “D” indicates the ‘Delusions’ held by the Trump supporters, who “are not able to differentiate between fantasy and reality.”

    The List:

    T:  This was a very clean and honest election.  There is no evidence of fraud. Claims to the contrary are baseless conspiracy theories.

    D:  There is massive evidence of election fraud of every type, including programmed computer cheating, dead people voting, and massive dumps of Biden votes in the middle of the night.  There is also extremely strong statistical evidence of vote total manipulation.

    *  *  *

    T: Biden is “President Elect” because the news media have declared that to be the case.  He will be the next President, and there is no room at all for dispute about that fact.

    D: The media do not determine who is President.  The next President will be determined when he has enough certified and unchallenged votes.  We are nowhere near that point.

    *  *  *

    T: The story about Hunter Biden’s laptop is “Russian disinformation”.  It’s designed to make you think Joe Biden did something wrong, but Joe doesn’t do things that are wrong.  Joe will bring integrity back to the White House.

    D: The laptop belongs to Hunter Biden.  Russia has nothing at all to do with it.  There is a massive amount of information on the laptop demonstrating schemes to enrich the Biden family by selling influence.  Tony Bobulinski, worked closely with the Bidens to set up some of the questionable transactions.  Tony met with Joe and said Joe was fully onboard with these business plans.  Joe got a percentage of the foreign money.  Hunter made deals with high ranking Chinese communists, plus lucrative deals with several other countries.  Joe is thoroughly compromised.  The way that the MSM and all of social media worked to hide this story is shocking.

    *  *  *

    T: President Obama set a good example of peaceful transition of power.  He did everything he could to help President Trump.

    D: President Obama, and ‘dirty cops’ at the head of his intelligence and law enforcement agencies planned and orchestrated a plan to damage the incoming President.  “The Resistance” has continued to this day.  Trump has never had a single day when he was not under attack by these forces.

    *  *  *

    T: Trump and his supporters are white supremacists.  Trump said the white supremacists in Charlottesville were “good people”.  He seems unwilling to condemn them.  Trumps desire to protect our southern border proves that he is racist.  His desire to ban all Muslims from the country proves that he is a bigot.

    D: Biden started his campaign with the Charlottesville lie and he repeated it often.  He once told a black audience that Republicans wanted “to put y’all back in chains”.  He works hard to keep blacks on the Democrat Voting Plantation, even going so far as to telling a black person, “you ain’t black” if you don’t vote for Joe.  Trump condemned white supremacists in Charlottesville and has done so many times since then.  Borders are not racist.  Countries have borders.  Trump did not ban Muslims.  He wanted to restrict entry from a few pro-Jihadist countries.

    *  *  *

    T: One of the biggest problems facing black people today is that police are shooting large numbers of innocent black people for no reason at all.  America is a racist country where black people have no chance because of institutional racism.  Obama said racism “is still part of our (white people’s) DNA that’s passed on”.  A few days ago, the twice elected President said racism was a “defining feature” of our country, adding that many Americans were, “a little disturbed by the advances that African Americans had made”.  “Whiteness” is the problem.  The Black Lives Matter movement may be the solution.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    D: Racist whites killing blacks for no reason is as big a problem as nooses in Nascar garages; as big a problem as racist attacks on people like Jussie Smollett.  Black bodies are piling up in some American cities, but it’s black thugs doing the killing, not the police and not white people.   There is no political advantage in being concerned about these black lives, so they are ignored.  BLM is a Marxist hate group that does not even seek to create racial harmony.  If BLM worked to keep black families together or create better schools, that would be great, but that is not their true interest.

    *  *  *

    T: Trump caused the hate that we see in our country.  Trump and his supporter are filled with hate and deserve to be punished after Biden is President.  The violence we have seen during Trumps Presidency has mostly been cause by white supremacist Trump supporters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    D: The violence and hateful rhetoric have mostly come from the left.  From day 1, Trump, his family and his supporter have been subjected to vile attacks, both verbal and physical.  The violent mobs in the streets of many American cities are Antifa and BLM leftists.  Their “mostly peaceful” protests are the most costly manmade damage to American property in history.

    *  *  *

    T: Most of the big things that people need can be free if we get the right people in positions of power.  In a decent country, politicians will provide a guaranteed income, free school, free housing and food for people who want it, and free medical care.  Good politicians would also give most of these benefits, including free health care, to anyone who comes across our open border.  It’s the right thing to do.

    D: Nothing but the air you breathe is free.  Politicians cannot “provide” anything that they do not take from a productive citizen.  Politicians can only provide coercion and deficit spending.  Only  productive citizens can provide goods and services.  In countries where politicians take total control of the economy, economic devastation follows, always and everywhere.  It’s the wrong thing to do.

    *  *  *

    I agree with Nicolle Wallace that a huge number of Americans have a false impression of reality because they are being told lies by their media.  The people who constantly hear these lies do live in an “alternate reality”.

    I also agree that this is very, very dangerous.

  • Goldman Capitulates On "Major" Stimulus, Now Sees Just $700BN Fiscal Aid In Early 2021
    Goldman Capitulates On "Major" Stimulus, Now Sees Just $700BN Fiscal Aid In Early 2021

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 19:45

    Back on September 24, long after we repeatedly said that any hopes for another major stimulus before the election (and certainly after, absent a Democratic sweep) was nothing but a pipe dream, Goldman – which until that point had predicted that Congress would pass a $1.5-$2 trillion fiscal stimulus “shortly” – threw in the towel and said it’s “base case” no longer anticipates a stimulus before 2021, resulting in a 50% cut to its Q4 GDP forecast, from 6% growth to 3% (as a reminder, on Friday JPM slashed its Q1 2020 GDP estimate to negative 1%, i.e., a double dip recession; we expect Goldman will follow suit).

    Well, fast forward two months, when in its latest prediction, the overly optimistic Goldman Sachs has fully capitulated to the political reality, and in a note published on Saturday, its chief political economist Alec Phillips writes that with Congress having recessed for Thanksgiving without progress on fiscal relief measures, “the odds that Congress will pass a major fiscal package before year end” have been further reduced. Instead, Goldman now believes that “a much smaller package of temporary extensions looks more likely” although even that may be overly optimistic in light of the unprecedented polarization that is emerging in Congress, a “return” to fiscal conservatism among republicans (this usually happens any time a Democratic president is in power) and hopes that a covid vaccine may be imminent.

    Additionally, according to Goldman, “the longer Congress waits to pass further fiscal measures, the smaller the bill is likely to get” because while increasing virus spread poses near-term risks, by Q1 2021 the outlook for widespread vaccine distribution will restrain the amount of fiscal support Congress will want to provide.

    * *  *

    While we find it amusing that we predicted more than three months ago what the top political strategist at Goldman Sachs only now concedes, here are some excerpts from Phillips’ “eureka” moment, why he no longer expects any sizable stimulus:

    Additional fiscal support still looks likely but Congress has made virtually no progress since the election. With Congress now on Thanksgiving recess this further reduces the odds that Congress will pass major COVID relief legislation in December. Instead, it looks more likely that Congress will add provisions to the spending bill that Congress is likely to pass to fund the government past Dec. 11, when the current spending authority expires (there is a chance a one-week temporary extension could push the deadline to Dec. 18). This would likely include at least an extension of expanded unemployment benefits, which expire Dec. 26. We estimate that the expansion of eligibility and extended duration of benefits would affect 11-12 million individuals collecting benefits and add slightly more than $13bn/month to benefit spending compared with letting those provisions expire.

    However, in a preemptive backtracking, Phillips admits that “even a simple temporary extension of unemployment benefits is far from certain” since Congress failed to extend the $600/week extra benefit that expired in late July which, at the time, seemed likely to be a forcing event for broader fiscal action. Other deadlines, like the end of restrictions on airline furloughs, have also failed to spur action. So while Goldman believes the odds of an extension are fairly good, “there is a risk that Congress fails to extend these provisions.”

    The Georgie runoff elections on Jan 5 present another complication. As Goldman notes, “Republican campaign messages have emphasized the benefits of divided government, while Democrats have focused on Republican opposition to a large relief package as a reason to support Democrats in the runoff.” Senate Democratic Whip Durbin recently indicated that Democrats would emphasize Republican opposition to the House Democratic relief package, saying “if they do nothing in the post-election session on COVID relief, that may affect the vote on Jan. 5 in Georgia.”

    In assessing the outcome of the Georgia race, Goldman says that if Congress enacts a few short-term extensions in December, this would probably push the broader debate past President-elect Biden’s inauguration on January 20, 2021. For example, Congress might extend the unemployment provisions through February 2021, which would likely allow enough time to work out a broader agreement once the Georgia results are clear and President-elect Biden has taken office. In such a scenario, Goldman expects legislation to become law sometime in February, with provisions taking effect in February or March.

    The GA runoffs, which will determine control of the Senate, will also define the amount of total fiscal support, which will also depend on the extent of renewed virus spread, and the outlook for vaccine distribution. According to Phillips, “worse-than-expected virus spread and new restrictions on activity seem likely to lead to a higher total price tag for additional fiscal support, while good news on vaccine development and distribution is likely to limit the amount of additional support.” Separately, while developments in these areas could surprise to the positive or negative in the near-term, the outlook is likely to be on an improving trend over the next several months, as more of the population gets vaccinated. If so, the longer Congress waits to enact broad COVID-relief legislation, the smaller the total amount of additional fiscal support might be.

    Covid aside, Senate control remains by far the most important factor in determining the total amount of fiscal support. In the event that Democrats win both Georgia seats on Jan. 5, Goldman expects Congress to pass fiscal measures in the range of $2 trillion (still, “while a “Blue Wave” outcome in which Democrats won a Senate majority with seats to spare might have led to a larger package, a 50-50 Senate with Vice President-Elect Harris casting the tie-breaking vote might restrain the size somewhat.)

    As an side, the difference between 49 and 50 Democratic seats in the Senate is critical, for two reasons according to Goldman: First, with 50 seats Democrats would control the Senate agenda and would be able to bring a larger fiscal package to a vote. Second, even if enough Republicans did not support such a package, Democratic leaders could use the reconciliation process to pass most of those measures with only 51 votes (i.e., no Republican support).

    In any event, under a divided Congress fiscal stimulus is likely to be much smaller and the size is likely to grow smaller the longer it takes Congress to pass legislation. Under Goldman’s base case that Republicans hold at least 51 seats in 2021 (prediction markets imply a 77% probability of this), Goldman now assumes that Congress would pass fiscal measures totaling $1 trillion (just under 5% of GDP), with most of the spending in 2021.

    It gets worse: since by early 2021, it is virtually certain that we will have actionable positive vaccine news, this combined with a likely delay until early 2021 in passing major fiscal legislation, “suggests that the amount is likely to be smaller.”

    As a result, Goldman now assumes only $700bn in fiscal measures, in bad news for insolvent state and local governments which had been holding out hope for a $2.2+ trillion stimulus package as Nancy Pelosi demanded in October (Goldman still thinks such a package would still address the same components it had previously expected: unemployment benefit extension, small business support, a limited amount of aid to states (likely through education grants, as in the prior Senate Republican bill), and funds for public health efforts.)

    * * *

    One final point on the Treasury’s recent decision not to extend some emergency Fed facilities: according to Phillips this does not meaningfully change the prospects for stimulus.

    Treasury Sec. Mnuchin has called on Congress to reallocate the $455bn in ESF funds that he estimates have not been used by Fed facilities or direct lending programs. Along with $138bn in unspent Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) funds, there are $593bn in “unused” CARES Act funds that congressional Republicans propose to reallocate to other uses. However, these funds are relevant mainly for political purposes. Since none of those funds are expected to be spent for the original purposes, rescinding them would not change projected spending. Congress can reallocate these funds to new programs where they would then be spent – unemployment benefits or a second round of PPP loans, for example—but this would have the exact same budgetary effect as leaving the funds in place and spending “new” money on those programs.

    However, the reallocation of these funds might lead Republicans to support a larger package than they had previously. For example, if Republican leaders count the $593Nn in “reallocated” funds against a hypothetical $700bn package, they might announce that their legislation spends only $107bn. This would be true in one very narrow technical sense (a concept known in federal accounting as “budget authority”) but it would not actually reduce the impact on the deficit, nor the official cost estimate the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) would produce. Still, Republican support for reallocating these funds to new uses suggests openness to a package of nearly $600bn, slightly larger than the prior Senate Republican proposal of slightly more than $500bn. According to Goldman, the need to compromise with congressional Democrats and the incoming Biden Administration would likely push this total up slightly, to around the $700Bn the bank expects.

    * * *

    Bottom line: Nancy Pelosi’s stubborn unwillingness to compromise with either Senate or White House negotiators, and trim her “ask” from $2.2TN to the upper $1TN’s, means that Democrats are now facing a dramatically reduced stimulus, which in turn would have substantial consequences for net treasury issuance in 2021 (the Treasury already has access to some $1.6 trillion in cash mostly from Bill issuance), and potentially for stocks – which continue to expect a “major” stimulus – as well as the broader economy, which will continue to suffer as the tailwind from the massive stimulus passed in early 2020 wears off. In fact, one could argue that without a sizable stimulus, and with very likely delays in implementing nationwide covid vaccines, the GDP contraction in Q1 which JPM already expects in its base case, will only get worse in Q2 and eventually devolve into a full-blown double-dip depression.  What Congress does then will depend on just how vindictive a Republican Senate at that time with an ostensibly democrat administration.

    Of course, if Goldman is right and if Congress is indeed neutered, this means that the market will shift its expectations for a major stimulus to come from the Fed instead, with traders already expecting a doubling in QE some time in early 2021 so the central bank can monetize all the $2.4 trillion in net issuance in 2021.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But for that to happen, a new “crisis” will first have to take place as we explained last weekend

  • UNICEF Finally Admits: "Schools Are Not Main Drivers Of COVID Among Children"
    UNICEF Finally Admits: "Schools Are Not Main Drivers Of COVID Among Children"

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 19:20

    Via 21stCenturyWire.com,

    One of the easier targets for social demolition by western authoritarians and bureaucracies has been schools.

    Aided and abetted by a hysterical mainstream media permanently geared towards maintaining a constant level of public fear, politicians have been able to deceive worried parents and teachers who may genuinely believe that COVID19 poses some sort of overall health threat to children (which it does not), as well as the widely-held canard that asymptomatic children are somehow ‘spreading the virus’ to other adults, the old and vulnerable.

    Numerous scientific studies have clearly shown how this is not the case. But by sustaining these widely held myths, governments have been able to successfully level primary and secondary education across the western hemisphere and retard the educational and social development of hundreds of millions of young people in the process.

    It is yet unclear why governments have been so keen to do this, but it’s not at all surprising that the populace has gone along with the theatre, especially after being primed by decades of ‘health and safety’ culture and corporatisation of public policy.

    It’s crucial to note: all of these findings literally destroy the argument for panic-driven policies like mass testing and mass vaccinations.

    After many months of sitting idle on the matter, some institutions, like UNICEF are now speak up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bianca Quilantan at Politico reports…

    Data from 191 countries shows no consistent link between reopening schools and increased rates of coronavirus infection, UNICEF reported in an analysis Thursday.

    In releasing its first comprehensive assessment of the pandemic’s effects on children, the United Nations agency said “there is strong evidence that, with basic safety measures in place, the net benefits of keeping schools open outweigh the costs of closing them.”

    “Schools are not a main driver of community transmission, and children are more likely to get the virus outside of school settings,” UNICEF said.

    The numbers: As of November, 572 million students — about 33 percent of all students — are being affected by 30 nationwide school closures, the report found. At their peak, school closures affected almost 90 percent of students around the world.

    Kids accounted for one in nine reported Covid-19 infections [ie. PCR positive tests] worldwide, the report found.

    “While children can get sick and can spread the disease, this is just the tip of the pandemic iceberg,” said Henrietta Fore, UNICEF executive director. “Disruptions to key services and soaring poverty rates pose the biggest threat to children. The longer the crisis persists, the deeper its impact on children’s education, health, nutrition and well-being. The future of an entire generation is at risk.”

    Dropoff in services: From surveys across 140 countries, UNICEF estimates that 70 percent of mental health services for children and adolescents have been disrupted during the pandemic, with 65 percent of countries reporting a decrease in home visits by social workers in September compared to last year.

    Nearly one-third of the countries saw a drop of at least 10 percent in coverage for health services. That includes routine vaccinations, outpatient care for childhood infectious diseases and maternal health services.

    Across 135 countries, there has been a 40 percent decline in the coverage of nutrition services for women and children. The number of children hurt by multidimensional poverty — characterized by poor health, education and living standards, in addition to the traditional monetary standards — is estimated to have increased by 15 percent globally by mid-2020.

    Transmission findings: Child-to-child transmission of the coronavirus in schools was “uncommon and not the primary cause” of infections among children who caught the virus while attending school, according to a July assessment of 31 countries conducted by the European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control…

    Continue this story at Politico…

    Perhaps they are finally waking up the catastrophic situation many societies now face because of the suicidal, reactionary policies that governments are pursuing.

  • Watch: Protesters Set Fire To Guatemala's Congress Building
    Watch: Protesters Set Fire To Guatemala's Congress Building

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 11/21/2020 – 18:55

    Anti-government protesters stormed Guatemala’s congressional building on Saturday afternoon and set fire to it amid increasing frustrations with the government over a new budget that would slash educational and health spending, reported AP News.

    Videos on Twitter show hundreds of protesters cheering outside the building in Guatemala City as it erupts in flames. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    BBC reports, “fire services have managed to put the fire out, but the extent of the damage is not yet known.”

    The incident comes as thousands of demonstrators lined the front of the National Palace in Guatemala City. They say legislators secretly passed a budget for the next fiscal year during a period where the country was distracted by recent hurricanes (Hurricane Eta and Iota) and the virus pandemic. They also allege government officials prioritized infrastructure projects to companies with close ties with the government, adding that the new budget neglects to allocate monies for social and economic programs to help the working-poor amid the virus pandemic. 

    Vice-President Guillermo Castillo denounced the burning of the congressional building on his Twitter account: 

    “Anyone who is proven to have participated in the criminal acts will be punished with the full force of the law.” He said people have the right to protest, “but neither can we allow people to vandalize public or private property.”

    Mass protests were also seen nearby. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President Alejandro Giammattei said meetings had been arranged with various groups to change the controversial budget.

    On Friday, Vice-President Guillermo Castillo condemned the budget and said that both the president and himself should resign “for the good of the country.”

    Guatemala’s human rights prosecutor Jordan Rodas said the budget was a “devious blow to the people because the country was between natural disasters, there are signs of government corruption, clientelism in the humanitarian aid.” 

    Roman Catholic Church officials in Guatemala were also displeased with the budget, asking the president to veto the budget on Friday. 

    Add Guatemala to the list of countries experiencing social unrest. 

       

      • Horseman: "The Bond Bull And Commodity Bear Markets Are Over" – Here's How To Trade It
        Horseman: "The Bond Bull And Commodity Bear Markets Are Over" – Here's How To Trade It

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 18:30

        After a remarkable start to the year, surging almost 30% when all other funds were tumbling, the fund formerly known as Horseman Global until its recent purchase by CIO Russell Clark (hence its current name Russell Clark Investment Management), has had a turbulent seven months, at one point in the summer even forcing the famously bearish hedge fund to throw in the towel on his well-known bearish/deflationary position and to not only turn net long for the first time in a decade (as we reported last month), but to shift its global outlook from deflationary to inflationary.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Unfortunately for Clark, just as he pulled a 180, going long such cyclical sectors as banks, mining and metals, and industrials while going aggressively short industrials (a bet on higher rates), a deflationary wave spurned by surging covid cacses hammered stocks and in October his fund lost 7.3%, bringing what was once a gain of as much as 25% YTD to just above 0%…

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        … something not lost on his LPs with the fund’s AUM dropping to just $91MM as of Oct 31, down 9% from the $100MM as of Sept 30.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        And since for most funds, $100MM is the critical minimum capital that most hedge funds need to remain viable, Clark may soon be facing extinction unless he can quickly turn around his performance, which for years suffered from fighting the Fed head on.

        Which is not to say that Clark doesn’t think he can do it.

        In his latest letter, the hedge fund manager blames his recent volatility on the market’s wild swings from a deflationary to a reflationary mode and back again (incidentally he could have just bought bitcoin which goes up no matter which of the two themes is prevalent and already be up more than 160% for the year), and in his latest slow the flood of redemption requests, Clark writes that one thing he is good at “is working out when a bull market is over” (referring to the nearly 4 decade-long bull market in bonds), a skill which the formerly bearish hedge funder thinks will allow him to position appropriately for what comes next (which reminds us that David Einhorn did a similar thing last month when he said that the tech bubble burst when the Nasdaq cracked on Sept 2, only for the S&P to soar to new all time highs just weeks later).

        This is how Clark lays out his reflationary thesis, starting with the hayday of the carry trade era in the early 2000s:

        All bull markets (and bear markets for that matter) have some combination of currency, bond and commodity cycle that is working for or against them. In my first decade, which started at the top of the dot com bubble, the overwhelming trade was the tightening of commodity markets, with the standout trade being iron ore moving from USD 20 a tonne to USD 200 a tonne. The commodity bull market, and a dovish Federal Reserve allowed “carry trading” – a very popular hedge fund trade – to become extremely lucrative, and the hedge fund industry prospered. 2000 to 2010 was the decade of the hedge fund. Other carry trades such as convergence trades in Europe (short bund long peripheral bonds) and in the US (long mortgage backed securities, short treasuries) also took off, until 2008 marked the beginning of the end.

        Things changed after the financial crisis, but especially after the 2010 DOJ crackdown on expert networks (thanks in no small part to this website), which also ended the “information arbitrage” (read legal insider trading) popularized by Steve Cohen and countless spin off funds. To Clark, the defining feature of the last decade was not just the chronic inability of hedge funds to generate alpha (as they no longer had access to inside information presented as “expert networking”) but the collapse of the carry trade and the advent of the capital arbitrage trade, i.e., issuing debt to buyback stock, something we have spent hundreds of articles discussing over the past decade:

        The 2010s has really been the reversal of the 2000s carry trade. In fact, for many years we ran what could be called a negative spread trade – long bonds, and short emerging markets and cyclicals that worked fantastically well based off the oversupply of commodity markets. But if the 2000s was about the carry trade, then 2010s were about the capital arbitrage trade. Capital arbitrage is basically issuing debt to buy equity, either through M&A or buybacks to create “value”. Apple has been very successful at issuing large amounts of bonds to buy back shares. With 40-year Apple bonds only yielding 2.8%, this is a no brainer trade. The investment firms best placed to benefit from such arbitrage has been private equity, and without question the 2010s have belonged to the private equity industry.

        Which brings us to today when, as hinted above, Clark calls an end to the “cap arb” trade. It is here also that the formerly bearish investor explains why he shed his bearish bias, pointing to the Fed’s helicopter money which “essentially fixed yields to allow governments to spend as much as they want in order to maintain economic growth.” This took any fundamentally-based bearish trades off the table – for the simple reason that there is no longer anything to be bearish about when the Fed controls the bond market – and “the upshot of this is that” Clark no no longer has to worry about private sector shenanigans: “all I need to do is focus on government bond yields.”

        Covid-19 and the response to it by Western central banks have made calling the top in this “capital arbitrage trade” much easier. Previously, I would be looking at government bond yields, and wondering how much corporate bond spreads could widen, particularly if problems in clearinghouses and autocallables came to the fore. When they did come to the fore in March, the Federal Reserve essentially lashed corporate debt yields to treasury yields. It also essentially fixed yields to allow governments to spend as much as they want in order to maintain economic growth. The upshot of this is that I no longer need to worry about private sector shenanigans (of which there is plenty), all I need to do is focus on government bond yields.

        Which brings us to the punchline, and why after being a devout deflationist, Clark now sees inflation as inevitable and perhaps imminent: “I am bearish government bonds. As stated above, markets decided October was deflationary.” And yet, not everything traded deflationary in October: “commodity markets with the exception of oil were marking inflation. Many commodities were up, some significantly. US corn, Chinese corn, crude palm oil, natural gas, natural rubber, the CRB Raw Industrial Index, Chinese pork, Brazilian rice to name a few. Even the US oil market looks to be tightening rapidly.”

        Additionally, and as we noted yesterday when we showed the record disconnect between US and Chinese 10Y yields…

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        … Clark writes that Chinese bonds have also gone their own way this year, with rising interest rates: “Why buy a 40 year Apple bond, when a Chinese 2 year bond offers the same yield in a potentially appreciating currency?”

        There is another big change the former “Horseman” points out:

        When we look at money supply M2 measures in Europe and Japan, Japanese M2 is growing at the fastest pace since the 1980s. Eurozone has the fastest pace since 2007. If M2 is growing rapidly, then why do these nations still need negative interest rates? Especially if a vaccine has been found.

        While the answer is self-explanatory (the liquidity is not going into the broader economy but is merely serving to backstop risk prices), Clark derives two conclusions:

        • One is that the commodity bear market is over.
        • And two, the bond bull market is also over.

        Incidentally, Clark is not the only one who believes the commodity bear market is over. In his latest Bear Traps report, Larry McDonald quotes a hedge fund manager who makes an interesting point:

        The Fed could be in a tricky spot when they meet in December. The pressure to ease is significant given increased cases/mitigation measures, especially as fiscal impasse continues. However, financial conditions have never been easier.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        It’s a problem central banks at ELB face post-market stabilization, how to be countercyclical. This month, US CCCs (junk of the junk) are outperforming everything in credit, Goldman FCIs on multi-year lows (easy financial conditions), NYSE stocks % above the 200-day ma at 82% (the 2016 – 2019 high was 75%!). Market participants don’t fear the downside. shorts are gone, options hedging not happening much, the sentiment is bullish, hedge funds have the most net exposure in 5 years. If there’s one thing the market teaches over and over, is it’s better to fade the crowd than to chase it. We are near term cautious, bullish (commodities, EM) for 2021.

        Clark admits that for now it is unclear what the immediate implications of these two “markets” being over are, noting that it is unlikely that we get another decade like 2010 of carry trades “given yields are so low everywhere, that could be a problem.” That said, he is confident that this “capital arbitrage” trade looks to have very poor risk reward from here.

        For that reason, Clark is now focusing his shorts on companies that have benefited from low bond yields and low commodity prices – utilities, private equity and infrastructure assets. To those one could also add growth and momentum stocks, which as we showed yesterday, have a record high duration, making them extremely vulnerable to rising rates.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        His final message is to those who wonder how he can short Private Equity firms: “People who wonder how we can short Private Equity firms have forgotten what happened to listed hedge funds through the 2010s!”

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Clark then muses some more on this topic in his Sector Allocation section:

        According to Deloitte, Private Equity assets have grown from less than USD 2 trillion in 2010, to over USD 4.5 trillion by 2019. Private Equity has many benefits over public funds. Leverage can be applied to companies, and short term losses can be tolerated while a firm builds market share. Private Equity managers can also choose when to sell assets. Over the decade, secondary buyouts, that is when a portfolio company owned by private equity is sold to another private equity buyer has increased from USD134bn in 2009 to USD600bn in 2019.

        One huge tailwind for private equity has been falling corporate bond yields. During the financial crisis, high yield debt yielded 18%. As of today, that yield is 4.9%, close to the lowest on record. Corporate debt to GDP has also reached a record share of US GDP at 55% in Q2 2020, well in excess of levels seen in 1991, 2000 and 2007. A change in the interest rate environment would likely be negative for the private equity industry.

        And while all that may be correct, and both listed hedge funds and the PE industry in general is facing the all too real danger of rising rates, at this point when every single redemption request matters a far more important question for Clark is what happens to one specific unlisted hedge fund namely his own, unless he manages a “home run” month in the very near future.

      • Do Not Trust Governments With The Control Of Money
        Do Not Trust Governments With The Control Of Money

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 18:00

        Authored by Richard Ebeling via The American Institute for Economic Research,

        If there one thing that is fairly certain in this life – besides the seeming inescapability of death and taxes – is that once someone is appointed to almost any position in the political and bureaucratic structures of a government they soon discover how important and essential is the organization of which they are a part for the well-being of the nation. The country could not exist without it, along with its increasing budget and expanded authority. This applies to the Federal Reserve, America’s central bank, no less than other parts of government. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The news media has reported that the apparently unlikely appointment of Dr. Judy Shelton to the Federal Reserve Board of Governors probably will be successfully maneuvered through the full Senate confirmation process. Shelton would then sit on the Federal Reserve Board filling the balancing a term that ends in 2024 and then made eligible for a 14-year term. Hers has been one of the more controversial nominations to the Fed in recent years, with critics fervently expressing their negative views of her. 

        For instance, Tony Fratto, a former Treasury official and deputy press secretary under George W. Bush, was recently quoted as saying that Shelton’s appointment would be “a discredit to the Senate and the Fed. It screams. Nothing at all is serious. Not us. Not you. Not them.”

        Mainstream Economists Against Anyone for Gold

        Back in August of this year, over one hundred academic and business economists issued an open letter to members of the U.S. Senate calling for rejection of her nomination to the Fed. Among those who signed were some economics Nobel Laureates, including Robert Lucas and Joseph Stiglitz. They insisted on her unfitness for such an appointment. Why? They said: “She has advocated a return to the gold standard; she has questioned the need for federal deposit insurance; she has even questioned the need for a central bank at all.” 

        They also accused her of hypocrisy, saying that Shelton had changed her stance on Federal Reserve policy and the institution’s relevance based simply on a desire to be appointed to the Fed board, and to serve the wishes of the president who had nominated her. So, she stands damned if she opposes the Fed with her call for a gold-backed currency, and she is damned if she modifies her positions on monetary policy supposedly to be more palatable to the Senators deciding her professional fate. Clearly, her critics would only stop being critical if they were somehow convinced that Judy Shelton truly loved the Fed, hated the gold standard, and supported “activist” monetary policy and interest rate manipulation; and for the full 14 years of her term on the Fed Board. 

        Political campaigns are full of people who say that they are drawn to higher echelon government employment so they can “give back” to or “serve” the country, and no doubt there are some who are seriously sincere when they say so. But who can deny that what also appeals to such people, and many others who are far more crudely opportunistic, is the attraction of being a “player” and an “insider” in the various halls of political power and decision-making in determining the bigger picture of the “shape-of-things-to-come?” 

        And it may be that Judy Shelton, based on her own statements of desiring to “serve” the country in this particular capacity, truly wants to, even with all her apparent changing views and emphases. Or maybe it’s all a game to say what she thinks others want and need to hear so that will approve her as a Board member of the Federal Reserve, and then sit at the Big Boy’s – oh, I mean the Big Person’s – table.  

        The Real Issue is the Case for Gold, Not a Person’s Sincerity  

        Be that as it may, the real issues concern whether her views on gold and the Federal Reserve are reasonable or not as useful input into the decision-making process of Fed monetary policy. To begin with, there is a far longer history of human societies going back to the ancients in which gold or silver or some other “real” commodity has served as the medium of exchange, the money-good facilitating transactions. The period of history in which mankind has primarily relied upon fiat or paper money currencies only covers about the last one hundred years. 

        Now, merely because an idea or an institution has been around a long time does not prove its validity or continuing usefulness. A variety of bad ideas and bad institutions beclouded human betterment for many centuries until they were finally overturned and replaced by other ideas and institutions considered more in line with bringing about improvements in the human social, economic, and political condition. 

        Fundamentally, the case for a gold standard has been based on the idea that governments have been notorious in the misuse of their capacity to turn the handle of the monetary printing press to create the money needed to fund their expenditures, rather than fully rely upon the collection of taxes. By this means, governments are able to get around the necessity of telling their citizens the truth concerning the actual cost of the activities it wishes to undertake. This was understood by many economists of differing policy persuasions.

        “Progressive” Richard T. Ely Challenged Arbitrary Monetary Policy

        As an example, Richard T. Ely (1854-1943) is usually viewed as one of the early and successful proponents of the interventionist-welfare state in America in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Having earned his bachelor’s and master’s degrees at Columbia University in New York in the second half of the 1870s, he went off to complete his studies in Imperial Germany. He came back imbued with the economic ideas and policy prescriptions of the German Historical School, with its emphasis on pragmatism and expediency as the needed basis for guiding governments in regulating industry and pursuing various forms of redistribution of wealth. He was also one of the founders of the American Economic Association in 1885 and a leading figure in the American Progressive Movement in the 1890s and early decades of the 20th century. 

        In his co-authored textbook, Outlines of Economics (1893, 4th revised ed. 1926) Ely highlighted the abuse with which governments – including the U.S. government during the Civil War of the 1860s – had used the issuance of paper or fiat money to fund expenditures with serious inflationary consequences for the citizens of countries experiencing such dangerous power by those in political authority. And why governments have little or no incentive to ever rein in their monetary mischiefs: 

        “The supply of gold, as we have seen, is subject to variations arising from such influences as the discovery of new deposits, the exhaustion of old ones, and changes in the methods of handling the ores. Variations in gold production are reflected in movements of the general level of prices.  

        “The supply of fiat money, it is argued, could be arbitrarily controlled by government and its purchasing power could be kept more nearly stable. Closely scrutinized, this particular argument for fiat money turns into the strongest of the arguments against it. Under practical conditions, experience has shown, governments find it much easier to expand than to contract their issues of paper money. 

        “Expansion permits larger expenditures; it is, for the time being a substitute for taxation; it raises prices and stimulates business. Contraction on the other hand, is at the expense of an immediate increase in taxation; it calls for rigid economy on the part of the government; it has for the time being a depressing effect upon business activities. 

        “With all of its shortcomings, the gold standard has the great advantage that its variations, largely the result of the play of the forces of the market, are beyond the arbitrary control of government.” (p. 259)

        J. Laurence Laughlin and the Perverse Incentives of Paper Money

        We may use one more example, but this time by an economist with nearly the exact opposite of Richard Ely’s public policy views. J. Laurence Laughlin (1850-1933) earned his PhD from Harvard University, and became a founder of the economics department at the University of Chicago in 1892. He was an advocate of the establishment of a central bank in the United States in the years leading up to the opening of the Federal Reserve in 1914. He is also often considered a critic of the traditional quantity theory of money. On general matters of economic policy, Laughlin was a strong proponent of a general laissez-faire, free market society. 

        In his Money and Prices (1919), Laughlin also emphasized the danger of paper currencies not connected to gold by redemption requirements to prevent governments from taking advantage of their capacity to increase the amount of paper money in circulation:  

        “The very existence of paper [money] issues, originating in a wrong method of borrowing [by the government], is a constant menace. The mere lapse of time in which no injury has been incurred unfortunately serves to lull the fear of anger. If retained, such issues are a suggestion for similar crude expansions in the future, when men are too excited to judge calmly of their acts. Their very presence is an incentive.

        “If legislators were all monetary experts, and never influenced by political considerations, there would be little risk in retaining for a time [such fiat money]; but we must take men as they are, and provide for probable acts of those who are incompetent and ill-advised. Obviously, these national guardians of our monetary system do not personally lose anything when they get the treasury into desperate straits . . . 

        “What is still more dangerous is the fact that the whim of the government is the only limit to its [paper money] issues . . . If a fancied need presses upon men inexperienced in monetary operations, especially if they have been inoculated with the fallacy that the more money a country has the better off it is, there will be excessive issues, followed by raids on the reserves.

        “The paper will depreciate – and the country will undergo rapid fluctuations in prices, an unsettling of contracts, a period of mad speculation, leading to the inevitable ruin of a commercial crisis . . . It being understood [therefore] that convertibility into gold is the prime prerequisite either of government or bank issues.” (pp. 265-266; 274)

        The 20th Century Failures of Paper Money Systems

        Is there anything in the history of the last one hundred years to invalidate the questions and concerns of such economists as Richard T. Ely or J. Laurence Laughlin, from so long ago, that led them to support and argue for a gold standard on political grounds? There was the monetary madness during and after the First World War, with paper money inflations to fund the expenses of the belligerent powers, and the destructive hyperinflations that followed the end of that conflict. (See my article, “The Lasting Legacies of World War I: Big Government, Paper Money and Inflation”.)

        There was the false sense of economic and monetary stability in the 1920s, followed by the Great Depression due to misguided Federal Reserve policy in the ’20s and disruptive government interventions and centralized planning schemes in the decade of the 1930s. Then more inflations to finance the Second World War, with a rollercoaster of inflations and recessions in the post-World War II period, followed by the new Federal Reserve monetary mismanagements that led to the financial and housing crises of 2008-2009, with continuing monetary manipulation over the next ten years of economic recovery. (See my article, “Ten Years On: Recession, Recovery and the Regulatory State”.)

        Institutions Restrict Potentially Harmful Behavior

        Unfortunately, the benefit of a gold standard has not been that it has always effectively prevented government monetary mismanagement and abuse; far from it. But, like many social, economic and political institutions, it sets limits and rules on the conduct of the societal participants that restrict everyday conduct that if allowed and regularly pursued can bring about changes in attitudes and actions that cumulatively brings damage to all in society.

        It can be easily argued that John Maynard Keynes’s “revolutionary” idea of governments balancing their budget over the business cycle – budget deficits in ‘bad” times and budget surpluses in “good” years – rather than on an annualized basis set loose the perverse political incentives of politicians never having to completely tell the citizenry from whence will come all the revenues to cover the costs of increasing government expenditures with which campaign contributions and votes are bought by politicians in the never-ending election cycles of modern democratic society. This institutional change has led to U.S. government budget deficits for 63 of the last 75 years since the end of the Second World War in 1945, with, now, annual trillion-dollar budget deficits likely to be the norm for as far as the fiscal eye can see. (See my articles, “Why Government Deficits and Debt Do Matter” and “Debt and Deficits are Out of Control” and “Debt, Deficits and the Cost of Free Lunches”.)

        The same has happened with mismanagement of the monetary system with, first, the weakening of the gold standard during and after the First World War, and then its abandonment in one country after the other beginning in the 1930s. The world is on fiat or paper money standards with total control in the hands of various monetary central planners with little or no external check on their policy decisions, other than the particular monetary theory fads and fashions that central bankers and their staff economic advisors currently hold as a guide for actual policy actions; along with the pressures of contemporary politics, regardless of how much it may be formally punctuated that the leading central banks around the world make their policy choices independent of the political climate. 

        Not having to worry about mandatory redemption of the bank notes and other monetary equivalents they issue being paid in gold “on demand” at a fixed rate of exchange by either domestic or foreign holders of their fiat currencies, central banks have been able to set loose what more than one economist has called the “age of inflation” since the end of the Second World War. 

        Gold an International Money vs. Fluctuating Paper Currencies

        The end to the gold standard also weakened the international quality of what had been in many ways a global monetary system in which gold was the world’s money and national currencies were merely different denominational ways of expressing relative amounts of the same money good. 

        The French social philosopher, political economist, and “futurist,” Bertrand de Jouvenel (1903-1987), in an article on “Money in the Market” (1955), recounted the experience of a British family vacationing in France before and then after the end of the gold standard in the 1930s:

        “In 1912, an English family spent its summer holiday in an out-of-the-way French village. A bill was presented, invoiced in francs; the English father had nothing but English gold sovereigns, then in circulation in Britain. This did not embarrass the innkeeper; true, he had never seen coins stamped with the British Monarch’s profile, but he was thoroughly familiar with the gold coins then circulating in France. 

        “Placing a 20-franc gold piece by the side of the sovereign, he found the latter heavier (123.27 grains to 99.56) and it seemed to him that two sovereigns made up about the same weight as a 50-franc gold piece (50 francs = 248.9 grains; 2 sovereigns = 246.54). Therefore, without consulting anybody, he made up his mind to accept two sovereigns as equivalent to 50 francs . . .

        “In 1932, the same English family returned to the same spot, again the head of the family had no other means of payment than those current in Britain at the time, i.e., pound notes. The aged innkeeper took these notes, laid them side by side with French notes, and this time learned nothing from the comparison . . . The ‘weighing’ of pounds had ceased to be a physical process, it was now a market process, a day-by-day confrontation of the French demand for pounds with the British demand for francs.

        “In the former case the rate of exchange depended upon the unchanging balance of physical weights in fine gold between the national coins: it was therefore inherently stable; in the second case it depended upon the changing balance of claims between two countries . . . it was therefore inherently unstable.” (See Bertrand de Jouvenel, Economics of the Good Life [Transaction Publishers, 1999], pp. 179-180.)

        The Changing Opinions of Economists on Monetary Policy

        When Great Britain in 1931 and then the United States in 1933 went off the gold standard, there was much hue and cry among a large majority of economists and many in the general public that a terrible policy mistake had been made in ending gold as the core money based on obligatory redemption of bank notes into a fixed weight of gold. 

        No doubt, the economists who issued that open letter in August of 2020 angrily protesting to the U.S. Senate their objection to Judy Shelton’s nomination to the Federal Reserve Board of Governors would all consider it the essence of monetary policy wisdom in the 1930s to have freed the British and American monetary systems from what Keynes had in the 1920s called that “barbarous relic” – gold. 

        By implication they would also be saying how misguided and wrong-headed were all those economists of the 1930s to oppose the leaving of the gold standard so governments might have wider discretion to wield monetary policy in the “activist” attempt to overcome the Great Depression. 

        Let me suggest that it is not outside the realm of the possible, perhaps the probable, that 50 years from now, many, maybe a significant majority, of economists will look upon the signers of that letter and think how misguided and foolish they were in thinking that governments and their central bankers had the knowledge, wisdom and ability to micromanage the economy through the macro-manipulation of money, credit and interest rates. 

        The Freedom to Choose the Currency to Use

        They will wonder how it was that so many in the economics profession could have suffered from the delusion that monetary central planning ever could be any more feasible than the failed Soviet-style system of general central planning of human affairs. Those future economists will be confounded that these economists of 2020 had not paid more attention to the reasoning of Austrian economist and Nobel Prize-winner, Friedrich A. Hayek (1899-1992), when he pointed out that nothing had been more wrong-headed than leaving the control of money in the monopoly hands of government.  

        That, as Hayek had argued in Choice in Currency (1976), nothing would be more reasonable and rational than letting everyone, anywhere, choose the money or monies that they found more convenient and advantageous to use in various and sundry transactions and exchanges. That such freedom to choose would be an invaluable institutional means to keep government monetary mismanagement and abuse in check, since any political authority which noticeably reduced the value or increased the uncertainty of its national currency’s future worth, would see a flight out of its use by its own and other citizens of the world. (See my article, “Government Monopoly Money vs. Personal Choice in Currency”.)

        Indeed, those future economists may also wonder why it was so difficult for those earlier economists of 2020 to fully appreciate the value and effectiveness of private competitive free banking as a replacement for the atavistic notion that a central bank was either necessary or desirable. They will be surprised at the general ignoring of an entire sub-field of monetary theorists that had emerged in the late 20th and early 21st centuries who demonstrated why central banks were the very institutional instrument to propagate the types of instabilities that monetary central planning was supposed to eliminate, or at least reduce. And why and how it was that the very stability and feedback needed for a functioning and growing economic order to flourish was far more likely and possible through monetary freedom. (See my eBook, Monetary Central Planning and the State.) 

        And who knows, if Judy Shelton is appointed to the Federal Reserve Board of Governors, and if she actually espouses and defends the ideas for which she is being condemned by so many of those “mainstream” economists today, it may be a useful step to the societal transformation to a freer society, a key long run element of which must be the freeing of money from political control.

      • Manhunt Underway After 69 Flee In Mass Lebanese Prison Break, 5 Fugitives Killed
        Manhunt Underway After 69 Flee In Mass Lebanese Prison Break, 5 Fugitives Killed

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 17:30

        A mass prison break in Lebanon on Saturday unleashed chaos outside capital of Beirut, including a high speed police chase of escaped convicts ending in a crash that left five dead.

        A largescale manhunt in and outside the city of Baabda – a mountain town that overlooks Beirut – is still underway given a total of 69 prisoners were able to escape.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Aftermath of crash following police chase in Lebanon, via Reuters

        At least 15 fugitives have been apprehended, with some others turning themselves in, however, it’s being reported that dozens of the escaped convicts are still on the run.

        As of late in the day Saturday (local) time, at least 40 are still believed to be at large. Police said “so far 15 inmates have been rearrested and four of the escaped prisoners handed themselves over,” Al Jazeera reports. 

        According to details in Reuters, police at one point gave chase after a group of five fugitives stole a car, leading to a chase: 

        The five died when a car they seized crashed into a tree in what the statement described as an accident while one prisoner was injured and taken to hospital.

        The state news agency NNA earlier said the prisoners had escaped from the prison at dawn after breaking open cell doors.

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        Prior reports by Amnesty International said the particular prison has witnessed riots and unrest in past months this year over worsening conditions related to the COVID-19 pandemic. The Baabda facility held pre-trial detainees. Prisoners and their families have been angered at the high-risk environment for exposure, and have demanded better precautions be taken in terms of prison conditions. 

        Saturday’s escape started with an organized attack against the jail guards, according to local police statements. 

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        The situation is considered dangerous enough to the public that President Michel Aoun has gotten involved, making a statement ordering that search and recovery efforts by security forces be intensified

        At least one of the escapees is said to be involved as part of a high profile Hezbollah case.

      • California Reports Record Jump As US COVID-19 Cases Top 12 Million; NY Sees Most New Cases In Months: Live Updates
        California Reports Record Jump As US COVID-19 Cases Top 12 Million; NY Sees Most New Cases In Months: Live Updates

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 17:15

        Summary:

        • NY reports another 5,972 new cases
        • California reports record jump
        • Wisconsin deaths top 3k
        • Illinois new cases top 13k
        • US cases top 12 million
        • US mortality rate rises
        • Germany tops 900k cases
        • Spain announces vaccination program start dates
        • US hospitalizations rise
        • Poland reopens malls
        • WHO criticizes Europe
        • Hungary deaths see new record

        * * *

        Update (1650ET): Gov Andrew Cuomo has just released the latest daily NY numbers, and for the first time since the spring, the Empire State has reported nearly 6k new cases in 24 hours.

        Meanwhile, in hard-hit El Paso, members of the Texas National Guard have been dispatched to help with “mortuary assistance.”

        For those who don’t understand what that means: they’re helping load up the bodies into refrigerated trucks.

        * * *

        Update (1550ET): Despite Gov Gavin Newsom imposing the tightest level of restrictions affecting 94% of California’s 40 million or so people, the Golden State still reported another record jump in new cases on Saturday, surpassing a daily record set months ago. 

        State health officials reported 15,442 new cases, bringing the statewide total to 1,087,714. Another 86 deaths were reported on Saturday, bringing the state’s death toll to 18,643.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Cali asn’t the only state to see record new numbers on Saturday. Wisconsin, one of the hardest hit states, just crossed the 3,000-death milestone after reporting 51 new deaths on Saturday for a total of 3,005. Wisconsin also reported another 6,224 new cases, while Illinois – another hard-hit midwestern state – topped 13k (13,012).

        Saturday’s numbers brought the US total case number north of 12 million less than a week after the tally topped 11 million.

        As the US continued to see record case numbers, the UK reported 19,875 new cases on Saturday, seeing its daily numbers duck back below 20k. After the mayor of Istanbul imposed tight new restrictions, Turkey also reported a record jump in new cases on Saturday with just over 5,500 new cases.

        * * *

        Now that Pfizer has officially filed for its emergency-use approval from the FDA, markets will be on tenterhooks until the approval is either handed down, or blocked for some ‘unforeseeable’ reason.

        In the meantime, markets’ attention has shifted back toward the numbers as new cases swell and 1 in 5 hospitals around the country are in danger of facing staff shortages.

        The US reported 1,870 fatalities on Friday, in a week in which the death rate increased pretty rapidly.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Hospitalizations in the US have reached a new record, with the midwestern prarie states seeing the highest rates of hospitalizations.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Across Europe, outbreaks have finally started to slow as new lockdown measures show their impact, though deaths and hospitalizations remain elevated.

        Spain’s campaign to vaccinate its population is slated to begin in January and will be voluntary, according to local media reports, citing Health Minister Salvador Illa.

        Spain expects to vaccinate about half its people by May, Illa said. The government plans to reveal further details of its vaccination strategy later this month.

        In Poland, a brief series of closures is coming to an end, as shopping malls will reopen while keeping restaurants, movie theaters and schools closed as Prime Minister Mateusz Morawiecki asks the population for ‘patience’ until a vaccine arrives.

        Over in Geneva, the WHO’s Special Envoy criticized the initial European response from the spring as “incomplete”, complaining that Europe failed to learn from Asian states like South Korea, which have successfully managed the virus since the beginning of the pandemic.

        As European countries started to report Saturday’s numbers, Germany’s RKI said the country added nearly 23,000 new cases on Saturday, lifting its total north of 900,000, and putting it on track to become the next European country to top 1 million cases.

        Here’s some more COVID-19 news from overnight and Saturday morning:

        Hungary suffers a record 121 deaths from the virus on Saturday though the number of hospitalized patients and new infections continued to level off (Source: Bloomberg).

        Russia sees record 467 deaths from the virus over the past 24 hours bringing the “official” death toll to 35,778 (Source: Bloomberg).

        CanSino said surging COVID cases around the world will allow it to quickly reach the infection thresholds to analyze the efficacy of its single-shot vaccine (Source: Bloomberg).

        Hong Kong added 45 new coronavirus cases Saturday, the highest daily toll in three months, after the city imposed new social restrictions (Source: Bloomberg).

      • Biden's Deep State
        Biden's Deep State

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 17:00

        Authored by Steve Brown via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

        Philosopher Hannah Arendt once wrote about the banality of evil, and there’s never been a more banal bunch than the foreign policy and security state crew Barak Obama surrounded himself with for eight years beside the possible exception of Bush’s own Neocons.

        Now after three years screaming about “Russian collusion” it appears the Evil Empire is about to regain its lost ground, championing new wars and more interventionist expansionism with a much greater role for the US military in the world.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Let’s name names.

        Pentagon

        For the defense chief post, the Washington Post has portrayed the banal face of Michele Flournoy as the pick to ‘restore stability’ to the Pentagon, an entirely false assertion. Recall that Fluornoy promotes unilateral global US military intervention, and advocated the destruction of Libya in 2011. By the military-industrial revolving door, Flournoy enabled many Corporate weaponry contracts amounting to tens of millions. Likewise Fluornoy is on the Booz-Hamilton board, where the swamp cannot get any deeper. As if this wretched example of an agent-provocateur for war and destruction were not bad enough, Biden is reportedly considering Lockheed-Martin banal kingpin Jeh Johnson for the DoD position, too.

        Lockheed director Johnson was employed by Rob Reiner and Atlantic editor arch-Neocon David Frum to run the Committee to Investigate Russia which mysteriously blew up as soon as the Mueller Report was released. Jeh Johnson has continued to warn of “Russian interference” in the US presidential election until now. Biden’s anointing as president-elect has ended that. As Homeland Security head, Johnson authorized cages for holding immigrant children. He also supported the assassination of General Suleimani, and has voiced support for US wars in Syria, Iraq, and Afghanistan.

        State

        From Libya to Syria, Yemen, Ukraine and beyond, the banality of evil is perhaps best personified by Susan Rice – apparently Biden’s premiere pick for Secretary. Rice was an abject failure at the United Nations, but all seems forgiven, probably at the behest of Biden’s donors. After her failure at the UN, Obama kicked Rice upstairs to be his National Security Advisor, a position that does not require Senate approval.

        An obvious war hawk in the mold of the Democrat’s donor class, a Rice appointment could reinforce the liberal mantra that women can be just as good at interventionism as men, and ensure full re-establishment of the Neoliberal agenda in Washington. John Kerry has been flagged as a potential for State (again) too, but at age 77 and subsequent to the failure of the JCPOA Kerry is an unlikely pick.

        Another potential pick among the banal Daughters of Darkness is Victoria Kagan-Nuland, architect of the 2014 debacle in Ukraine (among other things). Outed at State in an embarrassing act of what she called impressive statecraft and other embarrassing incidents, Nuland seems an unlikely choice. But Kagan-Nuland is as banal as banal can be, and Biden may somehow wish to reinforce his solidarity with the JTF and his donor class, on Israel.

        National Security Advisor

        Banality is certainly the mark of the beast here, in the form of Tony Blinken. Well in with Michele Flournoy (above) Blinken typifies the type of banality the Deep State engages in to promote its evil, with Blinken as successful as any other Deep State actor. A major hawk on Russia and war hawk in general, Blinken is an apologist for Israel. Blinken is a war hawk on Afghanistan and Syria too, and Blinken was directly involved in CIA operation Timber Sycamore. Oh, the banality.

        Another model of banality is Leon CIA Panetta who so far claims that cruising the Monterey peninsula is more fun that being in Washington. But we know that’s false and Panetta would be a logical pick. Besides being a hawk on everything, and laughing about the fact he has no idea how many wars Obama’s America was fighting – because he lost count – Panetta is simply another sycophant for evil like Hannah Arendt portrayed in her study of Adolf Eichmann.

        CIA

        Banal of the banal is of course Mike Morell. This incredibly vacuous excuse for a human being has been hate-mongering for years. Beside his blatant pandering support for another banal and brutal warmonger – Hillary Clinton – Mike Morell is one Neoliberal who still maintains that Saddam Hussein actively aided and abetted al Qaeda with regard to the 911 attacks. But Morell simply and ultimately represents the banality of evil, just as Arendt depicted Adolf Eichmann, but in Morell’s case succinctly summarized here by Ray McGovern.

        United Nations

        Outing the banality of the banal would be incomplete without mentioning Jen Psaki. Although a potential pick for White House Communications Director, why not promote an accomplished liar to a venue where accomplished lying really matters?

        Conclusion

        There is no indication that the United States as an entrenched warfare state will ever change its course until forced to. Mr Trump was incapable of enforcing that change. Sidelined by Russiagate psychosis, as a Beltway Neophyte and his own worst enemy at times, that sank Trump’s agenda. The actions of Mr Trump now – to end the wars in Syria, Iraq, Afghanistan and Yemen — should have been undertaken in earnest and without compromise years ago. Point being that Mr Trump’s new appointments to the Pentagon – and let’s hope CIA – will hopefully blunt the efficacy of Biden’s bad actors going forward.

        Regardless, characters the same or similar to the ones listed above will definitely infest Washington’s infernal Beltway cesspool once again via Joe Biden … make no mistake. …And they will be meaner and nastier than ever before! Guaranteed.
         

      • DoubleSpeak Is Here – Delusional MSM Praises GOP Lawmaker "Defending" CA Gov Newsom's "Idiotic Edicts"
        DoubleSpeak Is Here – Delusional MSM Praises GOP Lawmaker "Defending" CA Gov Newsom's "Idiotic Edicts"

        Tyler Durden

        Sat, 11/21/2020 – 16:35

        In a Wednesday speech from the House floor, Rep. Tom McClintock (R-CA) used what’s commonly known as sarcasm to mock California Governor Gavin Newsom’s hypocritical and “idiotic” COVID-19 restrictions, after he violated his own advice at an upscale dinner party over the weekend.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Newsom issued a misleading apology for breaking his own mandates during a dinner party at the French Laundry restaurant in Yountville, CA for a high-level lobbyist. In attendance were members of the California Medical Association.

        I rise this morning in defense of Gov. Gavin Newsom, who recently defied his own idiotic COVID edicts as he partied at one of the few restaurants that’s not yet been forced out of business,” McClintock began, mockingly.

        “I defend him because he was doing what we once all did in a free society: make our own decisions over what risks we’re willing to run and what cautions we’re willing to take according to our own circumstances to protect our own health.”

        Now, before we get to the MSM’s ‘presentation’ of McClintock’s speech, here’s more of it followed by a clip for your edification:

        “Every time we step outside our homes, the risks that we face multiply. A free society assumes that it’s citizens are competent to assess those risks, balance them against the avoidance costs, and to manage their decisions in a generally responsible way. It’s called common sense. And it’s a necessary prerequisite for self-government and liberty. The choices that octogenarian with emphysema might be very different from those of a healthy governor of California. Only a fool would claim the omnipotence to make an informed judgement for every person in every circumstance in every community.

        Watch:

        Now – here’s how journalists for mainstream outlets presented it using what’s commonly known as “journalistic malpractice” in a world reduced to headlines, where nearly 60% of all links shared on social media have never actually been clicked.

        (Perhaps the Sacramento Bee was making amends for allowing an Op-Ed contributor to excoriate Newsom over the dinner).

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Using a headline framing McClintock’s speech as a genuine defense of Newsom – a decision which would have gone through editors – is either willful deceit or tone-deaf stupidity.

      Digest powered by RSS Digest

      Today’s News 21st November 2020

      • The "Global Reset" Scam
        The “Global Reset” Scam

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 23:40

        Authored by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

        This article takes a tilt at increasing speculation about statist global resets, and why plans such as those promoted by the World Economic Forum will fail. Central bank digital currencies will simply run out of time.

        Instead, the collapse of unbacked fiat currencies will end all supra-national government solutions to their policy failures. Already, there is mounting evidence of money beginning to flee bank accounts into stocks, commodities and even bitcoin. This is an early warning of a rapidly developing monetary collapse.

        Moreover, nothing can now stop the collapse of fiat currencies, and with it schemes to control humanity for the convenience and ambitions of government planners. There can only be one statist solution and that is to mobilise gold reserves to back and save their currencies, which in order to succeed will have to be fully convertible into circulating gold coinage. It will also require the role of governments to be reset into a non-welfare, non-interventionist minimalist role, which can only be achieved after a complete collapse of the current fiat-financed system.

        Anything less will fail.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The Deep State and The Blob fuel conspiracy theories

        Increasingly, people are beginning to realise that their world is undergoing a period of rapid change, with the future of fiat money now uncertain. For most, it is too difficult to even contemplate. But growing uncertainties are driving wild speculation about what those in authority now have in store for the human race in the form of a global reset. It is a time for conspiracy theorists, aided and abetted by our politicians and central bankers who are being increasingly evasive, because events are spiralling out of their control.

        Then there is America’s Deep State, or the British equivalent, the more recently christened Blob; an amorphous entity comprised of the permanent bureaucracy with its own agenda. These faceless planners have moved on from merely making ministers’ lives difficult if they deviate from the blob’s predetermined course — immortalised in “Yes Minister” and its sequel series “Yes Prime Minister”.

        As we saw with Brexit, The Blob has been rigging political outcomes, even conniving in elections. Christopher Steele, an ex-MI6 officer produced a dodgy dossier on Trump to influence the American presidential election in 2016. But there is no such thing as an ex-MI6 Agent because of the Official Secrets Act, so we can only conclude that the intelligence arm of The Blob sanctioned it on a distanced basis. MI6 works with other intelligence agencies under the five-eyes agreement and is close to the CIA. Though they do not necessarily share intelligence, it is impossible to conceive of Steele’s role in influencing the outcome of a US presidential election without the CIA’s knowledge. Almost certainly, the fact that it was commissioned must have been with the CIA’s blessing.

        At the time of writing, we do not know the outcome of the current presidential election, but enough doubt has been thrown on the validity of the voting process to implicate unknown parties in managing the outcome. It can never be proved, but for increasing numbers of sceptics it looks like a Deep State operation. It is therefore hardly surprising that conspiracies abound.

        The World Economic Forum

        The most prominent of these conspiracies has hit the headlines in recent weeks. Its ambition is to take the lead in resetting the world by dismantling the capitalist system in favour of a greater technocratic rule — a fourth industrial revolution no less, even planting microchips in humans to read their brains and control them. The leader is one Klaus Schwab, whose World Economic Forum runs the annual Davos bunfight.

        As leader of the Davos forum, Schwab probably sees himself as the coordinator of world government. If so, at 82 years old he is probably getting impatient about the progress towards his personal vision of ultimate power. The covid chaos and the success of his climate change agenda must be encouraging him to think he is very close to a breakthrough. Alternatively, we might consider Schwab as a latter-day Charles Fourier (1772—1837), the utopian socialist philosopher, whose forgotten ideals were only marginally more narcissistic and bizarre than Schwab’s.

        While the great and the not so good love the annual Davos party as a networking venue for the politics industry, when it comes to transferring real power to Schwab, it’s a no-no. The only time a politician transfers power is when he is deposed by his or her electorate, colleagues, or the military. And history is littered with utopians, like Schwab, grasping for power over their fellow men. In addition to Charles Fourier, we can include Georg Hegel (1770—1831) and Auguste Comte (1798—1857), as well, of course, as Karl Marx. As thinkers or philosophers, they were all influential in their day and some of their ideas persist in the naïve.

        So, while increasing numbers of well-informed people are beginning to sense the end of the current world order, to assume that this will hasten the WEF’s grab for world domination by influencing events is a mistake. All our deep states, blobs and their branches, particularly central banks, will want to hold onto and enhance their executive power with the political class increasingly cast as cover. The planners at national level are not going to submit to Mr Schwab’s plans for world domination. Instead, international relations involve mutual cooperation to secure purely domestic objectives, something President Trump was in the process of destroying. From the Deep State’s point of view, perhaps that’s why he had to be deposed in favour of Biden, who is a long-serving compliant figure.

        Central bank digital currencies (CBDCs)

        There can be little doubt that central banks wish to increase their control over money and how it is used, cutting out the obstacle of commercial banks who produce most of the money in circulation through the expansion of bank credit. From a statist point of view, commercial banking is a dinosaur, an outdated remnant of free markets, perpetuating needless systemic risk and superseded by technology. Branch networks will disappear with cash, changing relationships between banks and the general public for ever.

        By introducing direct central bank accounts for members of the public and every business, commercial banks become superfluous and can be allowed to die. And if one goes bust before commercial banking has ended, the facility to transfer all its loans and deposits onto a central bank’s books will then exist. The removal of systemic risk by the abolition of commercial banks is one of several likely long-term objectives of CBDCs. Commercial banks can be left with the role of investment banking activities in capital markets.

        We can imagine the development of CBDCs going even further than just replacing cash. Stimulation by dropping money into personal accounts can be used to target increased spending by consumers, or even groups of consumers, sorted by wealth, location or other factors. Some consumers can be favoured relative to others, so in a swing state, for example, an incumbent administration might buy votes. While this would be strongly denied, as we have seen with unfettered fiat currency the state creeps incrementally towards unstated objectives, using every tool at its disposal. The election of Deep State-approved politicians then becomes possible.

        Eventually, funding of all capital projects will come under the direct control of the central bank. And savings deposits, always seen to be a brake on consumption, can be banished. Capital can be made available for government schemes and favoured businesses on the say so of the central bank.

        A future government statement might be issued on the following lines:

        “Your Government is pleased to announce that the National Audit Office has approved a number of infrastructure projects targeted at improving communications between administrative centres. This investment over ten years will secure an estimated 500,000 jobs. The cost over the life of the project is XXX billion monetary units. The Central Bank has confirmed it will make funding for these projects available, both to your Government and approved private sector contractors.”

        This would be a planners’ heaven. Furthermore, CBDC money can be withheld or frozen for anyone suspected of crimes and tax evasion, starving them into confessions of guilt. The justification is always that it is in the national interest to ensure that financial and tax crimes are eliminated — something commercial banks have singularly failed to do. Overseas payments can be routed through other CBDCs, giving the central banking network control over world trade. Just imagine foreign trade being conducted through a grander version of the Eurozone’s TARGET2 settlement system!

        Worried yet? In the advanced economies Covid-19 has nearly eliminated cash, which doubtless is intended to be replaced entirely by CBDCs. The end of cash and bank deposits will allow the central bank to cap the amount of cash anyone can hold, and also ensure that everyone is paid a “living wage”. Already flagged, another intention is to eliminate the burden of interest rates and by controlling where money supply is expanded, manage the economy.

        It is commonly assumed that those in charge of us know what they are doing — they don’t. They have become trapped at a socialist endpoint and are doubling down in their efforts towards greater socialism. But their dreams of future control are mere escapism. Individuals will lose yet more personal freedom, but ultimately the state cannot conquer human nature and the will of individuals to do what they want. The Soviets attempted it and failed, despite killing and starving many millions.

        Central to the collapse of any state-directed reset will be the loss of faith in fiat currencies, and particularly that of the world’s reserve currency, the US dollar. This remains the case irrespective of whether circulating currency is in cash, bank deposits, or CBDCs. Indeed, the collapse could be hastened by CBDCs, because the intention is to increase the pace of injection of new money into the economy if it is required (it always is), and to impose deeper negative interest rates, which cannot be easily achieved under the current monetary system.

        If these statist intentions are allowed to prevail, along with other agendas such as the elimination of cheap and effective fossil-based energy, the outlook for humanity is exceedingly grim. Like communism, the global reset into which the western world is drifting will destroy society. Those who believe in liberal values in the original sense of the term — not the modern socialist connotation — will find themselves welcoming the destruction of the current system before it is evolved any further.

        The course of a currency collapse

        The end of fiat currencies is likely to come sooner than later, from the consequences of today’s massive money-printing, particularly of dollars. Already, US government spending is financed substantially more by currency debasement than taxes, a condition that will almost certainly continue to deteriorate rapidly in the coming months. Furthermore, the global banking system, which is extremely thinly capitalised, faces a tsunami of bad debts which can only lead to a systemic failure — most likely in the Eurozone initially, but threatening all other jurisdictions through counterparty risks. It is coming to a head and is likely to happen soon, possibly triggered by the second covid wave.

        Long before the two or three years required for any CBDC to be operational, the world’s reserve fiat currency, the US dollar, is already hyper-inflating. There are signs the markets are beginning to understand this. Bitcoin’s price has risen sharply, sending signals to everyone that the differential between its ultimately fixed quantity and the accelerating rates of fiat currency debasement is feeding dramatically into the price.

        Despite the economic slump, equity markets are being driven to new highs as non-financial customers deem stocks to be preferable to bank deposits. It has not helped that the Fed reduced deposit rates to zero last March, well below everyone’s time preference. The Fed has also promised infinite QE in order to fund the fiscal deficit. Therefore, it is not surprising that individuals and corporations are shifting out of cash balances into financial and other assets, with the notable exception of fixed-interest bonds. Rising commodity and raw material prices are also telling us that dollars are been sold in those markets.

        This is the point being missed in all commentaries: the mounting evidence that markets, being forward-looking, are beginning to abandon the dollar. And once it goes beyond a certain point, nothing will reverse a rapid loss of purchasing power to the point of worthlessness. To avoid this outcome central banks led by the Fed must immediately abandon inflationary financing of budget deficits.

        That is not going to happen. In addition to the current hyperinflation must be added the inflationary cover for the costs and consequences of rescuing a failing global banking system. The costs are immediate, in that governments will take on their books everyone’s bad debts. The consequences are that through their central banks they will have no political alternative other than to counter the economic slump through yet more money printing.

        US Treasury bond yields are already beginning to rise, perhaps reflecting this developing outcome as Figure 1 shows.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The up-arrow at the bottom-right of the chart shows that the downward momentum for the bond yield has reversed, forming a golden cross; that is to say the yield is above its two commonly followed moving averages which in turn are forming a cross with the 55day moving average rising above the 200-day moving average, a strong indicator of a major turning point and of higher bond yields to come. The upward turn of bond yields is to be viewed in the context of the dollar’s trade weighted index, which is shown in Figure 2.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Currently standing at 92.40, if the dollar’s TWI breaks below 91.75 (the low on 1 September) it is likely to head significantly lower. With foreign holdings of dollars and dollar denominated financial securities totalling almost $27 trillion, the chances are that dumping of the dollar on the foreign exchanges will increase rapidly. That being the case, the Fed will not only be funding the unprecedentedly high (for peacetime) budget deficit but will have to absorb foreign sales of US Treasuries and dollars in order to keep the cost of government funding suppressed.

        Evidence is mounting that it cannot be done. And with the end of the suppression of interest rates comes the collapse of accumulated malinvestments, of government finances, and of the currency itself.

        First the ashes, then, hopefully the phoenix

        Elected in 1929, Hoover was the first US President who thought he could improve on the capitalist system of markets reforming themselves, and the results were a disaster. He was thrown out of office and replaced with another interventionist, Roosevelt, and the supremacy of the US Government over markets reforming themselves became established. The situation today is the logical destination of the fallacy that governments can run the economy.

        It will end with the collapse and replacement of today’s unbacked fiat currencies — the ashes and then the phoenix. There is every indication that the time when all is rendered into ashes is rapidly approaching. People with fiat, earning fiat, relying on fiat will be impoverished. A currency collapse with no foreign currency to escape into is a cataclysmic event, the like of which we haven’t seen before, not even in Roman times. If it doesn’t buy you food and warmth a million bucks is worthless.

        Governments will also have no means of collecting taxes, other than in their worthless currencies. They will be unable to pay their administrators, who cannot even afford to attend their offices. Their pensions and everybody else’s will be worthless. There will be no incentive for anyone in government without money. And without money there is no political power.

        There can only be one solution, and that is a reset with gold. The slide in currencies can be stopped by making them exchangeable into gold. The reason for a gold-backed reset is not so much to stop a fiat currency from further collapse but to use it to ensure the widest distribution of the national gold reserves through a reformed gold-backed currency. The US Treasury claims it still has over 8,000 tonnes of gold, which assuming the Deep State hasn’t raided it, can ensure that a new dollar, convertible by everyone into gold, can circulate as money.

        The same is true for other currencies, to greater or lesser degrees depending on their national gold reserves. But to be credible, gold coins must also circulate freely alongside readily convertible paper and digital substitutes. The banking system must also be reformed to do away with bank credit expansion, which creates deposits unbacked by gold. By then most of them may be in public ownership or protection, so a reform to abolish bank credit expansion should not be too difficult.

        The mobilisation of central bank gold is the best outcome by far. It returns the choice of money to the people who use it for the intermediation between their production and consumption. But very few in government, their Deep States or The Blobs, have the intellectual capacity to understand what needs to be done. Their advisors are inflationists to a man or woman. Furthermore, the US’s Deep State is obsessed with the threat from China and Russia, which between them control international bullion markets (London and Comex are just paper), and have substantial declared and undeclared reserves. Legitimising gold will transfer enormous monetary and geopolitical power from America to the Asian hegemons, which is likely to be strongly resisted.

        Furthermore, it will require governments to backtrack on the socialising process, whereby by providing welfare and regulating everything their budgets got out of hand. They must aim to reduce the full burden of their activities on the economy to under 20%.

        Following a currency collapse, any central bank that thinks it can use a CBDC to manage market outcomes will undermine its own credibility. Other than issuers of gold-backed notes, they will have no role. In order for the necessary reforms to stick, flights of fancy such as the statist ambitions of planners and of the Klaus Schwabs of this world must be abandoned, along with all the false sciences adopted by statists. But on the positive side, a collapse of fiat currencies is required to sweep away the current failing system, and sooner or later that is what we are going to get.

      • Pilots Draw Giant "Sky Penis" In Support For Russian Footballer After Masturbation Scandal
        Pilots Draw Giant “Sky Penis” In Support For Russian Footballer After Masturbation Scandal

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 23:20

        Two Russian Pobeda Airlines pilots are under investigation after they “chose a ballsy flight path” to show their support for Russian footballer team captain Artem Dzyuba, by drawing a giant c*** and balls in the sky, reported RT News

        Flightradar24 footage shows the Boeing 737-800 taking a quick detour from Moscow to Ekaterinburg on Nov. 11 to create a giant sky penis on flight radar maps. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        “We don’t know what you might see in our aircraft’s flightpath, but probably Pobeda captains decided to express their support for Artem Dzyuba, condemning the madness around him,” a Pobeda spokesperson said.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Dzyuba made headlines after a video of him pleasuring himself leaked online. The scandal has resulted in the footballer being suspended for three games. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The Federal Air Transport Agency said it is investigating the incident to determine whether the pilots had clearance to conduct such maneuvers. 

        While the pilot’s support for Dzyuba is rather strange, readers may recall US military pilots went on a sky penis drawing spree in the last couple of years. We’re not entirely sure why US pilots were drawing the penises (see: here & here & here), but it sure seemed as there was a competition of who could draw the biggest one.

      • Biden's Student Loan Forgiveness Plan Is Idiotic And Immoral
        Biden’s Student Loan Forgiveness Plan Is Idiotic And Immoral

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 23:00

        Authored by Josh Hammer via The Epoch Times,

        Higher education might be the most pressing domestic issue confronting America today. As currently structured and carried out, higher education is a blight upon the nation—an affirmative hindrance to our efforts in aiding human flourishing and securing the common good. It is possible that no propagated belief in modern American history has been more intellectually, experientially and fiscally ruinous than the notion that a four-year bachelor’s degree-bestowing bender is a necessary rite of passage for entering adulthood.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Caviling about the systemic corruption of the academy is perhaps old hat. By the time William F. Buckley Jr. wrote “God and Man at Yale” in 1951, the metamorphosis of America’s ivory tower into something closely approximating a fifth column was well underway. But the situation has, in recent decades, worsened; it has metastasized into a cancer whose tendrils spread the latest faddish developments in intersectional, anti-American, anti-Western “woke-ism” all throughout the land.

        It is both terrifying and perverse that America’s intellectual gatekeepers—the “elite”-forming, credentialing institutions that separate the “deplorables” from the ruling class—impress self-loathing pablum upon impressionable young minds. With some notable exceptions, American higher education today comprises madrasas of wokeness fundamentally hostile to the American regime and the American way of life. Many of the far left’s most toxic ideas, whether moral relativism, socialism, “anti-racism” or multiculturalism, either begin on campus or gain steam there. It shouldn’t surprise anyone that one of the more popular policies in conservative egghead circles today is to expand loan access to, and accreditation support for, trade school alternatives to traditional four-year bachelor’s degree-granting programs.

        Intellectual bankruptcy notwithstanding, there are manifold more tangible problems associated with the failed higher education status quo. Four years spent on campus between the ages of 18 and 22 means four prime years forgone from acquiring vocational skills, advancing a career, and mating and forming families. It also often means, due in part to the federal government’s effective monopoly over the student loan industry, four years of willful indebtedness to major in such patently silly “subjects” as “gender studies.” Student loans are now the second-largest source of collective American debt, behind only mortgage debt. By some staggering estimates, Americans have over $1.5 trillion in student loan debt.

        The modern Democratic Party is heavily reliant on woke college graduates for political support, and many on the left have warmed in recent years to large-scale student loan “forgiveness” (at least as a halfway measure, compared to the far left’s support for universal free college). Most recently, the likely incoming president, Democrat Joe Biden, has called for “immediate” forgiveness of $10,000 of student loan debt for borrowers.

        This policy is idiotic in the extreme and brazenly immoral. Republicans and sensible Democrats must unite to defeat it.

        The higher education-student loan complex is in desperate need of more transparency and accountability—not more bailouts. A prudent first step would be for creditors, whether public or (ideally) private, to present clear information about salaries and career paths for graduating high school seniors to consider before they commit to taking out hundreds of thousands of dollars in loans to major in “ethnic studies.” The worst possible thing we could do would be a mass bailout of this nature, which would initiate a vicious, never-ending cycle of tuition spikes, more indebtedness and more bailouts. It is a quintessential exercise in trying to apply a Band-Aid to a grievously slit artery.

        Think the moral hazard problems associated with the 2008 bank bailouts were bad? Wait until you see where this irresponsible experiment could end.

        Numerous other problems abound. Such a bailout is inherently regressive, as it would disproportionately benefit woke children who decided they could afford four years of the decadent ivory tower wasteland, and disproportionately harm taxpayers who themselves did not go to college. Such a bailout would also be manifestly unfair to those graduates who have diligently worked to pay off their loans in earnest—even if it meant forsaking jobs they otherwise would have preferred to take in favor of jobs that pay more. In other words, such a bailout would inculcate the worst lessons in fiscal imprudence and recklessness—all while letting the universities off the hook for their running what amounts to one sustained racket.

        American higher education needs a wrecking ball—not a bailout.

      • Boston Dynamics' Robot Dog Starts New Work On BP Oil Rig
        Boston Dynamics’ Robot Dog Starts New Work On BP Oil Rig

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 22:40

        The virus pandemic is accelerating the trend of robots replacing humans in the workplace. One robot that is quickly being adopted by mega-corporations is Boston Dynamics’ compact four-legged robot, called Spot. 

        June was the month when Boston Dynamics began selling Spot. By July, Ford Motor Company received the robot dog, equipped with five cameras to survey its Van Dyke Transmission Plant in Michigan. 

        Ford employed the four-legged robot over human surveyors to save money and time. The Michigan-based automobile manufacture isn’t the only company embracing robot dogs to complete mundane tasks generally performed by humans. Reuters notes BP Plc has programed Spot to “read gauges, look for corrosion, map out the facility, and even sniff out methane on its Mad Dog rig.” 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Adam Ballard, BP’s facilities technology manager, said the robot dog would make working on an offshore oil rig safer by reducing the number of people. He said the tasks Spot would be assigned will free up personnel to focus on other mission-critical assignments. 

        “Several hours a day, several operators will walk the facility; read gauges; listen for noise that doesn’t sound right; look out at the horizon for anomalies, boats that may not be caught on radar; look for sheens. 

        “What we’re doing with Spot is really trying to replicate that observation piece,” Ballard said, adding that an operator could then review the information from a central location.

        “We believe a lot of that up-front, remote work preparation can be done with a remotely-controlled robot… being able to pan, tilt, zoom and really understand the entire area in real conditions, real-time,” he said.

        Watch: Spot Learns New Tricks On Oil Rig 

        BP hopes Spot’s ability to gather data on oil rigs will cut down human personnel throughout rigs located in the Gulf of Mexico.

        We’re sure other companies will follow Ford or BP in the rush to automate their workforce under the cover of the virus pandemic.

        This comes as SoftBank Group Corp., the owner of Boston Dynamics, is exploring a sale of the company to Hyundai Motor Co., according to Bloomberg, suggesting upon the sale, Spot could be slated for mass production. 

      • GOP Girds For "Election Fraud" Fights In Georgia Runoffs
        GOP Girds For “Election Fraud” Fights In Georgia Runoffs

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 22:20

        Authored by Susan Crabtree via RealClearPolitics.com,

        Amid the fire and fury of Rudy Giuliani’s raucous, 90-minute press conference Thursday laying out President Trump’s claims of widespread voter fraud, the former New York City mayor and federal prosecutor famous for busting the mob in the 1980s, declined to offer an opinion on one very substantive question: Does he think the American election system is so rigged and Trump supporters are so mistrustful of the election process that federal authorities should monitor the two Georgia Senate runoffs set for Jan. 5?

        “I can’t say what’s going to be done about it. … I really can’t give you an opinion on that,” Giuliani told a reporter when the freewheeling, opinion-filled presser shifted to questions from the media.

        “I think every election should learn something from this and be very, very careful with the next election.”

        The reporter who shot the first question at Giuliani brought up Operation Greylord, an investigation conducted by the FBI, the IRS’ criminal division, the U.S. Postal Service and the Chicago police that rooted out court corruption in Cook County, Ill., in the 1980s.

        The three-year undercover operation resulted in the indictments of 92 judges and other officials, most of whom were convicted. The trials extended over 10 years.

        Even though it was a friendly question, Giuliani didn’t want to go there.

        “I have no idea where the FBI had been for the last four years,” he remarked.

        “…I don’t know what we have to do to get the FBI to wake up. Maybe we need a new agency to protect us. I have no idea.”

        No matter what you think of Giuliani’s defiant press conference and Donald Trump’s refusal to concede, trust in the U.S. election system among nearly half of the nation who voted for the president is hitting new lows.

        Morning Consult survey released this week found the share of Republicans who trust official election results has dropped by 43 percentage points. In a poll conducted in late October, 70% of Republicans said official election results will be either “very” or “most likely” reliable. In the post-Nov. 3 survey, just 27% say the same, with two-thirds of Republicans saying the 2020 election was not free and fair.

        Giuliani and others assert that widespread fraud is what shifted Georgia to the Democrats in the presidential race, not the changing demographics of the state and Stacey Abrams’ much-touted voter-registration and turnout drives. Fueled by an army of well-founded liberal groups, Abrams groups registered 800,000 Georgians to vote this year.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Georgia completed its by-hand recount of 5 million ballots Thursday, and — despite uncovering 6,000 ballots overlooked in the initial process — it validated the initial outcome: Joe Biden won the state by more than 10,000 votes. Republican Secretary of State Brad Raffensperger (pictured) plans to certify the results later Friday.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        With Senate control hanging in the balance, cash from deep-pocketed special interest groups is flooding into the Peach State – some $125 million over the last two weeks — and an army of activists from across the political spectrum have arrived to organize and orchestrate highly targeted turnout efforts. The race is now on to get 23,000 of the state’s 17-year-olds — those who will turn 18 before Jan. 5 — to register to vote by the Dec. 7 deadline, using Twitch streams, mobile gaming spots and online algorithm-targeted ads.

        So much is riding on the two runoffs pitting GOP Sens. David Perdue and Kelly Loeffler against, respectively, Democratic challengers Jon Ossoff and Raphael Warnock, that failed Democratic presidential candidate Andrew Yang and columnist Tom Friedman encouraged Democrats to move to the state temporarily and register to vote.

        The pair have since backtracked, arguing their remarks were flippant and meant to underscore the contest’s high stakes. Still, some wealthy California Democrats are reportedly traveling to Georgia to boost turnout operations and do whatever is necessary to help Democrats win the seats.

        Whether outside parties flocking there could backfire on Democrats by fueling parochial pride is an open question, but Republicans are on high alert. Georgia Attorney General Chris Carr last week warned that moving to the state temporarily to vote is a felony offense that carries a 10-year prison sentence and a maximum $100,000 fine.

        “You can’t be a canvasser for [Michael] Bloomberg – you can’t be a canvasser for the Koch brothers and decide, ‘Hey, I’m going to vote while I’m here,’” Gabriel Sterling, a Georgia election official, said last week.

        Though Yang insists it was obvious he was joking, conservatives deeply concerned about election fraud aren’t laughing.

        Hans von Spakovsky, an election law expert at the Heritage Foundation who has advocated for stricter voting laws, is urging Georgia Republicans to implement a detailed plan before the runoff to combat several types of potential voter fraud.

        Republican officials should comb through voter registration lists and divide them up by voters in each precinct, he told RealClearPolitics. Every polling location has a local monitoring committee, he explained, and each chairman should get the list of voters for that precinct. Voter registration lists can then be checked against the DMV’s list of residents and other state record databases.

        “I would distribute the list and say, ‘Look at everybody in your neighborhood who goes to that polling place — are there people on it that are not part of your community?’ Go over the list and check addresses” and ask neighbors if people recently moved there, he said.

        “If there’s a single family home in your neighborhood, and there’s 20 people registered there, okay, that’s a problem,” he said.

        “They should immediately bring that to the attention of local officials. That’s what they ought to be doing now.”

        But the No. 1 priority for combating voting fraud — or even the perception of it — should be to have poll workers, not just poll watchers, actually opening and counting mail-in ballots, providing eyes and ears on the ground, he argued.

        Von Spakovsky, who worked on behalf of Republicans in the 2000 Florida Bush-Gore recount, said Republicans must demand more transparency. He cited media reports that only one observer per 10 tables of vote counting was allowed during the Georgia recount because of COVID-19 social distancing rules.

        “Whoa, what is going on with that?” he asked. “There ought to be an observer at every single table where the recount is occurring. That’s what they did in Florida. I know. I was there.”

        Heritage Action, the Heritage Foundation’s political arm, says it’s mobilizing 20,000 of its local members in Georgia for door-knocking, phone calls and texts. It’s also recruiting a team of at least 100 poll workers to watch for any attempts to manipulate election results. Jenny Beth Martin, president of the Tea Party Patriots Citizens Fund, said her group plans to train poll workers and poll watchers on what to look for. “We will be engaging in precinct operations,” she told RCP.

        All of these efforts take manpower, and Republicans are privately fretting that the GOP didn’t do enough to prevent the runoff by countering Abrams’ extensive grassroots activities. As Giuliani signaled, they also don’t trust the FBI or other federal authorities to do anything to guard against or investigate fraud if there’s evidence of it occurring.

        John Yoo, a conservative lawyer who worked in the George W. Bush Justice administration, says Trump’s concerns about expanded mail-in voting leading to more opportunities for voter fraud are well-founded. President Jimmy Carter and James A. Baker III, secretary of state under George H.W. Bush, came to the same conclusion in 2005 after heading the Commission on Federal Election Reform, which concluded that “absentee ballots remain the largest source of potential voter fraud.”

        The practice of targeting senior citizen nursing homes and hospitals and helping elderly voters fill out their ballots is such a common practice that there’s a name for it among political operatives – “granny farming.” During the pandemic, there has been new concern about disenfranchising elderly people’s right to vote because of older Americans’ reluctance to go to the polls. But that fear has been abused, Yoo asserted.

        Critics of ballot harvesting, or the third-party collection of mail-in ballots, often refer to an incident uncovered by the Miami Herald in 1998 in which a 70-year-old woman recovering from a stroke complained about being badgered for her absentee ballot by a political operative who then filled it out and took it from her.

        “What everyone should be concerned about is if we see suspicious levels of voting – more votes than residents – at nursing homes or group homes,” Yoo said. He skeptical, however, that a significant number of people have moved illegally to vote.

        Instead, he says the two areas of greatest concern are ballot harvesting and the tabulation or accounting process of all ballots.

        Trump’s legal team has taken aim at the electronic voting tabulation process and the Dominion Voting System machines involved. Sidney Powell, one of Trump’s lawyers, insists that the president won by “millions of votes” and that the Dominion software altered the tallies. She has cited an affidavit signed by a former military official from Venezuela that the system was used to electronically flip votes for strongmen Hugo Chavez and his successor, Nicolas Maduro.

        The state of Georgia uses Dominion machines and software, but Raffensberger, the secretary of state, said an audit of those machines found no signs of foul play.

        And Jason Snead, the executive director of the conservative Honest Elections Project, says that Trump’s legal team has yet to provide enough evidence of widespread fraud for him to believe Dominion altered or tampered with “millions of votes or anything along those lines.”

        “There are clearly issues that happened on Election Day, and some of them have been well documented,” he said. “Some counties in a few states had problems with some equipment, but nothing that was really outside the norm for these sorts of systems.” 

        Snead said those making election laws have the responsibility to ensure that they’re managing the demand for increased mail-in voting options during COVID in a way “that will ensure that those ballots are properly protected and that the election system as whole runs smoothly, efficiently and securely.”

        One of the problems is that election fraud is hard to prove, and local district attorneys have shown little appetite for prosecuting it. Such cases take a lot of time to investigate, and state legislatures haven’t made the issue a funding priority, von Spakovsky and others say.

        In 2018 Arizona Attorney General Mark Brnovich launched an election integrity unit to “preserve public confidence in the integrity of our elections by vigilantly defending ballot safeguards and common-sense voting laws.”

        On Tuesday Brnovich publicly called on critics of the election process to come forward with “facts and evidence” so his office can investigate.

        After an election that has fueled so much distrust in the system, von Spakosvksy is urging all states to create similar election integrity units in their attorney general offices and for legislatures to provide enough resources for those units to do a thorough job.

        Snead said Brnovich is pursuing a “blockbuster” ballot harvesting case dealing with two provisions of Arizona law that the Supreme Court has said it would review this fall. One aspect deals with state laws requiring people to vote at their specific precinct and another to restrict ballot harvesting, limiting who can collect and deliver a person’s ballot to a family member, household member or caregiver.

        Depending on how the high court rules, more restrictive voting laws in several states could be on the chopping block — or enshrined as needed safeguards.

        “So this is going to be a big, big case,” he said. “It has the potential to help define and shape election law going forward.”

      • "Panic Attack" And "Night Terror" Searches Erupt Across US Amid Second Virus Wave 
        “Panic Attack” And “Night Terror” Searches Erupt Across US Amid Second Virus Wave 

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 22:00

        Public health experts have repeatedly warned that COVID-19 conditions are set to worsen across the country before they get better. 

        States and cities are reimposing strict social distancing measures, along with the increasing threat of lockdowns early next year if a Biden presidency is seen. 

        The virus pandemic and strict social distancing rules have already fueled a mental health crisis among Americans. 

        Months ago, we explained restrictions resulted in a dangerously sharp rise in mental illness. The CDC recently said disruptions to daily life during the pandemic lockdowns, anxiety about contracting the virus, and isolation at home have taken a deep toll on Americans’ mental health. 

        As the second wave of the virus ravages nearly every state, real-time data of Americans’ mental health via Google Search trends of more than 400 health symptoms, signs, and conditions suggest that the mental health crisis continues to silently rage. 

        Examining Google’s COVID-19 Search Trends symptoms dataset, we found recent searches for “anxiety,” “panic attack,” and “night terror” are on the rise in recent months, coinciding with the reemergence of the second coronavirus wave. 

        Internet searches for “anxiety” have erupted across the country in recent months, breaching March’s highs in the summer period. As virus cases continue to hit records this fall, anxiety levels will also rise. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Searches for “panic attacks” have also surged. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Even “night terror” has risen above the levels from the beginning of the pandemic. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The unintended consequences of the virus pandemic and socio-economic implosion of the country appear to be a public health crisis. 

      • America's Elites – Not Trump – Are Responsible For Undermining American Democracy
        America’s Elites – Not Trump – Are Responsible For Undermining American Democracy

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 21:40

        Authored by Tho Bishop via The Mises Institute,

        It is an overplayed cliché to refer to the insanity of the current year. Still, 2020 manages to surprise. It is increasingly looking like 2020 has created the greatest challenge to democratic legitimacy in the past century.

        Yesterday was a truly remarkable day in American history.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The official legal team for President Donald Trump—led by Rudy Giuliani, Sidney Powell, and Jenna Ellis—outlined an argument that America’s elections were hijacked by a conspiracy involving Dominion voting systems, the Smartmatic corporation, and elected officials of both parties. The team claimed that these actors collaborated with foreign enemies of the president to ensure he lost the 2020 election, actively inflating the vote totals for Joe Biden. The evidence, they say, will include hundreds of sworn affidavits and other documents that will validate their accusations. They also implied that the Department of Justice is either actively involved in this plot or serving to protect those involved.

        The press conference was heavy in bold and striking claims, but so far the legal team has not provided enough documentation to adequately vet the claims made. It is certainly true that questions existed about some of these voting systems prior to the election and that the official results include all sorts of unprecedented voting trends that have sparked questions about their statistical likelihood. Unlikely outcomes are not, however, impossible outcomes, and there are no accusations that any voting machines were illegally used without going through the legally required certification processes.

        Any serious legal challenge by Trump’s campaign team will require significant evidence that they have yet to make available. Of course, if the claims are accurate, the case involves a crime that may be beyond the capabilities of America’s judicial system.

        What the Trump campaign can legally prove, however, is almost a secondary issue at this point.

        Yesterday’s press conference has entrenched the current American president in the position that his anointed successor is illegitimate and that he is the one who holds a democratic mandate to govern.

        America has had controversial electoral outcomes before, such as the elections of 2000 and 1876, which ended up being decided by party leaders in a smoke-filled backroom (Republican Rutherford Hayes was given the presidency over Samuel Tilden in exchange for the repeal of Reconstructionist-era laws in the Southern states).

        There are several key differences between these instances and the current political turmoil: you now have a populist sitting president, actively despised by the corporate press, who is simultaneously disliked by the establishment of his own party and passionately beloved by his base.

        As I noted in an article a few days after the election:

        regardless of the legal outcome, America is about to find itself with a president that will be viewed as illegitimate by a large portion of the population—and perhaps even the majority of some states. There is no institution left that has the credibility to push back against the gut feeling of millions of people who have spent the last few months organizing car parades and Trumptillas that their democracy has been hijacked by a political party that despises them.

        The response we will receive from the corporate press, Very Serious pundits, and the various talking heads representing all the institutions that Trump has repeatedly mocked and belittled is obvious. Trump’s legal team is being dismissed as a bunch of partisan, sycophantic cranks spinning baseless conspiracy theories. Donald Trump is being portrayed as a spoiled, entitled man-child who would rather take down American democracy than admit he lost. His supporters will be dismissed and mocked as, at best, dumb suckers or, at worst, potentially violent right-wing extremists.

        The problem is that, regardless of one’s opinion of Donald Trump or the specific claims made by his legal team, America’s elite and those in power have no credibility of their own.

        For almost four years, the corporate press has propped up various false stories about the president while simultaneously propping up his political enemies and actively ignoring stories about the misconduct of Joe Biden’s son and potential conflicts of interest regarding the former vice president. The concerted effort to ask serious questions even forced journalists like Glenn Greenwald to ditch a media company he helped found.

        At the same time, progressively-aligned Big Tech companies (many of which are staffed by former members of Kamala Harris’s political offices) have been taking an increasingly aggressive role in censoring and editorializing President Trump and his supporters.

        Their claims that they have an ethical obligation to combat “misinformation” in the name of “democracy” are undermined by their willingness to actively assist the Chinese Communist Party in censoring dissidents.

        Meanwhile, the professional political class in this country, lauded as “experts” by the bad actors mentioned above, has long mocked the notion of democratic oversight. An explicit example was offered just recently when Jim Jeffrey, a US envoy to Syria, gleefully disclosed to DefenseOne that American military leaders successfully maintained a larger military presence in the country than President Trump had ordered. The power of America’s professional bureaucracy goes beyond military matters, however, and the hope of much of America’s elite is that US policy will be increasingly influenced by their colleagues at the UN and other globalist institutions. Be it the Paris Accord or the Great Reset, many American progressives increasingly view very serious policy matters as issues too important to be entrusted to American voters.

        Further still, America’s political environment has become so polarized and hostile that you have many elected officials in positions of influence who openly despise large swaths of the American population. For example, Arizona’s secretary of state—the woman in charge of election integrity in the state—described Trump’s base as “neo-Nazis” in 2017. Given her public statements, why would any Trump supporters have any faith in a governing body she influences to count votes? Meanwhile, the secretary of state in Michigan was a former employee of the Southern Poverty Law Center, a left-wing hate group.

        It would, of course, be wrong to suggest that the elites of the American left are alone in their hatred of their political enemies. While the Left has tended to be more violent in recent years, there are many Republican voters who consider the political left immoral, un-American, and a threat to their families. The difference is that, outside of a few levers of federal power held by the Republican Party, the American right does not have nearly the same institutional support that the Left does currently.

        It appears that 2020 may be the year that finally proves that the façade of democracy is not enough to maintain a unified political body. The election process does not inevitably lead to compromise and tolerance, but rather ends in those in power and those who are politically vanquished. When the losers of elections do not view their loss as a genuine reflection of democratic will, but rather an illegitimate coup, it is difficult to maintain governance over a population. Joe Biden appointing John Kasich–type Republicans will do little to soothe and reassure those who view a Biden presidency as little different than an occupational force.

        This is why Ludwig von Mises viewed political decentralization and secession as a necessary component of liberal democracy. The proper objective of the democratic process was the peaceful transfer of power reflecting changes in the political will—political self-determination—rather than some form of civil worship of the will of the majority. When political differences become irreconcilable, true political decentralization allows for the breaking of political unions.

        Will that end up being the ultimate result of the position of Trump’s legal team? Who knows. Trump and a few lawyers will certainly not be enough to overturn the official results or to successfully spur a Trump secession movement. What will be interesting is how the institution of the Republican Party will respond to the escalating rhetoric of the president.

        Under President Obama, the Republican Party remained civil and submissive while its Tea Party base discussed ideas like nullification and a convention of states. The sterility of the traditional GOP is likely a major reason why Donald Trump was able to take over the party. How much of the modern GOP will continue to follow the forty-fifth president, and how many will end up being perfectly content with being partners with Joe Biden?

        What we can be sure of is that it will be much harder for Biden to win over many of the 70+ million Americans who voted for Donald Trump earlier this month.

      • One In Five US Hospitals Are On The Verge Of A Staffing Crisis
        One In Five US Hospitals Are On The Verge Of A Staffing Crisis

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 21:20

        As COVID-19 cases surge pushing hospitalizations to levels unseen since the start of the pandemic, hospitals around the country are facing a staffing crisis. According to Bloomberg, 1 in 5 American hospitals anticipates a “critical staffing shortage” within a week’s time, according to DHHS.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Midwestern states like Missouri, Wisconsin and North Dakota have reported the highest share of hospitals worried about staffing shortages as deaths and hospitalizations soar.

        In a phrase that’s reminiscent of coverage from back in the spring, when hospital workers in some of NYC’s most unloved neighborhoods were wearing trash bags instead of PPE, Bloomberg warned that a dearth of doctors and nurses could risk pushing the mortality rate even higher. Frontline workers are “vulnerable to the consequences of overwork”, Bloomberg reported. In an example of just how bad it can get, readers might remember a rash of doctor suicides in NYC, and in other places as well. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Source: Bloomberg

        What’s more, given the staffing issues, hospitals around the country are bracing for a “holiday spike”, forcing health care workers to spend yet another holiday away from their families.

        The biggest problem this time around is that rural areas in the Midwest and elsewhere that were largely spared earlier in the year are now seeing outbreaks in their communities, which have in some cases badly strained the more threadbare facilities available in these areas.

        Here’s an example: Sprawling, sparsely populated Siskiyou County along California’s northern border hit a milestone this week. After months of dodging a major COVID-19 outbreak, seven people were hospitalized with coronavirus infections and the number of available ICU beds in the county briefly dropped to zero, which sent local public health officials into a full-blown panic.

        Management at the hospital pleaded with the townspeople to wear their masks and wash their hands, advising that more infections would inevitably lead to a surge in deaths.

        Another major difference this time around: During the spring and summer, the outbreaks were largely confined to a specific region of the country, allowing resources and staff to be ‘spread around’ from states with low numbers to states with high numbers. The problem is that right now, all 50 states are seeing their outbreaks accelerate. While the Midwest has been battered, Chicago hasn’t benefited from the federal resources or the help from nearby states that New York did back in the spring.

        That’s one reason that makes the recent increase in deaths more concerning, since if the numbers continue to rise, there won’t be any ‘cavalry’ for struggling states to call.

        “Earlier in the year, we were able to redeploy staff and resources to these hot spots,” one official said. “We really were talking about hot spots. The problem now is when every place is a hot spot, you lose the ability to redeploy. And that’s as simple as that.”

        Fortunately, Pfizer confirmed on Friday that it has submitted its paperwork for an emergency-use authorization for its vaccine, which should be administered to the first non-trial patients by mid-December, the company said.

      • The US Government Will Inflate To The Bitter End
        The US Government Will Inflate To The Bitter End

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 21:00

        Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

        The big news organizations say Joe Biden’s the next president of the USA.  That claims of election fraud and fixing are baseless.  Do you believe them?  Do you trust them?

        Regardless, Biden’s acting as if.  He’s talking to foreign leaders.  He’s meeting with vaccine makers.  He’s making big plans.  He’s planning big things.  But, apparently, he’s not progressive enough.

        This week, for example, an organization called Justice Democrats accused Biden of appointing corporate-friendly insiders.  They say these “corporate-friendly insiders […] will not help usher in the most progressive Democratic administration in generations.”

        Certainly, Biden’s getting plenty of advice.  The political puppet has left many strings to be pulled.  Elizabeth Warren and Chuck Schumer want Biden to erase the first $50,000 of a person’s student loan debt.  According to Schumer“Joe Biden can do that with the pen as opposed to legislation.”

        Will Biden listen to them?  Will he listen to progressive superstar Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez?  On Monday, Ms. Ocasio-Cortez, tweeted:

        “Student loan forgiveness is good, actually.

        “We should also push for tuition-free public colleges to avoid this huge debt bubble from financially decimating ppl every generation.  It’s one of the easiest progressive policies to ‘pay for,’ w/ multiple avenues from a Wall St transaction tax to an ultra-wealth tax to cover it.”

        Wow!  Biden hasn’t even moved into the White House and things have gone stoopid silly.  Where to begin?

        Cut It Off

        Without question, the student debt crisis is a disgrace.  There are roughly 45 million student loan borrowers who owe on the order of $1.6 trillion.  Most of this debt is from federal student loans.

        The federal government is responsible for this mess.  It supplied the credit that distorted the world in this way that would have otherwise been impossible.  The gas of massive amounts of federal student loans inflated a higher education bubble…and an industry of entitled, fake intellectuals.

        The business model generally requires signing credulous 18-year-olds up for massive amounts of government backed student loans.  These young adults have been told since before they could count that college was the magical path to a bright future.  But as tuition costs ran higher, propelled by more and more student loans, the value proposition no longer penciled out.

        Yet forgiving student loans rewards a corrupted education industry.  It allows colleges and universities to perpetuate in inflated product.  Hence, rather than forgiving student debt, as the progressives desire, we offer another novel approach.  That is, cut off government sponsored student loans.  Scuttle the gravy train that supplies universities with undeserved wealth.

        Now what would happen to all these high paid professors and fancy country club style college campuses without all this government sponsored debt?  For starters, tuition prices would fall.  Professor salaries would also fall.  And college campuses would adjust to their more modest means.

        Would the product – the education – be inferior?  Not for the technical disciplines that matter.  Smaller budgets, however, would help trim the fat, and eliminate many of the nonsense quack ‘studies’ courses.  These courses have little redeeming value and only exist because they’re funded by an abundance of federal student loans.

        Tuition-free public colleges at the expense of the rich, on the other hand, would certainly result in an inferior education.  They would turn college into an extension of high school.  Grades 13 through 16 would become daycare for young adults.  Students would graduate as unprepared as today’s 12th graders.  What a ridiculous waste of time and money.

        The U.S. Government Will Inflate To The Bitter End 

        The point is, $1.6 trillion in government sponsored student loan debt has piled up like a rush-hour wreck on the 405 Freeway through west Los Angeles.  This is a problem of the governments making.  And government solutions will only make things worse.  Here’s why?

        Forgiving student loan debt with the stroke of a pen does not make it go away.  Debt, remember, is unearned money that’s borrowed from the future.  It must either be repaid or defaulted on.  Given that this is government sponsored debt, the act of erasing it merely transfers it from student borrowers to the American public – that’s you.

        And how will the American public pay for it?  U.S. government revenue for fiscal year 2020 was $3.42 trillion.  Yet spending was $6.55 trillion.  The difference – a $3.13 trillion deficit – was made up with debt.

        Nancy Pelosi is currently pushing for Congress to adopt her $3.4 trillion coronavirus bailout package.  Tack on $1.6 trillion for student loan forgiveness and we’re up to $5 trillion.  And that’s before accounting for Medicare, agriculture, defense, social security, transportation, veterans affairs, and the many other federal programs.  And what about all the other demands Biden somehow owes?

        The Justice Democrats are calling “for Biden to create an Office of Climate Mobilization on Day 1.”  What an Office of Climate Mobilization is, exactly, is unclear.  But it sounds expensive.  And guess who will get to pay for it?  You will.

        You see where all roads lead back to, right?

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The dead end of dollar debasement.  The U.S. government will inflate to the bitter end.  And Creepy Joe – with the progressives egging him on – is just the man for the job.

      • A Bad Winter For The Global Economy (LIVE)
        A Bad Winter For The Global Economy (LIVE)


        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 20:55

        Tune in for this special edition of the Daily Briefing to hear from Ed and Raoul live at 4:30 PM ET. Raoul will provide an update on his macro thesis, trades he’s bullish on, and answer questions from the audience.

      • "Super Emitters": 1% Of People Cause Half Of Global Aviation Emissions
        “Super Emitters”: 1% Of People Cause Half Of Global Aviation Emissions

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 20:40

        You’ve heard of “super spreaders” but what about “super emitters”? 

        According to the woke vernacular, that a term reserved for those frequent-flyers who a recent study found represent just 1% of the world’s population yet who have caused half of aviation’s carbon emissions in 2018. This excludes the “wokest” of virtue-signalling super emitters – those who fly around the globe in ultra-emitting private jets, lecturing the rest of the world about the dangers of global warming. We can only imagine that if those were also included, then the number would be revised from 1% to 0.01%.

        According to a study by Stefan Gössling at Linnaeus University in Sweden, only 11% of the world’s population took a flight in 2018 and 4% flew abroad, and predictably US air passengers have by far the biggest carbon footprint among rich countries. Its aviation emissions are bigger than the next 10 countries combined, including the UK, Japan, Germany and Australia, the study reports (it wasn’t clear if China was excluded because of a far backroom exchanges of yuan/bitcoin).

        The research, published in the journal Global Environmental Change, collated a range of data and found large proportions of people in every country did not fly at all each year – 53% in the US, 65% in Germany and 66% in Taiwan. In the UK, separate data shows 48% of people did not fly abroad in 2018. Yet it is these people who will be hit just as hard by whatever “green” tax is coming by our new socialist overlords.

        On average, North Americans flew 50 times more than Africans in 2018, 10 times more than those in the Asia-Pacific region and 7.5 times more than Latin Americans. Europeans and those in the Middle East flew 25 times further than Africans and five times more than Asians.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Of course, the real culprit is not the US but China, although this woke study conveniently ignored the footprint of Beijing (which may or may not have funded the study): while the analysis showed the US produced the most emissions among rich nations, China does not make data available.

        What was most interesting, however, is that the study showed that an elite group enjoying frequent flights had a big impact on CO2 emissions, and yet according to conventional wisdom everyone should be punished in the form of higher taxes, prices, etc when the transgressions of a handful of woke virtue-signalers are most responsible for rise in airplane-linked emissions.

        Naturally, since this was a study on climate change, socialism wasn’t far behind: Dan Rutherford, at the International Council on Clean Transportation and not part of the research team, said the analysis raised the question of “equality.”

        “The benefits of aviation are more inequitably shared across the world than probably any other major emission source,” he said. “So there’s a clear risk that the special treatment enjoyed by airlines just protects the economic interests of the globally wealthy.”

        The frequent flyers identified in the study travelled about 35,000 miles (56,000km) a year, Gössling said, equivalent to three long-haul flights a year, one short-haul flight per month, or some combination of the two.

        Things got really silly when the researchers somehow estimated the “cost of the climate damage” whatever that means, caused by aviation’s emissions at $100BN in 2018. The absence of payments to cover this damage “represents a major subsidy to the most affluent”, the researchers said. “This highlights the need to scrutinise the sector, and in particular the super emitters.”

        So what do the socialists researchers suggest? Why taxes of course.

        A levy on frequent fliers is one proposal to discourage flights. “Somebody will need to pay to decarbonise flight – why shouldn’t it be frequent flyers?” Rutherford said. But Gössling was less enthusiastic, pointing out that frequent flyers were usually very wealthy, meaning higher ticket prices may not deter them.

        “Perhaps a more productive way is to ask airlines to increase the share of [low carbon] synthetic fuels mix every year up to 100% by 2050,” Gössling said. A mandate for sustainable aviation fuel starting in 2025 is backed by some in the industry.

        Yup: at this point the “scientists” were reduced to bickering over who should be taxed more to solve the world’s problems. What neither of them appears to realize is that whatever the so-called “cost of climate change”, the Fed will meet all of it by printing an even greater amount and then depositing it into the digital dollar accounts of those deemed “virtuous” enough by the world’s socialist overlords.

        Finally, do the wealth-redistributionist “researchers” do as they preach and stop flying themselves? Apparently not: “I’m not saying I’ll never fly again. But if I can avoid it, I really, really try,” Gössling said whimsically.

      • Trump Confirms The Pentagon & The CIA Are In Charge Of Foreign Policy
        Trump Confirms The Pentagon & The CIA Are In Charge Of Foreign Policy

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 20:20

        Authored by Jacob Hornberger via The Future of Freedom Foundation,

        President Trump has announced that he is ordering a partial withdrawal of U.S. troops from Afghanistan and Iraq during the waning days of his administration.

        Why only partial? And why now in the waning days of his presidency? After all, when Trump campaigned in 2016. his expressed aim was to bring all the troops home from those two countries. He repeatedly vowed to bring an end to America’s “forever wars.”

        There is a simple explanation for Trump’s failure, one that unfortunately so many Americans are loathe to consider: It’s not the president who is in charge of foreign policy. Instead it is the Pentagon and the CIA that are in charge.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Trump had four years to bring home those troops. Clearly he wanted to. The reason he didn’t – the reason he still can’t – is because the Joint Chiefs of Staff and the CIA won’t let him.

        Longtime readers of my blog know that I have periodically referenced a book titled National Security and Double Government by Michael J. Glennon, who is a professor of law at Tufts University and served as counsel to the Senate Foreign Relations Committee. He knows what he is talking about. I highly recommend his book.

        Glennon’s thesis is a simple one:

        The real power of the federal government lies with the national-security establishment – namely the Pentagon, the CIA, and the NSA.

        They permit the president, the Congress, and the Supreme Court to maintain the veneer of power.

        That veneer is unimportant to the Pentagon, the CIA, and the NSA.

        What’s important to them is who holds the power, not who appears to hold the power.

        Trump’s inability to bring the troops home from Afghanistan and Iraq provides confirmation of Glennon’s thesis. Trump wanted to bring them home. He vowed to bring them home. He had four years to bring them home. He was unable to do so. The Pentagon and the CIA simply would not permit it.

        In his Farewell Address in 1961, President Eisenhower warned about the danger to America’s democratic processes from what he called the “military-industrial complex.”

        That was almost 60 years ago. As we have seen with President Trump, the national-security state has grown ever more powerful since then.

      • Iran Unveils Unorthodox 'Aircraft Carrier Warship' To Challenge US In Indian Ocean
        Iran Unveils Unorthodox ‘Aircraft Carrier Warship’ To Challenge US In Indian Ocean

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 20:00

        It’s not quite an aircraft carrier though the AP has awkwardly dubbed it an ‘aircraft-carrying ship’ but it’s not a conventional warship either.  

        Iran’s Revolutionary Guards Corps (IRGC) has unveiled a new domestic produced multirole warship capable of carrying up to dozens of aircraft, drones, helicopters and missiles with rapid roll-on/roll-off capability

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Named the Shahid Roudaki after a ‘martyred’ IRGC Navy commander, state media described it as an “oceangoing warship capable of carrying aircraft” and is the latest in a rollout of major weapons systems built inside Iran while the country is under biting US-led sanctions. 

        The Drive described it as a new “unorthodox” warship in Iran’s arsenal that will engage in long-range operations

        The various weapons and other systems that are seen on the deck in pictures from the ceremony at least visually reflects the warship’s purported mission spectrum, as a multipurpose vessel for long-range operations. From bow to stern, the weapons visible on deck comprise eight anti-ship cruise missiles in four twin container launchers, six Ababil-2 unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), a single Bell 412 helicopter, four speedboats, and a 3rd Khordad surface-to-air missile system on a road-mobile transport-erector-launcher plus what appears to be an associated command vehicle. Iranian media reports that the vessel is also equipped with a three-dimensional phased-array radar, plus “advanced communication systems for electronic warfare.”

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        It measures 150 meters long at a displacement of 4,000 tons, and according to the IRGC is currently “ready to carry out missions”. 

        According to statements cited in the Associated Press, it shows Iran is preparing to beef up its presence in in Indian Ocean, where the US and its global allies currently have dominance:

        The commander of the Guard’s navy, Adm. Ali Reza Tangsiri, suggested his forces wanted to move beyond the waters of the Gulf into deep-water patrolling. Typically, the Guard covers the waters of the Persian Gulf, while Iran’s navy patrols the Gulf of Oman and beyond.

        “Presence and assignments in the Indian Ocean is our right,” Tangsiri said.

        The ship appears to be an answer to U.S. Navy patrols in the region by its Bahrain-based 5th Fleet. U.S. aircraft carriers routinely travel through Mideast waters. Iran sees those missions, as well as Israel’s expanding presence in the region, as a threat.

        The new ship does not specifically belong to the Iranian Navy but to the IRGC Navy, though the two often coordinate action and operate side-by-side. 

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        IRGC released photo of the new ‘Shahid Roudaki’ warship.

        It’s also believed the ship could enable more rapid IRGC deployment deeper in Persian Gulf waters, given it carries the type of fast boats typically used by the elite force anytime it intercepts or encircles US ships, as has happened in the recent past.

        While Iran possesses small submarines and domestic-made mid-sized battleships, it has nothing even close to a large aircraft carrier such as is possessed by major powers like the US, China, Britain, and Russia. 

      • New Strains Of COVID Could Render Vaccines Completely Useless, And 2 Dangerous Mutations Are Already Spreading
        New Strains Of COVID Could Render Vaccines Completely Useless, And 2 Dangerous Mutations Are Already Spreading

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 19:40

        Authored by Michael Snyder via The End of The American Dream blog,

        What if all of the assumptions that people are making about this COVID pandemic are completely wrong?  When Pfizer announced that they had developed a successful vaccine for COVID, the world cheered.  And then when Moderna announced that they had developed a successful vaccine for COVID, the world cheered even more.  But COVID has been mutating, and scientists assure us that it will keep mutating.  So what happens if the vaccines that are being developed end up being completely useless against new mutant strains of the virus?  Would that put us all the way back to square one (or even worse)?

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        To put this problem into perspective, let’s talk about the flu for a moment.  Every year, health authorities come up with a flu vaccine that they think will be effective against the variation or variations of the flu that they believe will be dominant in that particular year.  Most people simply assume that a “flu shot” will provide them with complete protection against “the flu”, but that is actually not true at all.  In some years the match between the flu vaccine and the variations of the flu that are running around is pretty good, and some years that is definitely not the case.  The following comes from the official CDC website

        During years when the flu vaccine is not well matched to circulating influenza viruses, it is possible that little or no benefit from flu vaccination may be observed. During years when there is a good match between the flu vaccine and circulating viruses, it is possible to measure substantial benefits from flu vaccination in terms of preventing flu illness and complications. However, even during years when the flu vaccine match is good, the benefits of flu vaccination will vary, depending on various factors like the characteristics of the person being vaccinated, what influenza viruses are circulating that season and even, potentially, which type of flu vaccine was used.

        At this point, Pfizer and Moderna both seem convinced that their vaccines will be effective against the dominant strain of COVID that is currently sweeping across the globe.

        But what if a new strain becomes dominant?

        In Denmark, a new strain of COVID that is being passed to humans from minks was considered to be so dangerous that the government actually announced that they would kill all 17 million minks in the entire nation

        The government of Denmark shocked the world a few days ago when it announced it would slaughter as many as 17 million minks in the country, effectively destroying the entire mink fur industry in the country. The officials opted for this radical option because of the novel coronavirus, as the pathogen developed a potentially dangerous mutation inside the captive mink population. Reports from the country said that the mutated coronavirus has already infected at least 12 people. Researchers are worried that the new strain might be so dangerous that it could effectively render the current COVID-19 vaccine candidates useless. A new report now delivers more troublesome news, as some researchers think that the mutated coronavirus strain has pandemic potential. Others, meanwhile, are calling for calm.

        Thankfully, after a tremendous uproar the Danish government decided not to kill all the minks.

        But this strain is still spreading, and as the quote above noted, this new strain “could effectively render the current COVID-19 vaccine candidates useless”.

        In other words, if this Denmark strain becomes dominant it may force the vaccine companies to go back to the drawing board.

        Meanwhile, we just learned that “a fast-spreading new strain of COVID-19” has popped up in Australia

        South Australia is battling a fast-spreading new strain of COVID-19 as it prepares for a six-day lockdown to attempt to contain the virus.

        A COVID-19 cluster in Adelaide’s north grew to 22 on Wednesday as thousands of people continued to flock to testing stations.

        The reason why authorities decided to lock down all of South Australia for six days is because this new strain appears to be far more contagious than previous strains

        A strain of Covid-19 behind an outbreak in South Australia may be spreading up to five times quicker than normal, officials fear.

        Concerned health bosses say the incubation period — how long it takes for someone to show symptoms after getting infected — was ‘very very short’.

        Professor Nicola Spurrier, chief health officer for South Australia, claimed people are becoming contagious within 24 hours of catching the virus. She said the particular strain behind the outbreak had ‘certain characteristics’.

        If it is true that this new strain spreads five times more rapidly than older strains, it could easily become dominant.

        And if that happens, the vaccines that have been developed may not be of any use at all.

        We just don’t know at this point.

        But what we do know is that COVID will continue to mutate in the months and years ahead, and that could potentially create massive headaches for vaccine developers.

        As for the vaccines that have already been created, some experts are pointing out that there is so much that is unknown about them.

        Most people assume that these new vaccines are similar to other vaccines that they have previously taken, but that is definitely not true.

        These new vaccines are in an entirely new class all by themselves.  They are known as “messenger RNA” (mRNA) vaccines, and they work by hijacking the protein-making machinery in your cells

        When Moderna was just finishing its Phase I trial, The Independent wrote about the vaccine and described it this way: “It uses a sequence of genetic RNA material produced in a lab that, when injected into your body, must invade your cells and hijack your cells’ protein-making machinery called ribosomes to produce the viral components that subsequently train your immune system to fight the virus.”

        “In this case, Moderna’s mRNA-1273 is programmed to make your cells produce the coronavirus’ infamous coronavirus spike protein that gives the virus its crown-like appearance (corona is crown in Latin) for which it is named,” wrote The Independent.

        I certainly do not want my cells “hijacked”, and nobody has any idea what the long-term effects will look like.

        And even if you take one of these new vaccines, it could end up doing no good for you at all if a different strain emerges and becomes dominant.

        Unfortunately, I believe that we have entered an era of global pandemics, and I am convinced that all of this enthusiasm about the vaccines that have been developed is completely misguided.

        We know that COVID will continue to mutate, but we have no idea at all if the current vaccines will be effective against those future strains or not.

        If fighting diseases was easy, we would have eradicated the common cold and the flu long ago.

        But we haven’t, and we won’t be eradicating COVID either.

        Even now, dangerous new strains of COVID are emerging, and I have a feeling that it is going to be COVID that is going to have the last laugh.

        *  *  *

        Michael’s new book entitled “Lost Prophecies Of The Future Of America” is now available in paperback and for the Kindle on Amazon.

      • Lamborghini And Porsche Vehicles Seized In $16M PPP Scam In Texas
        Lamborghini And Porsche Vehicles Seized In $16M PPP Scam In Texas

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 19:20

        While millions of Americans are unemployed, also have food and housing insecurities, Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) fraud exploded across the country this summer because there were virtually no checks and balances, allowing criminals to file fraudulent loans. 

        It comes hardly any surprise that the latest PPP fraud scheme involves seven individuals across two states who were charged in a Houston federal indictment unsealed Tuesday for their involvement in a scheme to obtained upwards of $16 million in PPP loans, according to ABC13 Houston

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        The federal indictment, unsealed Tuesday, accused the group of using PPP loans to buy luxury goods and exotic cars such as Porsches and Lamborghinis.

        “These defendants allegedly participated in a scheme to capitalize on the pandemic by filing at least 80 fraudulent PPP applications and enriching themselves by $16 million, spending it on luxury items such as a Porsche and Lamborghini automobiles,” Acting Assistant Attorney General Brian Rabbitt said in a press release. “The department and our law enforcement partners will continue to aggressively pursue those who would seek to illegally exploit the ongoing national emergency for their own benefit.”

        The indictment named seven defendants who appeared in front of U.S. Magistrate Judge Andrew M. Edison on Tuesday. 

        “Amir Aqeel, 52, and Pardeep Basra, 51, both of Houston, Texas; Rifat Bajwa, 51, of Richmond, Texas; Mayer Misak, 40, of Cypress, Texas; Mauricio Navia, 41, of Katy, Texas; and Richard Reuth, 57, of Spring, Texas.” 

        Prosecutors said the defendants had submitted fraudulent PPP loan applications by inflating the number of employees and average monthly payroll expenses. To do this, they also submit fraudulent bank records and federal tax forms. PPP loan applications were also submitted on behalf of companies the defendants controlled. Other loan applications were submitted via third party entities. 

        “The indictment further alleges the defendants laundered a portion of the fraudulent proceeds by writing checks from companies that received PPP loans to fake employees. Those that received checks included some of the defendants and their relatives, according to the charges. The fake paychecks were then allegedly cashed at Fascare International Inc. dba Almeda Discount Store – a cash checking company Azeemuddin owned.”

        In total, the defendants wrote more than 1,100 fake paychecks, collecting around $3 million in PPP loans that were deposited at Azeemuddin’s business.

        “Today’s indictment describes significant abuse of public funds meant for struggling American businesses and families,” said Special Agent in Charge Laurie L. Younger of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation OIG.

        The problem with the PPP program is that with little checks and balances, it fueled an unprecedented explosion of fraud. 

        We noted in July that a Flordia man used PPP loans to purchase a 2020 Lamborghini Huracan. 

        A California man fraudulently obtained $860,000 in PPP loans and fled the country. 

        Another man used PPP loans to buy Bitcoin

        Even JPMorgan employees were accused of pocketing U.S. coronavirus relief funds. 

        All of this happened despite the DOJ warning about early signs of PPP fraud in April, around the time the program began to disperse the loans. 

      • The ACLU And College Professors Are Encouraging Book-Burnings
        The ACLU And College Professors Are Encouraging Book-Burnings

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 19:00

        Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

        Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, risks to your prosperity… and on occasion, inspiring poetic justice.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        ACLU and Professor Team Up to Encourage Book Burnings

        Abigail Shrier has committed the ultimate sin: she has a different opinion than the woke mob. And that is an unforgivable transgression.

        Shrier’s new book is called Irreversible Damage: The Transgender Craze Seducing Our Daughters, and she discusses some very strong views, such as that children shouldn’t be coaxed into taking life-altering hormones.

        This is a controversial topic for many people, and they can choose to support or argue against Shrier’s opinions.

        But that’s not how the woke mob works. They don’t use logic and debate to engage in intellectual discourse.

        Instead, they simply rage– what Isaac Asimov described as “the last resource of fools.”

        So naturally Twitter is jumping all over this book and trying to cancel it.

        Target– the mega retail chain with stores all over the Land of the Free, already buckled, and decided to pull the book because apparently it’s full of hate speech.

        (Never mind that Target continues to sell White Fragility, which is also full of hate speech that accuses roughly half the country of being White Supremacists…)

        But more surprising is that Chase Strangio, a deputy director with the ACLU, is one of the Twitter mobsters.

        Strangio recently Tweeted, “We have to fight these ideas… Stopping the circulation of this book and these ideas is 100% a hill I will die on.”

        Remember, Strangio is with the ACLU, where the ‘C’ and ‘L’ stand for ‘Civil Liberties’. And last time I checked, civil liberties include freedom of speech. How quaint.

        Also joining the mob is a Professor of English from the University of California’s Berkely campus, who encourages people to steal and burn the book.

        That’s right, our cultural overseers are now advocating literal book burnings in the Land of the Free.

        Click here to read the full story.

        *  *  *

        How to Be a Hero in Germany: Do Nothing

        A new ad from the German government opens with an old man telling his story about how he survived the winter of 2020… back when he was 22.

        The commercial is meant to be a comical way to encourage people to stay home to contain COVID-19.

        The producers filmed the spot to make it look as if a Veteran of World War Two was being interviewed about doing something actually heroic– for instance, risking his life to save a village of defenseless civilians.

        But the ad says that all it takes to be a hero in the winter of 2020 is to do nothing: “Absolutely nothing. Being as lazy as raccoons.”

        Sure it’s a joke… but it’s also not.

        People actually think they are heroes for being lazy, while shaming anyone who dares to live their lives without fear.

        Click here to read the full story.

        *  *  *

        State Universities of New York Threaten to Hold Students Hostage Over COVID

        The system of New York State Universities announced a policy that all students on all campuses must test negative for COVID-19 before LEAVING campus to go home for the holidays.

        If students test positive, they will be FORCED to quarantine on campus for 14 days, at the responsibility of the University.

        And since campuses close just prior to Thanksgiving, that means students who test positive could be held hostage in isolation on the holiday, prevented from going home to see their families.

        One question: HOW IS THIS NOT KIDNAPPING????

        Click here to read the full story.

        *  *  *

        Great idea #593,291: Let’s Tax the Wind

        Argentina’s government has been an endless supply of terrible ideas, from wealth taxes to full-blow asset confiscation. Their latest idea? Taxing the air– more specifically the wind.

        Companies which sell wind power will have to pay 4.5% REVENUE (not profit) tax to the municipality for the privilege of using the air.

        Remember when governments were talking about fossil fuel taxes to encourage energy companies to stop drilling and start investing in renewable energy?

        Gee I wonder what’s going to happen with this one…

        Click here to read the full story.

        *  *  *

        “Defund Police” politician calls police over dispute with Lyft driver

        The City Commissioner in Portland, Oregon, Comrade Jo Ann Hardesty, has strongly voiced her support for defunding the police.

        So you’d think she’d be the last person to ever call the cops.

        But Hardesty was recently in a Lyft and got into an argument with her driver over some petty issue over the windows being up or down.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Apparently the argument escalated, and the driver pulled into a gas station and asked Hardesty to exit the vehicle.

        Now, instead of resolving the matter like a grown adult, Hardesty– an elected official– decided to call 911 (i.e. a number reserved for EMERGENCIES).

        The 911 dispatcher explained to Hardesty that no crime had been committed; if the Lyft driver wanted to cancel the ride, that was his right.

        But Hardesty insisted that the dispatcher send the police, i.e. the very people she wants to defund… because apparently this petty dispute constituted an emergency.

        Of course there is room for police reform. But Hardesty is absurdly hypocritical to call the police for such a trivial reason… and then demand that they be defunded.

        Click here to read the full story.

        *  *  *

        On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years.

        That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

      • Gov Cuomo Wins Emmy For "Masterful" COVID Press Conferences
        Gov Cuomo Wins Emmy For “Masterful” COVID Press Conferences

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 18:40

        Hollywood has never been afraid to shamelessly flaunt its allegiance to the Democratic Party, but handing New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo an Emmy for his “masterful” COVID-19 press conferences seems like they’re going too far.

        Cuomo was awarded the International Emmy Founders Award, which has previously been given to a diverse group of characters, including both Steven Spielberg and Grey’s Anatomy creator Shonda Rhimes.

        The Emmy’s announcement was accompanied by a Hollywood headshot of Cuomo with his 100-watt smile, a sign of a healthy and guilt-free conscience.

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        Cuomo’s daily press briefings, which ended back in the summer (though he has been holding briefings again with increasing frequency lately) were broadcast by the MSM – CNN, MSNBC, CBS News, NBC News – into the homes of millions of terrified Americans. Unsurprisingly, Cuomo spent most of the summertime lull polishing off a book called “American Crisis: Lessons in Leadership”.

        Accepting the award might rub millions of New Yorkers struggling with mounting debts and dwindling savings, as the governor imposes new restrictions on non-essential business hours and public gatherings, while the city shutters schools for the more than 300k kids who were receiving in-person education.

        Of course, Cuomo’s press conferences haven’t always gone smoothly for the governor. At one point, the New York Times was more focused on his “right-hand woman” Melissa DeRosa. And the other day, the governor got into it with a couple of reporters after trying to defend the clarity of the state’s new measures, only to be contradicted by NYC when school closures were announced minutes later.

        Cuomo’s critics on the left and right knocked him over his shameless book-slinging, and now his Emmy win.

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        Will the Pulitzer people award Cuomo with an honorary Pulitzer as well?

      • Luongo: Bitcoin & The Apotheosis Of Gold Bugs
        Luongo: Bitcoin & The Apotheosis Of Gold Bugs

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 18:20

        Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

        Bitcoin’s rally is all the news. It’s got the gold bugs all aTwitter as they watch their preferred safe haven asset of choice get upstaged again and again by the upstart, Bitcoin.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Every day it seems like another establishment media organization goes out of its way to give Bitcoin haters like one-note Peter Schiff an audience. The latest is Fox Business.

        I can’t tell anymore if they’re doing this to discredit Bitcoin, gold, Schiff or all three consecutively and concurrently….

        … and from a great height (apologies to Tom Stoppard).

        Here’s your latest howler from Schiff courtesy of a tweet from the irrepressible James Woods obviously looking for a good conversation:

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        What’s funny about that statement is that it can be applied to gold just as easily as it can be for bitcoin. Let’s try it and see what happens.

        “There’s no real use for gold,” Schiff would never say. “All you can do with gold once you buy it is sell it, but you need somebody else to buy it from you. It’s a massive pump-and-dump.”

        – SAID NOBODY CREDIBLE…. EVER.

        The Golden Rule of Gresham’s Law

        Today no one settles anything of note in gold. The places that allowed it recently, like Vietnam, demonetized gold and drove it underground by the State Bank of Vietnam in 2012.

        When’s the last time Peter or anyone else did anything with gold other than exchange it for dollars?

        The answer is never.

        And don’t talk to me about any VISA debit card scheme he may have for his clients. Any gold payment system like that has a dollar-translation layer.

        There’s no one on the other side of even that trade accepting digital grams of gold. It’s all nonsense in an economy like today’s. Sure there are a few systems like e-gold and the like out there with people doing their best John Galt impression, but talk to me about liquidity.

        It’s lower than it is on a lot of these sketchy crypto-exchanges out there.

        Moreover, anyone trading gold for dollars to buy candy bars or shoes with a VISA card is a patent moron. Because you then create a taxable event to have the privilege of paying capital gains tax on that transaction.

        I guess it’s a good idea if you buy high and sell low.. you get a discount on your sugar high. Talk about a metaphor for the modern age.

        Why would you do that when gold is supposed to be the ultimate store of value? Wouldn’t you buy that same candy bar with dollars and not incur the tax and the hassle? Pride?

        No. Idiocy.

        That is what has driven gold underground, that and it’s lack of fungibility.

        If you dig deep enough this is why the gold standard eventually failed. Lacked of divisibility is a real issue in an ever-expanding division of labor which the gold standard of the 19th and 20th centuries help develop.

        It’s ironic but true. Gold created the conditions for its obsolescence as a medium of exchange.

        Coupled with central bank malfeasance this is just good ol’ Gresham’s Law. Over-valued currency circulates (dollars) and under-valued currency is hoarded (gold). Nothing new, just the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility getting a workout in real time by mostly rational actors in a somewhat free market economy.

        And that same dynamic is in place with Bitcoin. It’s taxed in such a way that it precludes you doing anything with it because of the danger it actually represents to the ‘real economy’ backed by digital fiat debt-based dollars.

        “What do you want?” – Information.

        I honestly don’t know what’s up with people like Schiff and his disciples at this point. We all accept the fact that dollars today are 95% digital. We may not like it but we have to accept it, especially if you accept the very real argument about liquidity and fungibility.

        They are just ledger entries in encrypted databases around the world.

        The main difference between them and Bitcoin is that an algorithm decides how many are produced over a certain period of time (6.25BTC every ~10 minutes) versus dollars which, Peter rightly points out, is the plaything of the Federal Reserve, the U.S. Treasury Dept. and the offshore Eurodollar markets.

        But digital money is here to stay. In fact, digital money is the future. The only question is whether you want a digital currency that you know the supply of which allows for the rational calculation of demand or one that can be counterfeited at a moment’s notice by some guy with his hand in the cookie jar?

        But let’s dig deeper into this utterly facile and febrile statement of Schiff’s. Let’s go one step further. In fact we can adapt his statement to the dollar itself.

        “There’s no real use for the dollar,” Schiff also never said, though he should have. “All you can do with the dollar once you buy it is sell it, but you need somebody else to buy it from you. It’s a massive pump-and-dump.”

        Because when you use dollars you sell them to acquire the things you need. You exchange one thing for another. In this case goods.

        All Peter did with his dumb quote is validate the very thing that he decries about Bitcoin, that it is, in fact a potential store of value and medium of exchange because you can, in fact, get things you need with it. That you have to get dollars before you get the things you want is immaterial.

        In fact, is holding Bitcoin any different than buying a stock or a bond? A stock or corporate bond is a claim against the tangible assets and future revenue stream of a particular company, but is it a ‘pump and dump’ simply because in order to realize that value you first have to exchange it for dollars?

        No, of course not. Well, except for Tesla, but that’s a different rant.

        The reality is that bitcoin, just like a stock, a bond or gold is a store of value because it represents the past work of the people who validated the information encoded on the block chain.

        And with every block so encoded value accretes to the block chain and the ‘coins’ by which it is represented. That traditional valuation models have no way to directly measure that value is irrelevant.

        To deny that Bitcoin has any value is to deny the fact that information is a commodity. And that’s truly facile when, at its essence, that’s all an economy actually is, information. The goods that move can only do so efficiently with good information about their production and distribution.

        Price is the value of the information being transacted.

        Peter Schiff makes his living getting paid to dispense opinions on markets. His entire life is built on the idea that information concentrated in one man’s mind is worth something to someone else who is ignorant of that information.

        That people like Peter Schiff deny this simple process by which something acquires and builds commodity value through time is also irrelevant.

        It means that while Peter studied Austrian economics he just didn’t understand it.

        And so did every other gold bug who continues to stack to the exclusion of HODLing.

        The Critical Shift

        It’s no secret that I’m a fan of Bitcoin. It’s also no secret that I’m a fan of gold. I love gold. I own it and advocate for it. I even advocate for it to have a place in any theoretical private cryptocurrency based monetary system.

        But what I won’t do is short change the value of one of them at the expense of the other simply because my ego is too fragile to handle the idea that I may have been wrong.

        Honestly, the biggest regret of my life (other than not having more children) is not seeing Bitcoin’s strategic value earlier or I would have so many of them I wouldn’t have to spend my days writing articles defending it from punters like Schiff who are just bitter because they’ve been wrong.

        That said, the current rally is based on a fundamental shift in preference for those who rightly are scared of what a Harris administration will do to the dollar post-Great Reset.

        In a nakedly tyrannical world like we live in today where states clamp down on the free flow of capital outside of its control, Bitcoin is simply better technology than gold is today.

        And this is not to say there aren’t any good arguments against Bitcoin. There are, but Peter Schiff and the gold bugs never make them. I wish they would. It would actually make writing articles like this almost a challenge.

        The current rally in bitcoin is telling us clearly that there is a new premier store of value asset because of the current state of the world. Maybe that’s really what Schiff is decrying, a world that has passed him by.

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        What’s becoming clear even to me is that gold will only be valued in relation to bitcoin going forward, not the other way around.

        It’s sad but true. In my heart of hearts I wish it were different and not because of the structure of my portfolio or the name of my business.

        It’s sad because it proves that we are moving into a different age where technology is depreciating the value of an asset which materially improved the life of billions for millennia towards its commodity extraction value limit.

        And while many gold advocates don’t want to admit that they have stood by while the fortune of two lifetimes has passed them by. That’s the bad news.

        The good news is, given the chaos around the corner, there’s still plenty of upside left. Except for Peter Schiff, he’ll die on this hill unfortunately, just like his dad died in jail over denying the validity of the income tax.

        At least his dad’s was a noble goal.

        Denial is the surest path to getting your ass kicked by reality.

        *  *  *

        Join My Patreon if you want honesty in gold and crypto

        Donate via crypto:
        BTC: 3GSkAe8PhENyMWQb7orjtnJK9VX8mMf7Zf
        LTC: MWWdCHbMmn1yuyMSZX55ENJnQo8DXCFg5k
        DASH: XjWQKXJuxYzaNV6WMC4zhuQ43uBw8mN4Va
        XMR: 48Whbhyg8TNXiNV2LNkjeuJJU55CNt5m1XDtP3jWZK2xf5GNsbU2ZwHLDJTQ5oTU3uaJPN8oQooRpSQ2CPMJvX8pVTqthmu

      • Dominion Voting 'Lawyers Up' Before Abruptly Backing Out Of Pennsylvania Fact-Finding Hearing
        Dominion Voting ‘Lawyers Up’ Before Abruptly Backing Out Of Pennsylvania Fact-Finding Hearing

        Tyler Durden

        Fri, 11/20/2020 – 18:15

        Authored by Debra Heine via American Greatness (emphasis ours),

        Dominion Voting Systems Thursday night abruptly backed out of attending a fact-finding hearing that was set for Friday morning with the Pennsylvania House State Government Committee.

        At a press conference Friday morning, State Govt Committee Chair Seth Grove said the 1.3. million Pennsylvanians who used Dominion’s voting machines have been “hung out to dry and slapped in their faces.”

        <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

        Pennsylvania lawmakers had scheduled the hearing with the voting machine manufacturer “to help identify and correct any irregularities in the election process,” according to the House Republican Caucus.

        It is vitally important voters have faith in the machines they use to cast their ballots. On the heels of Gov. Tom Wolf unilaterally decertifying every voting machine in the Commonwealth, we need to know whether these new machines met expectations, whether they are reliable and whether they are not subject to interference,” said Rep. Grove (R-York).

        Dominion had initially agreed to attend the hearing, before it “abruptly canceled,”  Grove said.

        I was impressed at what appeared to be the willingness that Dominion Voting Systems to address accusations and it would have put 1.3. million Pennsylvanians who used their machines at ease—including myself, thinking that Dominion was willing to publicly back up their product which PA taxpayers invested millions to purchase” he noted during the presser.

        Unfortunately, last evening, Dominion Voting Systems lawyered up, and backed out of their commitment to the people of Pennsylvania to provide their input in a public format.”

        Grove blasted the company for “retreating into the darkness,” rather than appearing at the hearing with “honesty and integrity.”

        The committee chair said he wanted to know why a company with nothing to hide would back out.

        “Why would a vender of public goods fear discussing their product sold to the public for the public good? If Dominion’s products were successful and operated as they were supposed to, why wouldn’t Dominion take the opportunity to publicly review its success?” Grove demanded. “How hard is it to say, ‘our ballot machines worked exactly as promised and they’re 100 percent accurate’?”

        “After weeks of accusations, why has Dominion Voting Systems not released any analysis of the success of its voting machines to the public in order to stop their accusers in their tracks? If they have nothing to hide, why are they hiding from us?” he asked.

        Today I am saddened to report to the taxpayers of Pennsylvania and the 1.3 million voters who trusted Dominion Voting Systems with their ballots, that Dominion Voting Systems has hung you out to dry and slapped you in your faces.” the committee chair declared.

        Grove stated that Dominion’s behavior lent credibility to their accusers’ accusations.

        https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

        Rep. Dawn Keefer noted that fourteen counties used the Dominion Voting Systems software, so they owe it to Pennsylvania voters to show up and answer some questions.

        “We trust the workers in our polling places and in our counties,” Keefer said. “But what we don’t know is the role of 3rd party companies. And when they rescind their participation in our hearing, we’re left wondering why.”

        Keefer added: “Transparency is key for our election security. Dominion Voting Software is asking us to give them only blind trust. We’re very disappointed in Dominion’s last minute cancellation in today’s hearing.
        Transparency is key for our election security. Dominion Voting Software is asking us to give them only blind trust. We’re very disappointed in Dominion’s last minute cancelation in today’s hearing.”

      Digest powered by RSS Digest